Preface
Contents
Overview
Machine Features
Color and Image Quality Functions
- Basic Color Modes
- Adjusting Image Quality and Color
Guides Provided with the Machine
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
- Structure of the guide
- Conventions Used in This Guide
Menu Map
1 Legal and Safety Information
- Notice
2 Installing and Setting up the Machine
3 Preparation before Use
4 Printing from PC
5 Operation on the Machine
6 Using Various Functions
- Functions Available on the Machine
- Functions
7 Status/Job Cancel
8 Setup and Registration (System Menu)
- System Menu
9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting)
10 Troubleshooting
11 Appendix

KYOCERA 2554ci User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for 2554ci by KYOCERA which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

KYOCERA P7040cdn Manual

KYOCERA TASKalfa 306ci Manual

KYOCERA TASKalfa 2552ci MFP A3 Colour Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 6052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 3252CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 4052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 5052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

Operation Guide

TASKalfa 2554ci TASKalfa 3554ci

> Preface

Preface

Thank you for purchasing this machine.

This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take

simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.

Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine.

We recommend the use of our genuine toner containers, which have passed rigorous quality

control testing, to maintain quality.

The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.

We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.

A label is affixed to our genuine supplies, as shown below.

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number

The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.

You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number

before contacting your Service Representative.

Contents

Preface ..................................................................................................................................... i

Contents.................................................................................................................................. ii

Overview ................................................................................................................................ xi

Machine Features ................................................................................................................. xii

Color and Image Quality Functions................................................................................. xviii

Basic Color Modes ..................................................................................................... xviii

Adjusting Image Quality and Color.............................................................................. xix

Guides Provided with the Machine.................................................................................... xxi

About the Operation Guide (this Guide) ......................................................................... xxiii

Structure of the guide................................................................................................. xxiii

Conventions Used in This Guide............................................................................... xxiv

Menu Map.......................................................................................................................... xxvii

1 Legal and Safety Information ................................................................ 1-1

Notice ................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide ............................................................................. 1-2

Environment .............................................................................................................. 1-3

Precautions for Use ................................................................................................... 1-4

Laser Safety (Europe) ............................................................................................... 1-5

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) ........................................................................... 1-6

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ...................................... 1-7

Compliance and Conformity ...................................................................................... 1-7

Radio Tag Technology .............................................................................................. 1-8

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ................................... 1-8

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning .................................................................... 1-9

EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................. 1-9

EK1-ITB 2000 ............................................................................................................ 1-9

Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ........................................................................... 1-9

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................. 1-9

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ............................................................... 1-10

Legal Information .................................................................................................... 1-11

Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................. 1-13

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function ............................................................................ 1-13

Resource Saving - Paper ........................................................................................ 1-13

Environmental benefits of "Power Management" .................................................... 1-13

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ............................................................... 1-13

2 Installing and Setting up the Machine .................................................. 2-1

Part Names (Machine Exterior) ........................................................................................ 2-2

Part Names (Connectors/Interior) .................................................................................... 2-4

Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached) ........................................................ 2-5

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices .................................................................. 2-6

Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................ 2-7

Connecting LAN Cable .............................................................................................. 2-7

Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................. 2-8

Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................... 2-8

Power On/Off ..................................................................................................................... 2-9

Power On .................................................................................................................. 2-9

Power Off .................................................................................................................. 2-9

Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................. 2-10

Operation Panel Keys ............................................................................................. 2-10

[Job Separator] indicator ......................................................................................... 2-10

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ...................................................................... 2-11

Touch Panel ..................................................................................................................... 2-12

Using the Touch Panel ............................................................................................ 2-12

Home Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-14

iii

Assigning Functions to Function Keys .................................................................... 2-19

Display for Device Information ................................................................................ 2-21

Display Setting Screen ............................................................................................ 2-22

Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set ....................................................................... 2-23

Original Preview ...................................................................................................... 2-23

Entering Numbers ................................................................................................... 2-25

Help Screen ............................................................................................................ 2-27

Accessibility Functions (Magnifying the View) ........................................................ 2-28

Login/Logout ................................................................................................................... 2-29

Login ....................................................................................................................... 2-29

Logout ..................................................................................................................... 2-30

Default Settings of the Machine ..................................................................................... 2-31

Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................ 2-31

Network Setup ................................................................................................................. 2-32

Configuring the Wired Network ............................................................................... 2-32

Configuring the Wireless Network ........................................................................... 2-34

Setting Wi-Fi Direct ................................................................................................. 2-40

Configuring NFC ..................................................................................................... 2-42

Motion Sensor ......................................................................................................... 2-43

Energy Saver function .................................................................................................... 2-44

Low Power Mode .................................................................................................... 2-44

Sleep ....................................................................................................................... 2-45

Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................... 2-45

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ............................................................................ 2-45

Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for Europe) ........................................ 2-46

Energy Saver Recovery Level ................................................................................. 2-46

Weekly Timer Settings ............................................................................................ 2-46

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) ..................................................................... 2-46

Quick Setup Wizard ......................................................................................................... 2-47

Installing Software .......................................................................................................... 2-50

Published Software (Windows) ............................................................................... 2-50

Installing Software in Windows ............................................................................... 2-51

Uninstalling the Software ........................................................................................ 2-56

Installing Software in Mac Computer ...................................................................... 2-57

Setting TWAIN Driver .............................................................................................. 2-60

Setting WIA Driver ................................................................................................... 2-62

Checking the Counter ..................................................................................................... 2-63

Additional Preparations for the Administrator ............................................................. 2-64

Sending Documents to a PC ................................................................................... 2-64

Strengthening the Security ...................................................................................... 2-64

Command Center RX ...................................................................................................... 2-66

Accessing Command Center RX ............................................................................ 2-67

Changing Security Settings ..................................................................................... 2-68

Changing Device Information .................................................................................. 2-69

E-mail Settings ........................................................................................................ 2-70

Registering Destinations ......................................................................................... 2-74

Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 2-75

Printing a Document Stored in a Custom Box ......................................................... 2-76

Transferring Data from Our Other Products ................................................................. 2-77

Migrating the Address Book .................................................................................... 2-77

3 Preparation before Use .......................................................................... 3-1

Loading Paper ................................................................................................................... 3-2

Precaution for Loading Paper ................................................................................... 3-2

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................. 3-3

Loading in Cassette 1 ............................................................................................... 3-4

Loading in Cassette 2 ............................................................................................... 3-7

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes ................................................. 3-10

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder .................................................................... 3-14

Loading in the Side Feeder ..................................................................................... 3-16

Precautions for Outputting Paper .................................................................................. 3-18

Paper Stopper ......................................................................................................... 3-18

Envelope Stack Guide ............................................................................................. 3-18

Stack Level Adjuster ............................................................................................... 3-19

Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) .................................................................. 3-21

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC .............................. 3-22

Making a Note of the Computer Name and Full Computer Name .......................... 3-22

Making a Note of the User Name and Domain Name ............................................. 3-22

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ................................ 3-23

Configuring Windows Firewall ................................................................................. 3-27

Turn off password-protected sharing (Windows 10 only) ........................................ 3-31

Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB ........................................................................ 3-32

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ............................................................ 3-37

Adding a Destination (Address Book) ..................................................................... 3-37

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key ................................................................ 3-44

4 Printing from PC ..................................................................................... 4-1

Printer Driver Print Settings Screen ................................................................................ 4-2

Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................. 4-3

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 10) ..................................... 4-3

Printing from PC ................................................................................................................ 4-4

Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................. 4-4

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper ...................................................................... 4-6

Banner Printing ......................................................................................................... 4-9

Canceling Printing from a Computer ....................................................................... 4-15

Printing from the Handheld Device ............................................................................... 4-16

Printing by AirPrint .................................................................................................. 4-16

Printing by Google Cloud Print ................................................................................ 4-16

Printing by Mopria ................................................................................................... 4-16

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ......................................................................................... 4-17

Printing with NFC .................................................................................................... 4-17

Printing Data Saved in the Printer ................................................................................. 4-18

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job ............................... 4-18

Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................. 4-19

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ......................................... 4-19

Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................. 4-20

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ........................................... 4-20

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box ................................................................ 4-21

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box .......................................... 4-21

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box .......................................................... 4-22

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box .................................... 4-22

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ............................................................ 4-23

Accessing the Status Monitor .................................................................................. 4-23

Exiting the Status Monitor ....................................................................................... 4-23

Quick View State ..................................................................................................... 4-23

Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................. 4-24

Paper Tray Status Tab ............................................................................................ 4-24

Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................... 4-24

Alert Tab .................................................................................................................. 4-25

Status Monitor Context Menu .................................................................................. 4-25

Status Monitor Notification Settings ........................................................................ 4-26

5 Operation on the Machine ..................................................................... 5-1

Loading Originals .............................................................................................................. 5-2

Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................. 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document Processor .......................................................... 5-3

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ......................................................................... 5-6

Favorites .......................................................................................................................... 5-11

Registering Favorites .............................................................................................. 5-12

Recalling Favorites .................................................................................................. 5-12

Editing Favorites ..................................................................................................... 5-13

Deleting Favorites ................................................................................................... 5-13

Application ....................................................................................................................... 5-14

Installing Applications .............................................................................................. 5-14

Activating Applications ............................................................................................ 5-15

Deactivating Applications ........................................................................................ 5-16

Uninstalling Applications ......................................................................................... 5-16

Registering Shortcuts

(Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) .................................................................. 5-17

Adding Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-17

Editing Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-18

Deleting Shortcuts ................................................................................................... 5-18

Copying ............................................................................................................................ 5-19

Basic Operation ....................................................................................................... 5-19

Proof Copy .............................................................................................................. 5-21

Interrupt Copy ......................................................................................................... 5-22

Canceling Jobs ........................................................................................................ 5-22

Frequently-Used Sending Method ................................................................................. 5-23

Sending Document via E-mail ........................................................................................ 5-24

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-24

Sending Scanned Document via E-mail .................................................................. 5-24

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) ............. 5-26

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-26

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer ................................ 5-26

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) ................................... 5-29

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-29

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server ..................................................... 5-29

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ...................................................................................... 5-31

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-31

Scanning Document Using Application ................................................................... 5-31

Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box .............................................................. 5-32

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-32

Scanning Document Stored in a Box ...................................................................... 5-32

Useful Sending Method .................................................................................................. 5-34

WSD Scan ........................................................................................................................ 5-35

Installing the Driver ................................................................................................. 5-35

Executing WSD scan .............................................................................................. 5-36

DSM Scan ......................................................................................................................... 5-37

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-37

Executing DSM Scan .............................................................................................. 5-37

Scanning with File Management Utility ......................................................................... 5-39

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-39

Using FMU Connection to Scan an Original ........................................................... 5-39

Using MultiCrop Scan ..................................................................................................... 5-40

Configuring Settings before Scanning ..................................................................... 5-40

Using MultiCrop Scan to Send/Store an Original .................................................... 5-40

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ....................................... 5-42

Send to Me (Email) .......................................................................................................... 5-43

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-43

Sending a document to the mail address of the logged in user .............................. 5-43

Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send) ............................................................ 5-44

Canceling Sending Jobs ................................................................................................. 5-46

Handling Destination ...................................................................................................... 5-47

Specifying Destination ............................................................................................. 5-47

Choosing from the Address Book ........................................................................... 5-47

Choosing from the One Touch Key ......................................................................... 5-49

Choosing from the Search (No.) ............................................................................. 5-49

Checking and Editing Destinations ......................................................................... 5-50

Confirmation Screen of Destinations ....................................................................... 5-51

Recall ...................................................................................................................... 5-51

How to use the FAX Function ........................................................................................ 5-52

Using Document Boxes .................................................................................................. 5-53

What is Custom Box? .............................................................................................. 5-53

What is Job Box? .................................................................................................... 5-53

What is USB Drive Box? ......................................................................................... 5-54

Fax Box ................................................................................................................... 5-54

Basic Operation for Document Box ......................................................................... 5-54

Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 5-58

Editing Custom Box ................................................................................................. 5-59

Deleting Custom Box .............................................................................................. 5-60

Storing Documents to a Custom Box ...................................................................... 5-60

Printing Documents in Custom Box ........................................................................ 5-61

Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box ....................................................... 5-62

Sending Documents in Custom Box ....................................................................... 5-63

Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-mail Address of Logged in User ............. 5-64

Moving Documents in Custom Box ......................................................................... 5-64

Copying Documents in Custom Box into Other Boxes ............................................ 5-65

Copying Documents in Custom Box to USB Drive .................................................. 5-65

Joining Documents in Custom Box ......................................................................... 5-66

Deleting Documents in Custom Box ....................................................................... 5-67

Job Box ............................................................................................................................ 5-68

Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs ................................................................................. 5-68

Form for Form Overlay ............................................................................................ 5-69

Operating using Removable USB Drive ........................................................................ 5-70

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Drive ............................................ 5-70

Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to USB) .................................................... 5-72

Check the USB Drive Information ........................................................................... 5-73

Removing USB Drive .............................................................................................. 5-73

Using the Internet Browser ............................................................................................ 5-74

Launching and Exiting the Browser ......................................................................... 5-74

Using the Browser Screen ...................................................................................... 5-75

Manual Staple .................................................................................................................. 5-76

6 Using Various Functions ....................................................................... 6-1

Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................................... 6-2

About Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................... 6-2

Copy .......................................................................................................................... 6-2

Send .......................................................................................................................... 6-6

Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) ................................................................. 6-10

USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents) ........................................................... 6-16

Functions ......................................................................................................................... 6-19

Original Size ............................................................................................................ 6-20

Paper Selection ....................................................................................................... 6-21

Mixed Size Originals ............................................................................................... 6-23

Original Orientation ................................................................................................. 6-26

Fold ......................................................................................................................... 6-27

Collate/Offset .......................................................................................................... 6-29

Staple/Punch ........................................................................................................... 6-30

Paper Output ........................................................................................................... 6-34

ID Card Copy .......................................................................................................... 6-35

Org. Manual Feed (DP) ........................................................................................... 6-35

Density .................................................................................................................... 6-35

Original Image ......................................................................................................... 6-36

EcoPrint ................................................................................................................... 6-37

Color Selection ........................................................................................................ 6-38

vii

Color Balance .......................................................................................................... 6-39

Hue Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 6-40

One-touch Image Adjust ......................................................................................... 6-41

Sharpness ............................................................................................................... 6-43

Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment) .................................. 6-43

Saturation ................................................................................................................ 6-44

Prevent Bleed-thru .................................................................................................. 6-44

Contrast ................................................................................................................... 6-45

Trapping .................................................................................................................. 6-45

Erase Colors ........................................................................................................... 6-46

Zoom ....................................................................................................................... 6-46

Combine .................................................................................................................. 6-49

Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering ...................................................................... 6-51

Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan .................................................................... 6-53

Erase Shadowed Areas .......................................................................................... 6-55

Booklet .................................................................................................................... 6-56

Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-59

Cover ....................................................................................................................... 6-62

Form Overlay .......................................................................................................... 6-63

Page # ..................................................................................................................... 6-64

Memo Page ............................................................................................................. 6-66

Poster ...................................................................................................................... 6-67

Insert Sheets/Chapters ........................................................................................... 6-68

Image Repeat .......................................................................................................... 6-69

Text Stamp .............................................................................................................. 6-70

Bates Stamp ............................................................................................................ 6-73

Handwriting Enhancement ...................................................................................... 6-76

Continuous Scan ..................................................................................................... 6-76

Auto Image Rotation ............................................................................................... 6-77

Negative Image ....................................................................................................... 6-77

Mirror Image ............................................................................................................ 6-77

Job Finish Notice ..................................................................................................... 6-78

File Name Entry ...................................................................................................... 6-78

Priority Override ...................................................................................................... 6-79

Repeat Copy ........................................................................................................... 6-79

OHP Backing Sheet ................................................................................................ 6-80

DP Read Action ....................................................................................................... 6-81

Detect Multi-fed Originals ........................................................................................ 6-81

Detect Stapled Originals ......................................................................................... 6-81

Skip Blank Page ...................................................................................................... 6-82

2-sided/Book Original .............................................................................................. 6-82

Sending Size ........................................................................................................... 6-83

Long Original ........................................................................................................... 6-84

File Format .............................................................................................................. 6-84

File Separation ........................................................................................................ 6-91

Scan Resolution ...................................................................................................... 6-91

Email Subject/Body ................................................................................................. 6-92

Send and Print ........................................................................................................ 6-92

Send and Store ....................................................................................................... 6-92

FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................... 6-93

Email Encrypted TX ................................................................................................ 6-93

Digital Signature Email ............................................................................................ 6-93

File Size Confirmation ............................................................................................. 6-94

Delete after Printed ................................................................................................. 6-94

Delete after Transmitted .......................................................................................... 6-95

Storing Size ............................................................................................................. 6-95

Encrypted PDF Password ....................................................................................... 6-96

JPEG/TIFF Print ...................................................................................................... 6-96

XPS Fit to Page ....................................................................................................... 6-96

viii

7 Status/Job Cancel .................................................................................. 7-1

Checking Job Status ......................................................................................................... 7-2

Details of the Status Screens .................................................................................... 7-3

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs ..................................................................... 7-8

Checking Job History ....................................................................................................... 7-9

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ....................................................... 7-10

Sending the Log History .......................................................................................... 7-10

Job Operation .................................................................................................................. 7-11

Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................. 7-11

Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-11

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ........................................................................... 7-11

Reordering Print Jobs ............................................................................................. 7-12

Device Information .......................................................................................................... 7-13

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Supplies/Paper) ................... 7-15

8 Setup and Registration (System Menu) ............................................... 8-1

System Menu ..................................................................................................................... 8-2

Operation Method ..................................................................................................... 8-2

System Menu Settings .............................................................................................. 8-3

Device Settings ......................................................................................................... 8-6

Notification/Report ................................................................................................... 8-24

Function Settings .................................................................................................... 8-32

Network Settings ..................................................................................................... 8-52

Security Settings ..................................................................................................... 8-69

Job Accounting/Authentication ................................................................................ 8-82

Add/Delete Application ............................................................................................ 8-82

Adjustment/Maintenance ......................................................................................... 8-83

9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) 9-1

Overview of User Login Administration .......................................................................... 9-2

Managing the Job Account from PC ......................................................................... 9-2

Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning ..................................................... 9-2

Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning .......................................................... 9-2

Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC ......................................................... 9-2

Enabling User Login Administration ............................................................................... 9-3

Setting User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-4

Authentication Security ............................................................................................. 9-4

Adding a User (Local User List) ................................................................................ 9-6

Changing User Properties ....................................................................................... 9-10

User Login Administration for Printing ..................................................................... 9-12

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN ............................................................ 9-13

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ................................................................. 9-14

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC .................................................... 9-15

Local Authorization .................................................................................................. 9-16

Server Settings ........................................................................................................ 9-17

Group Authorization Settings .................................................................................. 9-18

Guest Authorization Settings ................................................................................... 9-21

Obtain NW User Property ....................................................................................... 9-24

Simple Login Settings ............................................................................................. 9-26

ID Card Settings ...................................................................................................... 9-29

PIN Login ................................................................................................................ 9-31

Using User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-32

Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-32

Overview of Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-33

To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ..................... 9-33

Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN ................................................. 9-33

Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA ...................................................... 9-33

Managing the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC ...................................................... 9-33

Enabling Job Accounting ............................................................................................... 9-34

Job Accounting (Local) .................................................................................................. 9-35

Adding an Account .................................................................................................. 9-35

Restricting the Use of the Machine ......................................................................... 9-36

Editing an Account .................................................................................................. 9-37

Deleting an Account ................................................................................................ 9-38

Job Accounting for Printing ..................................................................................... 9-39

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN .................................................................. 9-40

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ....................................................................... 9-41

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer .................................... 9-42

Configuring Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-43

Default Counter Limit .............................................................................................. 9-43

Count by Paper Size ............................................................................................... 9-45

Counting the Number of Pages Printed .................................................................. 9-46

Print Accounting Report .......................................................................................... 9-48

Using Job Accounting .................................................................................................... 9-49

Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-49

Apply Limit ....................................................................................................................... 9-50

Copier/Printer Count ....................................................................................................... 9-51

Unknown User Settings .................................................................................................. 9-52

Unknown ID Job ...................................................................................................... 9-52

Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ....................................... 9-53

10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 10-1

Regular Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 10-2

Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 10-2

Cleaning Glass Platen ............................................................................................. 10-2

Cleaning inside of the Document Processor ........................................................... 10-2

Cleaning Slit Glass .................................................................................................. 10-3

Toner Container Replacement ................................................................................ 10-4

Replace the Waste Toner Box ................................................................................ 10-7

Loading Paper ......................................................................................................... 10-8

Replacing Staples (Inner Finisher) .......................................................................... 10-9

Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................................ 10-11

Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................................ 10-12

Disposing of the Staple Waste .............................................................................. 10-14

Disposing of the Punch Waste .............................................................................. 10-16

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 10-22

Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................. 10-22

Machine Operation Trouble ................................................................................... 10-22

Printed Image Trouble ........................................................................................... 10-27

Color Printing Trouble ........................................................................................... 10-29

Remote Operation ................................................................................................. 10-30

Responding to Messages ...................................................................................... 10-32

Adjustment/Maintenance .............................................................................................. 10-51

Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................... 10-51

Color Registration Procedure ................................................................................ 10-52

Tone Curve Adjustment ........................................................................................ 10-56

Drum Refresh ........................................................................................................ 10-57

Calibration ............................................................................................................. 10-58

Laser Scanner Cleaning ........................................................................................ 10-58

Developer Refresh ................................................................................................ 10-58

Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................... 10-59

Jam Location Indicators ........................................................................................ 10-59

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 ............................................................ 10-62

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2 ............................................................ 10-65

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 and 4 (500-sheet×2) ........................... 10-68

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) .................................. 10-70

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) .................................. 10-72

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) ..................................... 10-75

Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray .......................................... 10-77

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1 ....................................................... 10-78

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) ................................ 10-83

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) ............................. 10-84

Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit ..................................................... 10-86

Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox ........................................................... 10-87

Remove any jammed paper in the Inner Finisher ................................................. 10-88

Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) .... 10-89

Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Dual Scan) .................. 10-91

Remove any jammed paper in the 1,000-Sheet Finisher ...................................... 10-92

Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet Finisher (Inner) ........................... 10-95

Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray A) ........................ 10-96

Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray B) ...................... 10-100

Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) .............. 10-103

Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Tray (4,000-sheet Finisher) ............. 10-108

Clearing a Staple Jam ................................................................................................. 10-113

Clearing a staple jam of the Inner Finisher ......................................................... 10-113

Clearing a staple jam of the 1,000-Sheet Finisher .............................................. 10-115

Clearing a staple jam of the 4,000-sheet Finisher ............................................... 10-118

Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) ...................... 10-120

11 Appendix ............................................................................................... 11-1

Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................ 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................. 11-2

Applications ............................................................................................................. 11-8

Character Entry Method ................................................................................................ 11-10

Entry Screens ........................................................................................................ 11-10

Entering Characters .............................................................................................. 11-12

Paper .............................................................................................................................. 11-13

Basic Paper Specifications .................................................................................... 11-13

Choosing the Appropriate Paper ........................................................................... 11-14

Special Paper ........................................................................................................ 11-17

Specifications ................................................................................................................ 11-21

Machine ................................................................................................................. 11-21

Copy Functions ..................................................................................................... 11-24

Printer Functions ................................................................................................... 11-25

Scanner Functions ................................................................................................ 11-26

Document Processor ............................................................................................. 11-27

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) ................................................................................. 11-28

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) ............................................................... 11-28

Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) .................................................................................... 11-28

Inner Finisher ........................................................................................................ 11-29

Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) ............................................................................. 11-29

1,000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................................. 11-30

4,000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................................. 11-31

Punch Unit (For 1,000-sheet/4,000-sheet) ............................................................ 11-31

Mailbox (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) ....................................................................... 11-32

Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) ................................................................ 11-32

Job Separator Tray ............................................................................................... 11-33

Inner Shift Tray ...................................................................................................... 11-33

Banner Tray .......................................................................................................... 11-34

Backing up your data .................................................................................................... 11-35

Backing up your data using KYOCERA Net Viewer .............................................. 11-35

Backing up your data using Command Center ..................................................... 11-35

Backing up your date using USB Drive ................................................................. 11-35

Functions List of Security Quick Setup ...................................................................... 11-36

Glossary ......................................................................................................................... 11-40

Index ............................................................................................................................ Index-1

> Overview

Overview

NOTE

• Before using the machine, be sure to read the following:

Legal and Safety Information (page 1-1)

• To prepare the device for use, including setting up cable connections and installing software.

Installing and Setting up the Machine (page 2-1)

• To learn how to load paper, set up shared folders, and add addresses to the address book, refer to the following:

Preparation before Use (page 3-1)

Operations from your PC

Copy functions

Printer functions

Fax functionsUSB driveSend functions

Document Box functions

Original Electronic data Fax dataUSB drive

Output Data

Application

SecurityInput Data

FAX Operation

Guide

This function serves a variety of

purposes, including saving data in the

machine and on a USB drive.

Printing Data Saved in the

Printer (page 4-18)

Creating a New Custom Box

(page 5-58)

You can expand the machine

functions according to your needs.

Application (page 5-14)

You can apply the various machine security

levels to your specific needs.

Strengthen security (page xv)

Frequently-Used

Sending Method

(page 5-23)

Command Center RX

You can check the status and change

the settings of the machine from a Web

browser on your computer.

Command Center RX (page 2-66)

Command Center RX User Guide

Copying (page 5-19)

Printing from PC (page 4-1)

Saving Documents

to USB Drive (Scan

to USB) (page 5-72)

xii

> Machine Features

Machine Features

The machine is equipped with many useful functions.

Using Various Functions (page 6-1)

Here are some examples.

Optimize your office workflow

Access to frequently used

functions with just one touch

(Favorites)

You can preset frequently used

functions.

Once you register frequently used

settings as favorite, you can call up

the settings easily. Using this favorite

brings the same results even if

operated by another person.

Favorites (page 5-11)

Interrupt other running jobs and

execute your copy job immediately

(Interrupt Copy)

You can interrupt other running jobs

and execute your copy job

immediately. When other users are

copying a large number of sheets,

this function allows you to interrupt

those jobs and make your copies

immediately.

When the interruption copy ends, the

machine resumes the paused print

jobs.

Interrupt Copy (page 5-22)

Check the finishing before copying

a large number of sheets

(Proof Copy)

It is possible to copy one sheet

before copying a large number of

sheets. This enables you to check the

contents and finishing and copy the

desired number of sheets without

scanning the original again if you are

satisfied with the result. If you want to

make changes, you can change the

settings and copy only one sheet

again.

Proof Copy (page 5-21)

Optimize your office workflow

Scan originals of different sizes at

a time (Mixed Size Originals)

It is useful when preparing

conference materials.

You can set the different sized

originals at one time so you don't

need to reset the originals regardless

of size.

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-

23)

Scan a large number of originals in

separate batches and produce as

one job (Continuous Scan)

It is useful when preparing many-

page handouts.

When a large number of originals

cannot be placed in the document

processor at one time, the originals

can be scanned in separate batches

and then copied or sent as one job.

Continuous Scan (page 6-76)

Send one time with multiple

sending options (Multi Sending)

You can send a same document to

the multiple destinations using a

different method.

You can specify multiple destinations

of different send methods such as E-

mail, SMB, and Fax.

You can reduce your workflow by

sending a job at once.

Sending to Different Types of

Destinations (Multi Sending)

(page 5-42)

1~10

1~30

11~20

21~30

xiii

> Machine Features

Optimize your office workflow

Save frequently used documents

in the machine (Custom Box)

You can save the frequently used

document in the machine and print it

when needed.

Creating a New Custom Box

(page 5-58)

Recover from low power mode or

sleep mode automatically

(Motion Sensor)

This model detects that the person is

approaching and recover from low

power mode or sleep mode

automatically.

Reduce waiting time before starting

to work.

Motion Sensor (page 2-43)

Save energy and cost

Save energy as needed

(Energy Saver function)

The machine is equipped with Energy

Saver function that automatically

switched into Low Power Mode or

Sleep Mode. You can set appropriate

Energy Saver Recovery Level

depending on the operation.

In addition, the machine can

automatically be switched into Sleep

and recovered at a specified time for

each day of the week.

Energy Saver function (page 2-

44)

Reduce paper use

(Paper Saving Printing)

You can print originals on both sides

of the paper. You can also print

multiple originals onto one sheet.

Favorites (page 5-11)

Skip blank pages when printing

(Skip Blank Page)

When there are blank pages in a

scanned document, this function

skips the blank pages and prints only

pages that are not blank.

Skip Blank Page (page 6-82)

xiv

> Machine Features

Create attractive documents

Prevent image bleed-through

(Prevent Bleed-through)

You can prevent image bleed-through

from the reverse side when scanning

thin originals.

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-44)

Erase the extra shaded area

(Erase Shadowed Areas)

When scanning with the document

processor open, erase the extra

shaded area.

Erase Shadowed Areas (page

6-55)

Create a booklet (Booklet)

It is useful when preparing handout.

You can create a magazine,

pamphlet, or other booklet from sheet

originals.

Facing-page, two-sided copies of

originals can be folded down the

center to create a booklet.

The cover page can be printed onto

colored paper or heavy paper.

Booklet (page 6-56)

Create attractive documents

Print a stamp on copies

(Text Stamp / Bates Stamp)

It is useful when adding text or date

that is not included in originals.

You can add desired text and date as

a stamp.

Text Stamp (page 6-70)

Bates Stamp (page 6-73)

Change appearance of image

easily

(One touch image adjust)

Change the appearance of image by

using the preset settings.

You can change the appearance of

image by simple operation without

making fine adjustment.

One-touch Image Adjust (page

6-41)

> Machine Features

Strengthen security

Password-protect a PDF file

(PDF Encryption Functions)

Use the PDF format's password

security options to restrict document

viewing, printing and editing.

Encrypted PDF Password

(page 6-96)

Protect data on the hard disk/SSD

(Encryption / Overwrite)

You can overwrite the unnecessary

data that remains on the hard disk/

SSD automatically.

To prevent an external leakage, the

machine is able to encrypt data

before writing it to the hard disk/SSD.

Data Security (page 8-72)

Prevent loss of finished

documents

(Private Print)

Temporarily saving print jobs in the

main unit document box and

outputting them when in front of the

device can prevent documents from

being taken by others.

Printing Data Saved in the

Printer (page 4-18)

Strengthen security

(Card Authentication)

You can log in simply by touching an

ID card. You don't need to enter your

user name and password.

Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card

Authentication Kit" (page 11-6)

Strengthen security

(Settings for Administrator)

Various functions are available for

administrators to strengthen security.

Strengthening the Security

(page 2-64)

OK !

xvi

> Machine Features

Use functions more efficiently

Expand functions as necessary

(Application)

The functionality of the machine can

be expanded by installing

applications.

Applications that help you perform

your daily more efficiently such as a

scan feature and an authentication

feature are available.

Application (page 5-14)

Display file size before sending /

storing a job

(File Size Confirmation)

You can check the file size before

sending/storing the document.

If your server specifies an e-mail size

limit, you can check and change the

size in advance.

File Size Confirmation (page 6-

94)

Install the machine without

concerning the network cables

(Wireless Network)

If there is a wireless LAN

environment, it is possible to install

the unit without worrying about the

network wiring. In addition, Wi-Fi

Direct, etc. are supported.

Configuring the Wireless

Network (page 2-34)

Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-40)

Configuring NFC (page 2-42)

Use functions more efficiently

Use USB drive

(USB Drive)

It is useful when you need to print

documents outside your office or you

cannot print documents from your

PC.

You can print the document from the

USB drive by plugging it directly into

the machine.

Original scanned at the machine can

be saved in the USB drive also.

Printing Documents Stored in

Removable USB Drive (page 5-

70)

Saving Documents to USB

Drive (Scan to USB) (page 5-72)

Specify image file format

(File Format)

You can select the various file

formats when sending/storing

images.

File Format (page 6-84)

Scan the long originals

(Long Original)

You can scan the long originals such

as Contract and Data log.

Long Original (page 6-84)

1 MB

xvii

> Machine Features

Use functions more efficiently

Detect the multiple feeding of

originals

(Detect Multi-fed Originals)

When reading a document from the

document processor, if the multiple

feeding of documents is detected,

then the reading stops automatically.

Detect Multi-fed Originals

(page 6-81)

Detect originals fastened with

staples

(Detect Stapled Originals)

When reading a document from the

document processor, if a stapled

document is detected, then the

reading stops automatically.

Detect Stapled Originals (page

6-81)

Skip the error job

(Job Skip Functions)

When paper empty error occurs at

the cassette by specifying the special

paper size or type, the machine skips

the error job and perform the next

job.

Error Job Skip (page 8-22)

Use functions more efficiently

Perform remote operation

(Command Center RX)

You can access to the machine

remotely to print, send or download

data.

Administrators can configure the

machine behavior or management

settings.

Command Center RX (page 2-

66)

xviii

> Color and Image Quality Functions

Color and Image Quality Functions

The machine is equipped with various color and image quality functions. You can adjust the scanned image as desired.

Basic Color Modes

The basic color modes are as follows.

For details, refer to the following:

Color Selection (page 6-38)

Color mode Description

Reference image Reference

page

Before After

Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether a

document being scanned is color or

black & white.

page 6-38

Full Color Scans a document in full color. page 6-38

Grayscale Scans a document in grayscale. page 6-38

Single Color Prints in any desired color. page 6-38

Black & White Scans a document in black & white. page 6-38

xix

> Color and Image Quality Functions

Adjusting Image Quality and Color

To adjust the image quality or color of an image, use the following functions.

I want to... Sample image Function Page

Before After

Easily adjust the image quality to match your own image

Adjust the skin color.

Example: Create a tanned effect.

One Touch Image

Adjust

[Portrait Photo]

page 6-41

Adjust the blue landscape.

Example: Make the blue more

vivid

One Touch Image

Adjust

[Landscape Photo

(Blue)]

page 6-42

Adjust the green landscape.

Example: Change to

yellowgreen

One Touch Image

Adjust

[Landscape Photo

(Green)]

page 6-42

Produce overall image vividly. One Touch Image

Adjust

[Vivid]

page 6-41

Favorites

[Vivid Copy]

page 5-11

Remove dark background or

bleed-through from the original

such as a newspaper.

Favorites

[Newspaper Copy]

page 5-11

Clearly reproduce fine lines,

faint lines, broken lines, and

other fine details in a CAD or

other drawings.

Favorites

[Drawing Copy]

page 5-11

Clearly reproduce the text or

colors of a highlighter.

Favorites

[Highlighter Copy]

page 5-11

> Color and Image Quality Functions

Adjust the color precisely.

Adjust the density. Density page 6-35

Adjust the color by

strengthening blue or red tones.

Example: Strengthening red

Color Balance page 6-39

Change the image by

individually adjusting each of

the six colors: red, blue, green,

cyan, magenta, and yellow.

Example: Changing red tones

close to yellow to yellow, and

cyan tones close to blue to blue

Hue adjustment page 6-40

Adjust the saturation. Saturation page 6-44

Adjust the image quality precisely

Emphasize or blur the image

outline.

Example: Emphasize the image

outlines

Sharpness page 6-43

Adjust the difference between

dark and light parts of the

image.

Contrast page 6-45

Darken or lighten the

background (the area with no

texts or images) of a document.

Example: Lightening the

background

Background Density page 6-43

Prevent bleed-through in 2-

sided originals.

Prevent Bleed-

through

page 6-44

Adjust the scanned image

Decrease the file size and

produce the characters clearly.

File format

[High Comp. PDF]

page 6-84

Convert a paper document to

PDF with searchable text.

File format

[PDF] or

[High Comp. PDF]

with

[OCR]

page 6-84

I want to... Sample image Function Page

Before After

xxi

> Guides Provided with the Machine

Guides Provided with the Machine

The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed.

The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine

performance.

Printed guides

Start using the

machine quickly

Quick Guide

Explains how to use basic functions of the machine, how to use convenient

features, how to perform routine maintenance, and what to do when problems

occur.

For safe use of the

machine

Safety Guide

Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of

the machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.

Safety Guide (TASKalfa 2554ci/TASKalfa 3554ci)

Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the

cautionary labels and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before

using the machine.

xxii

> Guides Provided with the Machine

Guides (PDF) on our website

Install the following versions of Adobe Reader to view the manuals.

Version 8.0 or later

Use the machine

thoughtfully

Operation Guide (This Guide)

Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and

indicates default settings and other information.

Use the fax functions FAX Operation Guide

Explains how to use the fax function.

Use the ID card Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide

Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.

Strengthen security

Data Encryption/Overwrite Operation Guide

Explains how to introduce and use the Data Encryption/Overwrite Function, and how

to overwrite and encrypt data.

Easily register

machine information

and configure settings

Command Center RX User Guide

Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to

check and change settings.

Print data from a

computer

Printer Driver User Guide

Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.

Directly print a PDF file KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide

Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.

Monitor the machine

and printers on the

network

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with

KYOCERA Net Viewer.

Scan images and save

with information

File Management Utility User Guide

Explains how to use File Management Utility to set various parameters and send

and save scanned documents.

Print without using the

printer driver

PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).

PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference

Describes the PRESCRIBE command functions and control for each type of

emulation.

Adjust the print or

scan position

Maintenance Menu User Guide

Maintenance Menu provides the explanation on how to configure the print, scan,

and other settings.

xxiii

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Structure of the guide

The Operation Guide contains the following chapters.

Chapter Contents

1Legal and Safety Information Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.

2Installing and Setting up the

Machine

Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login,

logout, and other matters related to administration of the machine.

3Preparation before Use Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the

machine, such as how to load paper and create an address book.

4Printing from PC Explains functions that are available when the machine is used as a printer.

5Operation on the Machine Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals,

making copies, sending documents, and using document boxes.

6Using Various Functions Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.

7Status/Job Cancel Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel

jobs being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and

toner levels, how to check the device status, and how to cancel fax

transmission.

8Setup and Registration

(System Menu)

Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.

9User Authentication and

Accounting (User Login, Job

Accounting)

Explains user login and job accounting.

10 Troubleshooting Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam

or other problem occurs.

11 Appendix Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides

information on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms.

Explains how to enter characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.

xxiv

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Conventions Used in This Guide

Adobe Reader XI is used as an example in the explanations below.

Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.

NOTE

The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not

appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.

Convention Description

[Bold] Indicates keys and buttons.

"Regular" Indicates a message or setting.

Click to move from the current page to the previously

displayed page. This is convenient when you want to

return to the page from which you jumped to the

current page.

Click an item in the Table of

Contents to jump to the

corresponding page.

CAUTION

Indicates that personal injury or

mechanical damage may result

from insufficient attention to or

incorrect compliance with the

related points.

NOTE

Indicates supplemental

explanations and reference

information for operations.

IMPORTANT

Indicates operational

requirements and restrictions to

operate the machine correctly,

and avoid damage to the

machine or property.

Refer to

Click the underlined text to jump

to the corresponding page.

xxv

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Conventions used in procedures for operating the machine

In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:

For details on touch panel operation, refer to the following:

Using the Touch Panel (page 2-12)

Actual procedure Procedure indicated in this guide

Select the [Home] key.



Select the [...].



Select the [System Menu].



Select [Device Settings].



Move the screen downwards (i.e. swiping)



Select [Sound].

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings]

> [Sound]

Select [Job Accounting/Authentication].



Select [Job Accounting] of "Job Accounting Setting".

[Job Accounting/Authentication] > "Job Accounting

Setting" [Job Accounting]

4XLFN6HWXS:L]DUG

&RXQWHU

)D[6HWXS

(QHUJ\6DYHU6HWXS

1HWZRUN6HWXS

(PDLO6HWXS

6HFXULW\6HWXS

&ORVH

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6HWWLQJV

$GG'HOHWH

$SSOLFDWLRQ

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

1HWZRUN

6HWWLQJV

6HFXULW\

6HWWLQJV

-RE$FFRXQWLQJ

$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ

$GMXVWPHQW

0DLQWHQDQFH

6HWWLQJV

$GG'HOHWH

$SSOLFDWLRQ

-RE$FFRXQWLQJ6HWWLQJ

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

1HWZRUN

6HWWLQJV

&RXQWHU

-RE$FFRXQWLQJ

$GG(GLW-RE$FFRXQWLQJ

-RE$FFRXQWLQJ&RXQWHU

-RE$FFRXQWLQJ6HWWLQJ

3ULQW$FFRXQWLQJ5HSRUW

&ORVH

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6HFXULW\

6HWWLQJV

-RE$FFRXQWLQJ

$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ

8VHU/RJLQ

8VHU/RJLQ6HWWLQJ

$GMXVWPHQW

0DLQWHQDQFH

xxvi

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Size and Orientation of Originals and Paper

Original sizes and paper sizes such as A4, B5, and Letter can be used in both the horizontal and vertical orientations. To

distinguish the orientations when these sizes are used, "R" is added to sizes used in the horizontal orientation. In

addition, the following icons are used to indicate original and paper placement orientations on the touch panel.

Orientation Setting Position

(X=Length, Y=Width)

Icons on the touch

panel

Indicated size in this

Guide*

* Original/paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and source tray. For details, refer to the

following.

Specifications (page 11-21)

Vertical

orientation

Original

Original Original

A4, B5, Letter .etc

Paper

Paper Paper

Horizontal

orientation

(-R)

Original

Original Original

A4-R, B5-R, Letter-R

.etc

Paper

Paper Paper

xxvii

> Menu Map

Menu Map

This is a list of menus displayed on the touch panel. Depending on the settings, some menus may not be displayed.

Some menu names may differ from their reference titles.

Org./Paper/Finishing Original Size (page 6-20)

Paper Selection (page 6-21)

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-23)

Original Orientation (page 6-26)

Fold (page 6-27)

Collate/Offset (page 6-29)

Staple/Punch Staple (page 6-30)

Punch (page 6-32)

Paper Output (page 6-34)

ID Card Copy (page 6-35)

Org. Manual Feed (DP) (page 6-35)

Layout/Edit Zoom (page 6-46)

Combine (page 6-49)

Margin/Centering (page 6-49)

Border Erase (page 6-53)

Erase Shadowed Areas (page 6-55)

Booklet (page 6-56)

Duplex (page 6-59)

Cover (page 6-62)

Form Overlay (page 6-63)

Page # (page 6-64)

Memo Page (page 6-66)

Poster (page 6-67)

Insert Sheets/Chapters (page 6-68)

Image Repeat (page 6-69)

Text Stamp (page 6-70)

Bates Stamp (page 6-73)

&RS\

xxviii

> Menu Map

Color/Image Quality Density (page 6-35)

Original Image (page 6-36)

Color Selection (page 6-38)

EcoPrint (page 6-37)

Color Balance (page 6-39)

Hue Adjustment (page 6-40)

One-touch Image Adjust (page 6-41)

Sharpness (page 6-43)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-43)

Saturation (page 6-44)

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-44)

Contrast (page 6-45)

Trapping (page 6-45)

Erase Colors (page 6-46)

Advanced Setup Continuous Scan (page 6-76)

Auto Image Rotation (page 6-77)

Negative Image (page 6-77)

Mirror Image (page 6-77)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-78)

File Name Entry (page 6-78)

Priority Override (page 6-79)

Repeat Copy (page 6-79)

OHP Backing Sheet (page 6-80)

DP Read Action (page 6-81)

Detect Multi-fed Originals (page 6-81)

Detect Stapled Originals (page 6-81)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-82)

Favorites (page 5-11)

Shortcut (page 5-17)

xxix

> Menu Map

Destination Email (page 5-24)

SMB (page 5-26)

FTP (page 5-29)

Fax (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

iFax (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Fax Server (page 5-44)

WSD Scan (page 5-35)

DSM Scan (page 5-37)

Address Book (page 5-47)

Org./Sending Data Format Original Size (page 6-20)

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-23)

2-sided/Book Original (page 6-82)

Sending Size (page 6-83)

Original Orientation (page 6-26)

Long Original (page 6-84)

File Format (page 6-84)

File Separation (page 6-91)

Org. Manual Feed (DP) (page 6-35)

Color/Image Quality Density (page 6-35)

Original Image (page 6-36)

Scan Resolution (page 6-91)

Fax TX Resolution (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Color Selection (page 6-38)

Sharpness (page 6-43)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-43)

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-44)

Contrast (page 6-45)

Erase Colors (page 6-46)

6HQG

xxx

> Menu Map

Advanced Setup Border Erase/Full Scan (page 6-53)

Erase Shadowed Areas (page 6-55)

Zoom (page 6-46)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-78)

Fax Delayed Transmission (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

File Name Entry (page 6-78)

Continuous Scan (page 6-76)

Email Subject/Body (page 6-92)

iFax Subject/Body (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Fax Direct Transmission (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Centering (page 6-49)

Fax Polling RX (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Send and Print (page 6-92)

Send and Store (page 6-92)

FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-93)

Email Encrypted TX (page 6-93)

Digital Signature to Email (page 6-93)

Text Stamp (page 6-70)

Bates Stamp (page 6-73)

Handwriting Enhancement (page 6-76)

File Size Confirmation (page 6-94)

Fax TX Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Detect Multi-fed Originals (page 6-81)

Detect Stapled Originals (page 6-81)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-82)

Favorites (page 5-11)

Shortcut (page 5-17)

xxxi

> Menu Map

Add/Edit (page 5-58)

Search (No.) (page 5-54)

Search (Name) (page 5-54)

(Open any box) Store File Functions Original Size (page 6-20)

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-23)

2-sided/Book Original (page 6-82)

Original Orientation (page 6-26)

Storing Size (page 6-95)

Org. Manual Feed (DP) (page 6-35)

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-44)

Density (page 6-35)

Original Image (page 6-36)

Scan Resolution (page 6-91)

Color Selection (page 6-38)

Erase Colors (page 6-46)

Sharpness (page 6-43)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-43)

Zoom (page 6-46)

Centering (page 6-49)

Border Erase/Full Scan (page 6-53)

Erase Shadowed Areas (page 6-55)

Continuous Scan (page 6-76)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-78)

File Name Entry (page 6-78)

Detect Multi-fed Originals (page 6-81)

Detect Stapled Originals (page 6-81)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-82)

Contrast (page 6-45)

Favorites (page 5-11)

Shortcut (page 5-17)

&XVWRP%R[

xxxii

> Menu Map

(Open any box) Print Functions Paper Selection (page 6-21)

Collate/Offset (page 6-29)

Paper Output (page 6-34)

Staple/Punch (page 6-30)Staple (page 6-30)

Punch (page 6-32)

Combine (page 6-49)

Duplex (page 6-59)

Margin/Centering (page 6-51)

Page # (page 6-64)

Fold (page 6-27)

Form Overlay (page 6-63)

Cover (page 6-62)

File Name Entry (page 6-78)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-78)

EcoPrint (page 6-37)

Priority Override (page 6-79)

Delete after Printed (page 6-94)

Zoom (page 6-46)

Booklet (page 6-56)

Text Stamp (page 6-70)

Bates Stamp (page 6-73)

Hue Adjustment (page 6-40)

Color Balance (page 6-39)

One-touch Image Adjust (page 6-41)

Saturation (page 6-44)

Trapping (page 6-45)

Color/Image Quality Density (page 6-35)

Original Image (page 6-36)

Color Selection (page 6-38)

Sharpness (page 6-43)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-43)

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-44)

Contrast (page 6-45)

Favorites (page 5-11)

xxxiii

> Menu Map

(Open any box) Send Destination (page 5-47)

Functions File Format (page 6-84)

Sending Size (page 6-83)

Centering (page 6-49)

Fax TX Resolution

(refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-78)

Fax Delayed Transmission

(refer to

FAX Operation Guide

)

File Name Entry (page 6-78)

Email Subject/Body (page 6-92)

iFax Subject/Body

(refer to

FAX Operation Guide

)

Delete after Transmitted (page 6-95)

FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-93)

Email Encrypted TX (page 6-93)

Digital Signature to Email (page 6-93)

Zoom (page 6-46)

File Separation (page 6-91)

Text Stamp (page 6-70)

Bates Stamp (page 6-73)

File Size Confirmation (page 6-94)

Fax TX Report

(refer to

FAX Operation Guide

)

Color/Image Quality Density (page 6-35)

Original Image (page 6-36)

Resolution (page 6-91)

Color Selection (page 6-38)

Sharpness (page 6-43)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-43)

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-44)

Contrast (page 6-45)

Favorites (page 5-11)

xxxiv

> Menu Map

(Open any box) Others Join (page 5-69)

Move/Copy (page 5-64)

Preview (page 5-56)

Page Selection (page 5-54)

Delete (page 5-67)

Search(Name) (page 5-54)

(page 5-54)

xxxv

> Menu Map

Private Print/Stored Job (page 4-19, page 4-20)

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold (page 4-21, page 4-22)

Repeat Copy (page 6-79)

Form for Form Overlay (page 5-69)

-RE%R[

xxxvi

> Menu Map

Print Functions Paper Selection (page 6-21)

Collate/Offset (page 6-29)

Paper Output (page 6-34)

Staple/Punch (page 6-30 Staple (page 6-30)

Punch (page 6-32)

Duplex (page 6-59)

Margin (page 6-51)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-78)

EcoPrint (page 6-37)

Priority Override (page 6-79)

Fold (page 6-27)

Text Stamp (page 6-70)

Bates Stamp (page 6-73)

Encrypted PDF Password (page 6-96)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-96)

XPS Fit to Page (page 6-96)

Color Color Selection (page 6-38)

86%'ULYH

xxxvii

> Menu Map

Store File Functions Original Size (page 6-20)

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-23)

2-sided/Book Original (page 6-82)

Original Orientation (page 6-26)

Storing Size (page 6-95)

Org. Manual Feed (DP) (page 6-35)

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-44)

Density (page 6-35)

Original Image (page 6-36)

Scan Resolution (page 6-91)

Color Selection (page 6-38)

Erase Colors (page 6-46)

Sharpness (page 6-43)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-43)

Zoom (page 6-46)

Centering (page 6-49)

Border Erase/Full Scan (page 6-53)

Erase Shadowed Areas (page 6-55)

Continuous Scan (page 6-76)

File Name Entry (page 6-78)

File Format (page 6-84)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-78)

File Separation (page 6-91)

Text Stamp (page 6-70)

Bates Stamp (page 6-73)

Handwriting Enhancement (page 6-76)

Detect Multi-fed Originals (page 6-81)

Detect Stapled Originals (page 6-81)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-82)

Contrast (page 6-45)

Long Original (page 6-84)

Remove USB (page 5-73)

USB Info (page 5-73)

Delete (page 5-55)

(page 5-55)

xxxviii

> Menu Map

Printing Jobs Status (page 7-3)

Log (page 7-2)

Sending Jobs Status (page 7-5)

Scheduled (page 7-7)

Log (page 7-2)

Storing Jobs Status (page 7-6)

Log (page 7-2)

Fax Communication Status (refer to

FAX Operation Guide

)

Fax Incoming/Outgoing Log (refer to

FAX Operation Guide

)

6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO

xxxix

> Menu Map

Quick Setup

Wizard

Fax Setup (page 2-47)

Energy Saver Setup (page 2-47)

Network Setup (page 2-48)

Email Setup (page 2-48)

Security Setup (page 2-48)

Device Settings Language/System

of Units

Language (page 8-6)

Measurement (page 8-6)

Keyboard Keyboard Layout (page 8-6)

Optional Keyboard Type (page 8-6)

Numeric Keypad Default Display (page 8-6)

Layout (HyPAS Application) (page 8-6)

Date/Time Date and Time (page 8-6)

Date Format (page 8-7)

Time Zone (page 8-7)

Energy Saver/

Timer

Auto Panel Reset (page 8-7)

Panel Reset Timer (page 8-7)

Low Power Timer (page 8-7)

Sleep Timer (page 8-7)

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-7)

Sleep Level (models except for Europe) (page 8-8)

Weekly Timer Settings (page 8-8)

Motion Sensor (page 8-9)

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 8-8)

Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 8-9)

Energy Saver Recovery Level (page 8-9)

Interrupt Clear Timer (page 8-9)

Ping Timeout (page 8-9)

6\VWHP0HQX

> Menu Map

Device Settings Display Settings Display Brightness (page 8-10)

Default Screen (page 8-10)

Wallpaper (page 2-15)

Show Power Off Message (page 8-10)

Quick Setup Registration (Copy) (page 8-10)

Quick Setup Registration (Send) (page 8-10)

Quick Setup Registration (Fax) (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Quick Setup Registration (Storing in Box) (page 8-10)

Quick Setup Registration (Box Print) (page 8-10)

Quick Setup Registration (Sending from Box) (page 8-10)

Sound Buzzer (page 8-11)

Fax Speaker Volume (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Fax Monitor Volume (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Original/Scan

Settings

Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-11)

Custom Original Size (page 8-12)

Prevent Light Reflection (page 8-12)

Prevent Original Skewing (page 8-12)

Paper Feeding Cassette 1 Settings (page 8-13)

Cassette 2 Settings (page 8-13)

Cassette 3 Settings (page 8-13)

Cassette 4 Settings (page 8-13)

Cassette 5 Settings (page 8-13)

MP Tray Settings (page 8-14)

Custom Paper Settings (page 8-15)

Media Type Setting (page 8-16)

Show Paper Setup Message (page 8-17)

Paper Feed

Settings

Default Paper Source (page 8-17)

Paper Selection (page 8-17)

Auto Paper Selection (page 8-17)

Media for Auto (Color) (page 8-17)

Media for Auto (B&W) (page 8-17)

Paper Source for Cover (page 8-18)

Separator Paper Source (page 8-18)

Special Paper Action (page 8-18)

xli

> Menu Map

Device Settings Paper Output Paper Output (page 8-19)

Paper Output

Behavior

Offset Documents by Job (page 8-19)

Offset One Page Documents (page 8-19)

Function Key Assignment (page 8-20)

Operation Assist Orientation Confirmation (page 8-20)

Preset Limit (page 8-20)

Clear Settings after Job Started (page 8-20)

Error Handling Duplexing Error (page 8-21)

Finishing Error (page 8-21)

No Staple Error (page 8-21)

Finished Pages Exceeded (page 8-21)

Punch Waste Full Error (page 8-21)

Paper Mismatch Error (page 8-21)

Wrong Size Paper Loaded (page 8-21)

Paper Jam before Staple (page 8-22)

Error Job Skip (page 8-22)

Auto Error Clear (page 8-22)

Continue or Cancel Error Job (page 8-22)

Image Preview at DP Jam (page 8-22)

Toner Settings Color Toner Empty Action (page 8-23)

Low Toner Alert (page 8-23)

Toner Waste Full Alert (page 8-23)

xlii

> Menu Map

Notification/

Report

Printing Report/

List

Status Page (page 8-24)

Service Status (page 8-24)

Network Status (page 8-24)

Optional Network Status (page 8-24)

Print Accounting Report (page 9-48)

Font List (page 8-25)

Outgoing Fax Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Incoming Fax Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Fax List (Index) (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Fax List (No.) (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

One Touch List (ALL) (page 8-25)

One Touch List (Fax) (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Fax Box List (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Application Status (page 8-25)

Configuration List (page 8-25)

Data Sanitization Report (page 8-25)

Result Report

Settings

Send Result Report (page 8-25)

RX Result (refer to FAX Operation Guide

Job Finish Notice Setting (refer to

FAX Operation Guide

)

Device Status

Notification

Low Toner Alert (page 8-23)

Toner Waste Full Alert (page 8-23)

Message Board Settings (page 8-26)

Fax Communication Report

(refer to

FAX Operation Guide

)

xliii

> Menu Map

Notification/

Report

History Settings Sending Log

History

Auto Sending (page 8-27)

Destination (page 8-27)

Subject (page 8-27)

SSFC (page 8-27)

Personal Information (page 8-27)

Sending Log History (page 8-27)

Settings

Auto Sending (page 8-28)

Destination (page 8-28)

Subject (page 8-28)

Log Reset (page 8-28)

Device Log

History Settings

Device Log History (page 8-29)

Auto Sending (page 8-29)

Destination (page 8-29)

Subject (page 8-29)

Secure Comm.

Error Log

Secure Comm. Error Log (page 8-30)

Auto Sending (page 8-30)

Destination (page 8-30)

Subject (page 8-30)

xliv

> Menu Map

Function Settings Function Defaults Common Clear Settings after Job Started (page 8-32)

File Name Entry (page 8-32)

Border Erase Default (page 8-32)

Zoom (page 8-32)

System Stamp (Basic Settings) (page 8-32)

DP Read Action (page 8-32)

Detect Multi-fed Originals (page 8-33)

Detect Stapled Originals (page 8-33)

Copy/Print Original Orientation (Copy) (page 8-33)

Color Selection (Copy) (page 8-33)

Color Balance (page 8-33)

Original Image (Copy) (page 8-33)

Background Density Adj. (Copy) (page 8-33)

Continuous Scan (Copy) (page 8-33)

Prevent Bleed-through (Copy) (page 8-33)

Skip Blank Page (Copy) (page 8-33)

EcoPrint (page 8-33)

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) (page 8-33)

Margin Default (page 8-34)

Border Erase (Copy) (page 8-34)

Collate/Offset (page 8-34)

Auto Image Rotation (Copy) (page 8-34)

Repeat Copy (page 8-34)

Trapping (page 8-34)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 8-34)

XPS Fit to Page (page 8-34)

Reserve Next Priority (page 8-34)

Auto Image Rotation Action (page 8-34)

Auto % Priority (page 8-34)

Paper Size for Small Original (page 8-34)

Original Size of Undetected Original (page 8-35)

Erase Shadowed Areas (Copy) (page 8-35)

xlv

> Menu Map

Function Settings Function Defaults Send/Store Original Orientation (Send/Store) (page 8-35)

Color Selection (Send/Store) (page 8-35)

Color Type (page 8-35)

Scan Resolution (page 8-35)

Fax TX Resolution (refer to FAX Operation

Guide)

Org. Image (Send/Store) (page 8-35)

Background Density Adj. (Send/Store) (page 8-

35)

Continuous Scan (Send/Store) (page 8-35)

Continuous Scan (Fax) (refer to

FAX Operation

Guide

)

Prevent Bleed-through (Send/Store) (page 8-35)

Border Erase/Full Scan (Send/Store) (page 8-35)

Border Erase/Full Scan (Fax)

(refer to

FAX

Operation Guide

)

Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) (page 8-35)

File Format (page 8-36)

Image Quality (File Format) (page 8-36)

High Comp. PDF Image (page 8-36)

HighCompressionPDF Mode (page 8-36)

Color TIFF Compression (page 8-36)

PDF/A (page 8-36)

OCR Text Recognition Action (page 8-36)

OCR Text Recognition (page 8-36)

Primary OCR Language (page 8-36)

OCR Output Format (page 8-36)

File Separation (page 8-36)

Email Subject/Body (page 8-36)

iFax Subject/Body (page 8-37)

Erase Shadowed Areas (Send) (page 8-37)

Erase Shadowed Areas (Store) (page 8-37)

xlvi

> Menu Map

Function Settings Copy/Print Quick Setup Registration (Copy) (page 8-10)

Send/Store Default Screen (page 8-37)

Prevent Mis-

sending Settings

Destination Check before Send (page 8-37)

Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-37)

New Destination Entry (page 8-37)

Recall Destination (page 8-37)

Broadcast (page 8-37)

Destination History (page 8-37)

Delete Destination History (page 8-37)

Quick Setup Registration (Send) (page 8-10)

Digital Signature

to File

Digital Signature (page 8-38)

Digital Signature Format (page 8-38)

Password Confirmation on Signature Permission

(page 8-38)

Password (page 8-38)

Email Email Settings SMTP (Email TX) (page 8-39)

SMTP Server Name (page 8-39)

SMTP Port Number (page 8-39)

Sender Address (page 8-39)

SMT Auth and Sender Address (page 8-39)

POP3 POP3 (page 8-39)

Remote Printing (page 8-39)

Sending Job -

Folder

FTP Settings (page 8-39)

SMB Settings (page 8-39)

Fax/iFax (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

WSD WSD Scan (page 8-40)

WSD Print (page 8-40)

DSM Scan (page 8-40)

Address Book Add/Edit Machine Address Book (page 8-40)

Machine Address

Book

Sort (page 8-41)

Narrow Down (page 8-41)

Edit Restriction (page 8-41)

External Address Book (page 8-41)

Address Book Type (page 8-41)

One-Touch Key Add/Edit One Touch Key (page 8-41)

Edit Restriction (page 8-41)

Send and Forward (page 8-41)

RX/Forward Rules/Fax Box (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

xlvii

> Menu Map

Function Settings Printer Emulation (page 8-46)

Color Setting (page 8-46)

Gloss Mode (page 8-46)

EcoPrint (page 8-46)

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) (page 8-46)

Override A4/Letter (page 8-46)

Duplex (page 8-46)

Copies (page 8-46)

Orientation (page 8-47)

Form Feed Timeout (page 8-47)

LF Action (page 8-47)

CR Action (page 8-47)

Job Name (page 8-47)

User Name (page 8-47)

Paper Feed Mode (page 8-47)

MP Tray Priority (page 8-47)

Auto Cassette Change (page 8-47)

Message Banner Print (page 8-48)

Wide A4 (page 8-48)

Resolution (page 8-48)

KIR (page 8-48)

Printing Job Terminator (page 8-48)

Remote Printing (page 8-48)

Direct Printing from Web (page 8-48)

Document Box Custom Box - Add/Edit (page 5-58)

Auto File Deletion Time (page 8-48)

Quick Setup Registration (Storing in Box) (page 8-10)

Quick Setup Registration (Box Print) (page 8-10)

Quick Setup Registration (Sending from Box) (page 8-10)

Job Box Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-49)

Repeat Copy Job Retention (page 8-49)

Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-49)

Fax Memory RX Box (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

xlviii

> Menu Map

Function Settings Home Customize Desktop (page 2-15)

Customize Taskbar (page 2-15)

Wallpaper (page 2-15)

Status Display Settings (page 8-50)

Job Status/Job Logs Settings (page 8-50)

Internet Browser Internet Browser (page 8-50)

Browser Environment (page 8-50)

Proxy (page 8-52)

Manual Staple (page 8-51)

Remote Services (page 8-51)

Network Settings Network Settings Host Name (page 8-52)

Proxy (page 8-52)

Wi-Fi Direct

Settings

Wi-Fi Direct (page 8-52)

Device Name (page 8-52)

IP Address (page 8-53)

Auto Disconnect (page 8-53)

Persistent Group (page 8-53)

Password (page 8-53)

Frequency band (page 8-53)

Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi (page 8-53)

Setup (page 8-54)

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-55)

Wired Network

Settings

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-57)

Others (page 8-59)

xlix

> Menu Map

Network Settings Network Settings Protocol Settings SMTP (Email TX) (page 8-39)

POP3 (Email RX) (page 8-39)

FTP Client (Transmission) (page 8-59)

FTP Server (Reception) (page 8-59)

SMB Client (Transmission) (page 8-59)

NetBEUI (page 8-59)

WSD Scan (page 8-40)

WSD Print (page 8-40)

iFax (page 8-59)

DSM Scan (page 8-40)

ThinPrint (page 8-60)

LPD (page 8-60)

Raw (page 8-60)

IPP (page 8-60)

IPP over SSL (page 8-60)

HTTP (page 8-61)

HTTPS (page 8-61)

LDAP (page 8-61)

SNMPv1/v2c (page 8-61)

SNMPv3 (page 8-61)

Enhanced WSD (page 8-61)

Enhanced WSD over SSL (page 8-61)

eSCL (page 8-61)

eSCL over SSL (page 8-62)

VNC (RFB) (page 8-62)

VNC (RFB) over SSL (page 8-62)

Enhanced VNC over SSL (page 8-62)

REST (page 8-62)

REST over SSL (page 8-63)

RESTful API Settings (page 8-63)

Ping (page 8-63)

Bonjour (page 8-63)

IP Filter (IPv4) (page 8-64)

IP Filter (IPv6) (page 8-64)

IPSec (page 8-64)

Restart Network (page 8-64)

> Menu Map

Network Settings Optional Network Host Name (page 8-65)

Wireless Network Connection Status (page 8-65)

Setup (page 8-65)

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-66)

Others (page 8-66)

Wired Network

Settings

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-67)

Others (page 8-67)

Restart Network (page 8-67)

Connectivity Bluetooth Settings (page 8-68)

Fax Server (page 8-68)

NFC (page 8-68)

Remote Operation (page 8-68)

Others Primary Network (Client) (page 8-69)

Restart Entire Device (page 8-69)

> Menu Map

Security Settings Security Quick Setup (page 8-69)

Interface Block

Setting

USB Host (page 8-70)

USB Device (page 8-70)

USB Drive (page 8-70)

Optional Interface 1 (page 8-71)

Optional Interface 2 (page 8-71)

Restart Entire Device (page 8-71)

Device Security

Settings

Unusable Time (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Job Status/Job Logs Settings (page 8-50)

Security Level (page 8-71)

Remote Printing (page 8-71)

Software Verification (page 8-71)

Administrator Authentication on Firm Update (page 8-71)

Data Security Hard Disk/SSD Initialization (page 8-72)

Data Sanitization (page 8-73)

System Stamp Printing Jobs Text Stamp (page 8-76)

Bates Stamp (page 8-77)

Sending Jobs Text Stamp (page 8-78)

Bates Stamp (page 8-79)

Storing Jobs Text Stamp (page 8-80)

Bates Stamp (page 8-81)

Authentication

Security

User Account Lockout Settings (page 9-4)

Password Policy Settings (page 9-5)

Unknown User Settings (page 9-52)

Network SSL (page 8-82)

Network Access (page 8-82)

lii

> Menu Map

Job Accounting/

Authentication

Job Accounting

Setting

Job Accounting (page 9-34)

Add/Edit Job Accounting (page 9-35)

Job Accounting Counter (page 9-46)

Job Accounting

Setting

Default Setting (page 9-50, page 9-51)

Default Counter Limit (page 9-43)

Count by Paper Size (page 9-45)

Print Accounting Report (page 9-48)

User Login Setting User Login (page 9-3)

Add/Edit Local User (page 9-6)

Local Authorization (page 9-16)

Obtain NW User Property (page 9-24)

Group Authorization (page 9-18)

Group List (page 9-18)

Guest Authorization Set. (page 9-21)

Guest Property (page 9-22)

Simple Login (page 9-26)

Simple Login Key (page 9-27)

PIN Login (page 9-31)

Authentication

Security

User Account Lockout Settings (page 9-4)

Password Policy Settings (page 9-5)

Unknown User Settings (page 9-52)

ID Card Settings Keyboard Login (page 9-29)

Additional Authentication (page 9-30)

Add/Delete

Application

Application (page 5-14)

Optional Function (page 11-8)

liii

> Menu Map

Adjustment/

Maintenance

Image Adjustment Density Copy (page 8-83)

Send/Box (page 8-83)

Fax (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Background

Density Adj.

Copy (Auto) (page 8-83)

Send/Box (Auto) (page 8-83)

Sharpness

Adjustment

Copy (page 8-83)

Send/Box (page 8-83)

Contrast Copy(page 8-83)

Send/Box (page 8-83)

Auto Color Correction (page 8-83)

Correcting Black Lines (page 8-84)

Color Registration - Auto (page 8-84)

Color Registration - Manual (page 8-84)

Calibration Cycle (page 8-84)

Calibration (page 8-84)

Tone Curve Adjustment (page 8-84)

Developer Refresh (page 8-84)

Auto Drum Refresh (page 8-84)

Drum Refresh (page 8-85)

Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 8-85)

Behavior

Adjustment

Silent Mode (page 8-85)

Drum Heater (page 8-85)

Others Diagnostics Memory Diagnostics (page 8-85)

Software Verification (page 8-71)

Open Toner Cover (page 8-85)

Restart/

Initialization

Restart Network (page 8-64)

Restart Network (Optional Network) (page 8-67)

Restart Entire Device (page 8-69)

Format SSD (page 8-86)

Format SD Card (page 8-86)

System Initialization (page 8-86)

1-1

1 Legal and Safety

Information

Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics.

Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide ............................................................................................................ 1-2

Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3

Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-4

Laser Safety (Europe) .............................................................................................................................. 1-5

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) .......................................................................................................... 1-6

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ..................................................................... 1-7

Compliance and Conformity .................................................................................................................... 1-7

Radio Tag Technology .............................................................................................................................. 1-8

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ................................................................. 1-8

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ................................................................................................... 1-9

EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................................................ 1-9

EK1-ITB 2000 .......................................................................................................................................... 1-9

Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ......................................................................................................... 1-9

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................................................ 1-9

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) .............................................................................................. 1-10

Legal Information .................................................................................................................................... 1-11

Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-13

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function .......................................................................................................... 1-13

Resource Saving - Paper ....................................................................................................................... 1-13

Environmental benefits of "Power Management" ................................................................................... 1-13

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .............................................................................................. 1-13

1-2

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Notice

Safety Conventions in This Guide

The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,

other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their

meanings are indicated below.

WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient

attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from

insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

Symbols

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated

inside the symbol.

... [General warning]

... [Warning of high temperature]

The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited

action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Warning of prohibited action]

... [Disassembly prohibited]

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of

the required action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Alert of required action]

... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]

Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are

illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).

NOTE

An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this

machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.

1-3

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Environment

The service environmental conditions are as follows:

Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.

• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.

• Avoid locations with vibrations.

• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.

• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.

• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.

During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the

machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of

copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that

the room be properly ventilated.

Temperature 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)

(But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5 °F (32.5 °C).)

Humidity 10 to 80%

(But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.)

1-4

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Precautions for Use

Cautions when handling consumables

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.

If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes

and skin.

• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If

coughing develops, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of

your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,

contact a physician.

• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.

Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.

Other precautions

Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner

container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.

Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature

and humidity.

If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multipurpose

(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.

1-5

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Laser Safety (Europe)

Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is

hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no

radiation can leak from the machine.

This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.

Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation

exposure.

These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.

Regarding CLASS 1 laser products, information is provided on the rating label.

1-6

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)

1. Safety of laser beam

This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards

established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is

safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and

sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.

2. The CDRH Act

A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health

(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without

certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates

compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.

The position of the rating label is show below.

3. Optical unit

When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is the label

located on the cover of the optical unit.

4. Maintenance

For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.

5. Safety switch

The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.

XXXXci

1-7

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power

Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and

are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.

Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l'appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs

sur l'appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l'appareil hors tension.

Compliance and Conformity

Hereby, KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. declares that the radio equipment type TASKalfa 2554ci and

TASKalfa 3554ci are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.

The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/index/service/dlc.html

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 and

Part 18 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference

will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.

FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate this equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment

should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Module name, Option Software Ver. Frequency band in which the

radio equipment operates:

Maximum radio-frequency power

transmitted in the frequency band in

which the radio equipment operates:

IB-51 (option) 2.2.6 2.4GHz 100mW

IB-37 (option) 1.0 2.4GHz 100mW

5GHz 50mW - 1W

IB-38 (option) 1.0 2.4GHz 100mW

Transmitter Module(SRD) 2005.11 13.56MHz 0.2nW

1-8

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Industry Canada statement:

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s) / receiver(s) that complies with Innovation, Science and Economic

Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS (s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all

persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter.

Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance Label: CAN ICES-3B/NMB-3B

* The above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Canada.

NOTE — Use shielded interface cables.

Caution:

The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful

interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

Operations in the 5.25-5.35GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only.

Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with Canada radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This

equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body.

* These above statements are valid in the United States of America, Canada and EU.

Radio Tag Technology

In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to

authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.

Other precautions

(for users in California, the United States)

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

1-9

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning

It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.

Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do

not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.

• Paper money

• Bank note

• Securities

•Stamp

• Passport

• Certificate

Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.

EN ISO 7779

Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder

weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.

EK1-ITB 2000

Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um

störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld

platziert werden.

Wireless Connection (Mexico only)

The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must

accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe

aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN

(If equipped)

Wireless LAN allows information to be exchanged between wireless access points instead of using a network cable,

which offers the advantage that a WLAN connection can be established freely within an area in which radio waves can

be transmitted.

On the other hand, the following problems may occur if security settings are not configured, because radio waves can

pass through obstacles (including walls) and reach everywhere within a certain area.

Secretly Viewing Communication Contents

A third person with malicious objectives may intentionally monitor radio waves and gain unauthorized access to the

following communication contents.

• Personal information including ID, passwords, and credit card numbers

• Contents of email messages

1-10

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Illegal Intrusion

A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the

following illegal actions.

• Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak)

• Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized information

(spoofing)

• Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification)

• Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction)

Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to

reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when

the product is used.

We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and

that they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the

security settings.

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)

• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect medical equipment. When using this product in a medical

institution or in the vicinity of medical instruments, either use this product according to the instructions and

precautions provided by the administrator of the institution or those provided on the medical instruments.

• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect automatic control equipment including automatic doors and fire

alarms. When using this product in the vicinity of the automatic control equipment, use this product according to the

instructions and precautions provided on the automatic control equipment.

• If this product is used in devices that are directly related to service including airplanes, trains, ships, and automobiles

or this product is used in applications requiring high reliability and safety to function and in devices requiring accuracy

including those used in disaster prevention and crime prevention and those used for various safety purposes, please

use this product after considering the safety design of the entire system including adoption of a failsafe design and

redundancy design for reliability and safety maintenance of the entire system. This product is not intended for use in

applications requiring high reliability and safety including aerospace instruments, trunk communication equipment,

nuclear power control equipment, and medical equipment; hence, the decision as to whether to use this product in

these applications needs to be fully considered and determined.

Sólo México (Mexico only)

Este equipo utiliza el módulo de interfaz de red inalámbrica modelo IB-37 (DHUA-K77-7) / IB-38 (DHUA-K77-8) para

conectarse a las redes Inalámbricas.

1-11

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Legal Information

Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of KYOCERA Document

Solutions Inc. is prohibited.

Regarding Trade Names

• PRESCRIBE is registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation.

• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.

• TASKalfa is registered trademarks or trademarks of KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.

• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Excel and PowerPoint are registered trademarks or

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.

• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.

• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.

• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging

Inc.

• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.

• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of

International Typeface Corporation.

• ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries.

• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.

• iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

• iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by

Apple Inc.

• Google and Google Cloud Print™ are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google LLC.

• Mopria™ is registered trademarks of Mopria™ Alliance.

• Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.

• Powered by ABBYY FineReader.

ABBYY and FineReader are trademarks of ABBYY Software Ltd.

• RealVNC, VNC and RFB are registered trademarks of RealVNC Ltd. in the U.S. and in other countries.

All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The

designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.

1-12

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Monotype Imaging License Agreement

1Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as

well as the UFST Software.

2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and

versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or

personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of

this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the

fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from

Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights

are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.

3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary

information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access

to and use of the Software and Typefaces.

4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You

agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.

5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License

may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not

remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you

shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as

requested.

6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.

7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with

Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.

Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.

The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular

purpose and merchantability, are excluded.

8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is

repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.

In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential

damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.

9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.

10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written

consent of Monotype Imaging.

11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data

and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.

Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in

FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).

12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and

conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No

change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.

By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

Open Source Software License

For the “Open Source Software license, go into the following URL and select Country > Product Name > OS > Language

and then, refer to the “OSS_Notice” from the manual tab in the “Download”.

https://kyocera.info/

1-13

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Energy Saving Control Function

The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of

time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state

but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of

time.

Low Power Mode (page 2-44)

Sleep (page 2-45)

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 2-46)

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function

This device includes 2-sided printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two 1-sided originals onto a single

sheet of paper as a 2-sided print, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used.

Duplex (page 6-59)

Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex

mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that

machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.

Resource Saving - Paper

For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper

certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or

an equivalent quality standard, be used.

This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to

further saving of forest resources.

* : EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes"

Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.

Environmental benefits of "Power Management"

To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that

automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time.

Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a

significant reduction in energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation

time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program

We participate in the ENERGY STAR® Program.

We provide the products complied with ENERGY STAR® to the market.

ENERGY STAR® is an energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the use of

products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing the products

complied with ENERGY STAR®, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during

product use and cut energy-related costs.

2-1

2 Installing and Setting

up the Machine

This chapter provides information for the administrator of this machine, such as part names, cable connection, and

software installation.

Part Names (Machine Exterior) ..................... 2-2

Part Names (Connectors/Interior) ................. 2-4

Part Names (With Optional Equipments

Attached) ....................................................... 2-5

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices ..... 2-6

Connecting Cables ........................................ 2-7

Connecting LAN Cable ....................... 2-7

Connecting USB Cable ....................... 2-8

Connecting the Power Cable .............. 2-8

Power On/Off ................................................ 2-9

Power On ............................................ 2-9

Power Off ............................................ 2-9

Using the Operation Panel .......................... 2-10

Operation Panel Keys ....................... 2-10

[Job Separator] indicator ................... 2-10

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle .... 2-11

Touch Panel ................................................ 2-12

Using the Touch Panel ...................... 2-12

Home Screen .................................... 2-14

Assigning Functions to Function

Keys .................................................. 2-19

Display for Device Information .......... 2-21

Display Setting Screen ..................... 2-22

Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set ..... 2-23

Original Preview ................................ 2-23

Entering Numbers ............................. 2-25

Help Screen ...................................... 2-27

Accessibility Functions (Magnifying

the View) ........................................... 2-28

Logout ............................................... 2-30

Default Settings of the Machine .................. 2-31

Setting Date and Time ...................... 2-31

Network Setup ............................................ 2-32

Configuring the Wired Network ......... 2-32

Configuring the Wireless Network .... 2-34

Setting Wi-Fi Direct ........................... 2-40

Configuring NFC ............................... 2-42

Motion Sensor ................................... 2-43

Energy Saver function ................................. 2-44

Low Power Mode .............................. 2-44

Sleep ................................................. 2-45

Auto Sleep ........................................ 2-45

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ...... 2-45

Sleep Level (Energy Saver)

(models except for Europe) .............. 2-46

Energy Saver Recovery Level .......... 2-46

Weekly Timer Settings ...................... 2-46

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) 2-46

Quick Setup Wizard .................................... 2-47

Installing Software ....................................... 2-50

Published Software (Windows) ......... 2-50

Installing Software in Windows ......... 2-51

Uninstalling the Software .................. 2-56

Installing Software in Mac

Computer .......................................... 2-57

Setting TWAIN Driver ........................ 2-60

Setting WIA Driver ............................ 2-62

Checking the Counter ................................. 2-63

Additional Preparations for the

Administrator ............................................... 2-64

Sending Documents to a PC ............ 2-64

Strengthening the Security ............... 2-64

Command Center RX .................................. 2-66

Accessing Command Center RX ...... 2-67

Changing Security Settings .............. 2-68

Changing Device Information ........... 2-69

E-mail Settings .................................. 2-70

Registering Destinations ................... 2-74

Creating a New Custom Box ............ 2-75

Printing a Document Stored in a

Custom Box ...................................... 2-76

Transferring Data from Our Other

Products ...................................................... 2-77

Migrating the Address Book .............. 2-77

2-2

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)

Part Names (Machine Exterior)

1 Document Processor

2 Operation Panel

3 Power Switch

4 Waste Toner Box Cover

5 Cassette 1

6 Cassette 2

7 Handles

8 Multipurpose Tray

9 USB Memory Slot

10 Original Eject Table

11 Original Stopper

12 Original Table

13 Original Width Guides

14 Slit Glass

15 Job Separator Tray

16 Paper Stopper

17 Inner Tray

18 Front Cover

19 Motion Sensor

20 Platen

21 Original Size Indicator Plates

2-3

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)

22 Paper Length Guide

23 Paper Width Guide

24 Paper Width Adjusting Tab

25 Support Tray Section of the Multipurpose Tray

26 Multipurpose Tray

27 Paper Width Guide

28 Right Cover 1 Lever

29 Right Cover 1

23 24

2-4

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)

Part Names (Connectors/Interior)

1 Option Interface Slot

2 USB Port

3 USB Interface Connector

4 Network Interface Connector

5 Toner Container (Black)

6 Toner Container (Magenta)

7 Toner Container (Cyan)

8 Toner Container (Yellow)

9 Toner Container Cover

10 Waste Toner Box

11 Waste Toner Box Cover

2-5

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)

Part Names (With Optional Equipments

Attached)

1 Tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the top tray)

2 Tray A

3 Tray B

4 Job Separator Tray

5 Folding Tray

6 Cassette 3

Optional Equipment (page 11-2)

7 Cassette 4

8 Cassette 5

9 Inner Shift Tray

10 Finisher Tray

11 Original Cover

12 Control Section of the Finisher

Manual Staple (page 5-76)

10 6

2-6

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use.

When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB

When Connecting the Machine to the PC or Tablet by network cable, Wi-Fi, or Wi-Fi direct

Cables that Can Be Used

NOTE

If you are using wireless LAN, refer to the following.

Configuring the Wireless Network (page 2-34)

Connection Environment Function Necessary Cable

Connect a LAN cable to the

machine.

Printer/Scanner/Network

FAX*1

*1 Function available when using optional FAX kit. For more information on using the Network FAX, refer to the FAX

Operation Guide.

LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T)

Connect a USB cable to the

machine.

Printer USB 3.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant,

max. 5.0 m, shielded)

IMPORTANT

Using a cable other than a USB 3.0 compatible cable may cause failure.

USB

MFP

Network

Network cable

connection

Wi-Fi

connection*1

Wi-Fi Direct

connection*1

*1 Only for models with

Wi-Fi.

Wi-Fi connection or

Wi-Fi Direct connection

Tablet

Wi-Fi access point

2-7

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables

Connecting Cables

Connecting LAN Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

1Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the hub or the PC.

2Power on the machine and configure the network.

Network Setup (page 2-32)

IMPORTANT

Make sure that the power to the machine is turned off.

Power Off (page 2-9)

2-8

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables

Connecting USB Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

1Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector located on the left side of the body.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.

2Power on the machine.

Connecting the Power Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power

outlet.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that the power to the machine is turned off.

Power Off (page 2-9)

IMPORTANT

Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.

2-9

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off

Power On/Off

Power On

1Turn the power switch on.

Power Off

1Turn the power switch off.

The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed.

Show Power Off Message (page 8-10)

It takes several minutes for power off.

CAUTION

If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the

machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the

outlet as a safety precaution.

IMPORTANT

• Do not press and hold the power switch more than 5 seconds continuously. Forcibly turning off the power

may damage the HDD or the memory so that it causes the failure.

• If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the power switch

disables fax transmission and reception.

• Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.

2-10

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Using the Operation Panel

Operation Panel Keys

1[Home] key: Displays the Home screen.

2[Data] indicator: Blinks while the machine is printing or sending/receiving, or accessing the hard disk/SSD. Also, it

lights when there is a sending job FAX using delayed transmission.

3[Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.

4[Energy Saver] indicator: Blinks while the machine is asleep.

5 Touch Panel: Displays icons for configuring machine settings.

[Job Separator] indicator

Blinks when there is paper in the job separator tray.

1234

2-11

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle

The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted.

2-12

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Touch Panel

Using the Touch Panel

This section explains the basic operation of the touch panel.

Tapping

This is the operation used to select an icon or key.

In this document, the tap operation is expressed as "select."

Popover

Tap the icons and keys to display detailed information on the icons and menus. A popover displays information and

menus without switching between screens.

Swiping

This is the operation used to switch between screens and to display items that are not displayed in the list.

Move in one direction as if tracing on the screen.

Example: Home Screen

Move the screen to the left and right.

&XVWRP%R[6HQG

3ROOLQJ%R[

&RS\

-RE%R[ )D[%R[86%'ULYH

)D[

6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO

'HYLFH

,QIRUPDWLRQ

/DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

&RS\ 6HQG )D[

8VHU 㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚㻘㻌㻣㻜㻜㻜

㻸㼛㼓㼛㼡㼠

㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚

6HQG

3ROOLQJ%R[

&RS\

-RE%R[ )D[%R[86%'ULYH

6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO

'HYLFH

,QIRUPDWLRQ

/DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

&RS\ 6HQG )D[

6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO

'HYLFH

,QIRUPDWLRQ

/DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV

+HOS ,QFRPLQJ

)D[/RJ

2XWJRLQJ

)D[/RJ

6\VWHP0HQX &RXQWHU $FFHVVLELOLW\

6WDQGDUG

1XPHULF.H\SDG

)DYRULWHV

:L)L'LUHFW

&XVWRP%R[6HQG

3ROOLQJ%R[

&RS\

-RE%R[ )D[%R[86%'ULYH

)D[

6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO

'HYLFH

,QIRUPDWLRQ

/DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

&RS\ 6HQG )D[

8VHU 㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚㻘㻌㻣㻜㻜㻜

㻸㼛㼓㼛㼡㼠

㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚

2-13

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Example: System Menu Screen

Move the screen up and down.

Operating the touch panel

1 Displays the status of the equipment as well as necessary operation messages.

2 Displays the Quick Setup screen.

3 Displays registered shortcuts.

4[Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.

5[Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress.

6[Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states.

7[Interrupt] key: Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.

8[Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode.

9 Displays the time.

10 Remaining amount of toner.

11 Set the copy functions.

'HYLFH

6HWWLQJV

4XLFN6HWXS

:L]DUG

/DQJXDJH6\VWHPRI8QLWV

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

1HWZRUN

6HWWLQJV

&RXQWHU

.H\ERDUG

1XPHULF.H\SDG

6\VWHP0HQX

'DWH7LPH

(QHUJ\6DYHU7LPHU

'LVSOD\6HWWLQJV

&ORVH

6HFXULW\

6HWWLQJV

-RE$FFRXQWLQJ

$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ 2ULJLQDO6FDQ6HWWLQJV

6RXQG

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

)DYRULWHV 3UHYLHZ

=RRP

6KRUWFXW

3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

$XWR

&RORU6HOHFWLRQ

)XOO&RORU

&RPELQH

2II



'XSOH[

VLGHG!!

VLGHG

6WDSOH3XQFK

2II

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

1XPHULF

.H\SDG

,'&DUG

&RS\

&RSLHV

6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO

'HYLFH

,QIRUPDWLRQ

/DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV

&RS\ 6HQG )D[

8VHU㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚㻘㻌㻣㻜㻜㻜

㻸㼛㼓㼛㼡㼠

㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚

11 9

2-14

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Home Screen

This screen is displayed by selecting the [Home] key on the operation panel. Touching an icon will display the

corresponding screen.

You can change the icons to display on the Home screen as well as its background.

Editing the Home Screen (page 2-15)

* The appearance may differ from your actual screen, depending on your configuration and option

settings.

No. Item Description

1Status Area Displays the messages and status icons for the current status.

Displays the logged-in user name when user login

administration is enabled.

2Taskbar Displays task icons.

If an error occurs, the [Status/Job Cancel] icon will show "!".

Once the error clears, the display will return to normal.

3Desktop Displays the application icons. Icons that are not displayed on

the first page will appear by changing the page.

4Screen-switching

keys

Use these buttons to switch between desktop pages.

NOTE

It is also possible to use swiping to switch between displays.

Using the Touch Panel (page 2-12)

5[...] Displays every task icons including the icons displayed in an

taskbar area in a popover.

6[Login] / [Logout] Logs in or logs out when user login administration is enabled.

7Remaining amount

of toner

Displays the remaining amount of toner. Select this icon to

display details of the remaining amount of toner in a popover.

&XVWRP%R[6HQG

3ROOLQJ%R[

&RS\

-RE%R[ )D[%R[86%'ULYH

)D[

6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO

'HYLFH

,QIRUPDWLRQ

/DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

&RS\ 6HQG )D[

8VHU 㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚㻘㻌㻣㻜㻜㻜

㻸㼛㼓㼛㼡㼠

㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚

2-15

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Editing the Home Screen

You can change the background of the Home screen as well as which icons are displayed.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Home]

8Sub status icons Displays the icons that indicate the status of the machine. 5

icons can be displayed. Select this area to display the icon

information in a popover.

Status Icon (Wi-Fi) The icon " " is displayed when Wi-Fi is connected. When

Wi-Fi is not connected, " " is displayed.

Status Icon

(Security level:

Low)

" " is displayed when the security level is set at [Low].

Status Icon

(Remote operation)

" " is displayed when using the remote operation.

Status Icon

(Security

information)

When you activate the Data Encryption/Overwrite Function,

the Security information icon will be displayed.

" " is displayed while the data is overwriting.

" " is displayed if remaining data is in HDD.

" " is displayed if remaining data is not in HDD.

Status Icon (FAX

Memory RX Box

capacity)

" " is displayed when the capacity of the FAX Memory RX

Box is 10% or less.

Status Icon (USB

drive)

" " is displayed when a USB drive is connected to this

machine.

Tapping the USB drive icon and selecting [Remove USB]

allows you to safely remove the USB drive.

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with

administrator privileges or as a user with privileges to configure this setting. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

No. Item Description

2-16

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

2Configure the settings.

The available settings are shown below.

Item Description

Customize

Desktop

Specify the function icons to display on the desktop.*1

Select [Add] to display the screen for selecting the function to

display. Select [Function Type] to narrow down the functions by

applications and favorites. Select the function to display and [OK].

Select an icon and [Previous] or [Next] to change the display

position of the selected icon on the Desktop.

To delete an icon from desktop, select the desired one and select

[Delete].

*1 Displays a maximum of 60 function icons including the installed applications and the

functions that can be used when options are installed.

Customize

Taskbar

Specify the task icons to display on the taskbar. Select [Taskbar

Button 1 (to 4)]. Select the function to display, and select [OK]. 4

task icons can be displayed.

NOTE

Functions that are hidden can be displayed by selecting [...] (popover

icon) on the right end of the taskbar.

Taskbar buttons for which [None] has been selected will not be

displayed. Other taskbar buttons will be displayed in order from the

left.

Wallpaper Configure the wallpaper of the Home screen.

Value: Images 1 to 8

2-17

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Available Functions to Display on Desktop

Function Icon Description Reference

page

Copy*1

*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory.

Displays the Copy screen. page 5-19

Send*1 Displays the Send screen. page 5-23

Fax Server Displays the FAX Server screen. page 5-44

Fax*2

*2 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

Displays the FAX screen. Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Custom Box*1 Displays the Custom Box screen. page 5-58

Job Box*1 Displays the Job Box screen. page 4-18

USB Drive*1 Displays the USB Drive screen. page 5-70

Fax Box*2 Displays the Fax Box screen. Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Polling Box*2 Displays the Polling Box screen. Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Fax Memory RX

Box*2

Displays the Fax Memory RX Box

screen.

Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Internet Browser Displays the Internet Browser

screen.

page 5-74

Send to Me

(Email)*3

*3 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.

Displays the Send screen. The E-

mail address of the logged-in user is

set as the destination.

page 5-43

Send to Me from

Box (Email)*3

Displays the Custom Box screen.

The E-mail address of the logged-in

user is set as the destination.

page 5-64

Favorites Calls up the registered favorite. The

icon will change according to the

function of the favorite.

page 5-11

Application Name*4

*4 The icon of the application appears.

— Displays the selected applications. page 5-14

2-18

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Available Functions to Display on Taskbar

Function Icon Description Reference

page

Status/Job Cancel*1

*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory.

Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.

—

Device

Information*1

Displays the Device Information

screen. Check the system and

network information, and information

on the options that are used.

It is possible to print various reports

and lists.

page 2-21

Language*1 Displays the Language setting

screen in System Menu.

page 8-6

Paper Settings*1 Displays the Paper setting screen in

System Menu.

page 8-13

Wi-Fi Direct*2

*2 Displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

Wi-Fi Direct is set and a list of

information relating to the machine

that can use the network appears.

page 2-40

Help Displays the Help screen. page 2-27

User Property Displays the User Property screen. page 9-10

Incoming Fax Log*3

*3 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

Displays the Incoming Fax Log

screen.

Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Outgoing Fax Log*3 Displays the Outgoing Fax Log

screen.

Refer to the

FAX

Operation

Guide.

System Menu Displays the System Menu screen. page 8-2

Counter Displays the Counter screen. page 2-63

Accessibility/

Standard

Magnifies the text and icons on the

screen. Select [Accessibility/

Standard] again to return to the

previous view.

page 2-28

Massage Board

Displays the Message Board screen.

NOTE

To use this function, set "Message

Board" to [ON] in System Menu.

page 8-26

Numeric Keypad Displays the numeric keys on the

touch panel. —

Favorites Displays the favorite list screen. page 5-11

2-19

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Assigning Functions to Function Keys

Function keys are keys to which various functions and applications, including copy and scan, can be assigned.

Frequently used functions and applications can be assigned and the screen can easily be displayed.

For this machine, the following functions are pre-assigned; however, alternative functions can be registered by

re-assigning these functions.

•[F1] (Function key 1): Copy

•[F2] (Function key 2): Send

•[F3] (Function key 3): FAX (Option)

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Function Key Assignment]

2Configure the settings.

1Select the function key to be set.

2Select the function to be assigned.

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with

administrator privileges or as a user with privileges to configure this setting. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Function Description Reference page

None No function has been assigned. —

Copy Displays the Copy screen. page 5-19

Send Displays the Send screen. page 5-23

Fax Server Displays the Fax Server screen. page 5-44

Fax*1 Displays the Fax screen. Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Custom Box Displays the Custom Box screen. page 5-53

Job Box Displays the Job Box screen. page 4-18

USB Drive Displays the USB Drive screen. page 5-70

Fax Box*1 Displays the Fax Box screen. Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Polling Box*1 Displays the Polling Box screen.

Fax Memory RX Box*1 Displays the Fax Memory RX Box screen.

Send to Me (Email)*2 Displays the Send screen. The E-mail

address of the logged-in user is set as the

destination.

page 5-43

Send to Me from Box

(Email)*2

Displays the Custom Box screen. The E-

mail address of the logged-in user is set as

the destination.

page 5-64

2-20

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Internet Browser Displays the Internet Browser screen. page 5-74

ID Card Copy Displays the ID Card Copy screen. page 6-35

Favorites Name Calls up the registered favorite. page 5-11

Application Name Displays the selected applications. page 5-14

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

*2 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.

Function Description Reference page

2-21

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Display for Device Information

Shows device Information. It is possible to check the status of the system and network, the status of consumables such

as toner and paper and the situation of the options being used. It is also possible to print various reports and lists.

1[Home] key > [Device Information]

2Check the device Information.

Tab Description

Identification/Wired

Network

You can check ID information such as the model name, serial

number, host name and location, and the IP address of the

wired network.

Wi-Fi*1

*1 Displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

You can check the status of Wi-Fi connection, such as the

device name, network name and IP address.

Supplies/Paper You can check the remaining amount of toner, and paper.

Fax*2

*2 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

You can check the local fax number, local fax name, local fax

ID and other fax information.

USB/NFC/Bluetooth You can check the connection status of USB drive, NFC (Near

Field Communication) and Bluetooth keyboard.

Option/Application You can check information on the options and applications that

are used.

Capability/Software

Version

You can check the software version and performance.

Security You can check the security information on the machine.

Report You can print various reports and lists.

Remote Ope. Status You can check the status of remote operation.

2-22

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Display Setting Screen

The following procedure is an example of the Copy screen.

Select Global Navigation and configure each function. Select the Arrow Button to display the following functions.

When an On/Off Flipswitch is displayed for a function, select the switch to change between ON and OFF.

1 Global Navigation

Displays the function categories.

2Body

Display functions and shortcuts of

copy.

3 Arrow Button

Moves the screen up or down.

4 Right Pane Area

Displays specific functions such

as preview or numeric keypad.

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

)DYRULWHV

3UHYLHZ

=RRP

6KRUWFXW

3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

$XWR

&RORU6HOHFWLRQ

)XOO&RORU

&RPELQH

2II



'XSOH[

VLGHG!!

VLGHG

6WDSOH3XQFK

2II

&RSLHV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

1XPHULF

.H\SDG

,'&DUG

&RS\

3UHYLHZ 3URRI&RS\

2ULJLQDO

3DSHU

=RRP

2ULJLQDO6L]H

$XWR

3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

0L[HG6L]H2ULJLQDOV

&ROODWH2IIVHW

2ULJLQDO2ULHQWDWLRQ

$XWR

2II

7RS(GJHRQ7RS

&ROODWH2Q

)DYRULWHV

3UHYLHZ

6KRUWFXW

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

1XPHULF

.H\SDG

)ROG

2II

6WDSOH3XQFK

2II

3DSHU2XWSXW

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

&RSLHV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

&RPELQH

2II

0DUJLQ&HQWHULQJ

%RUGHU(UDVH

'XSOH[

(UDVH6KDGRZHG$UHDV

2II

6WDQGDUG

)DYRULWHV 3UHYLHZ

6KRUWFXW

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

1XPHULF

.H\SDG

=RRP



%RRNOHW

2II

&RYHU

VLGHG!!VLGHG

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

&RSLHV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

: On

: Off

2-23

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set

Keys of features that cannot be used due to feature combination restrictions or non-installation of options are in a non-

selectable state.

Original Preview

You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Copy]

2Place the originals.

Normal Grayed out Hidden

In the following cases, the key is

grayed out and cannot be selected.

• Cannot be used in combination with a

feature that is already selected.

• Use prohibited by user control.

• For functions that cannot be changed

when using proof copy.

Cannot be used because an option is

not installed.

NOTE

• If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this case, select

the [Reset] key and try again.

• If the key is still grayed out after the [Reset] key is selected, it is possible that you are prohibited from using the

function by user login administration. Check with the administrator of the machine.

NOTE

To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box, refer to the following:

Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details (page 5-56)

The procedure described here is for copying a single-page original.

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

)DYRULWHV 3UHYLHZ

=RRP

6KRUWFXW

3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

$XWR

&RORU6HOHFWLRQ

)XOO&RORU

&RPELQH

2II



'XSOH[

VLGHG!!

VLGHG

6WDSOH3XQFK

2II

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

1XPHULF

.H\SDG

,'&DUG

&RS\

&RSLHV

)DYRULWHV

3UHYLHZ

=RRP

6KRUWFXW

3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

$XWR

&RORU6HOHFWLRQ

%ODFN

:KLWH

&RPELQH

2II



'XSOH[

VLGHG!!

VLGHG

6WDSOH3XQFK

2II

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

1XPHULF

.H\SDG

,'&DUG

&RS\

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

&RSLHV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

)DYRULWHV

3UHYLHZ

=RRP

6KRUWFXW

3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

$XWR

&RORU6HOHFWLRQ

)XOO&RORU

&RPELQH

2II



'XSOH[

VLGHG!!

VLGHG

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

1XPHULF

.H\SDG

,'&DUG

&RS\

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

&RSLHV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

2-24

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

3Display a preview image.

1Select [Preview] tab > [Preview].

The machine starts scanning the original. When scanning is completed, the preview image

appears on the panel.

Duplex Printing

Settings for duplex printing appear.

2If there is no problem with the preview image, select [Copy].

Copying starts.

1 Zoom out.

2Zoom in.

3 Cancel the job.

4 Displays the data

information.

5 Displays the current number

of pages and overall number

of pages.

6 You can change the job

settings.

7 Start the copying.

NOTE

• To change the quality or the layout, select [Cancel].

Change the settings and select

[

Preview

]

again to see a preview image with the new

settings.

• Depending on the function you are using, even if you scan a multi-page original, only

the first page can be previewed.

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

)DYRULWHV 3UHYLHZ

=RRP

6KRUWFXW

3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

$XWR

&RORU6HOHFWLRQ

)XOO&RORU

&RPELQH

2II



'XSOH[

VLGHG!!

VLGHG

6WDSOH3XQFK

2II

&RSLHV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

1XPHULF

.H\SDG

,'&DUG

&RS\

3UHYLHZ 3URRI&RS\

2ULJLQDO

3DSHU

=RRP

&RS\

-RE6HWWLQJV

=RRP2XW=RRP,Q

6L]H

'HQVLW\

&RORU

$

&DQFHO

%LQGLQJ

6LGH

1RUPDO

)XOO&RORU



(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW



-RE1DPH GRF

&RS\

-RE6HWWLQJV

=RRP2XW=RRP,Q

6L]H

'HQVLW\

&RORU

&DQFHO

%LQGLQJ

6LGH

1RUPDO

)XOO&RORU

/HIW5LJKW

)URQW

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

$



-RE1DPH GRF

2-25

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Using the Preview Screen

When the Preview screen is displayed, you can do the following by moving the finger that is touching the touch panel.

Entering Numbers

When entering numbers, numeric keys appear on the touch panel if you select the area in which the number is entered.

1 Enter numbers.

2 Clear entered numbers.

3 Enters [-].

4 Insert a space.

5 Move to the next input box.

6 When [.] is displayed: Enters the decimal point. The numbers entered after selecting this key will be the numbers

after the decimal point.

When [*] is displayed: Enters [*].

7 When [+/-] is displayed: Switches between positive and negative numbers.

When [#] is displayed: Enters [#].

8 Close the numeric keypad.

9 Entry by numeric keys is confirmed.

10 Move the cursor.

11 Delete a character to the left of the cursor.

Function Description

Swipe If a document with multiple pages is placed on the Document Processor, then all of the

document is read and then the preview for the first page is displayed. Swipe the preview to

the left and right to display a preview of the pages in the order read.

Drag With the finger touching the touch panel, slide the finger to move the position of the

displayed preview.

Pinch in

Pinch out

With two fingers touching the touch panel, widen or tighten the space between the two

fingers to zoom in and out on the view.

NOTE

• Depending on the item being entered, some of the keys other than the number keys may not be usable.

• Numeric keys do not appear on the touch panel if an optional numeric keypad is installed.

765

2-26

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Example: When entering the number of copies

Example: When entering a one-touch key number

Example: When searching for an address number

NOTE

For copy and print screens, you can set numeric keys to be displayed in advance. In addition, you can select the

layout for numeric keys that are used on the application.

Numeric Keypad (page 8-6)

=RRP3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

$XWR

&RORU6HOHFWLRQ

)XOO&RORU

2II



'XSOH[

VLGHG!!

VLGHG

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

2II

(QWHU

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

&RSLHV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

)DYRULWHV 3UHYLHZ

=RRP

6KRUWFXW

3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

$XWR

&RORU6HOHFWLRQ

)XOO&RORU

&RPELQH

2II



'XSOH[

VLGHG!!

VLGHG

6WDSOH3XQFK

2II

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

1XPHULF

.H\SDG

,'&DUG

&RS\

&RSLHV

6HDUFK1R

&DQFHO

(QWHU2QH7RXFKNH\QXPEHUXVLQJNH\V

 

(QWHU

HVWLQDWLRQ

3UHYLHZ

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

&DQFHO

$GG(GLW )LOWHU

6HDUFK

1R

$GGUHVV%RRN

1R 1DPH $GGUHVV7\SH

(QWHU

HVWLQDWLRQ

3UHYLHZ

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

&DQFHO

$GG(GLW )LOWHU

6HDUFK

1R

$GGUHVV%RRN

1R 1DPH $GGUHVV

7\SH

2-27

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Help Screen

If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.

Select [Help] on the Home screen to show the Help list.

1[Home] key > [...] > [Help]

2Select the items to check from the list.

1 Help titles

2 Displays information about functions and

machine operation.

3 Closes the Help screen and returns to the

original screen.5

6HQG

3ROOLQJ%R[

&RS\

-RE%R[ )D[%R[86%'ULYH

6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO

'HYLFH

,QIRUPDWLRQ

/DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

&RS\ 6HQG )D[

6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO

'HYLFH

,QIRUPDWLRQ

/DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV

+HOS ,QFRPLQJ

)D[/RJ

2XWJRLQJ

)D[/RJ

6\VWHP0HQX &RXQWHU $FFHVVLELOLW\

6WDQGDUG

1XPHULF.H\SDG

)DYRULWHV

:L)L'LUHFW

([SODQDWLRQRI

%DVLF2SHUDWLRQV

+HOS

7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ

2SHUDWLRQVIRU+RPHVFUHHQ

%DVLF&RS\LQJ

6HQGLQJD%DVLF)D[

6HQG6FDQQHG2ULJLQDO6HQG7R)ROGHU

6HQGLQJD%DVLF,QWHUQHW)D[

6HQG6FDQQHG2ULJLQDO6HQGDV(PDLO

&ORVH

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6HOHFWLQJ'HVWLQDWLRQIURP$GGUHVV%RRN

%DVLF:6'6FDQQLQJ

3UHVV>&RS\@LQWKH+RPHVFUHHQWR

VZLWFKWRWKH&RS\VFUHHQ

2SHQWKHSODWHQFRYHUDQGSODFHWKHVLGH

WREHFRSLHGIDFHGRZQRQWKHJODVVVXUIDFH

&ORVH

%DVLF&RS\LQJ

2-28

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Accessibility Functions (Magnifying the View)

You can magnify the text and keys displayed on the touch panel. You can also select items and move to the next screen

using the numeric keys.

Select [Home] key > [...] > [Accessibility/Standard]

Large keys and text appear on the touch panel.

You can also control the screen using the numeric key corresponding to the number in circle. (Example: Select the [2]

key on the numeric key pad to display the Send screen.)

Control the functions according to the display on the screen.

NOTE

• This function can be used on the Home screen and on the functions that were registered via Copy/Send/Fax Quick

Setup.

• To configure any functions that are not displayed on the Accessibility screen, you need to return to the original view.

Select [Accessibility/Standard] again.

• Long press the [Home] key to switch between the Standard screen and the Accessibility screen.

6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO

'HYLFH

,QIRUPDWLRQ

/DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

&RS\ 6HQG )D[

6HQG

3ROOLQJ%R[

&RS\

-RE%R[ )D[%R[86%'ULYH

6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO

'HYLFH

,QIRUPDWLRQ

/DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

&RS\ 6HQG )D[

6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO

'HYLFH

,QIRUPDWLRQ

/DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV

+HOS ,QFRPLQJ

)D[/RJ

2XWJRLQJ

)D[/RJ

6\VWHP0HQX &RXQWHU $FFHVVLELOLW\

6WDQGDUG

1XPHULF.H\SDG

)DYRULWHV

:L)L'LUHFW

2-29

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout

If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights, or if user login administration is enabled, you must enter

your login user name and login password.

Normal login

1Enter the login user name and login password to login.

If this screen is displayed during operations, enter the login user name and login password.

NOTE

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator

privileges and change your login user name or login password.

1 If [Network Authentication] is selected as the user authentication method, authentication

destinations are displayed and either [Local] or [Network] can be selected as the

authentication destination.

2 Enter the login user name.

3 Enter the login password.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

4 Select the login method from [Simple login], [PIN code login] and [IC card login].

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 9-1)

5 Check the Wi-Fi Direct environment.

6 Refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned. Displayed when

job accounting is enabled.

7 Set the language to use for the touch panel display.

(QWHUORJLQXVHUQDPHDQGSDVVZRUG

/RFDO

/RJLQ

/RJLQWR

:L)L'LUHFW

/RJLQ

8VHU1DPH

3DVVZRUG

.H\ERDUG/RJLQ

2WKHU/RJLQ &KHFN&RXQWHU /DQJXDJH

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

7654

2-30

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout

2Select [Login].

Simple Login

If this screen is displayed during operations, select a user and log in.

Logout

To logout from the machine, select the [Logout] key to return to the login user name/login

password entry screen.

Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:

• When the machine enters the sleep state.

• When the auto panel reset function is activated.

NOTE

If a user password is required, an input screen will be displayed.

Simple Login Settings (page 9-26)

6HOHFWWKHXVHUWRORJLQ 1R

:L)L'LUHFW

6LPSOH/RJLQ.H\

2WKHU/RJLQ

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

&XVWRP%R[6HQG

3ROOLQJ%R[

&RS\

-RE%R[ )D[%R[86%'ULYH

)D[

6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO

'HYLFH

,QIRUPDWLRQ

/DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

&RS\ 6HQG )D[

8VHU 㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚㻘㻌㻣㻜㻜㻜

㻸㼛㼓㼛㼡㼠

㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚

2-31

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine

Default Settings of the Machine

The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu. Before using this machine, configure such settings

as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions as needed.

Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.

When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of

the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Date/Time]

2Configure the settings.

[Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format]

NOTE

For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following:

Setup and Registration (System Menu) (page 8-1)

NOTE

• To make changes after this initial configuration, refer to the following:

Date/Time (page 8-6)

• The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.

Command Center RX User Guide

Item Description

Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed

location from the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer

time, configure settings for summer time.

Date and Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine.

If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be

displayed on the header.

Value: Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31),

Hour (0 to 23), Minute (0 to 59), Second (0 to 59)

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is

displayed in Western notation.

Value: MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year), DD/MM/YYYY (Day/

Month/Year), YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)

2-32

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Network Setup

Configuring the Wired Network

The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),

TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms.

Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.

Be sure to connect the network cable before configuring the settings.

Connecting LAN Cable (page 2-7)

For other network settings, refer to the following:

Network Settings (page 8-52)

Configuration Method Description Reference Page

Configuring the Connection

from the Operation Panel

on This Machine

Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the

network in a wizard-style screen, without setting

individually in System menu.

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-

47)

Use Wired Network Settings or Optional Network to

configure the network in details from System menu.

Wired Network Settings

(page 8-57)

Optional Network (page 8-65)

Configuring Connections

on the Web Page

For the equipped network interface, the connection

can be set by using Command Center RX. For the

optional IB-50, the connection can be set by using

the dedicated Web page.

Command Center RX User

Guide

IB-50 Operation Guide

Setting the Connection by

Using the Setup Utility of

IB-50

This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-50. You

can use it on Windows.

IB-50 Operation Guide

NOTE

When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default) after installing an optional Network

Interface Kit (IB-50) and a Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37, IB-38 or IB-51), select the desired setting on

"Primary Network (Client)".

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-69)

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges or

as a user with privileges to configure this setting.

If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and

password, and select [Login].

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

2-33

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

IPv4 setting

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Wired

Network Settings] > "TCP/IP Setting" [IPv4 Settings]

2Configure the settings.

When using DHCP server

•[DHCP]: Set to [On].

When setting the static IP address

•[DHCP]: Set to [Off].

•[Auto-IP]: Set to [Off].

•[IP Address]: Enter the address.

•[Subnet Mask]: Enter the subnet mask in decimal representation (0 to 255).

•[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.

When using the Auto-IP

Enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].

When setting the DNS server

In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server.

• When using the host name with "DHCP" setting set to "Off".

• When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically.

Select [Use DNS Server from DHCP] or [Use following DNS Server]. When [Use following

DNS Server] is selected, you can enter static DNS server information in the Primary and

Secondary fields provided.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the

machine OFF and then ON.

Restart Network (page 8-64)

NOTE

Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you

configure this setting.

2-34

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Configuring the Wireless Network

When the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37, IB-38 or IB-51) is installed on the machine and the connection settings

are configured, it is possible to print or send in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment. The configuration

methods are as follows:

Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or handheld device with

the machine locally. The connection methods are wired connection via LAN cable and wireless LAN connection (Wi-Fi Direct).

Configuration Method Description Reference Page

Configuring the Connection

from the Operation Panel on

This Machine

Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the

network in a wizard-style screen, without setting

individually in System menu.

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-

47)

Use Wi-Fi Settings or Wireless Network to configure

the network in details from System menu.

Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-53)

Wireless Network (page 8-65)

Setting the Connection by

Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

This is a tool that can be downloaded from our

website. You can configure the connection according

to the instructions provided by the wizard.

Setting the Connection by

Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

(page 2-34)

Setting the Connection by

Using the Setup Utility of

IB-51

This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-51. You

can use it on both Windows and Mac OS.

IB-51 Operation Guide

Configuring Connections on

the Web Page

For the IB-37, IB-38, the connection can be set from

the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

For the IB-51, the connection can be set on the

dedicated Web page.

IB-51 Operation Guide

NOTE

• The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37, IB-38) is an option for some models and the Wireless Network Interface

Kit (IB-51) is a standard option. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representatives for detail.

IB-37/IB-38 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)

IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)

• When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default) after installing an optional Network

Interface Kit (IB-50) and a Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37, IB-38 or IB-51), select the desired setting on

"Primary Network (Client)".

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-69)

NOTE

• To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to [ON]) and Restart Network from

the operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.

• To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned to the

machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.

• Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS.

Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-53)

Wireless Network (page 8-65)

2-35

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Wired Connection by Using LAN Cable

1Connect the machine with a computer.

1Connect the machine with a computer via LAN cable when the machine is powered on.

2Turn on the computer.

IP addresses (link local addresses) of the machine and computer are generated

automatically.

2Launch the Wi-Fi Setup Tool.

1Launch a web browser.

2Enter "https://kyocera.info/" to the browser's address bar or location bar.

3Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.

4Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.

2-36

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

5Utility tab > "Wi-Fi Setup Tool"

The Wi-Fi Setup Tool will be downloaded.

6Double-click the downloaded installer to launch.

3Configure the settings.

1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]

2[Use LAN cable] > [Next] > [Next]

3[Easy setup] > [Next]

The machine is detected.

4Select the machine > [Next]

5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user

name and password. Login user name and Password.

6Configure the communication settings > [Next]

7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator

privileges.

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

NOTE

• Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search

the machine.

• If the machine is not detected, select [Advanced setup] > [Next]. Select [Express] or

[Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or host name to

search the machine.

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)

2-37

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Wireless LAN Connection by Using Wi-Fi Direct

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Direct

Settings]

2Configure the settings.

"Wi-Fi Direct": [On] > [Close]

3Restart the network.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Restart

Network] > [Restart]

4Connect a computer or a handheld device with the machine.

Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-40)

5Launch the Wi-Fi Setup Tool.

1Launch a web browser.

2Enter "https://kyocera.info/" to the browser's address bar or location bar.

3Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.

2-38

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

4Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.

5Utility tab > "Wi-Fi Setup Tool"

The Wi-Fi Setup Tool will be downloaded.

6Double-click the downloaded installer to launch.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator

privileges.

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

2-39

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

6Configure the settings.

1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]

2[Wi-Fi Direct] > [Next] > [Next]

3[Advanced setup] > [Next]

Select [Express] or [Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or

host name to search the machine.

4Select the machine > [Next]

5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user

name and password. Login user name and Password.

6Configure the communication settings > [Next]

7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)

2-40

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Setting Wi-Fi Direct

Setting Wi-Fi Direct enables you to print from the Wi-Fi Direct environment. The configuration methods are as follows:

Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine

Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Direct

Settings]

2Configure the settings.

"Wi-Fi Direct": [On] > [OK]

3Restart the network.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Restart

Network] > [Restart]

4Specify the machine name from the computer or handheld

device.

If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the machine, select [Yes].

The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.

Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices Unsupported Wi-Fi Direct

Here, we'll explain the procedures for connecting to iOS handheld devices.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Direct

Settings]

2Configure the settings.

"Wi-Fi Direct": [On] > [OK]

3Restart the network.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Restart

Network] > [Restart]

4[Home] key > [Device Information] > [Wi-Fi]

5Note the “Wi-Fi Direct” network name (SSID), IP address, and

password.

NOTE

To use Wi-Fi Direct, Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37 or IB-38) must be installed in the machine.

IB-37/IB-38 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)

2-41

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

6Configure the handheld device.

1[Settings] > [Wi-Fi]

2Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list.

3Enter the password that was provided in step 5 > [Connect]

The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.

Configuring the Connection by Using Push Button

When your computer or handheld device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the

network using push button.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Direct

Settings]

2Configure the settings.

"Wi-Fi Direct": [On] > [OK]

3Restart the network.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Restart

Network] > [Restart]

4[Home] key > [Device Information] > [Wi-Fi]

5Press the push button on the computer or handheld device and

select "Wi-Fi Direct" [Push Button Setup] > [OK] on the screen

of operation panel.

The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.

IMPORTANT

You can connect up to ten handheld devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices

that support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other device, disconnect the already-

connected devices from the network. The disconnection methods are as follows:

• Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer

• Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel

Select [Home] key > [Device Information] > [Wi-Fi] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Device] > [Disconnect] > [Disconnect]

• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu

Wi-Fi Direct Settings (page 8-52)

• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Command Center RX

Command Center RX User Guide

2-42

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Configuring NFC

NFC (Near Field Communication) is the internal standard for near field communication in which the data communication

distance is limited to approximately 10 cm. Establishing data communication simply requires you to show the handheld

device supporting NFC to this machine.

The configuration methods are as follows:

Configuring Connections on the Web Page

You can set NFC from the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine

Configure the NFC from the System Menu.

NFC (page 8-68)

This section presents an example for configuring the NFC from the System Menu.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Connectivity" [NFC]

2Configure the settings.

"NFC": [On] > [OK]

2-43

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Motion Sensor

This model detects that the person is approaching and recover from low power mode or sleep mode automatically.

The range of detection of the Motion Sensor can be switched using the lever on the front.

For more information on Motion Sensor settings, refer to the following:

Motion Sensor (page 8-9)

2-44

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function

Energy Saver function

If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters Low Power Mode to

reduce power consumption. If a further period of time elapses without the machine being used, the machine

automatically enters sleep mode, which minimizes power consumption.

Low Power Mode

If the machine is not operated for a certain period of time, the energy saver indicator will light up and the screen will

become dark to reduce power consumption. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode. "Low power mode." will be

displayed on the screen.

The amount of time before entering Low Power Mode: 3 minutes (default setting).

If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. Also when fax

data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

To resume, perform one of the following actions.

• Select any key on the operation panel.

• Touch the touch panel.

• Place originals in the document processor.

• Open the document processor.

Recovery time from Low Power Mode is as follows.

• TASKalfa 2554ci/TASKalfa 3554ci: 9.7 seconds or less

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

NOTE

If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep mode is preceded.

2-45

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function

Sleep

To enter Sleep, select the [Energy Saver] key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save

a maximum amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.

If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. Also when fax data arrives

while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

When Using the Machine

Automatically wakes up when someone approaches the machine while the Motion Sensor is being used.

For more information on Motion Sensor settings, refer to the following:

Motion Sensor (page 8-9)

If the Motion Sensor is not being used, perform one of the following actions.

• Select any key on the operation panel.

• Touch the touch panel.

• Place originals in the document processor.

• Open the document processor.

Recovery time from Sleep Mode is as follows.

• TASKalfa 2554ci/TASKalfa 3554ci: 9.7 seconds or less

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

Auto Sleep

Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time.

The amount of time before entering Sleep is as follows.

• 10 minutes (default setting)

To change the preset sleep time, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-47)

Sleep Rules (models for Europe)

You can set whether sleep mode operates for each function. When the machine enters sleep mode, the ID card cannot

be recognized.

For more information on Sleep Rules settings, refer to the following:

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-7)

NOTE

If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep mode is preceded.

Energy Saver indicator

2-46

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function

Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for

Europe)

This mode reduces power consumption even more than normal Sleep mode, and allows Sleep Mode to be set

separately for each function. Printing from a computer connected with a USB cable is not available while the machine is

asleep. The time required for the machine to wake up from power save mode and resume normal operation will be

longer than for normal Sleep Mode.

For more information on Sleep Level (Home) Mode settings, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-47)

Energy Saver Recovery Level

This machine can reduce power consumption when recovering from Energy Saver Mode.

For EnergySaver RecoveryLevel, "Full Recovery" or "Normal Recovery" can be selected.

The factory default is "Normal Recovery".

For more information on Energy Saver Mode settings, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-47)

Energy Saver Recovery Level (page 8-9)

Weekly Timer Settings

Set the machine to automatically sleep and wake up at times specified for each day.

For more information on Weekly Timer Settings, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-47)

Weekly Timer Settings (page 8-8)

Power Off Timer (models for Europe)

If the machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off. The Power Off Timer is used to set the

time until the power turns off.

The factory setting for the time until the power turns off: 3 days

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 8-8)

NOTE

If the optional network interface kit is installed, Energy Saver cannot be specified.

2-47

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard

Quick Setup Wizard

The following settings can be configured in a wizard-style screen.

Fax Setup Configures basic fax settings. This function is displayed when the optional FAX Kit

is installed.

FAX Operation Guide

Dialing/RX Mode Dialing Mode (Port 1, Port 2*1)*2

Reception Mode

Auto (DRD)*3

Local Fax Information Local Fax Name (Fax Port 1, Fax Port 2*1)

Local Fax Number (Fax Port 1, Fax Port 2*1)

Local Fax ID

TTI

Volume Fax Speaker Volume

Fax Monitor Volume

Job Finish

Rings Rings (Normal)*4

Rings (TAD)*4

Rings (Fax/Phone)*4

Paper Source/Output Paper Source Settings

Fax Port 1

Fax Port 2*1

Redial Retry Times

Show Power Off

Message

Show Power Off Message —

Energy Saver Setup Configures sleep mode and low power mode.

Sleep Mode For Europe

Sleep Timer

Sleep Rules

Except for Europe

Sleep Timer

Sleep Level

Low Power Mode Low Power Timer

Recovery Mode Energy Saver Recovery Level

Weekly Timer Weekly Timer Settings

Schedule*5

Retry*5

Retry Times*5

Retry Interval*5

2-48

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Quick Setup Wizard]

2Select a function.

3Configure the settings.

Start the wizard. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings.

Network Setup Configures network settings.

Network Network Selection*6

Wi-Fi*7

DHCP*8

IP Address*9

Subnet Mask*9

Default Gateway*9

Email Setup Set SMTP server name and sender address to enable mail sending.

Email SMTP (Email TX)

SMTP Server Name*10

SMTP Port Number*10

Sender Address*10

Security Setup Specify the security level.

Security Quick Setup

*1 This is displayed when the option of two FAX Kits has been installed.

*2 Inch version only.

*3 DRD reception mode is available for some countries.

*4 This setting does not appear in some regions.

*5 This function is displayed when [Weekly Timer] is set to [On].

*6 This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37 or IB-38) is installed.

*7 This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wi-Fi].

*8 This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wired Network].

*9 This function is displayed when [DHCP] is set to [Off].

*10 This function is displayed when [SMTP (Email TX)] is set to [On].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If you experience difficulty configuring the settings, refer to the following:

Help Screen (page 2-27)

Control Description

End Exits the wizard. Settings configured so far are applied.

Previous Returns to the previous item.

2-49

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard

Skip Advances to the next item without setting the current item.

Next Advances to the next screen.

Back Returns to the previous screen.

Complete Register the settings and exit the wizard.

Control Description

2-50

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software

To use printer function, TWAIN/WIA connection, or network fax function, download and install prerequisite softwares

from our website (https://kyocera.info/).

Published Software (Windows)

Software Description

Recommended

software

KX DRIVER This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine.

Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are

supported by a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full

advantage of the features of the machine.

Use this driver to create PDF files.

KPDL mini-driver/PCL mini-

driver

This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There

are some restrictions on the machine features and option features

that can be used with this driver.

FAX Driver This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer

software application as a fax via the machine.

TWAIN Driver This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN-

compliant software application.

WIA Driver WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that

enables reciprocal communication between an imaging device such

as a scanner and an image processing software application. An

image can be acquired using a WIA-compliant software application,

which is convenient when a TWAIN-compliant software application is

not installed in the computer.

KYOCERA Net Viewer This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the

network.

Status Monitor This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an

ongoing reporting function.

File Management Utility This makes it possible to send and save a scanned document to a

specified network folder.

KYOCERA Net Direct Print This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe

Acrobat/Reader.

FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be

used in a software application.

Wi-Fi Setup Tool This is a tool for wireless network (wireless LAN) configuration of this

machine.

Scan to Folder Setup Tool for

SMB

This is a tool to create a shared folder in personal computers and set

the shared folder as a destination.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.

2-51

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software in Windows

Downloading and installing from the website

Download and install a software from our website.

1Download a software from the website.

1Launch a web browser.

2Enter "https://kyocera.info/" to the browser's address bar or location bar.

3Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.

4Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.

2-52

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

5Driver tab or Utility tab > of the software you want to download

An installer of the selected software will be downloaded.

2Double-click the downloaded installer to launch.

Follow the guidance on the screen to install the software.

Using the web installer

Install a software by using a web installer downloaded from our website.

1Download a software from the website.

1Launch a web browser.

2Enter "https://kyocera.info/" to the browser's address bar or location bar.

3Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

2-53

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.

5Utility tab > "Web installer"

A web installer will be downloaded.

2Double-click the downloaded installer to launch.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

2-54

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

3Display the screen.

4Click [Install].

5Select a model and click [Next].

NOTE

• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the

machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable.

• If a desired device is not displayed, select [Add custom device] to directly select the

device you want to use.

1 Read the license agreement.

2 Click [Accept] if there is no

problem.

2-55

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

6Install the softwares.

1Select softwares you want to install.

2Click [Install].

When [Install] is clicked, a screen which asks for cooperation for data collection may

appear. Select one of the answer choices and click [OK].

7Finish the installation.

Click [Next] > [Finish] to finish the installation wizard.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the printer driver installation procedure.

If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:

NOTE

Softwares recommended to install have in their checkboxes by default. Configure

them as needed.

NOTE

• If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].

• To install Status Monitor for Windows 8.1, it is necessary to install Microsoft.NET

Framework 4.0 beforehand.

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-60)

2-56

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Uninstalling the Software

Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.

1Display the screen.

Click Search box in taskbar, and enter "Uninstall Kyocera Product Library" in the search box.

Select [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] in the search list.

2Uninstall the software.

Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted.

3Finish uninstalling.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the software uninstallation procedure.

NOTE

Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

NOTE

In Windows 8.1, click [Search] in charms, and enter "Uninstall Kyocera Product Library" in

the search box. Select [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] in the search list.

NOTE

The software can also be uninstalled using Web Installer. In the screen of Web Installer,

click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the software.

2-57

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software in Mac Computer

Printer driver for Macintosh can be installed.

1Download a software from the website.

1Launch a web browser.

2Enter "https://kyocera.info/" into the address bar.

3Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.

NOTE

• Installation on Mac OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].

Printer (page 8-46)

• If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.

Bonjour (page 8-63)

• In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.

• When printing via AirPrint, you do not have to install the software.

2-58

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.

5Driver tab > "Mac Printer Driver(x.x and later)"

An installer of the selected software will be downloaded.

2Install the Printer Driver.

Double click to launch the downloaded installer.

Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.

This completes the printer driver installation.

If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.

If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.

2-59

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

3Configure the printer.

1Open System Preferences and add the printer.

2Select [Default] and click the item that appears in "Name" and then select the driver in

"Use".

3The selected machine is added.

4Select the printer added newly, and click the [Options & Supplies...] to select the options

equipped with the machine.

NOTE

When using an IP connection, click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the

host name or IP address. The number entered in "Address" will automatically appear in

"Name". Change if needed.

2-60

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Setting TWAIN Driver

1Display the screen.

1Click Search box in taskbar, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Select

[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list.

2Click [Add].

2Configure TWAIN Driver.

NOTE

In Windows 8.1, Click [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the

search box. Select [TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list.

1 Enter the machine name.

2 Select this machine from the list.

3 Enter the machine's IP address or host name.

4 Set units of measurement.

5 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.

6 Click [OK].

NOTE

When the machine's IP address or host name is unknown, contact Administrator.

2-61

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

3Finish registering.

NOTE

Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.

2-62

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Setting WIA Driver

1Display the screen.

1Click Search box in taskbar, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the search box.

Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras

screen appears.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click [Properties].

2Configure WIA Driver.

NOTE

In Windows 8.1, click [Search] in charms, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the

search box. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners

and Cameras screen appears.

1 Click the [Settings] tab.

2 Enter the machine IP addresses or host name.

3 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.

4 Set units of measurement.

5 Click [OK].

2-63

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Checking the Counter

Checking the Counter

Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [Counter]

2Check the counter.

2-64

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator

Additional Preparations for the Administrator

In addition to the information provided in this chapter, the administrator of this machine should check the following, and

configure the settings as needed.

Sending Documents to a PC

To Send to a Shared Folder (Send to Folder (SMB))

To send a document that has been loaded, you need to create a shared folder to receive the document on your

computer.

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-22)

To E-mail Scanned Images (Send as E-mail)

You can send a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.

E-mail Settings (page 2-70)

Strengthening the Security

This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator rights, and another with

Administrator rights. Logging in as this user will allow you to configure all settings; therefore, please change the login

user name and password.

In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this

machine to only those who have a registered login name and password.

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 9-1)

NOTE

Protection of confidential information by TPM

This product is equipped with the security chip called TPM (Trusted Platform Module). The encryption key used to

encrypt confidential information on this machine is stored in a dedicated storage area on the TPM chip. Since this

storage area cannot be read from outside the TPM, confidential information can be safely protected.

I want to... Function Reference page

Restrict the users of the machine. User Login page 9-2

Authentication Security page 9-4

Auto Panel Reset page 8-7

ID Card Settings*1 page 9-29

Restrict the basic functions that can be

used.

Local Authorization page 9-16

Group Authorization Set. page 9-18

Guest Authorization Set. page 9-21

Prevent another user from handling the

documents stored in the machine.

Custom Box page 5-53

Output the document stored in the

machine at the time when user operates

the device via operation panel.

Remote Printing page 8-48

2-65

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator

Prevent the data stored in the machine

from being leaked.

Data Overwrite*2 Refer to the

Data

Encryption/

Overwrite

Operation

Guide.

Encryption*2

PDF Encryption Functions page 6-86

Completely delete the data on the machine

before disposing of the machine.

Data Sanitization page 8-73

Record the operation history of users. Login History Settings page 8-28

Device Log History Settings page 8-29

Secure Comm. Error Log page 8-30

Protect the transmission from interception

and wiretapping.

IPP over SSL page 8-60

HTTPS page 8-61

LDAP Security Refer to the

Command

Center RX User

Guide.

SMTP Security page 8-39

POP3 Security page 8-39

FTP Encrypted TX page 6-93

Enhanced WSD (SSL) page 8-61

IPSec page 8-64

SNMPv3 page 8-61

Verify the software in the machine. Software Verification page 8-71

*1 The optional Card Authentication Kit is required.

*2 It is necessary to activate the Data Security Function.

I want to... Function Reference page

2-66

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Command Center RX

If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Command Center RX.

This section explains how to access Command Center RX, and how to change security settings and the host name.

Command Center RX User Guide

Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows.

NOTE

To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and click [Login].

Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box,

Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator

privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)

Setting Description Administ-

rator

General

User

Device

Information/

Remote

Operation

The machine's structure can be checked.

Job Status Displays all device information, including print and scan jobs, storing

jobs, scheduled jobs, and job log history.

Document Box Add or delete document boxes, or delete documents within a document

box.

*1 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user.

Address Book Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups. *1

Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine. ―

Function

Settings

Configure the advanced function settings. ―

Network

Settings

Configure the network advanced settings. ―

Security

Settings

Configure the security advanced settings. ―

Management

Settings

Configure the advanced management settings. ―

NOTE

The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.

Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted.

FAX Operation Guide

2-67

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Accessing Command Center RX

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

Examples: https://10.180.81.3/ (for IP address)

https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")

The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well

as their current status.

2Configure the function.

Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen.

NOTE

If the screen "There is a problem with this website's security certificate." is displayed,

configure the certificate.

Command Center RX User Guide

You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.

NOTE

To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and

Password and click [Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user

to access all pages, including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation

menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown

below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)

2-68

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Changing Security Settings

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.

(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4Click [Security Settings].

2Configure the Security Settings.

From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure.

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page 1-i)

NOTE

For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

2-69

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Changing Device Information

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.

(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4From the [Device Settings] menu, click [System].

2Specify the host name.

Enter the device information, and then click [Submit].

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page 1-i)

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

To restart the network interface card, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings]

menu, and then click [Restart Network] in "Restart".

2-70

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

E-mail Settings

By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send the images scanned by the machine as E-mail attachments and

to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed.

To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.

In addition, configure the following.

•SMTP settings

Item: "SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP"

• The sender address when the machine sends E-mails

Item: "Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings"

• The setting to limit the size of E-mails

Item: "E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings"

The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.

1Display the screen.

Display the SMTP Protocol screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.

(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page 1-i)

2-71

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

4From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].

2Configure the settings.

Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" to [On] in the "Send Protocols".

2-72

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

3Display the screen.

Display the E-mail Settings screen.

From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].

4Configure the settings.

Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items.

Setting Description

SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine.

SMTP Protocol Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that "SMTP Protocol" is set to

[On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocol] and set the SMTP protocol to [On].

SMTP Server Name*1 Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.

SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default port number is 25.

SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.

Authentication

Protocol

To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for authentication.

SMTP Security Set SMTP security.

Turn on "SMTP Security" in "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the

[Protocol Settings] page.

Connection Test Tests to confirm that the E-mail function is operating under the settings without

sending a mail.

Domain Restriction To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter the domain names of

addresses to be allowed or rejected. Restriction can also be specified by e-mail

address.

2-73

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

5Click [Submit].

POP3 POP3 Protocol You don't need to set the following items when you only enable the function of

sending e-mail from the machine. Set the following items if you want to enable

the function of receiving e-mail on the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Check Interval

Run once now

Domain Restriction

POP3 User Settings

E-mail

Send

Settings

E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When E-mail

size is greater than this value, an error message appears and E-mail sending is

cancelled. Use this setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP server. If

not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail sending regardless of the size

limit.

Sender Address*1 Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-mails, such as the

machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person

rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for

SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 256

characters.

Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of

the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The

maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.

Function Defaults Change the function default settings in [Common/Job Default Settings] page.

*1 Be sure to enter the items.

Setting Description

2-74

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Registering Destinations

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.

(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].

5Click [Add].

2Populate the fields.

1Enter the destination information.

Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the

same as when registering via operation panel.

2Click [Submit].

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page 1-i)

Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-37)

2-75

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Creating a New Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].

4Click [Add].

2Configure the Custom Box.

1Enter the box details.

Enter the information for the custom box you want to register. For details on the fields to

populate, refer to the following:

2Click [Submit].

Command Center RX User Guide

2-76

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Printing a Document Stored in a Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].

4Click the number or name of the Custom Box in which the document is stored.

2Print the document.

1Select the document you wish to print.

Select the checkbox of the document to be printed.

2Click [Print].

3Configure settings for printing, click [Print].

2-77

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

Transferring Data from Our Other Products

By using the machine's utility, you can smoothly migrate address books when the machine is to be replaced.

This section explains how to transfer data between our products.

Migrating the Address Book

The Address Book registered on the machine can be backed up or migrated using the KYOCERA Net Viewer

downloaded from our website.

For details on operating the KYOCERA Net Viewer, refer to the following:

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

Backing Up Address Book Data to PC

1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.

2Create a backup.

1Right-click on the model name from which you want to back up the Address Book, and

select [Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].

2Select [Custom mode] and click [Next].

2-78

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

3Select destination device group and click [Next].

4Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].

5Select [Create from device] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on

target device], and then click [Next].

2-79

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

6Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].

7Click on [Save to file].

8Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save].

For "Save as type", make sure to select "XML File".

NOTE

If the "Admin Login" screen appears, enter the "Admin Login" and "Login Password", and

then click [OK]. The default settings are as follows (Upper case and lower case letters

are distinguished (case sensitive)).

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)

2-80

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

9After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.

Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.

Writing Address Book Data to the Machine

1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.

2Load the Address Book data.

1Right-click on the model name to which you want to transfer the Address Book, and select

[Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].

2Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].

2-81

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

3Select destination device group and click [Next].

4Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].

5Select [Create from file] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target

device], and then click [Next].

Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's

Address Book from entry No.1.

2-82

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

6Click [Browse] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next].

7Click [Finish].

The write process of the Address Book data starts.

8Once the write process is complete, click [Close].

3-1

Preparation before Use

This chapter explains the following operations.

Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

Precaution for Loading Paper .................................................................................................................. 3-2

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................................................ 3-3

Loading in Cassette 1 .............................................................................................................................. 3-4

Loading in Cassette 2 .............................................................................................................................. 3-7

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes ................................................................................ 3-10

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder ................................................................................................... 3-14

Loading in the Side Feeder .................................................................................................................... 3-16

Precautions for Outputting Paper .......................................................................................................... 3-18

Precautions for Outputting Paper ..................................................................................................................... 3-18

Paper Stopper ........................................................................................................................................ 3-18

Envelope Stack Guide ........................................................................................................................... 3-18

Stack Level Adjuster .............................................................................................................................. 3-19

Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) ................................................................................................. 3-21

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC ................................................................... 3-22

Making a Note of the Computer Name and Full Computer Name ......................................................... 3-22

Making a Note of the User Name and Domain Name ........................................................................... 3-22

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ............................................................... 3-23

Configuring Windows Firewall ............................................................................................................... 3-27

Turn off password-protected sharing (Windows 10 only) ....................................................................... 3-31

Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB ........................................................................................................ 3-32

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................. 3-37

Adding a Destination (Address Book) .................................................................................................... 3-37

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key ............................................................................................... 3-44

3-2

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading Paper

Precaution for Loading Paper

When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.

Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface.

In addition, note the following points.

• If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded

may cause a jam.

• Avoid exposing opened paper to high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems.

Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multipurpose tray or cassettes back in the

paper storage bag.

• Leaving paper in the cassette for a long time may cause a discoloration of paper by heat

from the cassette heater.

• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by

removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.

IMPORTANT

If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is

stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image

quality.

NOTE

If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like

logo or company name, refer to the following:

Paper (page 11-13)

3-3

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units

Select the paper feeder units according to the size and type of paper.

No. Name Paper Size Paper Type Capacity Page

1Cassette 1 A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R,

216×340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II, Folio,

16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,

Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope

Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return

postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3,

Custom 1 to 4

Plain, Rough,

Vellum, Recycled,

Preprinted, Bond,

Cardstock, Color,

Prepunched,

Letterhead,

Envelope, Thick,

High Quality,

Custom 1 to 8

500 sheets

(80 g/m2)

page 3-4

2Cassette 2 A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R,

B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger,

Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,

Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K,

16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,

Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope

Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku

hagaki (Return postcard), Kakugata 2,

Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Custom 1

to 4

3Cassette 3

4Cassette 4

5Cassette 3 A4, Letter, B5 (Fixed to one of sizes.) Plain, Rough,

Vellum, Recycled,

Preprinted, Bond,

Color, Prepunched,

Letterhead, Thick,

High Quality,

Custom 1 to 8

1,500 sheets

(80 g/m2)

page 3-14

6Cassette 4

7Cassette 5 3,000 sheets

(80 g/m2)

page 3-16

NOTE

• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.

• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper

jams or other faults.)

• For higher quality color printing, use special color paper.

3-4

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in Cassette 1

Load the paper in Cassette. The procedures here represent the Cassette 1.

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

2Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.

NOTE

Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.

NOTE

When using Legal size paper, move the paper length guide to the extreme left and lay it

down.

3-5

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left

and right sides of the cassette.

4Load paper.

5Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely

against the paper.

If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

cassette.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled

or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,

the paper may skew or become jammed.

3-6

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

6Gently push the cassette back in.

7Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and

type of paper to be placed.

8Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Setting] > [Paper Feeding] > [Cassette 1]

9Configure the function.

Select the paper size and paper type.

Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings (page 8-13)

NOTE

Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following.

Paper Selection (page 6-21)

Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings (page 8-13)

3-7

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in Cassette 2

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

2Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.

NOTE

Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.

NOTE

When using 12×18" size paper, move the paper length guide to the extreme left and lay it

down.

3-8

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left

and right sides of the cassette.

4Load paper.

NOTE

When using SRA3/12×18", A3, or Ledger paper, adjust the auxiliary guide accordingly.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

cassette.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled

or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,

the paper may skew or become jammed.

3-9

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

5Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely

against the paper.

If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.

6Gently push the cassette back in.

7Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and

type of paper to be placed.

8Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Setting] > [Paper Feeding] > [Cassette 2]

9Configure the function.

Select the paper size and paper type.

Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings (page 8-13)

NOTE

Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following.

Paper Selection (page 6-21)

Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings (page 8-13)

3-10

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes

Load envelope or cardstock in the cassettes. Here, we'll explain the procedures for cassette 1, as an example.

1Pull Cassette 1 completely out of the machine.

2Remove the envelope feed guide.

When loading cardstock, go to step 5.

3Expand the lever of the envelope feed guide when loading

envelopes larger than Envelope C5 which has a width of

162 mm (6.4").

NOTE

Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.

3-11

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

4Attach the envelope feed guide as shown in the illustration.

The illustration below shows that the lever of the envelope feed guide is expanded.

5Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.

6Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the

left and right sides of the cassette.

3-12

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

7Load the envelope with the print side facing up.

Example: When printing the address.

8Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely

against the paper.

If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.

IMPORTANT

• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of

envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the

wrong direction or on the wrong face.

• Ensure that loaded envelopes do not exceed the level indicator.

NOTE

Approximately 100 post cards or 30 envelopes can be set.

3-13

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

9Gently push Cassette 1 back in.

10 Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Setting] > [Paper Feeding] > [Cassette 1]

11 Configure the function.

Select the paper size and type of envelope.

12 Set by using the printer driver on the PC.

Select the paper size and type of envelope using the printer driver on the PC.

Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings (page 8-13)

Printing on Standard Sized Paper (page 4-4)

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)

3-14

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder

The procedures here represent the cassette 3.

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

2Load paper.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

cassette.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled

or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.

3-15

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

3Gently push the cassette back in.

4Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and

type of paper to be placed.

5Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Setting] > [Paper Feeding] > [Cassette 3]

6Configure the function.

Select the paper type.

Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings (page 8-13)

3-16

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in the Side Feeder

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

2Load paper.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing down.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

cassette.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled

or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.

3-17

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

3Gently push the cassette back in.

4Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and

type of paper to be placed.

5Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Setting] > [Paper Feeding] > [Cassette 5]

6Configure the function.

Select the paper type.

Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings (page 8-13)

3-18

Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper

Precautions for Outputting Paper

Paper Stopper

When using paper A3/Ledger or larger, open the paper stopper shown in the figure.

Envelope Stack Guide

To use an envelope, open the Envelope Stack Guide as shown below.

NOTE

When using the Job Separator for output, you can if needed open the paper stopper on the Job Separator.

3-19

Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper

Stack Level Adjuster

If the paper output is significantly curled, you can extend the Stack Level Adjuster as described in the figure.

Job Separator Tray

Extending the Stack Level Adjuster

Restoring the Stack Level Adjuster

3-20

Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper

Inner Shift Tray

Extending the Stack Level Adjuster

Restoring the Stack Level Adjuster

3-21

Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper

Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher)

In case of ejecting number of sets exceeding the storage limit in the folding unit, detach the folding tray.

In case of ejecting to the folding tray

In case of ejecting more than the limit of the folding tray

NOTE

Refer to the following for maximum number for storage of folding unit.

Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) (page 11-32)

3-22

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Preparation for Sending a Document to a

Shared Folder in a PC

Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your

computer. Screens of Windows 10 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other

versions of Windows.

Making a Note of the Computer Name and Full

Computer Name

Check the name of the computer name and full computer name.

1Display the screen.

Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel],

[System and Security], and [System].

2Check the computer name.

Check the computer name and full computer name.

Screen example:

Computer name: PC001

Full computer name: PC001.abcdnet.com

After checking the computer name, click the [Close] button to close the "System"

screen.

Making a Note of the User Name and Domain Name

Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.

1Display the screen.

Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Windows System] and [Command

Prompt].

In Windows 8.1, click [Search] in charms, and enter "Command Prompt" in the search box.

Select [Command Prompt] in the search list.

The Command Prompt window appears.

NOTE

Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

NOTE

In Windows 8.1, right-click [PC] in the Start screen and select [Properties]. Or, right-click

the Window icon and select [System].

3-23

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

2Check the domain name and user name.

At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].

Check the user name and domain name.

Screen example:

User Name: PC0270

Domain Name: PC0270

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared

Folder

Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.

NOTE

If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or

group.

1Open up a window in File Explorer and select [View], [Options], and then [Folder

Options].

In Windows 8.1, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel],

[Appearance and Personalization], and then [Folder Options].

Remove the checkmark from [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced

settings".

Make sure that the [View] tab is selected.

3-24

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

1Create a folder.

Create a folder on your computer.

For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.

2Configure permission settings.

1Right-click the "scannerdata" folder, select [Property], and click [Sharing] and

[Advanced Sharing].

2Select the [Share this folder] checkbox and click the [Permissions] button.

3Make a note of the [Share name].

3-25

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

4Click the [Add] button.

5Specify the location.

1 If the computer name that you made a note of on page 3-22 is the same as the domain

name:

If the computer name is not shown in "From this location", click the [Locations] button,

select the computer name, and click the [OK] button.

Example: PC001

If the computer name that you made a note of on

page 3-22

is not the same as the

domain name:

If the text after the first dot (.) in the full computer name that you made a note of does

not appear in "From this location", click the [Locations] button, select the text after the

dot (.), and click the [OK] button.

Example: abcdnet.com

Making a Note of the User Name and Domain Name (page 3-22)

2 Enter the user name that you made a note of on page in the text box, and click the [OK]

button.

Also the user name can be made by clicking the [Advanced] button and selecting a

user.

3-26

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

6Set the access permission for the user selected.

7Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.

8Check the details set in the [Security] tab.

NOTE

"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen

security, it is recommended that you select "Everyone" and remove the "Read" [Allow]

checkmark.

1 Select the user you entered.

2 Select the [Allow] checkbox of the

"Change" and "Read" permissions

3 Press [OK].

1 Select the [Security] tab.

2 Select the user you entered.

If the user does not appear on "Group or

user names", click [Edit] button to add user

in a similar way of "configuration of

permission settings".

3 Make sure that checkmarks appear on

[Allow] checkbox for the "Modify" and

"Read & execute" permissions.

4 Click the [Close] button.

3-27

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Configuring Windows Firewall

Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.

1Check file and printer sharing.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel],

[System and Security], and [Allow an app through Windows Firewall].

2Select the [File and Printer Sharing] checkbox.

NOTE

Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

NOTE

• In Windows 8.1, in charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and

Security], and then [Windows Firewall].

• If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

3-28

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

2Add a port.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel],

[System and Security], and [Check firewall status].

2Select [Advanced settings].

3Select [Inbound Rules].

4Select [New Rules].

3-29

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

5Select [Port].

6Select [TCP] as the port to apply the rule to. Then select [Specific local ports] and enter

"445" then click [Next].

7Select [Allow the connection] and click the [Next] button.

3-30

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

8Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click the [Next] button.

9Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click [Finish].

In Windows 8.1

1In Windows 8.1, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel],

[System and Security], and then [Windows Firewall].

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

2Configure the settings.

Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-27)

3-31

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Turn off password-protected sharing (Windows 10 only)

If it is not possible to access the shared folder that you specified, the settings for operating system may be changed.

Follow the steps below to confirm and change the settings.

1Right-click [Start] button and select [Settings].

2Select [Network & Internet].

3Select [Sharing options].

4Select [Turn on network discovery] in [Network discovery].

Select [Turn on file and printer sharing] in [File and printer sharing].

3-32

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

6Click [ ] of [All Networks] and select [Turn off password-

protected sharing] in [Password-protected sharing].

Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB

An environment for sending a document to Windows can be set up smoothly by using the Scan to Folder Setup Tool for

SMB downloaded from our website.

By operating the Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB, you can configure the following settings.

• Create a shared folder in a PC for receiving documents

A new folder can be easily created on the desktop. Also, the newly created folder is automatically set as a shared folder.

• Set the created shared folder as an address on this machine

Information about such things as the name of the computer and shared names for the shared folder is easily

recorded in the address book of this machine with a sequence of actions. Can also be registered on the One Touch

Keys.

1Download a software from the website.

1Launch a web browser.

2Enter "https://kyocera.info/" to the browser's address bar or location bar.

3Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.

NOTE

It is recommended to set a password for the user account. (Regarding security, ask your network administrator.)

NOTE

• Log in to Windows with administrator privileges.

• If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges or as a user with execution authority.

3-33

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

4Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.

5Utility tab > "Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB"

Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB will be downloaded.

6Double click to launch the downloaded installer.

3-34

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

2Configure the settings.

1Select the device to use and click [Next].

The address book of the device appears.

2Select [Add].

NOTE

• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the

machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network cable and that it is

turned on and click [ Refresh].

• If user administration is valid on this machine, the user authentication screen appears.

NOTE

• Clicking on [Edit] after selecting the registered address allows you to change the

content of the registration.

• Unchecking the [Show fax-capable addresses] check-box will hide the address

containing the fax.

3-35

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

3Create a new folder.

Select "Create a new folder on the desktop" and click [OK] to create a new folder on the

desktop. (The default folder name is "Scan".)

4Enter the information requested to register the address.

5Click [OK] to register the address to the address book.

6Click [Close].

7To register the registered address in a One Touch key, click [Yes].

NOTE

• Click [Edit] to change the desktop folder name.

• Selecting [Select an existing folder and address] allows you to select an existing

folder that is already set as a shared folder on the PC.

1 Enter the name for display in the address book.

2 Display the folder name and path to the shared folder.

3 Shared folders can be selected from a PC on the network.

4 Display the user name of the selected PC.

5 Enter the password corresponds to the log in user name of the selected PC.

3-36

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

8Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination, and click [Submit].

9Click [Close].

10Click [Finish] to exit the Scan to Folder Setup Tool.

3-37

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Registering Destinations in the Address

Book

Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed.

The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (Only on products with the fax

function installed).

Adding a Destination (Address Book)

Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a

group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.

Registering a contact address

A maximum of 2,000 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as

destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (Only on products with the

fax function installed).

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit

Machine Address Book] > [Add] > [Contact]

2Add the name.

1Enter the destination name to be displayed on the Address Book.

NOTE

• Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Command Center RX.

Registering Destinations (page 2-74)

• Editing of the Address Book and One Touch Keys can be restricted to administrators.

Edit Restriction (page 8-41)

NOTE

If registering and editing of the Address Book is restricted to administrators, you can edit the Address Book by logging

in with administrator privileges.

Edit Restriction (page 8-41)

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

3-38

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

2Enter an address number.

To have the number assigned automatically, select [Auto].

3Add the address.

Select the address type icon.

: Email Address

: Folder (SMB) Address

: Folder (FTP) Address

: Fax

: iFax Address

E-mail Address

Select the entry field, and enter the E-mail address.

The Folder (SMB) Address

• To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select [Search Folder from Network] or

[Search Folder by Host Name].

If you selected [Search Folder from Network], you can search all PCs on the network for

a destination.

If you selected [Search Folder by Host Name], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup",

and "Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.

A maximum of 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you

want to specify in the screen that appears, and select [OK]. The login user name and login

password entry screen appears.

After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the

shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [OK]. The

address of the selected shared folder is set.

Select the folder from the Search Results list.

NOTE

Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of

2,000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.

If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when

you select [Save] and the number cannot be registered. If you set [Auto] (0000) as the

address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.

NOTE

Refer to the following for details on adding FAX and i-FAX address.

FAX Operation Guide

NOTE

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

3-39

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

• To directly specify the SMB folder, enter the "Host name," "Port," "Folder Path," "Login User

Name" and "Login Password."

The table below explains the items to be entered.

NOTE

For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the

information that you noted when you created the shared folder. For details on creating

shared folders, refer to the following:

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-22)

Item Description

Host Name*1

*1 "Host name" or "IP address"

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10])

Computer name

Port Port number

If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 445.

Folder Path Share name

For example:

scannerdata

If saving in a folder in the shared folder:

share name\folder name in shared folder

*2 When sending a document through an optional network interface (IB-50 or IB-51), "\"

cannot be used. If the computer name is different from the domain name, login user

name needs to be input by using "@."

(Example: james.smith@abcdnet)

• If the computer name and domain name are the same:

User Name

For example: james.smith

• If the computer name and domain name are different:

Domain name\User name

For example: abcdnet\james.smith

(Case sensitive.)

3-40

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

The Folder (FTP) Address

Enter "Host Name", "Port", "Folder Path", "Login User Name" and "Login Password".

The table below explains the items to be entered.

4Check if the destination entry is correct > [Register]

The destination is added to the Address Book.

To add a new address to the One Touch Key, select [Register] and follow the on-screen

instructions to enter the necessary information.

NOTE

• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

•Select [Connection Test] to check the connection to the server you chose. If the

connection fails, check the entries you made.

Item Descriptions

Host Name*1

*1 "Host name" or "IP address"

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10])

Host name or IP address of FTP server

Port Port number

If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 21.

Folder Path*2

*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is

combined by the slash "/" not using the back-slash.

Path for the file to be stored

For example: User\ScanData

If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.

NOTE

• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

•Select [Connection Test] or [Connection Test (Encrypted TX)] to check the connection

to the FTP server you chose. If the connection fails, check the entries you made.

NOTE

Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key.

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (page 3-44)

3-41

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Add the group

Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a

group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit

Machine Address Book] > [Add] > [Group]

2Add the name.

1Enter an address number.

To have the number assigned automatically, select [Auto].

2Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book.

3Select the destinations.

Select destinations (contacts) to add to the group. Put a checkmark in the checkbox to select

an item and remove the checkmark to cancel the selection.

4Check if the group entry is correct > [Save]

The group is added to the Address Book.

To add a new address to the One Touch Key, select [Register] and follow the on-screen

instructions to enter the necessary information.

NOTE

To add a group, you need individually added destinations. Register one or more individual destinations as needed

before proceeding. Up to 100 destinations for the E-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, 100 destinations for the i-FAX,

and a total of 10 destinations for the FTP and SMB can be registered per group.

NOTE

• Address Number is an ID for a group. You can select any available number out of

2,000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.

• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears

when you select [Save] and the number cannot be registered. If you set [Auto] (0000)

as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.

NOTE

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-50)

NOTE

Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key.

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (page 3-44)

3-42

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Editing Address Book Entries

Edit the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit

Machine Address Book]

2Select [ ] (information icon) for the destination or group to edit.

2Edit the destination.

Editing a Contact

1Change "Name", "Address Number" and destination type and address.

2[Save] > [OK]

Editing a destination to a group

1Change "Name" and "Address Number".

2Change the destination. Put a checkmark in the checkbox to select an item and remove the

checkmark to cancel the selection.

3[Save] > [OK]

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Destination Search (page 5-48)

Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-37)

Add the group (page 3-41)

3-43

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Deleting Address Book Entries

Delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit

Machine Address Book]

2Select a destination or group to delete.

2[Delete] > [Delete]

Delete the contact or group.

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Destination Search (page 5-48)

3-44

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key

Assign a new destination (contact or group) to an one touch key.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [One-Touch Key] > [Add/Edit

One Touch Key]

2Add One Touch Keys.

1Select a One Touch Key number for the destination > [Add/Edit]

Enter a number in "Search (No.)" and select [ ] (search icon) to display that One Touch

Key.

Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.

2Enter the One Touch Key name displayed in the send base screen.

3Select [Destination].

The Address Book appears.

4Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number > [OK]

Selecting [ ] (information icon) shows the detailed information of the selected destination.

NOTE

• Refer to the following for use of One Touch Key.

Specifying Destination (page 5-47)

• You can add One Touch keys and change their settings on Command Center RX.

Registering Destinations (page 2-74)

• If registering and editing of the One Touch Keys is restricted to administrators, you can edit the One Touch Keys by

logging in with administrator privileges.

Edit Restriction (page 8-41)

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Destination Search (page 5-48)

'HOHWH

$GG(GLW

2QH7RXFK.H\ &ORVH

6HDUFK

1R

3-45

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

5Select [OK].

The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.

Editing One Touch Key

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [One-Touch Key] > [Add/

Edit One Touch Key]

2Select a One Touch Key number to edit.

Enter a number in "Search (No.)" and select [ ] (search icon) to display that One Touch

Key.

2Change the Registered Information.

1Change "Display Name".

2Select [Destination], and select a new destination (contact or group). Selecting [ ]

(information icon) shows the detailed information of the selected destination.

3[OK] > [OK]

Add the destination to the One Touch Key.

Deleting the Destination to the One Touch Key

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [One-Touch Key] > [Add/

Edit One Touch Key]

2Select a One Touch Key number to delete.

Enter a number in "Search (No.)" and select [ ] (search icon) to display that One Touch

Key.

2Delete the Registered Information.

[Delete] > [Delete]

The data registered in the One Touch Key is deleted.

NOTE

Select [ ] (information icon) for the One Touch Key to display the information registered

in the One Touch Key.

NOTE

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Destination Search (page 5-48)

4-1

4 Printing from PC

This chapter explains the following topics:

Printer Driver Print Settings Screen ................................................................................................................... 4-2

Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................................................ 4-3

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 10) .................................................................... 4-3

Printing from PC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-4

Printing on Standard Sized Paper ........................................................................................................... 4-4

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper .................................................................................................... 4-6

Banner Printing ........................................................................................................................................ 4-9

Canceling Printing from a Computer ...................................................................................................... 4-15

Printing from the Handheld Device .................................................................................................................. 4-16

Printing by AirPrint ................................................................................................................................. 4-16

Printing by Google Cloud Print .............................................................................................................. 4-16

Printing by Mopria .................................................................................................................................. 4-16

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ....................................................................................................................... 4-17

Printing with NFC ................................................................................................................................... 4-17

Printing Data Saved in the Printer .................................................................................................................... 4-18

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job .............................................................. 4-18

Printing Documents from Private Print Box ........................................................................................... 4-19

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ....................................................................... 4-19

Printing Document from Stored Job Box ............................................................................................... 4-20

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ......................................................................... 4-20

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box .............................................................................................. 4-21

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box ........................................................................ 4-21

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box ......................................................................................... 4-22

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box ................................................................... 4-22

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ................................................................................................. 4-23

Accessing the Status Monitor ................................................................................................................ 4-23

Exiting the Status Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 4-23

Quick View State .................................................................................................................................... 4-23

Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................................................. 4-24

Paper Tray Status Tab ........................................................................................................................... 4-24

Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 4-24

Alert Tab ................................................................................................................................................. 4-25

Status Monitor Context Menu ................................................................................................................ 4-25

Status Monitor Notification Settings ....................................................................................................... 4-26

4-2

Printing from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen

Printer Driver Print Settings Screen

The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings.

Printer Driver User Guide

No. Description

1 [Quick Print] tab

Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an icon, it changes to an

image resembling the print results and applies the settings.

[Basic] tab

This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size, destination, and duplex

printing.

[Layout] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine mode, poster printing,

and scaling.

[Finishing] tab

This tab lets you configure settings related to finishing of printed media, including binding and stapling.

[Imaging] tab

This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.

[Publishing] tab

This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.

[Job] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly used documents and

other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved documents can be printed directly from the

machine, this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that you don't want others to see.

[Advanced] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.

2[Profiles]

Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a convenient practice to

save frequently used settings.

3 [Reset]

Click to revert settings to their initial values.

4-3

Printing from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen

Displaying the Printer Driver Help

The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display

Help as explained below.

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings

(Windows 10)

The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when

printing. For the settings, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

1Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Windows

System], [Control Panel], and [Devices and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the

[Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.

3Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.

4Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.

1 Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of

the screen.

2 Click the item you want to know about.

NOTE

The Help appears, even when you click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.

4-4

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printing from PC

This section provides the printing method using the KX DRIVER.

Printing on Standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is included in the print sizes of the machine, select the paper size in the [Basic] tab of the

print settings screen of the printer driver.

1Display the screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

2Configure the settings.

1Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.

2Select the [Basic] tab.

NOTE

• To print the document from applications, install the printer driver downloaded from our website on your computer.

• In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer driver.

• When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multipurpose tray before

performing the following procedure.

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-6)

NOTE

Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel.

Paper Feeding (page 8-13)

4-5

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.

To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock or

envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select

the media type.

4Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.

3Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)

4-6

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab

of the print settings screen of the printer driver.

The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel],

and [View devices and printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click the [Preferences] button on the [General] tab.

2Register the paper size.

1Click the [Basic] tab.

2Click the [Page Size...] button.

3Click the [New] button.

NOTE

To execute printing at the machine, set the paper size and type in the following:

Paper Feeding (page 8-13)

NOTE

In Windows 8.1, in charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and then

[Devices and Printers].

4-7

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

4Enter the paper size.

5Enter the name of the paper.

6Click the [Save] button.

7Click the [OK] button.

8Click the [OK] button.

3Display the print settings screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

4Select the paper size and type of non-standard size paper.

1Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.

2Select the [Basic] tab.

4-8

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 2.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select

the media type.

4Select the paper source in the "Source" menu.

5Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.

5Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

NOTE

If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media

type" menu.

4-9

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Banner Printing

When a document length from 488.1 mm (19.22") to a maximum of 1,220 mm (48.03") is specified for printing, the print

job is treated as banner printing.

Follow the steps below to set banner paper in the printer driver.

1Display the screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

2Configure the settings.

1Select the machine from the "Name" menu and click the [Properties] button.

2Select the [Basic] tab.

3Click the [Page Size...] button.

Max. number of sheets 1 sheet (manual feed), 10 sheets (when optional banner tray is attached*)

* When the banner tray (option) is used, up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be fed continuously For details,

refer to the follows:

Using the Banner Tray (Option) (page 4-12)

Paper width 210 mm to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")

Paper length 488.1 mm to 1,220 mm (19.22" to 48.03")

Paper weight 136 to 163 g/m2

Media type Heavy 2

4-10

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

3Register the paper size.

1Click the [New] button.

2Enter the length (488.1 mm (19.22") or longer), and width of the custom paper size being

registered.

3Enter the name of the paper.

4Click the [Save] button.

5Click the [OK] button.

4Configure the print paper size.

1Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 3.

2Click "Source" menu and select [Multipurpose tray].

3Click "Media type" menu and select [Plain].

4Click the [OK] button.

NOTE

When banner printing, a resolution of 600 dpi is set.

4-11

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

5Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

When you execute printing in this case, a message appears on the machine's operation panel.

Place the paper in the multipurpose tray, continue to support it so that it does not fall, and

select [Continue]. If paper has been loaded beforehand, no message is displayed and printing

starts automatically.

Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when printing

multiple banner sheets.

IMPORTANT

• If an output tray that cannot be used for banner printing such as Mailbox (option) is

selected in the printer driver, the output tray automatically changes to a tray that

can be used.

• After pressing [Continue], support the paper with both hands so that it feeds in

correctly.

• After printing starts, catch the paper when it is output so that it does not fall. When

using the inner tray as the output location, do not stand up the stopper.

Message Banner Print (page 8-48)

4-12

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Using the Banner Tray (Option)

When the banner tray (option) is used, up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be fed continuously.

The operation procedure for setting the banner paper by using the printer driver is the same as that of using the

multipurpose tray.

Banner Printing (page 4-9)

1Open the multipurpose tray.

Open the multipurpose tray until it stops.

Do not extend the multipurpose auxiliary tray.

2Attach the banner tray.

1Release the paper width guide lock on the banner tray and open to the maximum width.

2Attach the banner tray to the multipurpose tray.

NOTE

The paper length supported in banner tray is 488.1 mm to 1,220 mm (18.5" to 48.03").

4-13

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

3Load paper.

1Open the paper width guides on the multipurpose tray to the maximum width.

Make sure that the banner tray is attached so that the paper width guides on the banner

tray are outside the paper width guides on the multipurpose tray.

2Load banner paper so that it passes under the paper clamp bar.

3Loop the banner paper back and place the end on the paper support.

4-14

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

4Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the paper.

5Adjust the paper width guides on the banner tray to the same width as the paper width

guides on the multipurpose tray and lock.

IMPORTANT

If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides

to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.

IMPORTANT

Remove the paper when banner printing finishes, or when you are not using the banner tray.

NOTE

The print confirmation screen can be set in System Menu to not appear when the banner tray is attached. This will

allow continuous printing on multiple sheets. Refer to the follows:

Message Banner Print (page 8-48)

4-15

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Canceling Printing from a Computer

To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:

1Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at

the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog

box for the printer.

2Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select

[Cancel] from the "Document" menu.

NOTE

When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following:

Canceling Jobs (page 5-22)

4-16

Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device

Printing from the Handheld Device

This machine supports the AirPrint, Google Cloud Print and Mopria. According to the supported OS and application, you

can print the job from any handheld device or computer without installing a printer driver.

Printing by AirPrint

AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later

products.

To use the AirPrint, make sure that the AirPrint setting is enabled in the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Printing by Google Cloud Print

Google Cloud Print is a printing service provided by Google. This service enables a user with a Google account to print

from a machine connected to the Internet.

The machine can be configured in the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Printing by Mopria

Mopria is a standard on printing function included in Android 4.4 or later products.

Mopria Print Service needs to be installed and enabled in advance.

For details on how to use, refer to a Web site of Mopria Alliance.

NOTE

A Google account is necessary to use Google Cloud Print. Obtain a Google account if you do not have one.

It is also necessary to register the machine with the Google Cloud Print service in advance. The machine can be

registered from a PC connected to the same network.

4-17

Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct is a wireless LAN standard that Wi-Fi Alliance has been established. This is one of the functions of the

wireless LAN, without a wireless LAN access point or wireless LAN router, between devices can communicate directly

on a peer to peer basis.

The printing procedure by the Wi-Fi Direct is the same as that from the normal handheld devices.

When you use a printer name or Bonjour name on the port settings of the printer property, you can print the job by

specifying the name at Wi-Fi Direct connection.

When you use an IP address for the port, specify the IP address of this machine.

Printing with NFC

When the Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct has been configured in advance, the network between this machine and handheld

device will be configured by simply tapping an NFC tag.

Configuring the Wireless Network (page 2-34)

Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-40)

4-18

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Data Saved in the Printer

You can save the print job into the Job Box of this device and print it as necessary.

If you configure settings in the [Job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box

(memory) and printing can be executed at the machine.

Follow the work flow below when using Job Box.

Specifying the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job. (page 4-18)

Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it.

You can print the documents from the following boxes.

Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 4-19)

Printing Document from Stored Job Box (page 4-20)

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box (page 4-21)

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box (page 4-22)

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job

1Click [File] and select [Print] in the application. The Print

dialog box displays.

2Select the machine from the "Name" menu.

3Click the [Properties] button. The Properties dialog box

displays.

4Click the [Job] tab and select the [Job storage (e-MPS)] check

box to set the function.

NOTE

For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

4-19

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Documents from Private Print Box

In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job

from the application software, specify a password in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by entering the

password on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. If you do not specify a password, you will be

able to print without entering a password. The data will be deleted upon completion of the print job or after the power

switch is turned off.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Private Print/Stored Job].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Enter the password.

If a password is not set, go to step 3.

3Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

4Select [Start Print].

Printing starts.

Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Private Print/Stored Job].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Delete the document.

1Select the document to delete > [Delete]

2If the document is protected by a password, enter the password.

The document is deleted.

'HOHWH3ULQW

8VHU

%DFN

1DPH 'DWHDQG7LPH 6L]H

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS



4-20

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Document from Stored Job Box

In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up a password as necessary.

If you set up a password, enter the password when printing. Print data will be stored in the Stored Job Box after printing.

This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Private Print/Stored Job].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Enter the password.

3Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

4Select [Start Print].

Printing starts.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Private Print/Stored Job].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Delete the document.

1Select the document to delete > [Delete]

2If the document is protected by a password, enter the password.

The document is deleted.

NOTE

If the document is protected by a password, the password entry screen will be displayed.

Enter the password.

4-21

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box

Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a

document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies

are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the touch panel. By default, up to 32 documents can be

stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

3Select [Start Print].

Printing starts.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Delete the document.

Select the document to delete > [Delete] > [Delete]

The document is deleted.

NOTE

• When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one.

• To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-49)

4-22

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box

The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining

copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while

maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the touch panel. You can

change the number of copies to print.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

3Select [Start Print].

Printing starts.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold

Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Delete the document.

Select the document to delete > [Delete] > [Delete]

The document is deleted.

4-23

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status

Monitor)

The Status Monitor monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function.

Accessing the Status Monitor

The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.

Exiting the Status Monitor

Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor.

• Exit manually:

Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor.

• Exit automatically:

The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used.

Quick View State

The status of the printer is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is

clicked.Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.

NOTE

When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below.

• KX DRIVER is installed.

•Either [Enhanced WSD] or [Enhanced WSD(SSL)] is enabled.

Network Settings (page 8-52)

1 Printing progress tab

2 Paper tray status tab

3 Toner status tab

4Alert tab

5 Expand button

6 Settings icon

12 3 45 6

4-24

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Printing Progress Tab

The status of the print jobs is displayed.

Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.

Paper Tray Status Tab

Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining.

Toner Status Tab

The amount of toner remaining is displayed.

1 Status icon

2 Job list

4-25

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Alert Tab

If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.

Status Monitor Context Menu

The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.

•Command Center RX

If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the

Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings. This menu is not displayed when using USB

connection.

Command Center RX User Guide

•Notification…

This sets the display of the Status Monitor.

Status Monitor Notification Settings (page 4-26)

•www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

Open our website.

•Exit

Exits the Status Monitor.

4-26

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Status Monitor Notification Settings

The Status Monitor settings and event list details are displayed.

Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.

1Select Enable event notification.

If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is

executed.

2Select an event to use with the text to speech function in

Available events.

3Click Sound file / Text to Speech column.

Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.

When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text box.

NOTE

The available file format is WAV.

5-1

Operation on the Machine

This chapter explains the following topics:

Loading Originals .......................................................... 5-2

Placing Originals on the Platen .......................... 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document Processor ... 5-3

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ....................... 5-6

Favorites ..................................................................... 5-11

Registering Favorites ....................................... 5-12

Recalling Favorites .......................................... 5-12

Editing Favorites .............................................. 5-13

Deleting Favorites ............................................ 5-13

Application .................................................................. 5-14

Installing Applications ...................................... 5-14

Activating Applications ..................................... 5-15

Deactivating Applications ................................. 5-16

Uninstalling Applications .................................. 5-16

Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document

Box Settings) .............................................................. 5-17

Adding Shortcuts ............................................. 5-17

Editing Shortcuts .............................................. 5-18

Deleting Shortcuts ........................................... 5-18

Copying ...................................................................... 5-19

Basic Operation ............................................... 5-19

Proof Copy ....................................................... 5-21

Interrupt Copy .................................................. 5-22

Canceling Jobs ................................................ 5-22

Frequently-Used Sending Method .............................. 5-23

Sending Document via E-mail .................................... 5-24

Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-24

Sending Scanned Document via E-mail .......... 5-24

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a

Computer (Scan to PC) .............................................. 5-26

Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-26

Sending Document to Desired Shared

Folder on a Computer ...................................... 5-26

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server

(Scan to FTP) ............................................................. 5-29

Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-29

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP

Server .............................................................. 5-29

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ................................... 5-31

Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-31

Scanning Document Using Application ............ 5-31

Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box ............. 5-32

Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-32

Scanning Document Stored in a Box ............... 5-32

Useful Sending Method .............................................. 5-34

WSD Scan .................................................................. 5-35

Installing the Driver .......................................... 5-35

Executing WSD scan ....................................... 5-36

DSM Scan .................................................................. 5-37

Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-37

Executing DSM Scan ....................................... 5-37

Scanning with File Management Utility ....................... 5-39

Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-39

Using FMU Connection to Scan an Original .... 5-39

Using MultiCrop Scan ................................................. 5-40

Configuring Settings before Scanning ............. 5-40

Using MultiCrop Scan to Send/Store an

Original ............................................................ 5-40

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi

Sending) ..................................................................... 5-42

Send to Me (Email) ..................................................... 5-43

Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-43

Sending a document to the mail address of

the logged in user ............................................ 5-43

Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send) ......... 5-44

Canceling Sending Jobs ............................................. 5-46

Handling Destination .................................................. 5-47

Specifying Destination ..................................... 5-47

Choosing from the Address Book .................... 5-47

Choosing from the One Touch Key .................. 5-49

Choosing from the Search (No.) ...................... 5-49

Checking and Editing Destinations .................. 5-50

Confirmation Screen of Destinations ............... 5-51

Recall ............................................................... 5-51

How to use the FAX Function ..................................... 5-52

Using Document Boxes .............................................. 5-53

What is Custom Box? ...................................... 5-53

What is Job Box? ............................................. 5-53

What is USB Drive Box? .................................. 5-54

Fax Box ........................................................... 5-54

Basic Operation for Document Box ................. 5-54

Creating a New Custom Box ........................... 5-58

Editing Custom Box ......................................... 5-59

Deleting Custom Box ....................................... 5-60

Storing Documents to a Custom Box .............. 5-60

Printing Documents in Custom Box ................. 5-61

Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box ... 5-62

Sending Documents in Custom Box ................ 5-63

Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-

mail Address of Logged in User ....................... 5-64

Moving Documents in Custom Box ................. 5-64

Copying Documents in Custom Box into

Other Boxes ..................................................... 5-65

Copying Documents in Custom Box to USB

Drive ................................................................ 5-65

Joining Documents in Custom Box .................. 5-66

Deleting Documents in Custom Box ................ 5-67

Job Box ...................................................................... 5-68

Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs ......................... 5-68

Form for Form Overlay .................................... 5-69

Operating using Removable USB Drive ..................... 5-70

Printing Documents Stored in Removable

USB Drive ........................................................ 5-70

Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to

USB) ................................................................ 5-72

Check the USB Drive Information .................... 5-73

Removing USB Drive ....................................... 5-73

Using the Internet Browser ......................................... 5-74

Launching and Exiting the Browser ................. 5-74

Using the Browser Screen ............................... 5-75

Manual Staple ............................................................ 5-76

5-2

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

Loading Originals

Load the originals on the platen or document processor, depending on the original size, type, volume, and function.

• Platen: Place the sheet, book, postcards, and envelopes.

• Document Processor: Place the multiple originals. You can also place the two sided originals.

Placing Originals on the Platen

You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.

When you place envelopes or cardstock on the platen

NOTE

• A5 is detected as A4-R. Set the paper size to A5 by using the function key on the touch panel.

Original Size (page 6-20)

• For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:

Original Orientation (page 6-26)

NOTE

For the procedure for feeding envelopes or cardstock, refer to the following:

When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray (page 5-8)

CAUTION

Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.

IMPORTANT

• Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass.

• When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document processor in the open position.

1 Put the scanning side facedown.

2 Align it flush against the original

size indicator plates with the back

left corner as the reference point.

1 Put the scanning side facedown.

2 Align it flush against the original

size indicator plates with the back

left corner as the reference point.

5-3

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

Loading Originals in the Document Processor

The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are

scanned.

The document processor supports the following types of originals.　

Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Otherwise, the originals may be jammed or the

document processor may become dirty.

• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before

loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)

• Originals with adhesive tape or glue

• Originals with cut-out sections

• Curled original

• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)

• Carbon paper

• Crumpled paper

Detail Document Processor (Automatic 2-Sided) Document Processor

(Dual scan DP)

Type DP-7140 DP-7150 DP-7160

DP-7170 (Skewed, Multifeed and

Staple Detection)

Weight 45 to 160 g/m2

(duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2)

35 to 160 g/m2

(duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2)

35 to 220 g/m2

(duplex: 50 to 220 g/m2)

Sizes Maximum A3/Ledger

(11.69" × 17"/ 297 × 432 mm)

(Long-sized 11.69" × 63"/

297 × 1,600 mm) to Minimum

A5-R/Statement-R

(5.51" × 8.27"/140 × 210 mm)

Maximum A3/Ledger

(11.69" × 17"/ 297 × 432 mm)

(Long-sized 11.69" × 63"/

297 × 1,600 mm) to Minimum

A6-R/Statement-R

(4.13" × 5.82"/105 × 148 mm)

Maximum A3/Ledger

(11.69" × 17"/ 297 × 432 mm)

(Long-sized 11.69" × 74.8"/

297 × 1,900 mm) to Minimum

A6-R/Statement-R

(4.13" × 5.82"/105 × 148 mm)

No. of

sheets

Plain paper (80 g/m2), Recycled

paper, Vellum paper: 50 sheets

Thick paper (120 g/m2):

33 sheets

Art paper: 1 sheet

Plain paper (80 g/m2), Recycled

paper, Vellum paper: 140 sheets

(Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)

Thick paper (120 g/m2):

93 sheets

Art paper: 1 sheet

Plain paper (80 g/m2), Recycled

paper, Vellum paper: 320 sheets

(A4 or less), 200 sheets (A3, B4)

(Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)

Thick paper (120 g/m2):

180 sheets

Art paper: 1 sheet

IMPORTANT

• Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on

the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.

• Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the top

cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.

5-4

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

1Adjust the original width guides.

2Place the originals.

1Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the

leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go. The original loaded indicator

lights when the original is placed correctly.

NOTE

For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:

Original Orientation (page 6-26)

IMPORTANT

• Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap,

readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.

• Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the

maximum level may cause the originals to jam.

• Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way

that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).

DP-7140 /

DP-7150

DP-7160 /

DP-7170

5-5

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

2Open the original stopper to fit the size of the original set.

Document Processor (Reverse Automatic)/Document Processor (Dual Scan)

DP-7140

DP-7150

Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed, Multifeed and Staple Detection)

(Original size: A4/Letter or less)

(Original size: B4/Legal or more)

5-6

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

The multipurpose tray will hold up to 150 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2).

For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following:

Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 11-14)

For the paper type setting, refer to the following:

Media Type Setting (page 8-16)

Be sure to use the multipurpose tray when you print on any special paper.

The capacity of the multipurpose tray is as follows.

• A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 150 sheets

• B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets

• Thick paper (209 g/m2): 10 sheets

• Thick paper (157 g/m2): 50 sheets

• Thick paper (104.7 g/m2): 50 sheets

• Hagaki (Cardstock): 30 sheets

• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Kakugata 2,

Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Younaga 3, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4: 10 sheets

• OHP film: 10 sheet

• Coated: 10 sheets

• Banner paper: 488.1 mm (19.22") to a maximum of 1,220 mm (48.03"): 1 sheet (manual feed), 10 sheets (when

optional banner tray is attached)

• Index tab dividers: 15 sheets

1Open the multipurpose tray.

IMPORTANT

• If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the

paper you are using.

• Remove each transparency from the inner tray as it is printed. Leaving transparencies in the inner tray may

cause a paper jam.

NOTE

• When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:

Paper Feeding (page 8-13)

• When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to the

following:

MP Tray Settings (page 8-14)

• Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following:

Paper Selection (page 6-21)

MP Tray Settings (page 8-14)

5-7

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

2Adjust the multipurpose tray size.

Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.

3Load paper.

Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.

After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

multipurpose tray.

4Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using

the operation panel.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

IMPORTANT

• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing down.

• Curled paper must be uncurled before use.

• When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left

over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small

amount of paper left over in the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first

remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before

loading the paper back into the tray.

• If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides

to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.

MP Tray Settings (page 8-14)

5-8

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray

Load the paper with the print side facing down. For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

Example: When printing the address.

1 Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard)

2 Hagaki (Cardstocks)

3 Portrait form envelopes (Open the flap)

4 Landscape form envelopes (Close the

flap)

IMPORTANT

• Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard).

• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to

load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.

NOTE

• When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following:

MP Tray Settings (page 8-14)

• When you load cardstocks in the multipurpose tray, open the stopper as shown below.

1234

5-9

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

Loading Index Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

1Prepare paper.

Sort the pages so that the 1st page is at the back.

2Orient the paper in the same orientation.

Place the paper print side down, oriented so that the tabs are on the trailing side of the paper

when it feeds in.

123

112233

5-10

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

3Load paper.

Load paper in the tray.

For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

Index paper must meet the following conditions.

Item Description

Paper size A4/Letter

Paper weight 136 to 256 g/m2

Number of tabs 1 to 15

Length of tabs 30 mm or less

112233

5-11

Operation on the Machine > Favorites

Favorites

After you add frequently used functions to Favorites, you can recall them quickly and easily. You can also name the

favorites for easy identification when recalling.

The favorites below have been preregistered. The registered contents can be re-registered for easier use in your

environment.

Favorite name Description Default Registration

ID Card Copy Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or an

insurance card.

When you scan the front and back of the card, both sides

will be combined and copied onto a single sheet.

• Copying Functions

•Color: [Black & White]

Original Size: [A5]/[Statement]

Paper Selection: [Cassette 1]

Zoom: [100%]

Erase Shadowed Areas: [On]

Eco Copy Use this to save toner consumption when printing.

This changes color printing to black & white with lighter

density, so that the toner consumption can be reduced.

• Copying Functions

•Color: [Black & White]

EcoPrint: [On] (Level [5])

Newspaper Copy Use this when you want to copy a newspaper article, or

other originals printed on a colored substrate.

This adjusts the image quality so that the color of the

substrate or the text on the reverse side will not show on

the copy.

• Copying Functions

•Color: [Black & White]

Prevent Bleed-thru: [On]

Background Density Adj.: [Auto]

Technical Drawing Copy Use this when you want to copy a drawing that contains

shapes drawn with lines, and graphics. Use this also

when you want to copy colored lines in black & white.

• Copying Functions

•Color: [Black & White]

Original Image: [Text]

Sharpness (All): [+3]

Background Density Adj.: [Auto]

Confidential Stamp Use this to show a translucent text "Confidential" on the

center of the document.

• Copying Functions

• Color: [Black & White]

Prevent Bleed-thru: [On]

Stamp: [Confidential]

Font Size: [middle]

Font Color: [Black]

Stamp Position: [Center]

Display Pattern: [Transparent]

Highlighter Copy Use this when you want to clearly print out the color of

text and lines written/drawn by a highlighter pen, which

are normally difficult to copy.

Copying Functions

Color: [Full Color]

Original Image: [Text+Photo]

[Book /Magazine]

Highlighter Enhancement: [On (Bright)]

Vivid Copy Use this when you want to make a copy with an overall

vivid appearance.

• Copying Functions

•Color: [Full Color]

Original Image: [Text+Photo]

[Book /Magazine]

One-touch Image Adjust: [Vivid]

NOTE

• Up to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the favorites.

• If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.

5-12

Operation on the Machine > Favorites

Registering Favorites

The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.

Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Copy]

2Select [Favorites] while the copy mode is accessed.

1[Add/Edit] > Select a number (01 to 50) for the favorite number

2Enter the new favorite name > [Register]

The favorite is registered.

To display a registered favorite on the Home screen, select [Add] on the confirmation

screen that appears.

3Select [OK].

Recalling Favorites

1Recall the favorite.

1[Home] key > [...] > [Favorites] or select the icon of a favorite.

If you selected the icon of a favorite, that favorite will be recalled. If you selected

[Favorites], proceed to step 1-2.

2Select the favorite number you want to recall.

Select [Search] to enter the favorite number (01 to 50) directly for recalling.

2Execute the favorite.

Place the originals > [Start] key

NOTE

If you register on a favorite number already registered, delete the currently registered

favorite before registering.

NOTE

If the favorite cannot be recalled, the Document Box or the form overlay specified in the

favorite might have been deleted. Check the Document Box.

NOTE

[Favorites] can be selected in each function to call up the favorite registered for the

function.

5-13

Operation on the Machine > Favorites

Editing Favorites

You can change favorite number and favorite name.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [Favorites]

2Select [Add/Edit].

2Edit the favorite.

1Select corresponding to the favorite number (01 to 50) to change.

2Select [Edit] to change the favorite number and favorite name.

3[OK] > [OK]

Deleting Favorites

1 Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [Favorites]

2Select [Add/Edit].

2Delete the favorite.

1Select corresponding to the favorite number (01 to 50) to delete.

2[Delete] > [Delete]

Registering Favorites (page 5-12)

5-14

Operation on the Machine > Application

Application

The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing applications.

Applications that help you perform your daily more efficiently such as a scan feature and an authentication feature are

available.

For details, consult your sales representative or dealer.

Installing Applications

To use applications, first install the application in the machine and then activate the application.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Add/Delete Application] > "Application" [Add/Delete

Application]

2Install the application.

1[Add] > [OK]

2Insert the USB drive containing the application to be installed into the USB Memory Slot.

3Select the application to be installed > [Install]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ] (information

icon).

NOTE

You can install applications and certificates on the machine. The number of applications you can run may vary

according to the type of application.

NOTE

• If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with

privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login password

are set as shown below.

•Select [Print Report] to print an application report.

NOTE

When the message "USB Drive is recognized. Displaying files." is displayed, select

[Cancel].

5-15

Operation on the Machine > Application

4Select [Yes].

Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the

installation may take some time.

Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.

Activating Applications

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Add/Delete Application] > "Application" [Add/Delete

Application]

2Activate the application.

1Select the desired application > [Activate]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ] (information

icon).

2Enter the license key > [Official]

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen

does not appear, go to step 2-3. To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without

entering the license key.

3Select [Yes].

4Select the application icon in the Home screen.

Select the application icon.

The application will start up.

NOTE

• To install another application, repeat steps 2-3 and 2-4.

• To remove the USB drive, select [Remove USB] and wait until the message "USB

Drive can be safely removed." appears. Then remove the USB drive.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with

privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login password

are set as shown below.

IMPORTANT

• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you

will no longer be able to use the application.

• Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.

5-16

Operation on the Machine > Application

Deactivating Applications

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Add/Delete Application] > "Application" [Add/Delete

Application]

2Deactivate the application.

Select the desired application to exit > [Deactivate]

Uninstalling Applications

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Add/Delete Application] > "Application" [Add/Delete

Application]

2Deactivate the application.

1Select the application you want to delete > [Delete]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ] (information

icon).

2Select [Yes].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with

privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login password

are set as shown below.

NOTE

•Select [x] on the screen if you want to exit the already activated application.

• The procedure for exiting some applications may differ.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with

privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login password

are set as shown below.

5-17

Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)

Registering Shortcuts

(Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)

You can register shortcuts for easy access to the frequently used functions. A function name linked to a registered

shortcut can be changed as necessary.

Adding Shortcuts

Shortcut registration is performed in the basic screen of each function.

1Display the basic screen you want to register.

2Register the shortcuts.

1Select [Shortcut].

Display the shortcut menu.

2Select [Add].

3Select the settings you want to add > [Next >]

4Enter the shortcut name > [Next >].

5Confirm the entry.

Select [Shortcut Name], [Function], or [Permission] to change the settings.

6Select [Finish].

The shortcut is registered.

NOTE

The function name will be displayed if you do not enter a shortcut key.

NOTE

[Permission] is displayed when the user login administration is enabled.

,'&DUG&RS\

&ORVH

$GG

$GG(GLW6KRUWFXW

'HOHWH

(GLW

)DYRULWHV

3UHYLHZ

=RRP

6KRUWFXW

3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

$XWR

&RORU6HOHFWLRQ

)XOO&RORU

&RPELQH

2II



'XSOH[

VLGHG!!

VLGHG

6WDSOH3XQFK

2II

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

1XPHULF

.H\SDG

,'&DUG

&RS\

'HQVLW\

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

&RSLHV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5-18

Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)

Editing Shortcuts

1Display the screen.

1Select [Shortcut].

Display the shortcut menu.

2Select [ ] (edit icon).

2Edit the shortcut.

1Select the shortcut key you want to edit.

2Select [Edit].

3Select [Shortcut Name] or [Function] > Change the settings > [OK].

4[Finish] > [Update]

Deleting Shortcuts

1Display the screen.

1Select [Shortcut].

Display the shortcut menu.

2Select [ ] (edit icon).

2Delete the shortcut.

Select the shortcut key you want to delete > [Delete] > [Delete]

5-19

Operation on the Machine > Copying

Copying

The procedures here represent the basic copy operation and how to cancel the copy.

Basic Operation

1[Home] key > [Copy]

2Place the originals.

3Select the functions.

To configure the settings for functions, select the Global Navigation.

4Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.

Select the area for inputting the number of sheets to display the numeric keypad. Or, use [+] or

[-] to enter the number of sheets. Specify the desired number up to 9999.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

About Functions Available on the Machine (page 6-2)

=RRP3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

$XWR

&RORU6HOHFWLRQ

)XOO&RORU

2II



'XSOH[

VLGHG!!

VLGHG

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

2II

(QWHU

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

&RSLHV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5-20

Operation on the Machine > Copying

5Check the preview image.

Select [Preview] tab > [Preview] to show a preview image.

Original Preview (page 2-23)

6Press the [Start] key.

Copying begins.

NOTE

This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the

original will be scanned while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the

reserved copy job is printed. If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [Off], [Reserve Next] will

appear. Select [Reserve Next] and configure the necessary settings for the copy job.

Reserve Next Priority (page 8-34)

)DYRULWHV

3UHYLHZ

=RRP

6KRUWFXW

3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

$XWR

&RORU6HOHFWLRQ

)XOO&RORU

&RPELQH

2II



'XSOH[

VLGHG!!

VLGHG

6WDSOH3XQFK

2II

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

1XPHULF

.H\SDG

,'&DUG

&RS\

3UHYLHZ

2ULJLQDO

3DSHU

=RRP

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

&RSLHV

3URRI&RS\

5HVHUYH

1H[W

&DQFHO 6FDQQLQJ

6FDQ6HWWLQJV 3ULQW6HWWLQJV

$

䠂

$

-RE1R -RE1DPH8VHU1DPH  GRF

6FDQQHG3DJHV

7RS(GJHRQ7RS

VLGHG

3ODLQ

FRSLHV

037UD\

VLGHG

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

5-21

Operation on the Machine > Copying

Proof Copy

It is possible to copy one sheet before copying a large number of sheets. This enables you to check the contents and

finishing and copy the desired number of sheets without scanning the original if you are satisfied with the result. If you

want to make changes, you can change the settings and copy only one sheet again.

1Configure the settings.

Place the originals onto the machine, and configure the copy settings.

2Select [Preview] tab > [Proof Copy].

A confirmation copy is printed.

3Check.

Check contents and finishing.

Modify copy settings according to results. All functions except for functions whose keys are

grayed out on the touch panel can be corrected.

To perform a proof copy again, select [Proof Copy].

4Press the [Start] key.

Remaining sheets are copied.

)DYRULWHV

3UHYLHZ

=RRP

6KRUWFXW

3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

$XWR

&RORU6HOHFWLRQ

)XOO&RORU

&RPELQH

2II



'XSOH[

VLGHG!!

VLGHG

6WDSOH3XQFK

2II

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

1XPHULF

.H\SDG

,'&DUG

&RS\

3UHYLHZ

2ULJLQDO

3DSHU

=RRP

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

&RSLHV

3URRI&RS\

5-22

Operation on the Machine > Copying

Interrupt Copy

This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.

When the interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.

1Configure the settings.

1Select the [Interrupt] key.

The current print job is temporarily interrupted.

2Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy, and configure the copy settings.

2Press the [Start] key.

Interrupt copying begins.

3When interrupt copying ends, select the [Interrupt] key.

The machine resumes the paused print jobs.

Canceling Jobs

1Select the [Stop] key with the copy screen displayed.

2Cancel a job.

When there is a job is being scanned

The copy job is canceled.

When there is a job printing or on standby

Canceling job screen appears. The current print job is temporarily interrupted.

Select the job you wish to cancel > [Cancel] > [Yes]

NOTE

• If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and

printing resumes.

You can change the delay until interrupt copying is canceled. Change the delay as required.

Interrupt Clear Timer (page 8-9)

• The interrupt copy function may be unavailable depending on the status of document finisher usage. In this case, try

the priority override.

Priority Override (page 6-79)

NOTE

If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [Off], the Copying screen appears in the touch panel. In such case, selecting the

[Stop] key or [Cancel] will cancel the printing job in progress.

Reserve Next Priority (page 8-34)

5-23

Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method

Frequently-Used Sending Method

This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In

order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.

A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send E-mail. It is

recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.

Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.

• Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry): Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.

Sending Document via E-mail (page 5-24)

• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC.

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 5-26)

• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 5-29)

• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program.

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA (page 5-31)

NOTE

• Different sending options can be specified in combination.

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-42)

• The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.

FAX Operation Guide

5-24

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail

Sending Document via E-mail

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-69)

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending an E-mail, configure the SMTP and E-mail settings using the Command Center RX.

E-mail Settings (page 2-70)

Sending Scanned Document via E-mail

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

3In the destination screen for sending, select [+] > [Email]

4Enter destination E-mail address > [OK]

Up to 256 characters can be entered.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. Up to

100 E-mail addresses can be specified.

You can register the entered E-mail address in the Address Book by selecting [

Add to Address

Book

]. You can also replace the information for a previously registered destination.

Destinations can be changed later.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-51)

NOTE

If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be entered.

Broadcast (page 8-37)

5-25

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail

5Select the functions.

Select the Global Navigation to display other functions.

Send (page 6-6)

6Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

IMPORTANT

• [Email Encrypted TX] and [Digital Signature to Email] appear when setting S/MIME

on the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

• When using [Email Encrypted TX] and [Digital Signature to Email], specify the E-

mail addresses which have encryption certificate, from the address book. The

directly-entered address can not be configured these functions. When entering E-

mail address from the operation panel, you can not use these functions.

5-26

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

Sending Document to Desired Shared

Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

You can store the scanned document into the desired shared folder on a computer.

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending a document, configure the following settings.

• Make a note of the computer name and full computer name

• Make a note of the user name and domain name

• Create a shared folder and make a note of a shared folder

• Configure the Windows firewall

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a

Computer

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-69)

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

3In the destination screen for sending, select [+] > [SMB]

4Enter the destination information.

• To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select [Search Folder from Network] or

[Search Folder by Host Name].

If you selected [Search Folder from Network], you can search all PCs on the network for

a destination.

If you pressed [Search Folder by Host Name], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup",

and "Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.

Making a Note of the Computer Name and Full Computer Name (page 3-22)

Making a Note of the User Name and Domain Name (page 3-22)

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder (page 3-23)

Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-27)

5-27

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

Up to 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to

specify in the screen that appears, and select [OK]. The login user name and login

password entry screen appears.

After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the

shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [OK]. The

address of the selected shared folder is set.

Select the folder from the Search Results list.

• To directly specify the SMB folder, select [Folder Path Entry] and enter each item.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

The table below lists the items to be set.

5Check the status.

1Check the information.

Change the delay as required.

Item Description Max.

characters

Host Name*1

*1 Enter the Host name or IP address.

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10])

Computer name Up to

256 characters

Port Port number

If the port number is not specified, the default port

number is 445.

―

Folder Path Share name

For example:

scannerdata

If saving in a folder in the shared folder:

share name\folder name in shared folder

Up to

260 characters

*2 Domain name\User name

For example: abcdnet\james.smith

When sending a document through an optional network interface (IB-50 or IB-51), "\" cannot be

used. If the computer name is different from the domain name, login user name needs to be input

by using "@."

(Example: james.smith@abcdnet)

• If the computer name and domain name are the

same:

User Name

For example: james.smith

• If the computer name and domain name are

different:

Up to

64 characters

(Case sensitive.)

Up to

128 characters

5-28

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

2Select [Connection Test] to check the connection.

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If

"Cannot connect." appears, review the entry.

To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.

You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add to

Address Book].

6Select [OK].

Destinations can be changed later.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-51)

7Select the functions.

Select the Global Navigation to display other functions.

Send (page 6-6)

8Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

NOTE

If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be entered.

Broadcast (page 8-37)

5-29

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP

Server (Scan to FTP)

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending a document, configure the FTP Client (Transmission).

Protocol Settings (page 8-59)

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-69)

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

3In the destination screen for sending, select [+] > [FTP]

4Enter the destination information.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

The table below lists the items to be set.

Item Descriptions Max. characters

Host Name*1

*1 To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10])

Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64 characters

Port Port number

If the port number is not specified, the default port

number is 21.

―

Folder Path*2

*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the

slash "/" not using the back-slash.

Path for the file to be stored

For example: User\ScanData

If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home

directory.

Up to

128 characters

5-30

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)

5Check the status.

1Check the information.

Change the delay as required.

2Select [Connection Test] to check the connection.

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If

"Cannot connect." appears, review the entry.

To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.

You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add to

Address Book].

6Select [OK].

Destinations can be changed later.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-51)

7Select the functions.

Select the Global Navigation to display other functions.

Send (page 6-6)

8Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

NOTE

If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be entered.

Broadcast (page 8-37)

5-31

Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN or WIA

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-69)

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending a document, confirm that TWAIN/WIA driver is installed on a computer and the settings are configured.

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-60)

Setting WIA Driver (page 2-62)

Scanning Document Using Application

This subsection explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The WIA driver is used in the same way.

1Display the screen.

1Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.

2Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.

2Configure the scan settings.

Select scanning settings in the dialog box that opens.

3Place the originals.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

4Scan the originals.

Click the [Scan] button. The document data is scanned.

NOTE

For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application

software.

NOTE

For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.

5-32

Operation on the Machine > Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box

Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box

Follow the steps as below for scanning a document stored in a custom box using the TWAIN driver.

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-69)

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending a document, confirm that TWAIN driver is installed on a computer and the settings are configured.

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-60)

Scanning Document Stored in a Box

This subsection explains how to scan an original using an application supporting TWAIN.

1Display the screen.

1Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.

2Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.

2Display lists of documents.

1Select a custom box stored a document. If a password has been set for the box, the

password entry screen appears. Enter the password and click the [OK] button. When you

select a box, the document files in the Custom Box appear in "Document List".

2Set how to display the document data. Click the [Setting] button to select each item.

3Click [OK] button.

NOTE

To load a document saved in the Custom Box, select the model name with (Box) from “Model” on the TWAIN driver

configuration screen.

NOTE

For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application

software.

NOTE

For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.

5-33

Operation on the Machine > Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box

3Scan the originals.

1Select the document data to be scanned from [Document List].

Enter the document data name in the Search (Name) to find the data having the same

document data name or the document data name with the same beginning.

Click the [Detail] button to display the selected document data. When the document data

includes multiple pages, select the checkbox beside the pages you want to scan. The

selected pages will be scanned.

2Click the [Acquire] button.

The document data is scanned.

NOTE

In this case, the scanned page or the selected document data will not be deleted from

the Custom Box.

5-34

Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method

Useful Sending Method

You can specify the following useful scanning (sending) methods.

• WSD Scan: Saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.

WSD Scan (page 5-35)

• DSM Scan: A scanned document can be automatically saved in any format or sent to any destination by reading a

scan process from Active Directory.

DSM Scan (page 5-37)

• Scanning with File Management Utility: Scans a document using the settings of File Management Utility and saves it

to a specified network folder or PC.

Scanning with File Management Utility (page 5-39)

• Scanning using the fax server: A scanned original is send via a fax server.

Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send) (page 5-44)

• Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending): Sends to different types of destination (E-mail addresses,

folders, etc.) in a single operation.

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-42)

• Send to Me (Email): Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled.

Send to Me (Email) (page 5-43)

5-35

Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan

WSD Scan

WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-69)

Installing the Driver

For Windows 10

1Right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control

Panel] and then [View devices and printer].

2Install the driver.

Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].

When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the

installation is completed.

For Windows 8.1 and Microsoft Windows Server 2012

1Click [Search] in charms, [Control Panel], and then [View

devices and printers].

2Install the driver.

Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].

When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the

installation is completed.

NOTE

• To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected, and

"WSD Scan" is set to [On] in the network settings.

WSD Scan (page 8-59)

• For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.

5-36

Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan

Executing WSD scan

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

3Display the screen.

In the destination screen for sending, select [+] > [WSD Scan]

4Scan the originals.

Procedure using this machine

1[From Operation Panel] > [Next]

2Select the destination computer > [OK]

Select [Reload] to reload the computer list.

You can view information on the selected computer by selecting [ ] (information icon).

3Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.

4Press the [Start] key.

Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.

Procedure from Your Computer

1[From Computer] > [Start]

2Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.

5-37

Operation on the Machine > DSM Scan

DSM Scan

A scanned document can be automatically saved in any format or sent to any destination by reading a scan process

from Active Directory. For details, refer to Windows Server Help.

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-69)

Configuring Settings before Sending

If you are performing DSM scan, check the items below.

• The machine is connected to an Active Directory on the network that the scan process can reference.

• "DSM Scan", "LDAP" and "HTTP" are set to [On] in Network.

• "Network" [SSL] is set to [On] in Security Settings.

•[Network Authentication] is set in.

Executing DSM Scan

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

3Display the screen.

In the destination screen for sending, select [+] > [DSM Scan]

Protocol Settings (page 8-59)

SSL (page 8-82)

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the Active Directory that the scan process can reference is not on the network authentication server, DSM must be

set in Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear. In this event, select

[Cancel] to display the destination screen for sending.

5-38

Operation on the Machine > DSM Scan

4Select the scan process to be used > [OK].

Select [Reload] to reload the computer list.

To check the settings, select [ ] (information icon).

5Change the settings and add destinations as needed.

Only E-mail addresses can be added as destinations.

In the send destination screen, select [Detail/Edit], [Destination], and then [Address Book]

or [E-mail Addr Entry], and add a destination.

In some scan processes, it may not be possible to change settings or add destinations.

6Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

5-39

Operation on the Machine > Scanning with File Management Utility

Scanning with File Management Utility

"FMU Connection" is installed on the machine as a standard application.

FMU Connection can be used to scan an original according to the settings configured with "File Management Utility"

downloaded from our website, and save the image data and scanning information on a specified server or in a specified

folder. Unlike regular transmission functions, this application lets you use metadata such as the scan date and time and

the data format.

Configuring Settings before Sending

The first time you use FMU Connection, you must enable it in System Menu.

Add/Delete Application (page 8-82)

To use this function, you must install File Management Utility on your computer and configure settings for the

multifunction machine to be used, scanning conditions, and the file save location. To install File Management Utility, refer

to the following.

Installing Software (page 2-50)

Using FMU Connection to Scan an Original

1Make sure that File Management Utility is running on the

computer (or server) on which File Management Utility is

installed.

2Place the original.

3Select [FMU Connection].

FMU Connection starts.

4Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary

information and select [Next].

5When the scan settings screen appears, select each item and

configure the necessary settings.

The features that can be set depend on File Management Utility.

6Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

NOTE

For information on using File Management Utility, refer to the following:

File Management Utility User Guide

5-40

Operation on the Machine > Using MultiCrop Scan

Using MultiCrop Scan

MultiCrop Scan is installed as a standard application in this machine.

Using MultiCrop Scan function, you can scan multiple receipts, invoices, business cards, etc., cut them out individually,

file them, and send them to a specified destination or save them on a USB drive.

Configuring Settings before Scanning

The first time you use MultiCrop Scan function, you must enable it in System Menu.

Add/Delete Application (page 8-82)

Using MultiCrop Scan to Send/Store an Original

1Place the original.

2[Home] key > [MultiCrop Scan]

MultiCrop Scan function starts.

3Select [Send] or [Store to USB].

1When selecting [Send], select [Address book] or [Manual entry] to add the destinations.

When selecting [Store to USB], select [Open] or [Back] to specify the location to store the

file in USB drive, and go to step 4.

2When selecting [Address book], select the destination to send the file and then select

[Back].

Sending method are SMB, FTP and E-mail. Up to 10 destinations are selected.

When selecting [Manual entry], add details of destination and select [Add to list].

3Confirm whether the selected destinations are correct.

NOTE

To send to the specified destination, configure the network.

Network Setup (page 2-32)

IMPORTANT

• Before placing originals, clean the platen glass.

• Place the original and close the cover of Document Processor to use. MultiCrop

Scan.

• Allow at least 15 mm between originals.

• Use square originals for scanning correctly.

• A maximum of 16 original sizes from 50 × 50 mm to 210 × 210 mm can be detected.

Areas longer than 210mm are clipped and scanned.

NOTE

• The maximum number of continuous scanning pages is 982.

• Using MultiCrop Scan, you can correct the skew of the original (range of -45 degrees

clockwise). Place the originals so that the correct scan results are obtained.

5-41

Operation on the Machine > Using MultiCrop Scan

4Select [Scan & send].

5Configure the functions.

You can use or combine the following functions.

For details of each function, access to the reference page in the table.

Select [<] or [>] to move the function pages.

6Select [Start Scanning].

The originals are scanned, and sent them to the specified destinations or stored them to the

USB drive.

Item Value Reference Page

File Format PDF, TIFF, JPEG page 6-84

Image Quality Low to High (5 levels) -

Color Selection Full Color, Black & White, Grayscale page 6-38

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left,

Auto

page 6-26

Scan Resolution 200 x 200 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400

dpi, 600 x 600 dpi

page 6-91

File Separation ON, OFF page 6-91

Continuous Scan ON, OFF page 6-76

Density -4.0 (Lighter) to ;4.0 (Darker) page 6-35

File Name Enter the file name (within 32

characters).

You can also add [Job No.] and [Data

and Time] .

page 6-78

Border Erase Standard, Full Scan, Border Erase

Sheet, Border Erase Book, Individual

Border Erase

page 6-53

5-42

Operation on the Machine > Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)

Sending to Different Types of Destinations

(Multi Sending)

You can specify destinations that combine E-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP), fax numbers and i-FAX. This is

referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in

a single operation.

No. of broadcast items: Up to 500

However, number of items are restricted for the following sending options.

• E-mail: Up to 100

• Folders (SMP, FTP): Total of 10 SMB and FTP

• i-FAX: Up to 100

Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.

Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or

folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the [Start] key to start transmission to all destinations at one

time.

NOTE

• If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.

• If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be specified.

Broadcast (page 8-37)

5-43

Operation on the Machine > Send to Me (Email)

Send to Me (Email)

When user login is enabled, the document is sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.

Configuring Settings before Sending

To use this function, configure the followings.

• To use this function, the function icon must be displayed in the home screen.

Editing the Home Screen (page 2-15)

• An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

Sending a document to the mail address of the logged

in user

1Select [Home] key.

2Select [Send to Me (Email)].

5-44

Operation on the Machine > Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send)

Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server

Send)

You can send a scanned document via a fax server.

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

3Display the screen.

In the destination screen for sending, select [+] > [Fax Server]

4Enter recipient information.

Entering Information Directly

1Select [Fax No. Entry].

2Enter the fax number > [OK]

Destinations can be changed later.

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-50)

Selecting from the Address Book

1Select [Address Book].

2Specify the destination > [OK]

Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-47)

Destinations can be changed later.

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-50)

NOTE

• A fax server is required to use this function. For information about the fax server, contact the applicable

administrator.

• FAX server settings must be configured to send a FAX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Fax Server (page 8-68)

NOTE

Use the numeric keys to enter a number.

5-45

Operation on the Machine > Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send)

Selecting from an External Address Book

1Select [Ext Address Book].

2Specify the destination > [OK]

Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-47)

Destinations can be changed later.

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-50)

5Select the functions.

Select the Global Navigation to display other functions.

Send (page 6-6)

6Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

NOTE

For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

5-46

Operation on the Machine > Canceling Sending Jobs

Canceling Sending Jobs

1Select the [Stop] key with the send screen displayed.

2Cancel a job.

When there is a job is being scanned

Job Cancel appears.

When there is a job sending or on standby

Canceling job screen appears.

Select the job you wish to cancel > [Cancel] > [Yes]

NOTE

Selecting the [

Stop

] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.

5-47

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Handling Destination

This section explains how to select and confirm the destination.

Specifying Destination

Select the destination using either of the following methods except entering address directly:

• Choosing from the Address Book

• Choosing from the External Address Book

• For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

• Choosing from One Touch key

• Choosing from the Search (No.)

• Choosing from the FAX

Choosing from the Address Book

For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to the following:

Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-37)

1In the destination screen for sending, select [ ] (Address

Book icon).

2Select the destinations.

Select the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. The selected destinations

are indicated by a checkmark in the check box. To use an address book on the LDAP server,

select [Selection] > [Address Book] > [Ext Address Book].

You can change the order in which the destinations are listed by selecting [Name] or [No.].

Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-47)

Command Center RX User Guide

Choosing from the One Touch Key (page 5-49)

Choosing from the Search (No.) (page 5-49)

FAX Operation Guide

NOTE

• You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you select the [Send] key.

Default Screen (page 8-37)

• If you are using the products equipped with the fax function, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the other

party number using the numeric keypad.

NOTE

For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

5-48

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Destination Search

Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched. Advanced search by type or by

initial letter is also available.

3Accept the destination > [OK]

Destinations can be changed later.

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-50)

NOTE

• To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

• If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be selected. This also

applies to a group in which multiple destinations are registered.

Broadcast (page 8-37)

Keys used Search type Subjects searched

1Filter Advanced search by type of registered destination (Email,

Folder, Fax, iFax or Group). (Fax: Only when the optional

FAX Kit is installed. iFax: Only when the optional Internet

FAX Kit is activated.)

You can set this function up so that destination types are

selected when the address book is displayed. For details,

refer to the following:

Narrow Down (page 8-41)

2Search (No.) Search by registered address number or name. Select either

[Search (No.)] or [Search (Name)] to switch between

[Search (No.)] and [Search (Name)].

Search (Name)

NOTE

• To delete the destination, select [ ] > [ ] (delete icon) for the destination you want to

delete > [Delete]

• You can set the default sort setting of the address for the address book.

Sort (page 8-41)

&DQFHO

$GG(GLW )LOWHU

6HDUFK

1R

$GGUHVV%RRN

1R 1DPH $GGUHVV

7\SH

5-49

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Choosing from the One Touch Key

In the destination screen for sending, select the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered.

*The [No.] key has the same function as [Search (No.)] displayed on the touch panel. Use to directly enter a number

with the numeric keys, such as specifying a transmission address using a one-touch key number, or calling up a

stored program using the program number. For information on one-touch key numbers, refer to the following:

Choosing from the Search (No.)

Access the destination by specifying the 4-digit (0001 to 1000) One Touch Key number.

In the destination screen for sending, select [Search (No.)] to display the numeric entry screen. Select the entry field,

and use the numeric keys to enter the speed dial number.

NOTE

If the One Touch Keys for the desired destination is hidden on the touch panel, select [ ] or [ ] to display all One

Touch Keys. This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered.

For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to the following:

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (page 3-44)

NOTE

If you entered the One Touch Key in 1 to 3-digit, select [OK].

'HVWLQDWLRQ 1R

2QH7RXFK.H\ &ORVH

5-50

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Checking and Editing Destinations

1Display the screen.

Specify the destination.

Specifying Destination (page 5-47)

2Check and edit the destination.

Select [ ] to display a destination list.

• Select [ ] (information icon) to check the destination.

• Select [ ] (delete icon) to remove the destination from the list.

NOTE

• When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New Destination, the confirmation screen

appears. Enter the same destination again, and select [OK].

Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-37)

• When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen appears

after pressing the [Start] key.

Destination Check before Send (page 8-37)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-51)

5-51

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Confirmation Screen of Destinations

When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing

the [Start] key.

Destination Check before Send (page 8-37)

1Move the screen to the bottom and confirm all destinations.

Selecting [ ] (information icon) shows the detailed information of the destination.

To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete > [Delete] > [Delete]

To add the destination, select [Close] and then return to the destination screen.

2Select [Check].

Recall

Recall is a function allowing you to send the last entered destination once again. When you want to send the image to

the same destination, select [Recall], and you can call the destination you sent on the destination list.

1Select [Recall].

The destination you sent is displayed on the destination list.

2Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

NOTE

Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot

select [Check] unless you have confirmed all destination.

NOTE

When the last sending included FAX, folders and E-mail destinations, they are also

displayed. If necessary, add or delete the destination.

NOTE

• When [On] is selected in "Dest. Check before Send", a destination confirmation screen is

displayed when you press the [Start] key.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-51)

• Recall information is canceled in the following conditions.

- When you turn the power off

- When you send a next image (new recall information is registered)

- When you log out

'HOHWH

&ORVH

&KHFN

&KHFNWKHGHVWLQDWLRQOLVWWKURXJKWKHODVWSDJH

$IWHUFKHFNLQJWKHOLVWSUHVV>&KHFN@DQGWKHQ>6WDUW@

'HVWLQDWLRQ 'HWDLO

5-52

Operation on the Machine > How to use the FAX Function

How to use the FAX Function

On products with a FAX function, it is possible to use the FAX function. The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make

use of FAX functionality.

FAX Operation Guide

5-53

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Using Document Boxes

Document Box is a function for saving print data from a computer and sharing it with multiple users.

The available Document Boxes are as follows: Custom Box, Job Box, USB drive Box, and Fax Box.

What is Custom Box?

Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval. You

can create or delete a Custom Box.

The following operations are possible:

• Creating a new Custom Box

• Printing Document in a Custom Box

• Saving scanned documents to a Custom Box

• Sending Documents in a Custom Box

• Editing Documents in a Custom Box

• Deleting Documents in a Custom Box

What is Job Box?

Job Box is a generic name for the "Private Print/Stored Job Box", "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box", "Repeat Copy Box",

and "Form for Form Overlay Box". These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.

Repeat Copy Box

Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies

later. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.

Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs (page 5-68)

NOTE

• To use Custom Box, a hard disk must be installed in the machine.

A hard disk is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representatives for detail.

HD-15/HD-16 "Hard Disk" (page 11-6)

• The operation on Custom Box you perform from operation panel can also be made using Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

• You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.

Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-49)

• For details on operating the Job Box, refer to the following:

Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-18)

NOTE

Repeat Copy function is not available when the Data Security Function is active.

5-54

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Form for Form Overlay Box

Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image. This Job Box is used to store the

forms or images for overlaying.

Form for Form Overlay (page 5-69)

What is USB Drive Box?

A USB drive can be connected to the USB memory slot on the machine to print a saved file. You can print data directly

from the USB drive without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB drive in the PDF,

TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS, high compression PDF, Word, Excel or PowerPoint format (Scan to USB).

Fax Box

Fax Box store the fax data. The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of FAX functionality.

FAX Operation Guide

Basic Operation for Document Box

This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with custom

boxes.

Box List

NOTE

To use Form for Form Overlay Box, a hard disk must be installed in the machine.

A hard disk is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representatives for details.

HD-15/HD-16 "Hard Disk" (page 11-6)

NOTE

Word, Excel and PowerPoint will be saved in a Microsoft Office 2007 or later file format.

NOTE

In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User Logon

privileges, refer to the following:

Editing Custom Box (page 5-59)

1 Sorts the box number, box name, owner name

and size of data saved in the box in ascending/

descending order.

2 This is a custom box. Select it to open it.

3 Displays the details for the selected box.

4 A box can be searched for by Box No. or Box

Name. Select either [Search (No.)] or [Search

(Name)] to switch between [Search (No.)] and

[Search (Name)].

5 Registers new boxes and checks, modifies or

deletes box information.

)DYRULWHV

&XVWRP%R[

1R 1DPH 2ZQHU 8VHG

6HDUFK

1R

&XVWRP%R[

$GG(GLW (QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

5-55

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Document List

The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name or as

thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below.

Viewing Box Details

1Select [ ] (information icon) for the box whose details you

wish to check in the box list screen.

2Check the box details.

3Select [Close].

The display returns to the default Document Box screen.

List 1 Selecting more than one document at a time.

2 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.

3 Display the details for the selected document.

4 Sorts the file name, date and time and size of

data in ascending/descending order.

5 A document can be searched for by Name.

6 The menu for document operations will be

displayed.

7 Switches between list display and thumbnail

display.

8 Sends the selected documents.

9 Prints the selected documents.

10 Saves the document in the open box.

Thumbnail

NOTE

You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes. However, note that you cannot

select multiple documents when you are sending documents.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

%R[%DFN

)LOH1DPH 'DWHDQG7LPH 6L]H

2WKHUV

6HQG3ULQW6WRUH)LOH

%R[

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS



910

%R[%DFN

2WKHUV

6HQG3ULQW6WRUH)LOH

%R[

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

867

910

5-56

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Editing Box Details

1Select [Add/Edit] in the box list screen.

2Select the box whose details you wish to edit and select [Edit].

3Edit the box details.

Enter new details.

4If you have changed the details, select [OK] and then select

[OK] in the confirmation screen.

If you do not change the details, select [Cancel].

5Select [Close].

The display returns to the default Document Box screen.

Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details

1Select a document to preview and then select [Others] >

[Preview].

2Preview the document or check the document details.

The operations available in the preview screen are shown below.

3Confirm the document and select [Close].

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

1Zoom out.

2Zoom in.

3 Select to select any page of the open document

and print, send or copy to USB Drive.

Selecting a Page (page 5-57)

4 Sends the selected documents.

5 Prints the selected documents.

NOTE

The preview display can be controlled by moving your finger(s) on the touch panel.

Original Preview (page 2-23)

&ORVH

3ULQW 6HQG 6HOHFW3DJHV =RRP2XW=RRP,Q

&RORU

5HVROXWLRQ

6L]H $

[GSL

)XOO&RORU

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS



5 4 3 2 1

5-57

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Selecting a Page

When printing, sending, or copying a document within a Custom Box, you can specify any pages at will.

Select [Others] > [Page Selection] in the document list screen of the Custom Box, or [Page Selection] in the Preview

screen, to display the page selection screen.

Select the pages you want to work with, and select [Print], [Send], or [Copy to USB].

Printing Documents in Custom Box (page 5-61)

Sending Documents in Custom Box (page 5-63)

Moving Documents in Custom Box (page 5-64)

1 Selecting more than one document at a time.

2 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.

3 Use a “,” (comma) to separate numbers when

specifying pages that are not consecutive.

4 Specify a continuous page range.

5 Displaying the number of pages selected.

6 Selected pages can be copied to USB drive.

7 Selected pages can be sent.

8 Selected pages can be printed.

6HOHFWHG3DJHV

%DFN

(QWHU3DJHV6HQG3ULQW 6HOHFW5DQJH&RS\WR86% (QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS



678

5-58

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Creating a New Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > [Add/Edit]

2Register the Custom Box.

1[Add] > Enter the information for each item

The table below lists the items to be set.

NOTE

• To use Custom Box, a hard disk must be installed in the machine.

A hard disk is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representatives for details.

• If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges or

as a user with privileges to configure this setting. The factory default login user name and login password are set as

shown below.

• If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges to perform the following operations. They

cannot be performed with user privileges.

- Creating a box

- Deleting a box of which owner is another user.

Item Description

Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

Box No. Enter the box number by selecting [+], [-] or number keys. The box number can

be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should have a unique number. If you

select [Auto] (0000), the smallest number available will be automatically

assigned.

Owner*1 Set the owner of the box. Select the owner from the user list that appears.

Permission*2 Select whether to share the box.

Box Password User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to protect the

box. Entering a password is not mandatory. Enter the same password of up to

16 characters in both "Box Password" and "Confirmation".

This can be set if [Shared] is selected in Permission.

Usage

Restriction

The usage for a box can be restricted. To enable a capacity restriction enter a

value for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes by selecting [-],

[+] or number keys. You can enter a limit between 1 and 30,000 (MB).

Auto File

Deletion

Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time. Select [On] to

enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the numeric keys to enter

the number of days for which documents are stored. You can enter any number

between 1 and 31 (day(s)). To disable automatic file deletion, select [Off].

5-59

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

2Select [OK].

The Custom Box is created.

Editing Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > [Add/Edit]

2Edit the custom box.

Select the box > [Edit] > Enter the information for each item > [OK]

When user login administration is enabled, the settings that can be changed varies depending

on the privileges of the logged in user.

Free Space Displays the free space on the box.

Overwrite

Setting

Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new

documents are stored. To overwrite old documents, select [Permit]. To retain

old documents, select [Prohibit].

Delete after

Printed

Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is complete. To

delete the document, select [On]. To retain the document, select [Off].

*1 Displayed when the user login administration is enabled.

*2 Not displayed when "Owner" is set to [No Owner].

NOTE

• When you have logged in as a user, you can only edit a box whose owner is set to that user.

• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.

Item Description

5-60

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

For details on each items, refer to the following:

Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-58)

3[OK] > [Close]

The display returns to the default Document Box screen.

Deleting Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > [Add/Edit]

2Delete the custom box.

Select the box > [Delete] > [Delete]

Storing Documents to a Custom Box

Custom box stores the print data which is sent from a PC. For the operation of the printing from the PC, refer to the

following:

Printer Driver User Guide

Privileges Settings that can be changed

Administrator Box Name

Box No.

Owner

Permission

Usage Restriction

Auto File Deletion

Free Space

Overwrite Setting

Delete after Printed

User Box Name

Box Password

Usage Restriction

Auto File Deletion

Overwrite Setting

Delete after Printed

NOTE

• When you have logged in as a user, you can only delete a box whose owner is set to that

user.

• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.

5-61

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Printing Documents in Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Custom Box]

2Select the box containing the document you want to print.

2Print the document.

1Select the document in the list that you want to print by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2Select [Print].

3Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:

Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) (page 6-10)

If a document stored from a computer is selected, the print settings selection screen

appears.

To use the settings used at the time of printing (when the document was saved), select

[Print As Is]. Select [Start Print] to start printing.

To change the print settings, select [Print after Change Settings (Use File Settings)] or

[Print after Change Settings (Do Not Use File Settings)] and change the print settings.

After a document saved in the machine is selected, [Use File Settings] may appear in the

setting screen for the feature to be used.

To use the settings saved with the document, select [Use File Settings].

If you need to change the print settings, select the desired feature.

4Press the [Start] key.

Printing of the selected document begins.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

NOTE

Select [Favorites] when registering or recalling favorites.

Registering Favorites (page 5-12)

Recalling Favorites (page 5-12)

5-62

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box]

2Place the originals.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

3Store the document.

1Select the box > [Store File]

2Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:

Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) (page 6-10)

3Press the [Start] key.

The original is scanned and the data is stored in the specified Custom Box.

NOTE

• Enter up to 32 characters as the file name.

•Select [Favorites] when registering or recalling favorites.

Registering Favorites (page 5-12)

Recalling Favorites (page 5-12)

5-63

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Sending Documents in Custom Box

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-69)

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box

2Send the document.

1Select the document you wish to send by checking the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2Select [Send].

3Set the destination.

For more information on selecting destinations, refer to the following:

Specifying Destination (page 5-47)

4Set the sending size, original image, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be set, refer to the following:

Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) (page 6-10)

5Press the [Start] key.

Sending of the selected document begins.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

• You cannot select and send multiple documents.

• To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

NOTE

Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear.

IMPORTANT

Only when specifying the E-mail addresses which have encryption certificate from

the address book, [Email Encrypted TX] and [Digital Signature to Email] can be

used. When entering E-mail address from the operation panel, you can not use

these functions.

NOTE

Select [Favorites] when registering or recalling favorites.

Registering Favorites (page 5-12)

Recalling Favorites (page 5-12)

5-64

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-mail Address

of Logged in User

When user login is enabled, documents in the custom box are sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.

Setting before send

Before using this function, the following are necessary.

• The function icon must be displayed in the home screen.

Editing the Home Screen (page 2-15)

• An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

Sending to the E-mail address of the logged in user.

When user login is enabled, documents in the custom box are sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.

Send to the E-mail address of the logged in user. The procedure is as follows.

1Select [Home] key.

2Select [Send to Me(Email)].

Moving Documents in Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box

2Move the documents.

1Select the document in the list that you want to move by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2[Others] > [Move/Copy] > [Move to Custom Box] > select the destination of move >

[Move] > [Move]

The selected document is moved.

NOTE

When this function is used, functions other than transmission cannot be used.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

NOTE

If the box to which the document is to be moved is protected by a password, enter the

correct password.

5-65

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Copying Documents in Custom Box into Other Boxes

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box

2Copy the documents.

1Select the document in the list that you want to copy by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2[Others] > [Move/Copy] > [Copy to Custom Box] > select the destination of copy >

[Copy] > [Copy]

The selected document is copied.

Copying Documents in Custom Box to USB Drive

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box

2Copy the documents.

1Select the document in the list that you want to copy by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2[Others] > [Move/Copy] > [Copy to USB Drive] > select the destination of copy > [Next] >

[Copy] > [Copy]

The selected document is copied.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

NOTE

If the box to which the document is to copied is protected by a password, enter the

correct password.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

5-66

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Joining Documents in Custom Box

You can join documents within a custom box into one file.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box

2Join the document.

1Select the documents in the list that you wish to join by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

You can join up to 10 documents.

2[Others] > [Join].

3Arrange the documents into the order in which they are to be joined.

Select the document you want to rearrange and select [Up] or [Down] to move it to the

correct place in the sequence.

4 [Next] > Enter the file name for the joined document

5[Join] > [Join]

The documents are joined.

NOTE

You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. If necessary, move the documents to be

joined beforehand.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

NOTE

Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.

NOTE

After joining, the original documents are left unchanged. Delete the documents if they

are no longer needed.

5-67

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Deleting Documents in Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Custom Box]

2Select the box containing the document.

2Delete the document.

1Select the document in the list that you want to delete by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2[Others] > [Delete] > [Delete]

The document is deleted.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

•[Delete] is disabled until a document is selected.

• To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

5-68

Operation on the Machine > Job Box

Job Box

This section explains the Repeat Copy Box and the Form for Form Overlay Box. For Private Print/Stored Job Box and

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box, refer to the following:

Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-18)

Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs

Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies

later. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted. This

section explains how to print documents saved by the Repeat Copy function.

Repeat Copy (page 6-79)

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Job Box] > [Repeat Copy]

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the numeric keys.

2Specify the number of copies to print as desired > [Start Print]

Printing begins.

The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the power switch is turned off.

5-69

Operation on the Machine > Job Box

Form for Form Overlay

Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image. This Job Box is used to store the

forms or images for overlaying.

Storing a Form

You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the job box. One page can be registered in one form.

1Place the original.

2Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Job Box] > [Form for Form Overlay]

3Store the forms.

1Select [Store File].

2If necessary, select the image quality of original, scanning density, etc. before the original is

scanned.

3Press the [Start] key.

The original is scanned and stored in the [Form for Form Overlay] box.

Deleting a Form Stored

You can delete the form stored in the job box

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Job Box] > [Form for Form Overlay]

2Delete the forms.

Select the form to delete > [Delete] > [Delete]

The form is deleted.

NOTE

To use Form for Form Overlay Box, a hard disk must be installed in the machine.

A hard disk is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representatives for details.

HD-15/HD-16 "Hard Disk" (page 11-6)

5-70

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Drive

Operating using Removable USB Drive

Plugging USB drive directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB drive

without having to use a computer.

The following file types can be printed:

• PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)

• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)

• JPEG file

• XPS file

• OpenXPS file

• Encrypted PDF file

In addition, you can store scanned image files in USB drive connected to the machine.

The following file types can be stored:

• PDF file format

• TIFF file format

• JPEG file format

• XPS file format

• OpenXPS file format

• High-compression PDF file format

• Word file format

• Excel file format

• PowerPoint file format

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Drive

NOTE

Word, Excel and PowerPoint will be saved in a Microsoft Office 2007 or later file format.

NOTE

• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).

• Use USB drive properly formatted by this machine.

• Plug the USB drive directly into the USB Memory Slot.

5-71

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Drive

1Plug the USB drive.

1Plug the USB drive into the USB Memory Slot.

2When the machine reads the USB drive, "USB Drive is recognized. Displaying files." may

appear. Select [Continue].

Displays the USB Drive screen.

2Print the document.

1Select the folder containing the file to be printed.

2Select the file to be printed > [Print]

3Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired.

For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:

USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-16)

4Press the [Start] key.

Printing of the selected file begins.

NOTE

If the message does not appear, select [USB Drive] on the Home screen.

NOTE

• 1,000 documents can be displayed.

• To return to a higher level folder, select [UP].

NOTE

After a document saved in the machine is selected, [Use File Settings] may appear in

the setting screen for the feature to be used.

• To use the settings saved with the document, select [Use File Settings].

• If you need to change the print settings, select the desired feature.

5-72

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Drive

Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to USB)

You can store scanned documents to a removal USB drive.

1Place the originals.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

2Plug the USB Drive.

1Plug the USB drive into the USB Memory Slot.

2When the machine reads the USB memory, "USB Drive is recognized. Displaying files."

may appear. Select [Continue].

Displays the USB Drive screen.

3Store the document.

1Select the folder where the file will be stored.

2Select [Store File].

3Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be set, refer to the following:

USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-16)

4Check the storing image.

NOTE

The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.

NOTE

If the message does not appear, select [USB Drive] on the Home screen.

5-73

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Drive

5Press the [Start] key.

The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB drive.

Check the USB Drive Information

1In the USB Drive screen, select [USB Info].

2Once you confirm the information, select [Close].

Removing USB Drive

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [USB Drive]

2Select [Remove USB].

Select [OK], and remove the USB Drive after "USB Drive can be safely removed." is

displayed.

IMPORTANT

Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB drive.

NOTE

USB drive can also be removed after checking the Device Information.

Device Information (page 7-13)

Tapping the USB drive icon shown at the top of the touch panel and selecting [Remove

USB] allows you to safely remove the USB drive.

Home Screen (page 2-14)

5-74

Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser

Using the Internet Browser

If the machine is connected to the network, you can browse the Internet on the touch panel.

Launching and Exiting the Browser

Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Internet Browser]

The Internet browser starts up.

2Use the browser screen to browse web pages.

For information on how to use the browser screen, refer to the following:

Using the Browser Screen (page 5-75)

3To exit the browser, select [X] (Close) and then select [OK] in the exit confirmation screen.

NOTE

To use the internet browser, "Internet Browser" must be set to [On] in Function Settings.

Internet Browser (page 8-50)

NOTE

You can specify preferences such as the way the Internet browser screen is displayed.

Browser Environment (page 8-50)

5-75

Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser

Using the Browser Screen

The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below.

1Back/Forward: Displays the previous page or

the next page.

2Reload: Updates the page.

3Home page: Displays your specified home page.

You can set your home page in the Browser

Environment (page 8-50).

4Security lock icon: Displayed when you are

viewing a protected page.

5Enter URL: Use this to display a desired web

page by entering the URL for that page.

6Text box: Pressing the text box displays a

keyboard that allows you to type text.

7Search (Search Internet): Use the selected

search site to search with the entered keyword.

8Menu: Displays the browser setup menu. You

can use this menu to specify the browser's

display magnification, set the text encoding

scheme and check the server certificate.

Retrieval in page: Search from the entered

keyword in the currently displayed page. You can

continue your search by selecting [SearchUp] or

[SearchDown].

9Close: Closes the Internet browser and returns

you to the application list screen.

69123 5 7

4 8

5-76

Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple

Manual Staple

You can staple copied paper manually without any print operation. It is useful when you have forgotten to set the staple

sort mode before starting copying, or when you want to staple originals.

Maximum number of sheets available for manual stapling

4,000-sheet Finisher

Use the keys on the control section of the Finisher (optional) for manual stapling.

1Press the stapling position key on the stapling control section.

The shutter of the paper exit area is opened and this equipment enters into the manual staple

mode.

2Set the staple position.

Press the stapling position key to select the stapling position

(Back / Front / 2 Points ).

Operation is not possible while the stapling position lamps are blinking. Operate after the

lamps light solidly.

NOTE

• This function requires the optional Document Finisher:

4,000-sheet Finisher (page 11-31)

• If there are no staples when manual stapling is performed, the stapling position lamps and stapling position key

LEDs all blink. Add staples.

Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet Finisher) (page 10-12)

• Manual stapling cannot be executed when the machine is in operation.

Paper size

Paper weight

52 - 90 g/m2

(14.0 - 24.0 lb. Bond)

91 - 105 g/m2

(24.3 - 28.0 lb. Bond)

A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K 65 sheets 55 sheets

A3, B4, Folio, Ledger 30 sheets 30 sheets

1 Stapling position lamps

2 Stapling position key

3 Stapling key / lamp

123

5-77

Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple

3Load the paper.

Straighten the edges of the paper well and place

the paper front side down in the shutter opening

of the output unit.

If the near side of the paper ( ) will be stapled,

place the paper against the front guide (A).

If the far side of the paper ( ) will be stapled,

place the paper against the back guide (B).

If the edge of the paper ( ) will be stapled at

two points, place the paper with the center

aligned to the center point between the two side

guides (A and B).

4Staple the paper.

Let go of the paper, and then press the stapling key.

Stapling starts. Stapling finishes and the output is delivered to tray.

Finishing the manual staple mode

Press the stapling position key several times until the stapling position lamps turn off. The shutter of the paper exit area

closes. It means that manual stapling is finished.

If no operation is performed for approx. 10 seconds, the manual staple mode will be automatically finished.

CAUTION

Do not insert your hand inside the open shutter.

NOTE

• Press the stapling position key before you place the paper. Once the paper is placed, the

stapling position key cannot be used.

• The stapling lamp lights when the paper is properly placed. If it does not light, replace the

paper.

CAUTION

Be sure that your hands are away from the paper while stapling is in progress.

NOTE

The time after which manual staple mode is automatically exited can be changed.

Manual Staple (page 8-51)

6-1

Using Various Functions

This chapter explains the following topics:

Functions Available on the Machine .............. 6-2

About Functions Available on the

Machine .............................................. 6-2

Copy ................................................... 6-2

Send ................................................... 6-6

Custom Box (Store File, Printing,

Send) ................................................ 6-10

USB Drive (Store File, Printing

Documents) ...................................... 6-16

Functions .................................................... 6-19

Original Size ..................................... 6-20

Paper Selection ................................ 6-21

Mixed Size Originals ......................... 6-23

Original Orientation ........................... 6-26

Fold ................................................... 6-27

Collate/Offset .................................... 6-29

Staple/Punch .................................... 6-30

Paper Output .................................... 6-34

ID Card Copy .................................... 6-35

Org. Manual Feed (DP) .................... 6-35

Density .............................................. 6-35

Original Image .................................. 6-36

EcoPrint ............................................ 6-37

Color Selection ................................. 6-38

Color Balance ................................... 6-39

Hue Adjustment ................................ 6-40

One-touch Image Adjust ................... 6-41

Sharpness ......................................... 6-43

Background Density Adj.

(Background Density Adjustment) .... 6-43

Saturation ......................................... 6-44

Prevent Bleed-thru ............................ 6-44

Contrast ............................................ 6-45

Trapping ............................................ 6-45

Erase Colors ..................................... 6-46

Zoom ................................................. 6-46

Combine ........................................... 6-49

Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering ... 6-51

Border Erase, Border Erase/Full

Scan .................................................. 6-53

Erase Shadowed Areas .................... 6-55

Booklet .............................................. 6-56

Duplex ............................................... 6-59

Cover ................................................ 6-62

Form Overlay .................................... 6-63

Page # .............................................. 6-64

Memo Page ...................................... 6-66

Poster ............................................... 6-67

Insert Sheets/Chapters ..................... 6-68

Image Repeat ................................... 6-69

Text Stamp ........................................ 6-70

Bates Stamp ..................................... 6-73

Handwriting Enhancement ................ 6-76

Continuous Scan ............................... 6-76

Auto Image Rotation ......................... 6-77

Negative Image ................................. 6-77

Mirror Image ...................................... 6-77

Job Finish Notice .............................. 6-78

File Name Entry ................................ 6-78

Priority Override ................................ 6-79

Repeat Copy ..................................... 6-79

OHP Backing Sheet .......................... 6-80

DP Read Action ................................. 6-81

Detect Multi-fed Originals .................. 6-81

Detect Stapled Originals ................... 6-81

Skip Blank Page ................................ 6-82

2-sided/Book Original ........................ 6-82

Sending Size ..................................... 6-83

Long Original ..................................... 6-84

File Format ........................................ 6-84

File Separation .................................. 6-91

Scan Resolution ................................ 6-91

Email Subject/Body ........................... 6-92

Send and Print .................................. 6-92

Send and Store ................................. 6-92

FTP Encrypted TX ............................ 6-93

Email Encrypted TX .......................... 6-93

Digital Signature Email ...................... 6-93

File Size Confirmation ....................... 6-94

Delete after Printed ........................... 6-94

Delete after Transmitted .................... 6-95

Storing Size ....................................... 6-95

Encrypted PDF Password ................. 6-96

JPEG/TIFF Print ................................ 6-96

XPS Fit to Page ................................ 6-96

6-2

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Functions Available on the Machine

About Functions Available on the Machine

This machine provides the various functions available.

Copy

Each function is displayed in the Body when Global Navigation is selected.

For details on each function, see the table below.

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

Org./Paper/

Finishing

Configure the

settings for

originals, paper,

and finishing such

as collate and

staple.

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-20

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that

contains the required paper size.

page 6-21

Mixed Size

Originals

Scan the documents of different sizes that are

set in the document processor all at once.

page 6-23

Original

Orientation

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-26

Fold Fold the finished documents. page 6-27

Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-29

Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-30

Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-34

ID Card Copy Use this when you want to copy a driver's license

or an insurance card. When you scan the front

and back of the card, both sides will be combined

and copied onto a single sheet.

page 6-35

Org. Manual Feed

(DP)

Multi-sheet documents such as slips can be read

on the document processor whilst still bound

together. When placing a document on the

document processor, place one copy at a time.

page 6-35

2ULJLQDO6L]H

$XWR

3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ

0L[HG6L]H2ULJLQDOV

&ROODWH2IIVHW

2ULJLQDO2ULHQWDWLRQ

$XWR

2II

7RS(GJHRQ7RS

&ROODWH2Q

)DYRULWHV

3UHYLHZ

6KRUWFXW

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

,QWHUUXSW

1XPHULF

.H\SDG

)ROG

2II

6WDSOH3XQFK

2II

3DSHU2XWSXW

2UJ3DSHU

)LQLVKLQJ

4XLFN6HWXS

/D\RXW(GLW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

&RSLHV

(QHUJ\6DYHU

Global Navigation

Body

6-3

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-46

Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed

page.

page 6-49

Margin/Centering Margin: Add margins (white space). In

addition, you can set the margin width

and the back page margin.

Centering:Centers the original image on the

paper when copying onto paper

different from the original size.

page 6-51

Border Erase Erases the black border that forms around the

image.

page 6-53

Erase Shadowed

Areas

When scanning with the document processor

open, erase the extra shaded area.

page 6-55

Booklet Scan multiple original pages, then print copies so

that they can be folded into a single booklet, with

a cover.

page 6-56

Layout/Edit

Configure the

settings for duplex

printing and stamp.

Duplex Produces two-sided copies.

You can also create single-sided copies from two-

sided originals.

page 6-59

Cover Adds a cover to the finished documents. page 6-62

Form Overlay Prints the original document overlaid with a form

or image.

page 6-63

Page # Adds page numbers to the finished documents. page 6-64

Memo Page Delivers copies with a space for adding notes. page 6-66

Poster Separates and copies an enlarged image onto

multiple pages to make copies larger than the

maximum paper size.

page 6-67

Insert Sheets/

Chapters

Insert a separator sheet, or make the first page of

the chapter the front page when performing

duplex printing.

page 6-68

Image Repeat Tiles the original image on one sheet of paper. page 6-69

Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-70

Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-73

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

6-4

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Density Adjust density. page 6-35

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-36

Color Selection Select the color setting. page 6-38

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-37

Color Balance

Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and

black.

page 6-39

Color/Image

Quality

Configure he

settings for density,

quality of copies,

and color balance.

Hue Adjustment Adjust the color (hue) of images. page 6-40

One-touch Image

Adjust

Adjust images as desired to more [Vivid] or more

[Muted] images.

page 6-41

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-43

Background

Density Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such

as newspapers.

page 6-43

Saturation Adjust the color saturation of the image. page 6-44

Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed-

through when scanning thin original.

page 6-44

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and

dark areas of the image.

page 6-45

Trapping Remove blank areas if characters and the image

outline in black have blank areas because of

color drift.

page 6-45

Erase Colors Erases colors in the source document. page 6-46

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

6-5

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate

batches and then produce as one job.

page 6-76

Auto Image

Rotation

Automatically rotates the image 90 degrees

when the sizes of the original and the loaded

paper matches but the orientations are different.

page 6-77

Negative Image Inverts black and white portions of the image for

printing.

page 6-77

Mirror Image Copies the mirrored image of the original. page 6-77

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-78

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-78

Advanced Setup

Configure the

settings for

continuous

scanning, mirror

image copies, and

Skip Blank Page

function.

Priority Override

Suspends the current job and gives a new job top

priority.

page 6-79

Repeat Copy

Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as

necessary after a copy job is completed.

page 6-79

OHP Backing

Sheet

When printing to sheets of transparency,

automatically inserts a paper between them.

page 6-80

DP Read Action When the document processor is used, select

the scanning operation for the document

processor.

page 6-81

Detect Multi-fed

Originals

When reading a document from the document

processor, if the multiple feeding of documents is

detected, then the reading stops automatically.

page 6-81

Detect Stapled

Originals

When reading a document from the document

processor, if a stapled document is detected,

then the reading stops automatically.

page 6-81

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank pages

and prints only pages that are not blank.

page 6-82

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

6-6

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Send

Each function is displayed in the Body when Global Navigation is selected.

For details on each function, see the table below.

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

Org./Sending Data

Format

Configure the

settings for original

type and file format.

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-20

Mixed Size

Originals

Scan the documents of different sizes that are

set in the document processor all at once.

page 6-23

2-sided/Book

Original

Select the type and orientation of the binding

based on the original.

page 6-82

Sending Size Select size of image to be sent. page 6-83

Original

Orientation

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-26

Long Original Reads long-sized original documents using a

document processor.

page 6-84

File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level

can also be adjusted.

page 6-84

File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original

data page by specified number of pages, and

sends the files.

page 6-91

Org. Manual Feed

(DP)

Multi-sheet documents such as slips can be read

on the document processor whilst still bound

together. When placing a document on the

document processor, place one copy at a time.

page 6-35

4XLFN6HWXS

'HVWLQDWLRQ

2UJ6HQG

'DWD)RUPDW

&RORU,PDJH

4XDOLW\

$GYDQFHG

6HWXS

3UHYLHZ

)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

2ULJLQDO

6HQG

=RRP

'HVWLQDWLRQ

2ULJLQDO6L]H

$XWR

0L[HG6L]H2ULJLQDOV

VLGHG%RRN2ULJLQDO

)LOH)RUPDW

2ULJLQDO2ULHQWDWLRQ

2II

VLGHG

3')

/RQJ2ULJLQDO

6HQGLQJ6L]H

6DPHDV2ULJLQDO6L]H

)LOH6HSDUDWLRQ

7RS(GJHRQ7RS

Global Navigation

Body

6-7

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Color/Image

Quality

Configure the

settings for density,

quality of copies,

and color balance.

Density Adjust density. page 6-35

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-36

Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-91

Fax TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Color Selection Select the color setting. page 6-38

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-43

Background

Density Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such

as newspapers.

page 6-43

Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed-

through when scanning thin original.

page 6-44

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and

dark areas of the image.

page 6-45

Erase Colors Erases colors in the source document. page 6-46

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

6-8

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Advanced Setup

Configure the

settings for

transmission copy,

encrypted

transmission, and

file size

confirmation.

Border Erase/Full

Scan

Erases the black border that forms around the

image.

page 6-53

Erase Shadowed

Areas

When scanning with the document processor

open, erase the extra shaded area.

page 6-55

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-46

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-78

Fax Delayed

Transmission

Set a send time. Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-78

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate

batches and then produce as one job.

page 6-76

Email Subject/

Body

Adds subject and body when sending a

document.

page 6-92

iFax Subject/Body Adds subject and body when sending a

document by i-FAX.

Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Fax Direct

Transmission

Sends FAX directly without reading original data

into memory.

Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Centering Centers the original image on the paper when

sending onto paper different from the original

size.

page 6-51

Fax Polling RX Dial the destination and receive documents for

Polling Transmission stored in the polling box.

Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Send and Print Prints a copy of the document being sent. page 6-92

Send and Store Stores a copy of the document being sent in a

Custom Box.

page 6-92

FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. page 6-93

Email Encrypted

Sends encrypted E-mail using the electronic

certificate.

page 6-93

Digital Signature

Add a digital signature to the email, using the

electronic certificate.

page 6-93

Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-70

Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-73

Handwriting

Enhancement

Emphasize the handwriting texts and lines by

changing their color to specified one.

page 6-76

File Size

Confirmation

Checks the file size before sending/storing the

original.

page 6-94

Fax TX Report Print a report of fax transmission results. Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

6-9

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Advanced Setup

Configure the

settings for

transmission copy,

encrypted

transmission, and

file size

confirmation.

Detect Multi-fed

Originals

When reading a document from the document

processor, if the multiple feeding of documents is

detected, then the reading stops automatically.

page 6-81

Detect Stapled

Originals

When reading a document from the document

processor, if a stapled document is detected,

then the reading stops automatically.

page 6-81

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank pages

and sends only pages that are not blank.

page 6-82

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

6-10

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send)

Each function is displayed in the Body when Global Navigation is selected.

For details on each function, see the table below.

Store File

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

Functions

Configure the

settings when

storing the

document in the

Custom Box.

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-20

Mixed Size

Originals

Scan the documents of different sizes that are

set in the document processor all at once.

page 6-23

2-sided/Book

Original

Select the type and orientation of the binding

based on the original.

page 6-82

Original

Orientation

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-26

Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. page 6-95

Org. Manual Feed

(DP)

Multi-sheet documents such as slips can be read

on the document processor whilst still bound

together. When placing a document on the

document processor, place one copy at a time.

page 6-35

Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed-

through when scanning thin original.

page 6-44

Density Adjust density. page 6-35

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-36

Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-91

Color Selection Select the color setting. page 6-38

Erase Colors Erases colors in the source document. page 6-46

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-43

Background

Density Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such

as newspapers.

page 6-43

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-46

Centering Centers the original image on the paper when

storing onto paper different from the original size.

page 6-51

%DFN

)XQFWLRQV

4XLFN6HWXS

3UHYLHZ

2ULJLQDO6L]H

0L[HG6L]H2ULJLQDOV

2ULJLQDO2ULHQWDWLRQ

)UHH6SDFH

$XWR

2II

VLGHG

VLGHG%RRN2ULJLQDO

6WRULQJ6L]H

7RS(GJHRQ7RS

)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

2UJ0DQXDO)HHG'3

6DPHDV2ULJLQDO6L]H

'HQVLW\

3UHYHQW%OHHGWKUX

2ULJLQDO

6WRUH

=RRP

Global Navigation

Body

6-11

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Functions

Configure the

settings when

storing the

document in the

Custom Box.

Border Erase/Full

Scan

Erases the black border that forms around the

image.

page 6-53

Erase Shadowed

Areas

When scanning with the document processor

open, erase the extra shaded area.

page 6-55

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate

batches and then produce as one job.

page 6-76

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-78

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-78

Detect Multi-fed

Originals

When reading a document from the document

processor, if the multiple feeding of documents is

detected, then the reading stops automatically.

page 6-81

Detect Stapled

Originals

When reading a document from the document

processor, if a stapled document is detected,

then the reading stops automatically.

page 6-81

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank pages

and stores only pages that are not blank.

page 6-82

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and

dark areas of the image.

page 6-45

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

6-12

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

Functions

Configure the

settings for paper

selection and

duplex printing

when printing from

the Custom Box.

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that

contains the required paper size.

page 6-21

Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-29

Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-34

Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-30

Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed

page.

page 6-49

Duplex Prints 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided,

2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided.

page 6-59

Margin/Centering Margin: Add margins (white space). In

addition, you can set the margin width

and the back page margin.

Centering:Centers the original image on the

paper when copying onto paper

different from the original size.

page 6-51

Page # Adds page numbers to the finished documents. page 6-64

Booklet Print document so that it can be folded into a

single booklet, with a cover.

page 6-56

Form Overlay

Prints the original document overlaid with a form or

image.

page 6-63

Cover Adds a cover to the finished documents. page 6-62

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-78

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-78

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-37

Priority Override

Suspends the current job and gives a new job top

priority.

page 6-79

Delete after

Printed

Automatically deletes a document from the box

once printing is complete.

page 6-94

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-46

Fold Fold the finished documents. page 6-27

Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-70

Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-73

6-13

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Functions

Configure the

settings for paper

selection and

duplex printing

when printing from

the Custom Box.

Hue Adjustment Adjust the color (hue) of images. page 6-40

Color Balance

Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and

black.

page 6-39

One-touch Image

Adjust

Adjust images as desired to more [Vivid] or more

[Muted] images.

page 6-41

Saturation Adjust the color saturation of the image. page 6-44

Trapping Remove blank areas if characters and the image

outline in black have blank areas because of

color drift.

page 6-45

Density Adjust density. page 6-35

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-36

Color Selection Select the color setting. page 6-38

Color/Image

Quality

Configure the

settings for density,

quality of copies,

and color balance.

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-43

Background

Density Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such

as newspapers.

page 6-43

Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed-

through when scanning thin original.

page 6-44

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and

dark areas of the image.

page 6-45

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

6-14

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Send

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

Functions

Configure the

settings for file

format and FAX

transmission when

sending from the

Custom Box.

File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level

can also be adjusted.

page 6-84

Sending Size Select size of image to be sent. page 6-83

Centering Centers the original image on the paper when

sending onto paper different from the original

size.

page 6-51

Fax TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-78

Fax Delayed

Transmission

Set a send time. Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-78

Email Subject/

Body

Adds subject and body when sending a

document.

page 6-92

iFax Subject/Body Adds subject and body when sending a

document by i-FAX.

Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

Delete after

Transmitted

Automatically deletes a document from the box

once transmission is complete.

page 6-95

FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. page 6-93

Email Encrypted

Sends encrypted E-mail using the electronic

certificate.

page 6-93

Digital Signature

Add a digital signature to the email, using the

electronic certificate.

page 6-93

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-46

File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original

data page by specified number of pages, and

sends the files.

page 6-91

Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-70

Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-73

File Size

Confirmation

Checks the file size before sending/storing the

original.

page 6-94

Fax TX Report Print a report of fax transmission results. Refer to FAX

Operation

Guide.

6-15

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Color/Image

Quality

Configure the

settings for density,

quality of copies,

and color balance.

Density Adjust density. page 6-35

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-36

Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-91

Color Selection Select the color setting. page 6-38

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-43

Background

Density Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such

as newspapers.

page 6-43

Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed-

through when scanning thin original.

page 6-44

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and

dark areas of the image.

page 6-45

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

6-16

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents)

Each function is displayed in the Body when Global Navigation is selected.

For details on each function, see the table below.

Store File

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

Functions

Configure the

settings for color

selection and

document name

when storing the

document in the

USB drive.

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-20

Mixed Size

Originals

Scan the documents of different sizes that are

set in the document processor all at once.

page 6-23

2-sided/Book

Original

Select the type and orientation of the binding

based on the original.

page 6-82

Original

Orientation

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-26

Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. page 6-95

Org. Manual Feed

(DP)

Multi-sheet documents such as slips can be read

on the document processor whilst still bound

together. When placing a document on the

document processor, place one copy at a time.

page 6-35

Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed-

through when scanning thin original.

page 6-44

Density Adjust density. page 6-35

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-36

Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-91

Color Selection Select the color setting. page 6-38

Erase Colors Erases colors in the source document. page 6-46

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-43

Background

Density Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such

as newspapers.

page 6-43

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-46

Centering Centers the original image on the paper when

storing onto paper different from the original size.

page 6-51

%DFN

)XQFWLRQV

4XLFN6HWXS 2ULJLQDO6L]H

0L[HG6L]H2ULJLQDOV

2ULJLQDO2ULHQWDWLRQ

)UHH6SDFH

$XWR

2II

VLGHG

VLGHG%RRN2ULJLQDO

6WRULQJ6L]H

7RS(GJHRQ7RS

6KRUWFXW

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW

6WRS

2UJ0DQXDO)HHG'3

6DPHDV2ULJLQDO6L]H

'HQVLW\

3UHYHQW%OHHGWKUX

2ULJLQDO

=RRP

6WRUH

5HPRYH86%'ULYH

Global Navigation

Body

6-17

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Functions

Configure the

settings for color

selection and

document name

when storing the

document in the

USB drive.

Border Erase/Full

Scan

Erases the black border that forms around the

image.

page 6-53

Erase Shadowed

Areas

When scanning with the document processor

open, erase the extra shaded area.

page 6-55

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate

batches and then produce as one job.

page 6-76

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-78

File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level

can also be adjusted.

page 6-84

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-78

File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original

data page by specified number of pages, and

sends the files.

page 6-91

Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-70

Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-73

Handwriting

Enhancement

Emphasize the handwriting texts and lines by

changing their color to specified one.

page 6-76

Detect Multi-fed

Originals

When reading a document from the document

processor, if the multiple feeding of documents is

detected, then the reading stops automatically.

page 6-81

Detect Stapled

Originals

When reading a document from the document

processor, if a stapled document is detected,

then the reading stops automatically.

page 6-81

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank pages

and stores only pages that are not blank.

page 6-82

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and

dark areas of the image.

page 6-45

Long Original Reads long-sized original documents using a

document processor.

page 6-84

Global Navigation Function Description Reference

page

6-18

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Global Navigation Function key Description Reference

page

Functions

Configure the

settings for paper

selection and

duplex printing

when printing from

the USB drive.

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that

contains the required paper size.

page 6-21

Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-29

Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-34

Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-30

Duplex Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets. page 6-59

Margin Add margins (white space). In addition, you can

set the margin width and the back page margin.

page 6-51

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-78

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-37

Priority Override

Suspends the current job and gives a new job top

priority.

page 6-79

Fold Fold the finished documents. page 6-27

Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-70

Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-73

Encrypted PDF

Password

Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF

data.

page 6-96

JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or

TIFF files.

page 6-96

XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the

selected paper size when printing XPS file.

page 6-96

Color

Configure the color

mode settings.

Color Selection Select the color setting. page 6-38

6-19

Using Various Functions > Functions

Functions

On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.

Icon Description

Access to the function is indicated by icons.

Example:Select [Org./Paper/Finishing] in the Copy screen to use the function.

Access to the function is indicated by icons.

Example:Select [Org./Sending Data Format] in the Send screen to use the function.

Access to the function is indicated by icons.

Example:Select [Functions] in the Custom Box screen to use the function.

Access to the function is indicated by icons.

Example:Select [Functions] in the USB Drive screen to use the function.

Org./Paper

/Finishing

Copy

Org./Sending

Data Format

Send

Functions

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Drive

6-20

Using Various Functions > Functions

Original Size

Specify the original size to be scanned.

Select [Auto (Document Processor)], [Metric], [Inch], [Others] or [Size Entry] to select the original size.

Org./Paper

/Finishing

Org./Sending

Data Format Functions Functions

Item Value Description

Auto

(Document

Processor)

— Have the size of original detected automatically.

Metric A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B4, B5-R, B5,

B6-R, B6, Folio, 216 x 340 mm

Select from the Metric series standard sizes.

Inch Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,

Statement, 11" × 15", Oficio II

Select from the Inch series standard sizes.

Others 8K, 16K-R, 16K, Hagaki (Cardstock),

Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Custom 1-4*1

*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to the following:

Custom Original Size (page 8-12)

Select from special standard sizes and custom

sizes.

Size Entry Metric

X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Enter the size not included in the standard

sizes.*2

When you have selected [Size Entry], select [+]

or [-] to set the sizes of "X" (horizontal) and "Y"

(vertical). Select the entry field to use the

numeric keys for entry.

*2 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following:

Measurement (page 8-6)

Inch

X: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

NOTE

Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size original.

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-21

Using Various Functions > Functions

Paper Selection

Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size.

Select from [1] (Cassette 1) to [5] (Cassette 5) to use the paper contained in that cassette.

If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.

In case of changing the paper size and the media type of the multi purpose tray, select [Change Multipurpose Tray

Settings] and change Paper Size and Media Type. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table

below.

Org./Paper

/Finishing Functions Functions

NOTE

• Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette.

Paper Feeding (page 8-13)

• Cassettes after Cassette 2 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Item Value Description

Paper

Size

Metric A3*1*2, A4-R*1*2, A4*1*2,

A5-R*1*2, A5*1, A6*1*2, B4*1*2,

B5-R*1*2, B5*1*2, B6*1*2,

Folio*1*2, 216 × 340 mm,

SRA3*1*2

Select from the Metric standard size.

Inch Ledger*1*2, Letter-R*1*2,

Letter*1*2, Legal*1*2,

Statement*1*2, 12" × 18"*1*2,

Executive, Oficio II

Select from the Inch standard size.

Others 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO5,

Envelope#10, Envelope#9,

Envelope#6, Envelope

Monarch, Envelope DL,

Envelope C5, Envelope C4,

Hagaki (Cardstock), *1*2,

Oufukuhagaki (Return

postcard), Kakugata 2,

Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Younaga 3,

Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4,

Custom 1-4*3

Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.

Size

Entry

Metric

X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1 mm

increments)

Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1 mm

increments)

Enter the size not included in the standard size.*4

When you have selected [Size Entry], use [+]/[-] or the

numeric keys to set the sizes of "X" (horizontal) and "Y"

(vertical).

Select the entry field to use the numeric keys for entry.

Inch

X: 5.83 to 18" (in 0.01"

increments)

Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01"

increments)

Media type Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*5, Bond, Cardstock,

Color, Prepunched*5, Letterhead*5, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Index Tab

Dividers, Custom 1-8*6

Copy

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-22

Using Various Functions > Functions

*1 Paper size automatically detected in the cassette.

*2 Paper size automatically detected in the Multipurpose Tray.

*3 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to the following:

Custom Paper Settings (page 8-15)

*4 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following:

Measurement (page 8-6)

*5 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:

Special Paper Action (page 8-18)

*6 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following:

Media Type Setting (page 8-16)

NOTE

• You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default.

MP Tray Settings (page 8-14)

• If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multipurpose tray, a confirmation screen

appears. Load the required paper in the multipurpose tray and select [

Continue

] to start copying.

6-23

Using Various Functions > Functions

Mixed Size Originals

Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once.

This function cannot be used if platen is used. Different Width is not displayed in inch models.

Copying

Metric Models

Inch Models

Sending/Storing

Org./Paper

/Finishing

Org./Sending

Data Format Functions Functions

Item Value Description

Off

Mixed Size

Copies

Original Width*1

*1 If the document processor (DP-7140) is used, it is not possible to specify a different width for the original.

Same Width, Different Width Select options for the width of set original.

Same Size

Copies

Original Width*1 Same Width, Different Width Select options for the width of set original.

Top Page

Direction

Long Edge Left, Short Edge Left Select the original orientation of the first

page.

Item Value Description

Off

Mixed Size

Copies

Original Width Same Width Originals are detected individually for size

and copied to the same size paper as

originals.

Same Size

Copies

Original Width Same Width Select the original orientation of the first

page.

Top Page

Direction

Long Edge Left, Short Edge Left

Item Value Description

Mixed Size Originals Off

Same Width Scans and sends/stores multiple sheets of

the same width using the document

processor.

Different Width Scans and sends/stores multiple sheets of

different width using the document

processor.

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-24

Using Various Functions > Functions

Supported Combinations of Originals

Same Width

When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows.

• B4 and B5

• Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)

• Legal and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)

Example: B4 and B5

Different Width (Available for metric models only)

The supported combinations of originals are as follows.

• A3, B4, A4, B5

• B4, A4-R, B5

•A4-R, B5-R, Folio

Example: A3, B4, A4, B5

NOTE

When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination, make sure to set "Auto Detect Original Size" to

[On] for "Folio".

Folio and A4

Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-11)

NOTE

• If you are using the document processor (DP-7140), originals of different width cannot be loaded together.

• Number of sheet that can be placed in the document processor: up to 30 sheets

• When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination, make sure to set "Auto Detect Original Size" to

[On] for "Folio".

A4-R, B5-R, and Folio

Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-11)

IMPORTANT

When placing originals of different width, arrange the originals so that their left sides and top sides are

aligned, and place the originals in alignment with the far width guide. If the originals are not aligned in this

way, they may not be scanned correctly, and skewing or original jams may result.

* Set the originals of A4 and B5 with vertical orientation.

6-25

Using Various Functions > Functions

Selecting How to Copy Originals

Set the paper size (copy size) when printing scanned document. Select whether you wish to create individual copies on

different size paper matching the original sizes or to produce all copies on the same size paper.

Mixed Size Copies

Originals are detected individually for size and copied to the same size paper as originals.

Same Size Copies

Originals are all copied to the same size paper.

NOTE

This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.

A4-RB4 B5 A4-RB4 B5

A4-RB4 B5 B4 B4 B4

6-26

Using Various Functions > Functions

Original Orientation

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.

Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left] or [Auto].

Org./Paper

/Finishing

Org./Sending

Data Format Functions Functions

•Zoom

•Duplex

• Margin/Centering

• Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan

• Combine

• Memo page

• Page #

• Booklet

• Stapling/Punch (optional feature)

• 2-sided/Book Original

• Text Stamp

• Bates Stamp

NOTE

If [On] is selected in the setting for Original Orientation in System Menu, the selection screen for original orientation

appears when you select any of the above functions.

Orientation Confirmation (page 8-20)

Item Image

Top Edge on

Top

Top Edge on

Left

Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

NOTE

The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed.

Original Orientation (Copy) (page 8-33)

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

Original Original orientation

6-27

Using Various Functions > Functions

Fold

Folds the finished documents. Select the fold method.

The following folding options and orientations are available.

Org./Paper

/Finishing Functions Functions

Original orientation Orientation: Landscape Orientation: Portrait

Item

Bi-Fold Saddle Stitch

Inside

Outside

Multi-sheet Fold Set whether or not multiple pages of the printed document are stacked and

folded. This is set to [On] when saddle stitch stapling is set.

Tri-Fold Inside R to L/B to T

L to R/T to B

Outside R to L/B to T

L to R/T to B

Multi-sheet Fold Set whether or not multiple pages of the printed document are stacked and

folded.

Copy

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-28

Using Various Functions > Functions

NOTE

• Folding requires the optional 4,000-sheet Finisher and the folding unit.

• For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be folded, refer to the following.

Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) (page 11-32)

6-29

Using Various Functions > Functions

Collate/Offset

Offsets the output by page or set.

Org./Paper

/Finishing Functions Functions

Item Image Description

Off

Collate On Scans multiple originals and delivers complete sets of

copies as required according to page number.

Offset Each

Page

Printed copies are collated and output as individual pages

separately.

NOTE

This function requires the optional Document Finisher:

Inner Finisher (page 11-29)

1,000-sheet Finisher (page 11-30)

4,000-sheet Finisher (page 11-31)

Inner Shift Tray (page 11-33)

Offset Each

Set

Printed copies are collated and output as individual set

separately.

NOTE

This function requires the optional Document Finisher:

Inner Finisher (page 11-29)

1,000-sheet Finisher (page 11-30)

4,000-sheet Finisher (page 11-31)

Inner Shift Tray (page 11-33)

NOTE

The paper sizes supported in Offset are Legal, Ledger, Oficio II, Letter, A3, A4, B4, B5, 216 × 340 mm and 8K, 16K.

Copy

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-30

Using Various Functions > Functions

Staple/Punch

Staple

Staples the finished documents. The staple position can be selected.

Org./Paper

/Finishing Functions Functions

NOTE

This function requires the optional Document Finisher:

Inner Finisher (page 11-29)

1,000-sheet Finisher (page 11-30)

4,000-sheet Finisher (page 11-31)

Item Value Description

Staple Off

Top Left Select the staple position, and then select [Next >].

For details on original orientation and staple position, refer to the

following:

Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position (page 6-33)

Top Right

2 staples Left

2 staples Top

2 staples Right

Saddle Stitch Select whether to fold the finished documents in two with staples in the

center.

When placing originals, be sure to place the cover page at the bottom.

For details on saddle stitching, refer to the following:

Booklet (page 6-56)

Original Orientation Top Edge on

Top, Top Edge

on Left, Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct

direction. Select [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the

originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Copy

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-31

Using Various Functions > Functions

Original Orientation and Staple Position

1,000-sheet Finisher, 4,000-sheet Finisher

Inner Finisher

Original orientation Paper orientation Top Edge on Left

Paper orientation

Cassette paper load

direction

Cassette paper load

direction

Original orientation Paper orientation Top Edge on Left

Paper orientation

Cassette paper load

direction

Cassette paper load

direction

NOTE

One position staple is not slanted for the following paper sizes.

B5-R, 16K-R

6-32

Using Various Functions > Functions

Mixed Size Stapling

Even with mixed paper sizes, if the sizes have the same width as shown in the combinations below, the output can be

stapled.

• A3 and A4

• B4 and B5

• Ledger and Letter

• Ledger and Letter-R

• 8K and 16K

Punch

Punches holes in sets of finished documents.

NOTE

• Number of sheets that can be stapled: up to 30 sheets.

• When performing Mixed Size Stapling, refer to the following:

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-23)

NOTE

• This function requires the optional Document Finisher and Punch Unit.

• For details on paper sizes that can be punched, refer to the following:

Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) (page 11-29)

Punch Unit (For 1,000-sheet/4,000-sheet) (page 11-31)

• The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole

punching.

Item Value Description

Punch Off

2 holes Left Select the position of punch holes. For details on original

orientation and position of punch holes, refer to the

following:

Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position (page

6-33)

2 holes Top

2 holes Right

3 holes Left

3 holes Top

3 holes Right

4 holes Left

4 holes Top

4 holes Right

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document top edge

to scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation]

to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge

on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].

A3A4

B4B5

LedgerLetter

A3A4

LegalLetter-R

6-33

Using Various Functions > Functions

Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position

Image Original orientation

Original Print results Glass platen Document processor

NOTE

The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole

punching.

6-34

Using Various Functions > Functions

Paper Output

Specify the output tray.

with optional Job Separator

with optional 1,000-sheet Finisher

with optional 4,000-sheet Finisher

with optional Mailbox

Org./Paper

/Finishing Functions Functions

Item Description

Inner tray Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine.

Job Separator Tray Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.

Item Description

Job Separator Tray*1

*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: A3, Ledger.

Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.

Finisher Tray Delivery to the Finisher Tray of the optional Document Finisher.

Item Description

Job Separator Tray*1

*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: A3, Ledger.

Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.

Tray A Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document Finisher.

Tray B Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document Finisher.

When [Heavy 5] (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and tray B is set for the output

destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.

Item Description

Job Separator Tray*1

*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: A3, Ledger.

Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.

Tray A Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document Finisher.

Tray B Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document Finisher.

When [Heavy 5] (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and tray B is set for the output

destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.

Tray 1 to 7 Delivery to tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of the optional Mailbox.

When [Heavy 3] to [Heavy 4] (164 g/m2 - 256 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox is

set for the output destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray B.

When [Heavy 5] (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox is set for the

output destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.

Copy

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-35

Using Various Functions > Functions

ID Card Copy

Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or an insurance card. When you scan the front and back of the card,

both sides will be combined and copied onto a single sheet.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Org. Manual Feed (DP)

Multi-sheet documents such as slips can be read on the document processor whilst still bound together. When placing a

document on the document processor, place one copy at a time.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Density

Adjust density.

Adjust density selecting [-4] (Lighter) to [+4] (Darker).

NOTE

• This can be set when the optional Job Separator or Document Finisher (1,000-sheet Finisher or 4,000-sheet

Finisher) is installed. This cannot be set when the optional Inner Finisher is installed.

• The default setting for Paper Output can be changed.

Paper Output (page 8-19)

Org./Paper

/Finishing

Org./Paper

/Finishing

Org./Sending

Data Format Functions Functions

NOTE

• Requires the optional Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Multifeed Detection).

• Documents can be placed if the total thickness of the multi-sheet document is 220 g/m2 or less.

Color/Image

Quality

Color/Image

Quality

• Functions

• Color/Image

Quality

• Functions

• Color

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-36

Using Various Functions > Functions

Original Image

Select original image type for best results.

Copying

Sending/Printing/Storing

Color/Image

Quality

Color/Image

Quality

• Functions

• Color/Image

Quality

• Functions

• Color

Item Value Description

Text+Photo*1

*1 If gray text is not printed completely using [Text + Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.

Original Type Printer Output Best for mixed text and photo documents printed on this

machine originally.

Book/Magazine Best for mixed text and photos printed in a magazine, etc.

Highlighter

Enhancement

Off, On

(Normal), On

(Bright)

Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and

markings made with highlighter pen.

If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].

Photo Original Type Printer Output Best for photos printed on this machine originally.

Book/Magazine Best for photos printed in a magazine, etc.

Photo Paper Best for photos taken with a camera.

Text Light Text/Fine

Line

Off Best for documents that are mostly text and were originally

printed on this machine.

On Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.

Highlighter

Enhancement

Off, On

(Normal), On

(Bright)

Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and

markings made with highlighter pen.

If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].

Graphic/Map Original Type Printer Output Best for maps and diagrams printed on this machine

originally.

Book/Magazine Best for maps and diagrams printed in a magazine.

Highlighter

Enhancement

Off, On

(Normal), On

(Bright)

Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and

markings made with highlighter pen.

If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].

Item Value Description

Text+Photo Best for mixed text and photo documents.

Highlighter

Enhancement

Off, On

(Normal), On

(Bright)

Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and

markings made with highlighter pen.

If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].

Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-37

Using Various Functions > Functions

EcoPrint

EcoPrint saves toner when printing.

Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not required.

Text Light Text/Fine

Line

Off Best for documents that are mostly text and were originally printed

on this machine.

On Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.

Highlighter

Enhancement

Off, On

(Normal), On

(Bright)

Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and

markings made with highlighter pen.

If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].

Text (for OCR) Scanning produces an image that is suitable for OCR. This

function is only available when Color Selection is set to Black and

White.

Color Selection (page 6-38)

Color/Image

Quality Functions Functions

Item Value Description

Off

On Toner Save Level [1] (Low) to [5] (High) Adjust the Toner Save Level.

Item Value Description

Copy

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-38

Using Various Functions > Functions

Color Selection

Select the color setting.

Copying

Printing

Sending/Storing

Color/Image

Quality

Color/Image

Quality

• Functions

• Color/Image

Quality

• Functions

• Color

Item Description

Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether documents are color or black and white.

Full Color Prints documents in full color.

Black & White Prints documents in black and white.

Single Color Cyan Specify one of the colors and produce copies in that color regardless of original type.

Magenta

Yellow

Red

Green

Blue

Item Description

Auto Color (Color/

Grayscale)*1

*1 Not displayed when printing from USB drive.

The color of the stored document is automatically detected. A color document is

printed in full color, and a black & white document is printed in grayscale.

Auto Color (Color/B & W)*1 The color of the stored document is automatically detected. A color document is

printed in full color, and a black & white document is printed in black & white.

Full Color Prints documents in full color.

Grayscale*1 Prints documents in grayscale.

Black & White Prints documents in black and white.

Item Description

Auto (Color/Grayscale) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and scan

color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale.

Auto (Color/B & W) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and scan

color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White.

Full Color Scans the document in full color.

Grayscale Scans the document in grayscale. Produces a smooth, detailed image.

Black & White Scans the document in black and white.

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-39

Using Various Functions > Functions

Color Balance

Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.

Example:

Color/Image

Quality Functions

Item Value Description

Off

On Cyan [-5] to [+5] Move the cursor to adjust each color (Cyan,

Magenta, Yellow, Black).

Magenta

Yellow

Black

NOTE

This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.

Copy

Custom

Box

More MagentaOriginalLess Magenta

6-40

Using Various Functions > Functions

Hue Adjustment

Adjust the color (hue) of images.

Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow-red or yellow to a strong green-yellow to make more creative

copies.

The following settings can be set.

Color/Image

Quality Functions

Item Description

Off

All Adjust hue for all colors.

Select [ ] or [ ] to adjust the hue.

Individual Select individual colors to adjust the hue.

Select [Red], [Magenta], [Blue], [Yellow],

[Green] or [Cyan] and then select [ ] or [ ] to

adjust the hue.

NOTE

• This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.

• These adjustments are especially useful on rich color images.

Copy

Custom

Box

When adjusting yellow to

more green, blue to more

magenta (the part)

Original

When adjusting yellowish-red

to more yellow, bluish-cyan

to more blue (the part)

Yellow

Green

Blue

Red

Magenta

Cyan

6-41

Using Various Functions > Functions

One-touch Image Adjust

Adjust images as desired to more [Vivid] or more [Muted] images.

The following settings can be set.

After selecting [Portrait Photo], [Landscape Photo (Blue)] or [Landscape Photo (Green)], select from the 3 colors.

Color/Image

Quality Functions

NOTE

This feature can be used with full color and auto color.

Item Before After Description

Off

[Vivid] Increases saturation for a more vivid effect.

[Muted] Reduces saturation for a calmer effect.

[Sharp] Increases contrast for a more pronounced

image.

[Smooth] Reduces contrast for a softer image.

[Light] Makes overall color lighter and less vivid for

a bright and light feel.

[Dark] Makes overall color darker for a heavier feel.

[Portrait Photo] [Portrait

Gives skin color a warm, rosy look.

[Portrait

Gives skin color a tanned look.

[Portrait

Gives skin color a whiter look.

Copy

Custom

Box

6-42

Using Various Functions > Functions

[Landscape Photo (B)] [Blue 1] Makes blue more vivid.

[Blue 2] Makes blue a true blue without any green.

[Blue 3] Gives blue a greenish (emerald green) tint.

[Landscape Photo (G)] [Green 1] Makes green more vivid.

[Green 2] Gives green a yellowish-green tint.

[Green 3] Gives green a slightly bluish tint.

NOTE

Select from one of the 9 available One Touch Image Adjust types. Multiple selections are not possible.

Item Before After Description

6-43

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sharpness

Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.

When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward

"Sharpen". When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire*1 patterns

appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward "Blur".

When [All] is selected, select [-3] to [3] (Blur - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.

When [Text/Fine Line] is selected, select [0] to [3] (Normal - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.

Background Density Adj. (Background Density

Adjustment)

Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.

If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color, select [Manual] and adjust the

density of the ground color.

Color/Image

Quality

Color/Image

Quality

• Functions

• Color/Image

Quality

Functions

Item Value Description

All [+1] to [+3]

(Sharpen)

Emphasizes the image outline.

[-1] to [-3] (Blur) Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*1 effect.

*1 Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.

Text/Fine Line [0] to [3]

(Normal -

Sharpen)

Makes letters and lines appear sharper.

Only text and fine lines are emphasized.

Color/Image

Quality

Color/Image

Quality

• Functions

• Color/Image

Quality

Functions

Item Description

Off Does not adjust the ground color.

Auto Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original.

Manual Select [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density manually.

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

Original More SharpLess Sharp

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-44

Using Various Functions > Functions

Saturation

Adjust the color saturation of the image.

Prevent Bleed-thru

Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Color/Image

Quality Functions

NOTE

This feature is used with full color and auto color. Saturation is disabled if Auto Color detects black and white originals.

Item Description

[-1] to [-3] (Grayish) Results in paler color.

[+1] to [+3] (Vivid) Results in more vivid color.

Color/Image

Quality

Color/Image

Quality

• Functions

• Color/Image

Quality

Functions

Copy

Custom

Box

OriginalGrayish Vivid

Results in paler color. Results in more vivid color.

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-45

Using Various Functions > Functions

Contrast

You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image.

Trapping

Remove blank areas if characters and the image outline in black have blank areas because of color drift.

Color/Image

Quality

Color/Image

Quality

• Functions

• Color/Image

Quality

Functions

Item Description

[+1] to [+4] (Higher) Increases the sharpness of colors.

[-1] to [-4] (Lower) Creates smoother colors.

Color/Image

Quality Functions

IMPORTANT

• Before setting Trapping, execute calibration. Set Trapping only if blank areas are not improved.

Calibration (page 10-58)

• If Trapping is set, the outline may be highlighted.

Item Value Description

Off

On Trapping Level Light, Medium, Heavy Set Trapping Level. A higher level eliminates more blank

areas.

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

Original HigherLower

Copy

Custom

Box

6-46

Using Various Functions > Functions

Erase Colors

Erases colors in the source document.

Zoom

Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.

Copying

The following zoom options are available.

Auto

Adjusts the image to match the paper size.

Color/Image

Quality

Color/Image

Quality

• Functions

• Color/Image

Quality

Functions

Item Value Description

Off

On Yellow, Red, Cyan,

Magenta, Green, Blue,

Black

Select the colors to erase. You can select up to 6 colors.

Color Range 1 (Narrower) to 5

(Wider)

Choose a range of colors to erase. For example, if you

specify yellow and select [5 (Wider)] from the color range,

greens and reds close to yellow will be erased.

NOTE

If you select only [Black], you cannot set the Color Range.

Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup Functions Functions

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

A4: 141%

A6: 70%

6-47

Using Various Functions > Functions

Standard Zoom

Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.

Others

Reduces or enlarges at magnifications other than the Standard Zoom.

Zoom Entry

Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%. Use the numeric keys or

select [+] or [-] to enter the any magnification.

Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)

Metric

Models

400% Max.

200% A5 >> A3

141% A4 >> A3 A5 >> A4

127% Folio>>A3

106% 11"x15">>A3

100%

90% Folio>>A4

75% 11"x15">>A4

70% A3 >> A4 A4 >> A5

50%

25% Min.

Inch Models 400% Max.

200% Statement >>Ledger

154% Statement>>Legal

129% Letter>>Ledger

121% Legal>>Ledger

100%

78% Legal>>Letter

77% Ledger>>Letter

64% Ledger>>Letter

50% Ledger>>Statement

25% Min.

Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)

Metric

Models

115% B5>>A4

86% A4>>B5

129% Statement>>Letter

78% Legal>>Letter

64% Letter>>Statement

Inch Models 141% A5>>A4

115% B5>>A4

90% Folio>>A4

86% A4>>B5

70% A4>>A5

6-48

Using Various Functions > Functions

XY Zoom

Select vertical and horizontal magnifications individually. Magnifications can be set in 1% increments between 25% and

400%.

Printing/Sending/Storing

Item Value Description

XY Zoom X: 25 to 400%

(in 1% increments)

Y: 25 to 400%

(in 1% increments)

Select vertical and horizontal

magnifications individually.

Select [+] or [-] to change the displayed

magnifications of "X" (horizontal) and

"Y" (vertical).

Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys

for entry.

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original

document top edge to scan correct

direction.

Select [Original Orientation] to choose

orientation of the originals, either [Top

Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Then press [OK].

Item Description

100% Reproduces the original size.

Auto Reduces or enlarges original to sending/storing size.

NOTE

• To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size.

Paper Selection (page 6-21)

Sending Size (page 6-83)

Storing Size (page 6-95)

• Some combinations of original size and paper size or sending size may cause the image to be positioned at the

edge of the paper. To center the original vertically and horizontally on the page, use the Centering function.

Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering (page 6-51)

6-49

Using Various Functions > Functions

Combine

Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page.

You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines around the pages.

The following types of the boundary lines are available.

Layout/Edit Functions

Item Value Description

Off

2 in 1 Layout 2 in 1 (Left to Right/Top to Bottom),

2 in 1 (Right to Left/Bottom to Top)

Select the page layout of scanned originals.

Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the boundary line type.

Select [Border Line] to select the page

boundary line.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction.

Select [Original Orientation] to choose

orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge

on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

4 in 1 Layout 4 in 1 (Right then Down),

4 in 1 (Left then Down),

4 in 1 (Down then Right),

4 in 1 (Down then Left)

Select the page layout of scanned originals.

Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the boundary line type.

Select [Border Line] to select the page

boundary line.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction.

Select [Original Orientation] to choose

orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge

on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Copy

Custom

Box

None Dotted LineSolid Line Positioning Mark

6-50

Using Various Functions > Functions

Layout image

Item Image

2 in 1 L to R/T to B

R to L/B to T

4 in 1 Right then Down

Left then Down

Down then Right

Down then Left

NOTE

• The paper sizes supported in Combine mode are A4, A5, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement,

Oficio II, and 16K.

• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.

6-51

Using Various Functions > Functions

Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering

Copying/Printing

Add margins (white space). In addition, you can set the margin width and the back page margin.

Centering: Centers the original image on the paper when copying onto paper different from the original size.

Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup Functions Functions

NOTE

The default setting for margin width can be changed.

Margin Default (page 8-34)

Item Value Description

Off

Margin Margin Metric: -18 mm to +18 mm

(in 1 mm increments)

Inch: -0.75 to +0.75"

(in 0.01" increments)

Set the margin width.*1

Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the margins for

"Left/Right" and "Top/Bottom".

*1 The input units can be changed in System Menu.

Measurement (page 8-6)

Back Page Auto, Manual For duplex copying, select [Back Page] and select

[Auto] or [Manual].

When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate margin is

applied automatically on the rear page depending on a

margin specified for the front page and a binding

orientation.

When [Manual] is set, you can set a different margin

than the front on the back. Set the margin in the screen

that is displayed. The setting selections are the same as

for the front.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*2

*2 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document top edge

to scan correct direction.

Select [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of

the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on

Left].

Centering*3

*3 Not displayed when printing from USB drive.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*2

Select the orientation of the original document top edge

to scan correct direction.

Select [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of

the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on

Left].

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-52

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sending/Storing

When you have sent/stored the original after specifying the original size and sending size, depending on these sizes, a

margin is created at the bottom, left, or right side of paper. By using the Centering function, the image is placed with a

margin equally created for all edges.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

6-53

Using Various Functions > Functions

Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan

Erases the black border that forms around the image.

Standard

Full Scan

Border Erase Sheet

Border Erase Book

Individual Border Erase

Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup Functions Functions

Erase the black frame created in the original. Erasing width is fixed.

Scan originals without white margins. No border erase.

Erase the black frame created in the original. Erasing width can be adjusted.

Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such

as a thick book. You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders

around the edges and in the center of the book.

You can specify border erase widths individually for all edges.

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

Original Finishing

6-54

Using Various Functions > Functions

NOTE

•[Full Scan] is not displayed when copying.

• The default setting for border erase width can be changed.

Border Erase Default (page 8-32)

• The default width for back page can be changed.

Border Erase to Back Page (page 8-32)

Item Value Description

Standard Scan originals with Standard Mode.

Full Scan*1

*1 Not displayed when copying.

Scan originals without white margins.

Border Erase

Sheet

Border Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm

(in 1 mm increments)

Inch: 0.00 to 2.00"

(in 0.01" increments)

Set the border erase width.*2

Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the value.

*2 The input units can be changed in System Menu.

Measurement (page 8-6)

Back Page Same as Front Page,

Do Not Erase

For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page] and then

select [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].

Border Erase

Book

Border Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm

(in 1 mm increments)

Inch: 0.00 to 2.00"

(in 0.01" increments)

Set the border erase width around the edges and in

the center of the book.*2

Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the value.

Back Page Same as Front Page,

Do Not Erase

For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page] and then

select [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].

Individual

Border Erase

Border Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm

(in 1 mm increments)

Inch: 0.00 to 2.00"

(in 0.01" increments)

Set the border erase width individually for all

edges.*2

Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the value.

Back Page Same as Front Page,

Do Not Erase

For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page] and then

select [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top, Top

Edge on Left, Auto*3

*3 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original

Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,

either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

6-55

Using Various Functions > Functions

Erase Shadowed Areas

When scanning with the document processor open, erase the extra shaded area.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup Functions Functions

NOTE

In case the Document processor or the original cover is not opened sufficiently, it might not be able to erase the

shaded area.

Prevent Light Reflection (page 8-12)

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-56

Using Various Functions > Functions

Booklet

The Booklet option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures or pamphlets. A

booklet, such as a magazine, is made by folding at the center.

You can print the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multipurpose

tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to the following:

Paper Source for Cover (page 8-18)

Binding on the left side

Binding on the right side

Top binding

Layout/Edit Functions

NOTE

Using the optional 4,000-sheet Finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your copies (fold them in two

with staples in the center). Supported paper sizes are A3, A4-R, B4, Ledger, Letter-R, Legal, Oficio II and 8K.

Type of original Original size Paper size

One-sided original,

Two-sided original

All*1

*1 Except for custom sized originals.

A3, A4-R, A4, A5, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger,

Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Oficio II and 8K

Book Original A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R

and 8K

The folded copies can be read from left to right.

The folded copies can be read from right to left.

The folded copies can be read from top to bottom.

Copy

Custom

Box

Original Copy

6-57

Using Various Functions > Functions

Copying

Item Value Description

Off

1-sided >>

Booklet

Binding in Finishing Left, Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original

document top edge to scan correct

direction. Select [Original Orientation] to

choose orientation of the originals, either

[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Then press [OK].

Cover Off

Cover:

Front Cover

Print Setting

Do Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

Select whether to add the cover. Select the

printing method for the cover to be

inserted.

Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and

specify the print setting for the cover to be

inserted. Select from [Do Not Print], [Back

Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and

press [OK].

Cover:

Back Cover

Print Setting

Do Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

Staple/Fold Off, Fold Only,

Saddle Stitch

To fold finished copies in half, select

[Staple/Fold] and then select [Fold Only].

To use saddle stitching, select [Staple/

Fold] and then select [Saddle Stitch].

2-sided >>

Booklet

Binding in Original Left/Right, Top Select the binding direction of originals.

Binding in Finishing Left, Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original

document top edge to scan correct

direction. Select [Original Orientation] to

choose orientation of the originals, either

[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Then press [OK].

Cover Off

Cover:

Front Cover

Print Setting

Do Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

Select whether to add the cover. Select the

printing method for the cover to be

inserted.

Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and

specify the print setting for the cover to be

inserted. Select from [Do Not Print], [Back

Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and

press [OK].

Cover:

Back Cover

Print Setting

Do Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

Staple/Fold Off, Fold Only,

Saddle Stitch

To fold finished copies in half, select

[Staple/Fold] and then select [Fold Only].

To use saddle stitching, select [Staple/

Fold] and then select [Saddle Stitch].

6-58

Using Various Functions > Functions

Printing

Book >>

Booklet*2

Binding in Original Left, Right Select the binding direction of originals.

Binding in Finishing Left, Right Select the binding orientation of copies.

Cover Off, On Select whether to add the cover. Select

[Cover] to select [Cover], and select [OK].

Staple/Fold Off, Fold Only,

Saddle Stitch

To fold finished copies in half, select

[Staple/Fold] and then select [Fold Only].

To use saddle stitching, select [Staple/

Fold] and then select [Saddle Stitch].

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

*2 [Top Edge on Top] is set for "Original Orientation".

Item Value Description

Off

Booklet Binding Left, Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.

Cover Off

Cover:

Front Cover

Print Setting

Do Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

Select whether to add the cover. Select the

printing method for the cover to be

inserted.

Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and

specify the print setting for the cover to be

inserted. Select from [Not Print], [Back

Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and

press [OK].

Cover:

Back Cover

Print Setting

Do Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

Staple/Fold Off, Fold Only,

Saddle Stitch

To fold finished copies in half, select

[Staple/Fold] and then select [Fold Only].

To use saddle stitching, select [Staple/

Fold] and then select [Saddle Stitch].

NOTE

• The number of sheets that can be folded or Saddle Stitch stapled varies depending on paper weight. For details,

refer to the following:

Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) (page 11-32)

• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to place the originals in page order.

Item Value Description

6-59

Using Various Functions > Functions

Duplex

Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals.

The following modes are available.

One-sided to Two-sided

Two-sided to One-sided

Two-sided to Two-sided

Layout/Edit Functions Functions

Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd

number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.

The following binding options are available.

A Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.

B Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.

Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation

when turning the pages.

Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets.

Place originals in the document processor.

The following binding options are available.

• Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.

• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.

Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. Place originals in

the document processor.

NOTE

The paper sizes supported in Duplex mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,

Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Hagaki

(Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) and Custom 1 to 4.

Copy

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

Original Copy

ghi

def

abc

ghi

abc

def

ghi

abc

def

Original Copy

6-60

Using Various Functions > Functions

Book to One-sided

Book to Two-sided

Copying

Prints 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided. Select the binding

orientation for original and finished documents.

Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book original.

The following binding options are available.

Binding Left: Originals with facing pages are copied from left to right.

Binding Right: Originals with facing pages are copied from right to left.

NOTE

• The original sizes supported in Book to One-sided mode: A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K

• The paper sizes supported in Book to One-sided mode: A4-R, A4, A5, B5-R, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R and 16K

Produces two-sided copies from an open book original with

facing pages.

NOTE

• The original sizes supported in Book to Two-sided mode: A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K

• The paper sizes supported in Book to Two-sided mode: A4-R, A4, A5, B5-R, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R and 16K

Item Value Description

1-sided>>1-sided ―Disables the function.

1-sided>>2-sided Finishing Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original

Orientation] to choose orientation of the

originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge

on Left].

Original Copy

Book to

2-sided

Book to

Book

6-61

Using Various Functions > Functions

When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key.

After scanning all originals, select [Finish Scan] to start copying.

Printing

Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets.

2-sided>>1-sided Original Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of originals.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original

Orientation] to choose orientation of the

originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge

on Left].

2-sided>>2-sided Original Left/Right, Top Select the binding direction of originals.

Finishing Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original

Orientation] to choose orientation of the

originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge

on Left].

Book >> 1-sided*2 Original Left, Right Select the binding direction of originals.

Book >> 2-sided*2 Original Left, Right Select the binding direction of originals.

Finishing Book>>2-sided,

Book>>Book

Select the desired Duplex option.

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

*2 [Top Edge on Top] is set for "Original Orientation".

Item Value Description

1-sided ―Disables the function.

2-sided Finishing Left/Right Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for

binding on the left or right.

Top Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for

binding on the top.

Item Value Description

6-62

Using Various Functions > Functions

Cover

Adds a cover to the finished documents.

You can print the first page and/or the last page onto colored paper or thick paper fed from the different paper source

than the regular one. The following two options are available. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multipurpose tray.

To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to the following:

Paper Source for Cover (page 8-18)

The printing method can be set for the covers. Specify a print setting for each cover.

Layout/Edit Functions

Item Value Description

Off

Front Cover Front Cover Print

Setting

Do Not Print, Front

Only, Back Only*1,

Duplex*1

*1 [Back Only] and [Duplex] appears when finishing is set to 2-sided in "Duplex".

Duplex (page 6-59)

Different paper has to be inserted for the first

page of the document.

Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only], [Back

Only], or [Duplex] for the print setting of the

inserted paper.

Front and Back

Covers

Front Cover Print

Setting

Do Not Print, Front

Only, Back Only*1,

Duplex*1

Different paper has to be inserted for the first

page and last page of the document.

Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only], [Back

Only], or [Duplex] for the print setting of the

inserted paper.

Back Cover Print

Setting

Do Not Print, Front

Only, Back Only*1,

Duplex*1

Copy

Custom

Box

6-63

Using Various Functions > Functions

Form Overlay

Prints the original document overlaid with a form or image.

Once you scan and register the form, the form is overlaid onto the original. You can also use a form that is already

registered in the Document Box.

Place the original for the form on top of the other originals. When using the optional document processor, the first page

of the originals should be placed on the top.

Layout/Edit Functions

Item Value Description

Off

Select Stored

Form

Select Stored Form ―Form must be previously registered in

Document Box.

Form for Form Overlay (page 5-69)

Select the form to be overlaid from Document

Box.

Select [Select Stored Form] to display the

Document Box that store documents which

can be used as a form. Select the desired form

from the list and select [Select].

After you have selected the form, select [Next

>].

Density 10% to 100% Specify the density of the form to be overlaid.

Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the

value.

Finishing

Image

Transparent The form is overlaid on the document.

Form on Original

Image

The form is placed on top of the document.

Original Image on

Form

The form is placed under the document.

Copy

Custom

Box

Original CopyForm

Density:

30%

Density:

100%

6-64

Using Various Functions > Functions

Page #

Adds page numbers to the finished documents.

The available formats for numbering are [-1-], [P. 1 ] and [1/n]. The format [1/n] prints the total number of pages in the

place of "n".

Select the numbering format from [-1-], [P. 1 ] or [1/n].

Scan New

Form*1

Density 10% to 100% Specify the density of the form to be overlaid.

Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the

value.

Finishing Image Transparent The form is overlaid on the document.

Form on Original

Image

The form is placed on top of the document.

Original Image on

Form

The form is placed under the document.

*1 Not displayed when printing from the custom box.

Layout/Edit Functions

Item Value Description

Copy

Custom

Box

Original [-1-][P. 1 ][1/n]

6-65

Using Various Functions > Functions

Item Value Description

Off

-1-, P.1, 1/

Position Top Left, Top Middle,

Top Right, Bottom Left,

Bottom Middle,

Bottom Right

Select the print position of page number.

Specify the detailed page number position using

numeric values, and to set the page number position

([Same as Front Page], [Mirror Front Page]) when a

page number is placed on the back side of the paper in

duplex printing.

1st Page 1 to 10 To start page numbering from a page other than the first

page, use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to specify the

starting page.

Start # 1 to 9999 To start the numbering with a number other than 1, use

[+], [-] or the numeric keys to specify the starting

number.

Denominator#*1

*1 This item appears when [1/n] is selected.

Auto, Manual

(1 to 9999)

The total number of pages "n" in the format [1/n] can be

changed manually. Select [Manual] and use [+], [-] or

the numeric keys to enter the total number of pages.

Last Page Auto, Manual (-10 to 0) If you do not want page numbering through to the last

page, select [Manual]. Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to

specify the final page to be numbered (a negative

number of pages counting backwards from the last

page).

Specify the desired number up to -10.

Font Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of page number.

Size Font sizes registered in

"Font (Page #)" are

displayed.

Font Size (Page #)

(page 8-32)

Set the font size of page number.

Color Black, Cyan, Magenta,

Yellow, Red, Green,

Blue, White

Set the color of page number.

Style None, Bold, Italic,

Bold/Italic

Set the font style of page number. Select a font style by

checking the checkbox.

Display

Pattern

Transparent, Clipping,

Overwrite

Set the display method of page number.

Density 10 to 100%

(in 10% increments)

Set the density of the color of page number.

Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the value.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*2

*2 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document top edge

to scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation]

to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge

on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Count Blank

Page*3

*3 Not displayed when printing from the custom box.

Off, On When a scanned document contains blank pages, select

[On] if you require blank pages to be numbered. Select

[Off] to skip blank pages.

6-66

Using Various Functions > Functions

Memo Page

Delivers copies with a space for adding notes.

You can also print two originals onto the same sheet with a space or add lines to indicate page boundaries.

Select [Layout A] or [Layout B] and select the page layout from "Layout".

Layout A

Layout B

Layout/Edit

NOTE

The paper sizes supported in Memo mode: A4, A5, B5, Legal, Oficio II, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Statement, Folio and

16K.

Reduces images of each original page for printing onto half of a page,

leaving the other half blank for notes.

Reduces images of two original pages for printing onto half of a page,

leaving the other half blank for notes.

Item Value Description

Off

Layout A Layout Left/Top, Right/Bottom Select how to lay out the pages of scanned

original.

Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the boundary line type. Select [Border

Line] to select the page boundary line.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left, Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original

Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,

either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Copy

Original Copy

6-67

Using Various Functions > Functions

Poster

To use this device to make copies larger than the maximum paper size, use Poster mode to separate and copy an

enlarged image onto multiple pages.

The completed copies have overlapping areas. A single large page can be created by pasting those areas together.

Choose one of the following 3 enlargement settings:

Layout B Layout Top Left to Right,

Top Right to Left,

Top Left to Bottom,

Top Right to Bottom

Select how to lay out the pages of scanned

original.

Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the boundary line type. Select [Border

Line] to select the page boundary line.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left, Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original

Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,

either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Layout/Edit

Item Value Description

Off

Copy Size Metric: A0, A1, A2

Inch:

34 × 44", 22 × 34", 17 × 22"

Metric:

Select A0, A1 or A2 as finish size. Copy is enlarged

according to the selected paper size.

Inch:

Select 34 × 44", 22 × 34" or 17 × 22" as finish size. Copy

is enlarged according to selected paper size.

Zoom Priority 100 to 400% (in 1% increments) Image will be output on the necessary number of copies

for the specified zoom size.

Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to change the displayed

magnification as desired.

Number of

Sheets

2 sheets, 4 sheets, 8 sheets Copy is enlarged according to the specified number of

sheets.

Item Value Description

Copy

Original Copy

6-68

Using Various Functions > Functions

Insert Sheets/Chapters

Insert a separator sheet, or make the first page of the chapter the front page when performing duplex printing.

The configured pages are displayed on the list.

Layout/Edit

Item Value Description

Off

On Add Separator Separator

Sheet

1 to 998*1

*1 If your model is equipped with a hard drive, the number of sheets is 4999.

Enter document page numbers where

separators get inserted. Use [+], [-] or

the numeric keys to enter the page

number.

Paper

Source

Cassette 1 to 5,

MP Tray

Select the source of the paper for the

separator.

Chapter Chapter

Page

2 to 998*1 Enter the page numbers of the original

document where you want to insert the

chapters. Use [+], [-] or the numeric

keys to enter the page number.

Edit ―Change the configuration of the chapter

page and separator. The method of

operation is the same as that of a new

addition.

Delete ―Delete the page selected in the list.

Next > Sheets Setting Do Not Print,

Front Only, Back

Only*2, Duplex*2

*2 [Back Only] and [Duplex] appear when finishing is set to 2-sided in "Duplex".

Duplex (page 6-59)

Select [Do Not Print,], [Front Only],

[Back Only], or [Duplex] for the print

setting of the inserted paper.

Copy

6-69

Using Various Functions > Functions

Image Repeat

Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image. You can also specify the area of the original to repeat.

Zoom Priority

Double Copy

Layout/Edit

Repeat an image of specified zoom ratio.

Copy two image.

Item Value Description

Off

Zoom

Priority

25 to 400% (in 1% increments) Set the default screen.

Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to change the displayed

magnification as desired.

To set the area of the original to be repeated, select [Next >].

Specify

Repeat

Area

Off

On To set the area of the original to be repeated, select [On] for

"Specify Repeat Area".

Start Metric*1

X1: 0 to 431 mm

Y1: 0 to 296 mm

Inch

X1: 0.00 to 16.99"

Y1: 0.00 to 11.68"

*1 The input units can be changed in System Menu.

Measurement (page 8-6)

Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to input the area of the original

to be repeated.

Y1: Length from top left of

platen to top edge of repeat

area

X1: Length from top left of

platen to left edge of repeat

area

Y2: Height of repeat area

X2: Width of repeat area

Area Metric*1

X2: 1 to 432 mm

Y2: 1 to 297 mm

Inch

X2: 0.01 to 17.00"

Y2: 0.01 to 11.69"

Double Copy ―Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet.

For example, you can double-copy an A5 original onto an A4

sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies that are

identical to the original.

Copy

Original Copy

6-70

Using Various Functions > Functions

Text Stamp

You can add a text stamp on the documents.

Copying/Printing

Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup Functions Functions

NOTE

This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings.

Printing Jobs (page 8-76)

Item Value Description

Off

On Text Stamp Any text string (up to

32 characters), Template 1 to

Select the entry field and enter the text string

to be printed, or select a text stamp from the

displayed templates.

After you have set the stamp, select [Next >].

NOTE

Templates that have been set will appear.

Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-32)

Stamp Method Each Print Page,

Each Original Page

Select the stamp method.

Select [Stamp Method] and set the stamp

method for text stamp.

Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top

Right, Middle Left, Center,

Middle Right, Bottom Left,

Bottom Middle, Bottom Right

Set the stamp position to be printed.

Select [

Position

] and select the text stamp

position.

Specify the detailed stamp position using

numeric values, and to set the stamp position

and angle when a stamp is placed on the

back side of the paper in duplex printing.

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-71

Using Various Functions > Functions

On Font Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of text stamp.

Size Registered font sizes are

displayed.

Set the font size of text stamp.

For details on registering font sizes, refer to

the following:

Font Size (Text Stamp) (page 8-32)

Character

Border

Off, Circle, Rectangle,

Underline

Set the character border and underline.

Color Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,

Red, Green, Blue, White

Set the color of text stamp.

Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of text stamp. Select a font

style by checking the checkbox.

Display

Pattern

Transparent, Clipping,

Overwrite

Set the display method of text stamp.

Density 10 to 100% (in 10%

increments)

Set the density of text stamp color.

Set the value by using [+], [-] or the numeric

keys.

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge

on Left, Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction. Select

[Original Orientation] to choose orientation

of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or

[Top Edge on Left].

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Item Value Description

6-72

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sending/Storing

NOTE

• This cannot be set when Long Original is set.

Long Original (page 6-84)

• This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings.

Sending Jobs (page 8-78)

Storing Jobs (page 8-80)

Item Value Description

Off

On Text Stamp Any text string (up to

32 characters), Template 1 to

Select the entry field and enter the text string

to be printed, or select a text stamp from the

displayed templates.

After you have set the stamp, select [Next >].

NOTE

Templates that have been set will appear.

Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-32)

Stamp Method Each Print Page,

Each Original Page

Select the stamp method.

Select [Stamp Method] and set the stamp

method for text stamp.

Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top

Right, Middle Left, Center,

Middle Right, Bottom Left,

Bottom Middle, Bottom Right

Set the stamp position to be printed.

Select [

Position

] and select the text stamp

position.

Set the stamp position using numeric values,

and to set the stamp angle.

Font Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of text stamp.

Size Registered font sizes are

displayed.

Set the font size of text stamp.

For details on registering font sizes, refer to

the following:

Font Size (Text Stamp) (page 8-32)

Character

Border

Off, Circle, Rectangle,

Underline

Set the character border and underline.

Color Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,

Red, Green, Blue, White

Set the color of text stamp.

Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of text stamp. Select a font

style by checking the checkbox.

Display

Pattern

Transparent, Clipping,

Overwrite

Set the display method of text stamp.

Density 10 to 100%

(in 10% increments)

Set the density of text stamp color.

Set the value by using [

], [

] or the numeric keys.

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left, Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction. Select

[Original Orientation] to choose orientation

of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or

[Top Edge on Left].

6-73

Using Various Functions > Functions

Bates Stamp

You can add a bates stamp on the documents.

Copying/Printing

Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup Functions Functions

NOTE

This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings.

Printing Jobs (page 8-76)

Item Value Description

Off

On Bates Stamp Date, User Name, Serial

Number, Numbering, Text 1,

Text 2

Set the stamp to be printed.

When [Text 1] or [Text 2] is selected, select

the entry field and enter the text string.

After you have set the stamp, select [Next >].

Date Format MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY,

YYYY/MM/DD

Set the date format.

This setting is available when "Date" is set in

"Bates Stamp".

Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top

Right, Middle Left, Center,

Middle Right, Bottom Left,

Bottom Middle, Bottom Right

Set the stamp position to be printed.

Select [

Position

] and select the bates stamp

position.

Specify the detailed stamp position using

numeric values, and to set the stamp position

when a stamp is placed on the back side of

the paper in duplex printing.

Numbering Default 1 to 9999999 Set the starting sequence number.

If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On],

you can set the number of digits of the serial

number (1 to 7 digits).

This setting is available when "Numbering" is

set in "Bates Stamp".

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-74

Using Various Functions > Functions

On Font Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of bates stamp.

Size Registered font sizes are

displayed.

Set the font size of bates stamp.

For details on registering font sizes, refer to

the following:

Font Size (Bates Stamp) (page 8-32)

Color Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,

Red, Green, Blue, White

Set the color of the bates stamp.

Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of bates stamp. Select a font

style by checking the checkbox.

Display

Pattern

Transparent, Clipping,

Overwrite

Set the display method of the bates stamp.

Density 10 to 100%

(in 10% increments)

Set the density of bates stamp color.

Set the value by using [+], [-] or the numeric

keys.

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left, Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction. Select

[Original Orientation] to choose orientation

of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or

[Top Edge on Left].

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Item Value Description

6-75

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sending/Storing

NOTE

• This cannot be set when Long Original is set.

Long Original (page 6-84)

• This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings.

Sending Jobs (page 8-78)

Storing Jobs (page 8-80)

Item Value Description

Off

On Bates Stamp Date, User Name, Serial

Number, Numbering, Text 1,

Text 2

Set the stamp to be printed.

When [Text 1] or [Text 2] is selected, select

the entry field and enter the text string.

After you have set the stamp, select [Next >].

Date Format MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY,

YYYY/MM/DD

Set the date format.

This setting is available when "Date" is set in

"Bates Stamp".

Numbering Default 1 to 9999999 Set the starting sequence number.

If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On],

you can set the number of digits of the serial

number (1 to 7 digits).

This setting is available when "Numbering" is

set in "Bates Stamp".

Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top

Right, Middle Left, Center,

Middle Right, Bottom Left,

Bottom Middle, Bottom Right

Set the stamp position to be printed.

Select [

Position

] and select the bates stamp position.

Specify the stamp position using numeric values.

Font Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of bates stamp.

Size Registered font sizes are

displayed.

Set the font size of bates stamp.

For details on registering font sizes, refer to

the following:

Font Size (Bates Stamp) (page 8-32)

Color Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,

Red, Green, Blue, White

Set the color of bates stamp.

Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of bates stamp. Select a font

style by checking the checkbox.

Display

Pattern

Transparent, Clipping,

Overwrite

Set the display method of bates stamp.

Density 10 to 100%

(in 10% increments)

Set the density of bates stamp color.

Set the value by using [+], [-] or the numeric

keys.

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left, Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction. Select

[Original Orientation] to choose orientation

of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or

[Top Edge on Left].

6-76

Using Various Functions > Functions

Handwriting Enhancement

Emphasize the handwriting texts and lines by changing their color to specified one.

Continuous Scan

Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job.

Originals will be scanned continuously until you select [Finish Scan].

Select [On] to use continuous scanning. To use Job Build, select [Job Build]. You can set the functions that appear on

the screen during scanning.

(Value: [Off] / [On] / [Job Build])

Job Build

When [Job Build] is selected when copying or printing, the binding orientation for finished documents can be selected

from [Binding Left], [Binding Right] or [Binding Top].

The following functions can be selected during scanning.

Advanced

Setup Functions

Item Value Description

Off

On Yellow, Red, Cyan, Magenta, Green,

Blue, Black, Make with White

Set the color to change.

Advanced

Setup

Advanced

Setup Functions Functions

Item Description

Next Copy: On Back In duplex copying, prints on the back side if the next page is to be printed on the front

side. Select [On Back] to use this function.

Next Copy: On Front In duplex copying, prints on the front side if the next page is to be printed on the back

side. Select [On Front] to use this function.

Sheet Insertion Inserts a blank paper in the next page. Select [Sheet Insertion] to use this function.

Send

USB

Drive

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

1~10

1~30

11~20

21~30

6-77

Using Various Functions > Functions

Auto Image Rotation

Automatically rotates the image 90 degrees when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the

orientations are different.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Negative Image

Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Mirror Image

Copies the mirrored image of the original.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Advanced

Setup

NOTE

• You can select whether to rotate the image automatically in the default settings.

Auto Image Rotation (Copy) (page 8-34)

• When you have enabled this function, you can select how the images are rotated.

Auto Image Rotation Action (page 8-34)

Advanced

Setup

NOTE

This function is only available for black and white copy mode.

Advanced

Setup

Copy

6-78

Using Various Functions > Functions

Job Finish Notice

Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.

It is also available that send a notice when a job is interrupted.

Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the

machine to finish.

File Name Entry

Adds a file name.

Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job history or job status

using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here.

Enter the file name (up to 32 characters).

To add date and time, select [Date and Time]. To add job number, select [Job No.]. To add both, select [Job No.] &

[Date and Time] or [Date and Time] & [Job No.].

Advanced

Setup

Advanced

Setup Functions Functions

NOTE

• PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.

Command Center RX (page 2-66)

• E-mail can be sent to a single destination.

• It will be possible to download the scan data in PC from the stored URL described in the text of the notice E-mail of

Job Finish Notice for "Send to Folder (SMB/FTP)" or "Storing Documents to a Custom Box". This is a useful function

in case if it is not possible to send/receive a large amount of scan data due to the restriction of the mail attachment

file size.

Item Description

Off

Address Book Select the notification destination from the address book.

Address Book Select the notification destination on the address book screen, then select [OK].

[] (information

icon)

Information on the selected destination can be viewed.

Notify when

interrupted

Select [On] if you require an e-mail notification when a job is interrupted.

Address Entry Enter E-mail address directly. Select the entry field, enter the address (up to 256

characters) and select [OK].

Notify when

interrupted

Select [On] if you require an e-mail notification when a job is interrupted.

Advanced

Setup

Advanced

Setup Functions Functions

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-79

Using Various Functions > Functions

Priority Override

Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority.

The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Repeat Copy

Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed.

For confidential documents, you can set up a password for the use of Repeat Copy. In such a case, the correct

password must be entered to perform Repeat Copy.

To register a password, enter a 4-digit password.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Repeat Copy is not available when the Data Security Function is active.

When the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is set to 0 (zero), this function cannot be

used.

Repeat Copy Job Retention (page 8-49)

You can select Repeat Copy as the default setting.

Repeat Copy (page 8-34)

Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying.

File Name Entry (page 6-78)

Repeat Copy

The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Job Box. Refer to Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs to print out the Repeat Copy

jobs.

Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs (page 5-68)

Advanced

Setup Functions Functions

NOTE

• This function is not available if current job was an override.

• Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage. In this

case, try the interrupt copy.

Interrupt Copy (page 5-22)

Advanced

Setup

IMPORTANT

• A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the power switch is turned off.

• If you forget the password, Repeat Copy cannot be performed for that document. Make a note of the

password beforehand if necessary.

Copy

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

Copy

6-80

Using Various Functions > Functions

OHP Backing Sheet

When two or three OHP transparencies are stacked on top of each other, static electricity may make them difficult to

handle. When using OHP Backing Sheet, a paper sheet is automatically inserted between each transparency, making

them easier to handle. Also, the same original page can be printed to the backing sheet for multiple page printing.

Blank Sheet

Copied Sheet

Advanced

Setup

NOTE

• For transparency film that can be used, refer to the following:

Transparencies (page 11-17)

• Never load OHP transparencies into trays or cassettes other than the multipurpose tray.

• When OHP Backing Sheet is set, the multipurpose tray paper type is automatically set to "Transparency".

• If the optional 1,000-Sheet Finisher or 4,000-Sheet Finisher is installed, you may need to specify the output

destination for finished copies.

Paper Output (page 6-34)

Outputs a blank backing sheet after printing to a transparency. (* denotes

transparency.)

After printing to a transparency, copies the same original image to the

backing sheet paper. (* denotes transparency.)

IMPORTANT

• Fan through the transparencies before loading.

• Up to 1 transparency can be loaded at one time.

• Be sure that paper of the same size and orientation as the transparencies is loaded in the cassette.

Item Value Description

Off

Blank Sheet,

Copied Sheet

Paper Source Auto, Cassette 1 (to 5) Select the media to be fed. When [Auto] is

selected, the machine automatically selects

media that matches the size of the original.

Copy

12*

Original Copy

6-81

Using Various Functions > Functions

DP Read Action

When the document processor is used, select the scanning operation for the document processor.

Detect Multi-fed Originals

When reading a document from the document processor, if the multiple feeding of documents is detected, then the

reading stops automatically.

Detect Stapled Originals

When reading a document from the document processor, if a stapled document is detected, then the reading stops

automatically.

Advanced

Setup

Item Description

Speed Priority Gives priority to scanning speed.

Quality Priority Gives priority to image quality at a slightly slower scan speed.

Advanced

Setup

Advanced

Setup Functions Functions

Item Description

On In case of detecting that multiple sheets of original are fed at the same time, the

message is displayed and stop scanning the original.

Off It does not detect.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Multifeed Detection).

Advanced

Setup

Advanced

Setup Functions Functions

Item Description

On In case of detecting that the original is stapled or the original is fed skewed, the

message is displayed and stop scanning the original.

Off It does not detect.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Multifeed Detection).

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

Copy

Send

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-82

Using Various Functions > Functions

Skip Blank Page

When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are

not blank.

Blank pages can be set as pages that include ruled lines and a small number of characters.

The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the

document.

Select [On] > [Detect Item to Skip], and select [Blank Pages + Ruled Lines], [Blank Pages Only] or [Blank Pages +

Some Text].

2-sided/Book Original

Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original.

Advanced

Setup

Advanced

Setup Functions Functions

NOTE

The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank pages.

Org./Sending

Data Format Functions Functions

Item Value Description

1-sided ―"2-sided/Book Original" is not set.

2-sided Binding Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of originals.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to

scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation] to

choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]

or [Top Edge on Left].

Book*2

*2 [Top Edge on Top] is set for "Original Orientation".

Binding Left, Right Select the binding orientation of originals.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to

scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation] to

choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]

or [Top Edge on Left].

Copy

Send Custom

Box

USB

Drive

Send

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-83

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sample image

Sending Size

Select size of image to be sent.

Select [Same as Original Size], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the sending size.

Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom

Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.

Value Image

2-sided Binding Left/Right

Binding Top

Book Binding Left

Binding Right

Org./Sending

Data Format Functions

Item Value Description

Same as Original Size ―Automatically sends the same size as the

original.

Metric A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio,

216 × 340 mm

Select from the Metric series standard sizes.

Inch Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11" × 15",

Oficio II

Select from the Inch series standard sizes.

Others 8K, 16K, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki

(Return postcard)

Select from special standard sizes.

Original size and sending size are the same different

Original Size (page 6-20) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.

Sending Size Select [Same as Original Size]. Select the desired size.

Zoom (page 6-46) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].

NOTE

When you specify the sending size that is different from the original size, and select the zoom of [100%], you can send

the image as the actual size (No Zoom).

Send

Custom

Box

6-84

Using Various Functions > Functions

Long Original

Reads long-sized original documents using a document processor.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

File Format

Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted.

Select the file format from [

PDF

], [

TIFF

], [

XPS

], [

JPEG

], [

OpenXPS

], [

High Comp. PDF

], [

Word

], [

Excel

], and [

PowerPoint

When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.

If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings.

Org./Sending

Data Format Functions

NOTE

• Long originals are sent in black and white.

• Only a single side of a long original can be scanned. Originals of up to 1,900 mm / 74.8"*1 long can be scanned.

• A resolution of 300 × 300 dpi or smaller can be selected.

• This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set.

*1 1,600 mm/63" if fax functions are used.

Org./Sending

Data Format Functions Functions

Item Value Color mode

PDF*1*2*3*4

*1 You can create Searchable PDF file by running OCR on the scanned document.

OCR Text Recognition (Option) (page 6-85)

*2 Set the PDF/A. (Value: [Off] / [PDF/A-1a] / [PDF/A-1b] / [PDF/A-2a] / [PDF/A-2b] / [PDF/A-2u]).

*3 Set PDF encryption.

PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-86)

*4 Set Digital Signature to File.

PDF Electronic Signature (page 6-89)

1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black

and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White

TIFF

XPS

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale

JPEG

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black

and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White

OpenXPS

High Comp. PDF*1*2*3*4 Compression Ratio Priority,

Standard, Quality Priority

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/

Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale

Word*5 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color,

Grayscale

Excel*5

PowerPoint*5

Send

USB

Drive

Send

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-85

Using Various Functions > Functions

OCR Text Recognition (Option)

When [

PDF

], [

High Comp. PDF

[Word]

[Excel]

, or

[PowerPoint]

is selected for the file format, you can create

Searchable file by running OCR on the scanned document. Select [

OCR Text Recognition

], and then [

], select the

language of the document, and select [

*5 Word, Excel and PowerPoint will be saved in a Microsoft Office 2007 or later file format.

Scan to Office Function (page 6-88)

Item Description

Off Do not create Searchable file.

On Create Searchable file.

Select the language to extract from the languages that appear on the touch panel.

NOTE

• This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)

• This function cannot be set when you send from the Custom Box.

• If the proper language is not selected, file creation may take a long time or the creation may fail.

The default language can be changed in System Menu.

Primary OCR Language*2 (page 8-36)

• If you do not set an original in the correct orientation, the text of the document may not be recognized as characters.

In addition, it may take some time to create the file. Check the following:

- The original orientation is correct.

• The accuracy of the text recognition depends on the original condition. The following condition may result in

decreasing the recognition accuracy.

- Repeatedly copied documents (as copied copy)

- Received faxes (with low resolution)

- Originals with the character space too narrow or wide

- Originals with the lines on the text

- Originals with the special fonts

- Binding part of the book

- A handwritten texts

6-86

Using Various Functions > Functions

PDF Encryption Functions

If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and

editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.

Select [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] in [File Format], and select [Encryption].

Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in [Compatibility].

When [Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected

Item Value Description

Password to Open

Document

Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters).

Enter the password again for confirmation.

Password to Edit/Print

Document

Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters).

Enter the password again for confirmation.

When you have entered the password to edit/print

document, you can specifically limit the operation.

Printing Allowed Not Allowed, Allowed Restricts printing of the PDF file.

Changes Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.

Commenting Can only add commenting.

Page Layout except

extracting Pages

Can change the page layout except extracting the

pages of the PDF file.

Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the

pages of the PDF file.

Copying of Text/

Images/Others

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF

file.

6-87

Using Various Functions > Functions

When [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected

Item Value Description

Password to Open

Document

Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters).

Enter the password again for confirmation.

Password to Edit/Print

Document

Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters).

Enter the password again for confirmation.

When you have entered the password to edit/print

document, you can specifically limit the operation.

Printing Allowed Not Allowed Disables the printing of PDF file.

Allowed (Low Resolution

only)

Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.

Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution.

Changes Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.

Inserting/Deleting/Rotating

Pages

Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the

PDF file.

Commenting Can only add commenting.

Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the

pages of the PDF file.

Copying of Text/

Images/Others

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF

file.

6-88

Using Various Functions > Functions

Scan to Office Function

This machine provides the function which converts scanned documents including text, figures and pictures into

searchable and editable Microsoft Office (Word, Excel and PowerPoint) 2007 or later data format, via OCR processing.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Send] > [Org./Sending Data Format] > [File Format]

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Word], [Excel] or [PowerPoint] as a file format.

2Select [OCR Text Recognition] > [On].

3Select the language of the document which you wish to scan > [OK].

4Select [OCR Output Format] and select an OCR output mode from the table below >

[OK].

3Press the [Start] key.

NOTE

• This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)

• The scanned result may not be realized perfectly according to condition of the documents.

NOTE

When you select [Off], the documents are converted into the Microsoft Office data

(scanned image).

Item Description

Text + Graphics Converts the scanned documents into the editable and

searchable Microsoft Office data format.

Text + Graphics with

Scanned Image

Converts the scanned documents into two types of data: one is

the editable and searchable Microsoft Office data format and

the other one is the Microsoft Office data format with scanned

image. You can edit text and layout of the editable data by

referring the scanned image.

Scanned Image with

Searchable Text

Converts the scanned documents into the searchable

Microsoft Office data format (scanned image).

6-89

Using Various Functions > Functions

PDF Electronic Signature

If [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] is selected as a file format, electronic signature can be added to the PDF to be sent.

Electronic signature can certify a sender of document and prevent falsification. To use this function, it is required to

from the system menu. In this manual, a procedure to register a signing certificate from Command Center RX is

described as an example.

1Access Command Center RX.

2Register a signing certificate to be used in the electronic

signature addition setting.

1Click [Common/Job Default] in the [Function Settings] menu.

2Click [Settings] from [File Default Settings] > [Signing Certificate] to create, import, or

acquire a device certificate.

Command Center RX User Guide

3Click [Restart/Reset] > [Restart Device] to restart the device.

3Configure the digital signature settings.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Send/Store] > [Digital

Signature to File]

NOTE

• This function appears when [Specify Each Job] is selected for "Digital Signature to File" in the system menu.

Digital Signature (page 8-38)

• This function can be configured when [PDF/A-2a], [PDF/A-2b], or [PDF/A-2u] is selected in PDF/A.

• To register a signing certificate from KYOCERA Net Viewer, refer to the following.

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

Accessing Command Center RX (page 2-67)

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with

administrator privileges or as a user with privileges to configure this setting. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

6-90

Using Various Functions > Functions

2Configure the digital signature addition settings.

Configurable items are as follows.

4Navigate to display the screen.

[Home] key > [Send] > [Org./Sending Data Format] > [File Format]

5Enable the function.

1Select [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] as a file format.

2From "Digital Signature", select [On] > [OK] in order.

6Press the [Start] key.

Item Description

Digital Signature Select whether to add a digital signature.

Value:

Off: Does not add a digital signature.

Specify Each Job: Whether to add a digital signature is

selected each time of sending.

On: Always adds a digital signature when

sending.

Digital Signature

Format

Select an algorithm used for encryption of digital signature.

Value: SHA1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Digital Signature" is set to

[Specify Each Job] or [On].

Password

Confirmation on

Signature Permission

Select whether to confirm password when setting digital

signature.

Value: On, Off

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Digital Signature" is set to

[Specify Each Job].

Password Set a password required for setting digital signature. Enter a

new security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and

symbols.

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Password Confirmation on

Signature Permission" is set to [On].

NOTE

If "Password Confirmation on Signature Permission" is set to [On], a password input

screen appears. Enter a password set in the system menu.

Password (page 8-38)

6-91

Using Various Functions > Functions

File Separation

Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by specified number of pages, and sends the files.

Scan Resolution

Select fineness of scanning resolution.

(Value: [600 × 600dpi] / [400 × 400dpi Ultra fine] / [300 × 300dpi] / [200 × 400dpi Super fine] / [200 × 200dpi Fine] /

[200 × 100dpi Normal])

Org./Sending

Data Format Functions Functions

NOTE

A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.

Item Value Description

Off

On Set file separation.

Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to specify the number of

pages, and then select [Next >].

Attach File to E-mail All Files in 1 E-mail,

1 file per E-mail

Select how to attach the files to the E-mail. Select [All

files in 1 E-mail] to attach and send all files in a single

E-mail. Select [1 file per E-mail] to attach and send

1 file per E-mail.

Color/Image

Quality

• Functions

• Color/Image Quality Functions

NOTE

The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and

longer send times.

Send

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

Send

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-92

Using Various Functions > Functions

Email Subject/Body

Adds subject and body when sending a document.

Select [Subject] / [Body] to enter the Email subject/body.

Send and Print

Prints a copy of the document being sent.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Send and Store

Stores a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Advanced

Setup Functions

NOTE

• The subject can include up to 256 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.

• Select [Body 1], [Body 2], or [Body 3] to enter stored text for the body text. For details on registering templates,

refer to the following:

Email Subject/Body (page 8-36)

Advanced

Setup

Advanced

Setup

NOTE

• To use this function, a hard disk must be installed in the machine.

HD-15/HD-16 "Hard Disk" (page 11-6)

• When [On] is selected, select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be stored.

If a password entry screen for the Custom Box appears, enter the password.

• You can view information on the selected Custom Box by selecting [ ] (information icon).

Send

Custom

Box

Send

Send and Store

Original

6-93

Using Various Functions > Functions

FTP Encrypted TX

Encrypts images when sending via FTP.

Encryption secures the document transmission.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Email Encrypted TX

Sends encrypted E-mail using the electronic certificate.

Encryption secures the document transmission.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Digital Signature Email

Add a digital signature to the email, using the electronic certificate.

By adding a digital signature to an email, you can confirm the identity of the destination and detect tampering during

transmission.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Configuring S/MIME settings in the Command Center RX

1Access to the Command Center RX

Accessing Command Center RX (page 2-67)

Advanced

Setup Functions

NOTE

Click [Security Settings], and then [Network Security] in the Command Center RX. Be sure that "SSL" of Secure

Protocol Settings is "On" and one or more effective encryption are selected in Client side settings.

Command Center RX User Guide

Advanced

Setup Functions

NOTE

To use this function, configure the certificate, protocol and email function in the Command Center RX.

Configuring S/MIME settings in the Command Center RX (page 6-93)

Advanced

Setup Functions

NOTE

To use this function, configure the certificate, protocol and email function in the Command Center RX.

Configuring S/MIME settings in the Command Center RX (page 6-93)

Send

Custom

Box

Send

Custom

Box

Send

Custom

Box

6-94

Using Various Functions > Functions

2Register the device certificate which is used for S/MIME.

1From the [Security Settings] menu, click [Certificates].

2Click [Settings] of [Device Certificate] (1 to 5) to create or import the device certificate.

Command Center RX User Guide

3Click [Restart/Reset] and then [Restart Device] to restart the machine.

3Configure the protocol settings

1From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].

2Set [SMTP (E-mail TX)] and [S/MIME] to [On] in Send Protocols.

3Click [Submit].

4Configure the E-mail function.

1From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].

2Configure the settings in “S/MIME” as necessary.

Command Center RX User Guide

3Click [Submit].

5Link the E-mail address with S/MIME certificates

1From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].

2Click the contact's [Number] or [Name] you want to edit.

3Click [Settings] on “S/MIME Certificate”.

4Click [Import] on the required certificate to register it, and then click [Submit].

5Click [OK].

File Size Confirmation

Checks the file size before sending the original.

To change the file size, change the settings of each function. When you select [Recalculate], the file size is

recalculated.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Delete after Printed

Automatically deletes a document from the box once printing is complete.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Advanced

Setup Functions

Functions

Send

Custom

Box

Custom

Box

6-95

Using Various Functions > Functions

Delete after Transmitted

Automatically deletes a document from the box once transmission is complete.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Storing Size

Select size of image to be stored.

Select [Same as Original Size], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the storing size.

Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom

Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.

Functions

Functions Functions

Item Value Description

Same as Original Size ―Automatically sends the same size as the

original.

Metric A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio,

216 × 340 mm

Select from the Metric series standard sizes.

Inch Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11" × 15",

Oficio II

Select from the Inch series standard sizes.

Others 8K, 16K, Hagaki (Cardstock),

Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard)

Select from special standard sizes.

Original Size and the size you wish to

store as are the same different

Original Size (page 6-20) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.

Storing Size Select [Same as Original]. Select the desired size.

Zoom (page 6-46) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].

NOTE

When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image

as the actual size (No Zoom).

Custom

Box

Custom

Box

USB

Drive

6-96

Using Various Functions > Functions

Encrypted PDF Password

Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.

Enter the Password, and select [OK].

JPEG/TIFF Print

Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.

XPS Fit to Page

Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Functions

NOTE

For details on entering the password, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

Functions

Item Description

Paper Size Fits the image size to the selected paper size.

Image Resolution Prints at resolution of the actual image.

Print Resolution Fits the image size to the print resolution.

Functions

USB

Drive

USB

Drive

USB

Drive

7-1

7 Status/Job Cancel

This chapter explains the following topics:

Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2

Details of the Status Screens .................................................................................................................. 7-3

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-8

Checking Job History ......................................................................................................................................... 7-9

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ...................................................................................... 7-10

Sending the Log History ........................................................................................................................ 7-10

Job Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 7-11

Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................................................. 7-11

Canceling of Jobs ................................................................................................................................... 7-11

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ........................................................................................................... 7-11

Reordering Print Jobs ............................................................................................................................ 7-12

Device Information ........................................................................................................................................... 7-13

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Supplies/Paper) ......................................................... 7-15

7-2

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Checking Job Status

Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.

Available Status Screens

The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens - Printing

Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs.

The following job statuses are available.

Displaying Status Screens

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job you want to check.

Select either of [Print Jobs], [Send Jobs], or [Store Jobs] to check the status.

Select [Send Jobs] > [Scheduled Job] to check delayed transmission.

Status Display Job status to be displayed

Print Job Status • Copy

• Printer

• Printing from Document Box

• Fax reception

• iFax reception

• Email reception

• Printing data from USB Drive

• Application

• Job Report/List

Send Job Status • Email

• Folder transmission

• Fax transmission

• iFax transmission

• Sending Job - Fax Server

• Application

• Multiple destination

Store Job Status • Scan

•Fax

•iFax

• Printer

• Join Box Document

• Copy Box Document

Scheduled Job • Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission

Print Jobs Screen (page 7-3)

Send Jobs screen (page 7-5)

Store Jobs screen (page 7-6)

Scheduled Job Screen (page 7-7)

7-3

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Details of the Status Screens

Print Jobs Screen

NOTE

• You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.

Job Status/Job Logs Settings (page 8-50)

• This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

No. Item Description

1Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

2Type Icons that indicate the job type

Copy job

Printer job

Job from Document Box

Fax reception

iFax reception

Email reception

Data from USB Drive

Application

Report/List

3Job Name Job Name or file name

4User Name User Name for the executed job

5Status Status of job

InProcess: The status before starting to print.

Printing: Printing

Waiting: Print Waiting

Pause: Pausing print job or error

Canceling: Canceling the job

6WDWXV

-RE1DPH

7\SH 8VHU1DPH

3ULQWLQJ-REV 6HQGLQJ-REV

6WDWXV

-RE7\SH

6WRULQJ-REV )D[&RPPXQL

FDWLRQ6WDWXV

/RJ

)D[,QFRPLQJ2XWJRLQJ/RJ &ORVH

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

GRF

7RS3ULRULW\

$FFHSW7LPH 6WDWXV

3URFHVVLQJ

0RYH8S &DQFHO 3DXVH$OO

3ULQW-REV

12 4 6

91011 7

7-4

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

6[] (information icon) Select the icon of the job whose detailed information you want to

display.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-8)

You can select [] (information icon) in “Copies” in the detailed

information screen to change the number of copies that are printed.

7[Pause All Print Jobs] Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the printing

jobs will be resumed.

8[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key.

9[Move Up] In the list, select the job that you want to move up the job queue and

select this key.

Reordering Print Jobs (page 7-12)

10 [Top Priority] Select the job to be overridden, and select this key.

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs (page 7-11)

11 [Job Type] Only selected type of jobs is displayed.

NOTE

The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed.

Status (page 8-50)

No. Item Description

7-5

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Send Jobs screen

No. Item Description

1Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

2Type Icons that indicate the job type

Sending Job Email

Sending Job Folder

Sending Job Fax

Sending Job iFax

Sending Job - Fax Server

Sending Job Application

Multi Sending

3Destination Destination (Either destination name, Fax number, Email address, or

server name)

4User Name User Name for the executed job

5Status Status of job

InProcess: The status before starting sending such as during

scanning originals

Sending: Sending

Waiting: Waiting Sending

Canceling: Canceling the job

Pause: Pausing the job

6[] (information icon) Select the icon of the job whose detailed information you want to

display.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-8)

7[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key.

8[Job Type] Only selected type of jobs is displayed.

9[TOP Priority] Select the job to be overridden, and select this key. Only displayed

when the optional fax kit is installed.

NOTE

The address and user name can be changed to other information if needed.

Status (page 8-50)

$FFHSW7LPH

6WDWXV &DQFHO

'HVWLQDWLRQ

7\SH 8VHU1DPH

3ULQWLQJ-REV 6HQGLQJ-REV

6WDWXV

-RE7\SH

6WRULQJ-REV )D[&RPPXQL

FDWLRQ6WDWXV

6FKHGXOHG /RJ

)D[,QFRPLQJ2XWJRLQJ/RJ

3URFHVVLQJ

&ORVH

7RS3ULRULW\ (QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

12 3 4 5

897

7-6

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Store Jobs screen

No. Item Description

1Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

2Type Icons that indicate the job type

Storing Job Scan

Storing Job Fax

Storing Job iFax

Storing Job Printer

Join Box Document

Copy Box Document

3Job Name Job name or file name is displayed.

4User Name User Name for the executed job

5Status Status of job

InProcess: The status before starting to save such as during

scanning originals

Storing: Storing Data

Canceling: Canceling the job

Pause: Pausing the job

6[] (information icon) Select the icon of the job whose detailed information you want to

display.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-8)

7[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key.

8[Job Type] Only selected type of jobs is displayed.

NOTE

The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed.

Status (page 8-50)

$FFHSW7LPH

6WDWXV &DQFHO

7\SH 8VHU1DPH

3ULQWLQJ-REV 6HQGLQJ-REV

6WDWXV

-RE7\SH

6WRULQJ-REV )D[&RPPXQL

FDWLRQ6WDWXV

)D[,QFRPLQJ2XWJRLQJ/RJ

3URFHVVLQJ

&ORVH

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

-RE1DPH

/RJ

123 4

7-7

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Scheduled Job Screen

No. Item Description

1Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

2Type Icons that indicate the job type

Scheduling Job Fax

3Destination Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, or No. of

broadcast items)

4User Name User Name for the executed job

5Start Time Time to start the scheduled job

6[] (information icon) Select the icon of the job whose detailed information you want to

display.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-8)

7[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key.

8[Start Now] Select the job you want to send immediately from the list, and select

this key.

$FFHSW7LPH

6WDWXV &DQFHO

'HVWLQDWLRQ

7\SH 8VHU1DPH

3ULQWLQJ-REV 6HQGLQJ-REV

6WDUW7LPH

6WDWXV 6WRULQJ-REV )D[&RPPXQL

FDWLRQ6WDWXV

6FKHGXOHG /RJ

)D[,QFRPLQJ2XWJRLQJ/RJ &ORVH

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

6WDUW1RZ

123 4

7-8

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs

1Display the screen.

Details of the Status Screens (page 7-3)

2Check the information.

1Select [ ] (information icon) for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.

Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.

In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by selecting [] (information icon) in "Result/

Destination". Select [] (information icon) for the destination to display detailed information.

2To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].

6WDWXV

-RE1DPH

7\SH 8VHU1DPH

3ULQWLQJ-REV 6HQGLQJ-REV

6WDWXV

-RE7\SH

6WRULQJ-REV

)D[&RPPXQL

FDWLRQ6WDWXV

/RJ

)D[,QFRPLQJ2XWJRLQJ/RJ &ORVH

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

GRF

7RS3ULRULW\

$FFHSW7LPH 6WDWXV

3URFHVVLQJ

0RYH8S

&DQFHO 3DXVH$OO

3ULQW-REV

7-9

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Checking Job History

Available Job History Screens

The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs.

The following job histories are available.

NOTE

• Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer from the computer.

Command Center RX User Guide

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

• You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.

Job Status/Job Logs Settings (page 8-50)

• This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Screen Job histories to be displayed

Print Job Log • Copy

• Printer

• Printing from Document Box

• Fax reception

• iFax reception

• Email reception

• Printing data from USB Drive

• Application

• Job Report/List

Send Job Log • Email

• Folder

•Fax

•iFax

•Fax Server

• Application

• Multiple destination

Store Job Log • Scan

•Fax

•iFax

• Printer

• Join Box Document

• Copy Box Document

7-10

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Displaying Job History Screen

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job to check details.

Select the [Log] tab, and select the job to check details from the list.

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories

1Display the screen.

Displaying Job History Screen (page 7-10)

2Check the information.

1Select [ ] (information icon) for the job you want to check.

Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.

2To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].

Sending the Log History

You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically

whenever a set number of jobs is reached.

Send Log History (page 8-27)

(QG'DWH

6WDWXV

-RE1DPH

7\SH 8VHU1DPH

3ULQWLQJ-REV 6HQGLQJ-REV

5HVXOW

6WDWXV

-RE7\SH

6WRULQJ-REV

)D[&RPPXQL

FDWLRQ6WDWXV

/RJ

)D[,QFRPLQJ2XWJRLQJ/RJ

&RPSOHWHG

&ORVH

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

&RPSOHWHG

GRF

GRF

GRF

7-11

Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation

Job Operation

Pause and Resumption of Jobs

Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Pause All Print Jobs] on the printing jobs status screen.

Printing is paused.

When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume All Print Jobs].

Canceling of Jobs

A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job to be canceled from the list, and select [Cancel].

3Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs

Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job to be given priority, and select [Top Priority].

3Select [Print] in the confirmation screen.

The current job in printing is suspended, and the job for override.

7-12

Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation

Reordering Print Jobs

This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and select

[Move Up].

3Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

The priority of the selected job is increased by 1.

To further raise the job's priority, select [Move Up] again. Each time you select [Move Up], the

priority increases by 1.

7-13

Status/Job Cancel > Device Information

Device Information

Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.

1Display the screen.

1Select the [Home] key.

2Select [Device Information].

The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed.

2Check the Information.

The items you can check are described below.

Identification/Wired Network

You can check ID information such as the model name, serial number, host name and

location, and the IP address of the wired network.

Wi-Fi

You can check the status of Wi-Fi connection, such as the device name, network name and IP

address.

Supplies/Paper

You can check the remaining amount of toner, and paper.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Supplies/Paper) (page 7-15)

Fax

You can check the local fax number, local fax name, local fax ID and other fax information.

FAX Operation Guide

USB/NFC/Bluetooth

You can check the connection status of USB drive, NFC (Near Field Communication) and

Bluetooth keyboard.

•Select [Format] for "USB Drive" to format external media.

•Select [Remove] for "USB Drive" to safely remove the external media.

• Select "Bluetooth" [Connect] to set the Bluetooth keyboard connection.

Option/Application

You can check information on the options and applications that are used.

Capability/Software Version

You can check the software version and performance.

NOTE

Displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

NOTE

Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

IMPORTANT

When [Format] is selected, all data in the USB drive is erased.

7-14

Status/Job Cancel > Device Information

Security

You can check the security information on the machine.

Report

You can print various reports and lists.

Remote Operation Status

You can check the situation of remote operation.

7-15

Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Supplies/Paper)

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner

and Paper (Supplies/Paper)

Check the remaining amount of toner, and paper on the touch panel.

1Display the screen.

1Select the [Home] key.

2Select [Device Information].

3Select [Supplies/Paper].

2Check the Information.

The items you can check are described below.

Toner Information

The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels. And you can check the status of waste

toner box.

Paper Status

You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper

source. The amount of paper remaining is shown in levels.

Others

You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.

8-1

Setup and Registration

(System Menu)

This chapter explains the following topics:

System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2

Operation Method .................................................................................................................................... 8-2

System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-3

Device Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 8-6

Notification/Report ................................................................................................................................. 8-24

Function Settings ................................................................................................................................... 8-32

Network Settings .................................................................................................................................... 8-52

Security Settings .................................................................................................................................... 8-69

Job Accounting/Authentication ............................................................................................................... 8-82

Add/Delete Application ........................................................................................................................... 8-82

Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 8-83

8-2

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Menu

Configure settings related to overall machine operation.

Operation Method

System Menu is operated as follows:

1Display the screen.

Select the [Home] key > [...] > [System Menu].

2Select a function.

3Configure the function.

Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.

1 Displays the System Menu items. Items

that are not displayed can be displayed

by swiping the screen up and down.

2 Returns to the previous screen.

3 Displays setting items.

Select the key of a function to display

the setting screen.

4 Returns to the previous screen.

1 Returns to the previous screen without

making any changes.

2 Enter a setting by selecting it and return

to the previous screen.

3 Accepts the settings and exits.

NOTE

• If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges or

as a user with privileges to configure this setting. The factory default login user name and login password are set as

shown below.

• If function default settings have been changed, the [Reset] key can be selected in each function screen to

immediately change the settings.

'HYLFH

6HWWLQJV

4XLFN6HWXS

:L]DUG

/DQJXDJH6\VWHPRI8QLWV

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

1HWZRUN

6HWWLQJV

&RXQWHU

.H\ERDUG

1XPHULF.H\SDG

6\VWHP0HQX

'DWH7LPH

(QHUJ\6DYHU7LPHU

'LVSOD\6HWWLQJV

&ORVH

6HFXULW\

6HWWLQJV

-RE$FFRXQWLQJ

$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ 2ULJLQDO6FDQ6HWWLQJV

6RXQG

/DQJXDJH

&ORVH

/DQJXDJH6\VWHPRI8QLWV

0HDVXUHPHQW

(QJOLVK

0HDVXUHPHQW

&DQFHO

8-3

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Menu Settings

This section explains the functions that can be configured in System Menu. To configure the settings, select the item in

System Menu and select the setting item. For details on each function, see the table below.

Item Description Reference

Page

Quick Setup Wizard The Quick Setup Wizard configures Fax, Energy Saver, Network,

E-mail and Security Setup.

page 2-47

Device Settings Configure overall machine operation. page 8-6

Language/System of Units Set the language to use for the touch panel display, and select

inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.

page 8-6

Keyboard Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter

characters.

page 8-6

Numeric Keypad Select whether or not to display the numeric keypad. page 8-6

Date/Time Configures settings related to the date and time. page 8-6

Energy Saver/Timer Configure the Energy Saver settings. page 8-7

Display Settings Configure the touch panel display settings. page 8-10

Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. page 8-11

Original/Scan Settings Configure settings for originals. page 8-11

Paper Feeding Configure the paper and paper source settings. page 8-13

Paper Output Configure settings for paper output. page 8-19

Function Key Assignment Assign a function to each function key. page 8-20

Operation Assist It is possible to configure the settings for the Orientation Selection

screen display and the Preset Limit on the number of copies that

can be made at one time.

page 8-20

Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has

occurred.

page 8-21

Toner Settings Configure the toner settings. page 8-23

Notification/Report Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history.

Settings for printing reports can also be configured.

page 8-24

Printing Report/List Print various reports and lists. page 8-24

Result Report Setting Configure settings for notices for sending and receiving. page 8-25

Device Status Notification Configure settings for toner notices. page 8-26

Message Board Settings Configure settings for message board. page 8-26

Fax Communication

Report

Configure settings for FAX notices. page 8-27

History Settings Configure settings for printing the history of the machine use. page 8-27

8-4

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Function Settings Configures settings for copying, sending and Document Box

functions.

page 8-32

Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is

completed or the [Reset] key is selected.

Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and

sending. Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes

subsequent jobs easier.

page 8-32

Copy/Print Configures settings for copying and printing functions. page 8-37

Send/Store Configures settings for sending and storing functions. page 8-37

Email Configure settings for email transmission and receipt. page 8-39

Sending Job - Folder Configures settings for Sending Job Folder functions. page 8-39

Fax/iFax Configures settings for fax functions.

FAX Operation Guide

—

WSD Configure settings for WSD Scan and WSD Print. page 8-40

DSM Scan Configure settings for DSM Scan. page 8-40

Address Book Configures Address Book settings. page 8-40

One-Touch Key Configures One Touch Key settings. page 8-41

Send and Forward Select whether to forward the original to another destination when

sending images.

page 8-41

RX/Forward Rules/Fax

Box

Configures settings for RX/Forward rules and Fax Box. page 8-45

Printer Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the

application software screen. However, the following settings are

available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

page 8-46

Document Box Configure settings for Custom Box. page 8-48

Job Box Configure settings for Job Box. page 8-49

Fax Memory RX Box Set whether to perform Print Immediately for the fax documents

received or to save them in the Fax Memory RX Box.

FAX Operation Guide

—

Home Configure settings for Home screen. page 8-49

Status Configure settings for Status. page 8-50

Internet Browser Configure settings related to the Internet. page 8-50

Manual Staple Select whether to use Manual Staple. page 8-51

Remote Services Configures remote services settings. page 8-51

Network Settings Configures network settings. page 8-52

Item Description Reference

Page

8-5

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Network Settings Configure the wired network and Wi-Fi settings. page 8-52

Optional Network Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit or

Wireless Network Interface Kit.

page 8-65

Connectivity Configure the Connectivity settings of this machine to other

devices.

page 8-68

Others Configure other network related settings. page 8-69

Security Settings Configures security settings. page 8-69

Security Quick Setup The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by

service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for

customers to use this menu.

page 8-69

Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface

with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.

page 8-70

Device Security Settings Configures the device security settings. page 8-71

System Stamp Configure settings for header, footer, and stamp. page 8-76

Authentication Security Configure security settings for User Authentication. page 8-81

Unknown User Settings This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with

unknown or unsent login user names or User ID.

page 8-82

Network Configure security settings on the network. page 8-82

Job Accounting/Authentication Configures settings related to machine management.

User Login:

Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)

Job Accounting:

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)

page 8-82

Add/Delete Application Configure settings for Application. page 8-82

Application Configure settings for applications that help you perform your

daily more efficiently such as a scan feature and an authentication

feature.

page 5-14

Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. page 11-8

Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. page 8-83

Image Adjustment Perform Image Adjustment. page 8-83

Behavior Adjustment Perform Behavior Adjustment for the machine. page 8-85

Others Adjust Others. page 8-85

Item Description Reference

Page

8-6

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Device Settings

Configures overall machine operation.

Language/System of Units

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Language/System of Units]

Keyboard

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Keyboard]

Numeric Keypad

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Numeric Keypad]

Date/Time

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Date/Time]

Item Description

Language Set the language to use for the touch panel display.

Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.

Value: mm, inch

Item Description

Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters.

Value: QWERTY, QWERTZ, AZERTY

Optional Keyboard Type Select the type of optional keyboard that you want to use.

Value: US-English, US-English with Euro, French, German, UK-English

Item Description

Default

Display

Copy/Print

from Box

Select whether or not to display the numeric keypad.

Value: Off, On

HyPAS

Application

Layout (HyPAS Application) Select the HyPAS numeric keypad layout to display upon startup.

Value: Floating, Horizontal, On the Right

Item Description

Date and Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-

mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.

Value: Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (0 to 23), Minute (0 to

59), Second (0 to 59)

NOTE

If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer

be able to use the application.

8-7

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Energy Saver/Timer

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Energy Saver/Timer]

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western

notation.

Value: MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD

Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If you

select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.

Setting Date and Time (page 2-31)

Item Description

Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to

the default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

For setting the time until the panel is automatically reset, refer to the following:

Panel Reset Timer (page 8-7)

Panel Reset Timer If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto

Panel Reset.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Auto Panel Reset] is set to [On].

Low Power Timer Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode.

Value: 1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)

Low Power Mode (page 2-44)

Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep.

Value: 1 to 120 minutes (10 minutes increments)

Sleep Rules (models for

Europe)*1

Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually:

• ID Card Reader*2

• Application

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If the sleep condition is not turned off, the ID card cannot be recognized.

Item Description

8-8

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Sleep Level (models except

for Europe)*1

Select the sleep level.

Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than normal

Sleep mode.

Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver

Sleep Rules Select whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:

• ID Card Reader*2

• Application

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When the machine has entered sleep mode with Energy Saver setting, the ID card

cannot be recognized.

Weekly Timer Settings Configure settings for switching the machine into Sleep mode and waking it

automatically at a specified time for each day of the week.

Weekly Timer Select whether to use Weekly Timer.

Value: Off, On

Schedule Specify the time for each day of the week at which the machine enters Sleep mode

and recovers.

Retry Set the number of retry to switch the machine into Sleep mode.

Value: Limited Retries, Unlimited Retries

NOTE

• If [Limited Retries] is selected, set the number of retry. The setting range is 0 to

10.

• If [Unlimited Retries] is selected, retry is performed until the machine enters

Sleep mode.

Retry Interval Set the retry interval.

Use [-] / [+] to enter a number.

Value: 10 to 60 seconds (increments of 10 seconds)

Power Off Timer (models

for Europe)

Select whether to turn off the power automatically after a period of inactivity.

Value: 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 9 hours, 12 hours,

1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 1 week

Item Description

8-9

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Power Off Rule (models for

Europe)

Select whether or not the machine enters Power Off mode for the following function.

Select [On] to set the Power Off mode.

•Network

•Fax

• USB Cable

• USB Host

• Application

•NIC

• Remote Diagnostics

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• Even when any of the functions is set to [On], if either [Fax] or [NIC] is set to [Off],

the machine does not enter Power Off Mode.

• Even when [Network] or [USB Cable] is set to [Off], if the machine does not

communicate with the other devices, the machine will enter Power Off Mode.

•[Fax] is Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

•[NIC] is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network

Interface Kit is installed.

Motion Sensor Automatically wake up from low power mode or sleep mode when someone

approaches the device.

Value: Off, Low, Middle, High

Energy Saver Recovery

Level

Select the method of recovery from energy saver.

Value:

Full Recovery: This mode enables the use of all functions immediately.

However, this mode saves less energy.

Normal Recovery: In this mode, you can select the method from the following:

enabling the use of all functions immediately or enabling the use of desired functions

only.

If you want to use all functions immediately, select the [Energy Saver] key to execute

recovery.

Interrupt Clear Timer Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set

to Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

Ping Timeout Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in "System/Network".

Value: 1 to 30 seconds (in 1 second increments)

*1 This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Fiery controller is installed.

*2 Displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.

Item Description

8-10

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Display Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Display Settings]

Item Description

Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel.

Value: 1 (Darker), 2, 3, 4, 5 (Lighter)

Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).

Value: Home, Copy, Send, Fax*1, Status, Custom Box, Job Box, USB Drive, Fax Box*1,

Favorite, Home (Accessibility), Accessibility Copy, Accessibility Send, Accessibility

Fax*1, Internet Browser, Application Name*2

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

*2 The running application will be displayed.

Application (page 5-14)

Wallpaper Editing the Home Screen (page 2-15)

Show Power Off

Message

Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off.

Value: Off, On

Quick Setup

Registration (Copy)

Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen

are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.

Six items in the following options are available.

Value: Off, Paper Selection, Zoom, Staple/Punch*3, Density, Duplex, Combine, Collate/

Offset,

Original Image, Original Size, Original Orientation, Color Selection, Continuous Scan,

Background Density Adj

*3 Displayed when the optional Document Finisher is installed. When a punching unit is not installed, this item name is

"Staple".

Quick Setup

Registration (Send)

Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen

are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.

Six items in the following options are available.

Value: Off, Original Size, 2-sided/Book Original, Sending Size, Original Orientation,

File Format, Density, Original Image, Scan Resolution, Fax TX Resolution*1, Color

Selection, Zoom, Continuous Scan, Background Density Adj

Quick Setup

Registration (Fax)

FAX Operation Guide

Quick Setup

Registration (Storing

in Box)

Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen

are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.

Six items in the following options are available.

Value: Off, Color Selection, Storing Size, Density, 2-sided/Book Original, Scan

Resolution, Zoom, Original Orientation, Original Size, Original Image, Continuous

Scan, Background Density Adj

Quick Setup

Registration (Box

Print)

Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen

are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.

Six items in the following options are available.

Value: Off, Paper Selection, Collate/Offset, Staple/Punch*3, Duplex, Combine, Delete

after Printed, Color Selection

Quick Setup

Registration

(Sending from Box)

Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen

are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.

Six items in the following options are available.

Value: Off, Sending Size, Fax TX Resolution*1, File Format, Delete after Transmitted,

Color Selection

8-11

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Sound

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Sound]

Original/Scan Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Original/Scan Settings]

Item Description

Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.

Tone Set the tone of the buzzer.

Value: Sound1, Beep

Volume Set the buzzer volume level.

Value: 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum), 2, 3 (Medium), 4, 5 (Maximum)

Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are selected.

Value: Off, On

Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.

Value: Off, On, FAX Reception Only*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Ready Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.

Value: Off, On

Warning Emit a sound when errors occur.

Value: Off, On

Optional Keyboard Emit a sound to confirm key presses with a sound.

Value: Off, On

Fax Speaker Volume*1 FAX Operation Guide

Fax Monitor Volume*1

Item Description

Auto Detect Original Size Select whether to automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.

System of Units Select [Metric] when automatically detecting the originals in centimeter sizes. Select

[Inch] when detecting the originals in inch sizes.

Value: Metric, Inch

A6/Hagaki*1 As A6 and Hagaki (Cardstock) are similar in size, select either one of them for

automatic detection.

Value: A6, Hagaki

NOTE

If [Hagaki] is set, only the originals placed on the platen are detected.

Folio*1 Select whether to enable automatic detection of Folio.

Value: Off, On

11×15"*1 Select whether to enable automatic detection of 11×15" size.

Value: Off, On

Legal/Oficio II/

216×340 mm*2

Set the original sizes for the device to detect automatically.

Value: Legal, Oficio II, 216×340 mm

8-12

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Custom Original Size Set up frequently-used custom original size.

The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size.

Select [On] for "Custom 1 (to 4)" and enter the desired size.

Value

Metric

X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Prevent Light Reflection Prevent light reflection when using the Erase Shadowed Areas feature.

Value: Off, On

Prevent Original Skewing When scanning the originals from the Document Processor, select [On] to prevent

them from skewing.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Multifeed

Detection).

Same Width Originals

Different Width

Originals

*1 This function is displayed when "System of Units" is set to [Metric].

*2 This function is displayed when "System of Units" is set to [Inch].

Item Description

HorizontalVertical

8-13

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Paper Feeding

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding]

Configure the paper and paper source settings.

Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings]

NOTE

[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder is installed.

[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) is installed.

[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) is installed.

[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.

Item Description

Paper Size*1 Select paper size. Paper size is automatically detected and selected when [Auto

(Metric)] or [Auto (Inch)] is selected.

Value: Auto (Metric), Auto (Inch), A3*2*3, A4*3, A4-R*3, A5*3, A5-R*3, A6*3, B4*2*3,

B5*3, B5-R*3, B6*3, Folio*3, 216×340mm, SRA3*2*3, Ledger, Letter, Letter-R,

Legal, Statement, 12×18", Executive, Oficio II, 8K*2, 16K, 16K-R, ISO B5,

Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,

Envelope C5, Envelope C4*2, Hagaki*3, Oufukuhagaki, Kakugata 2*2, Youkei 4,

Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Size Entry

If you selected [Size Entry], enter the paper size.

Value

Cassette1

Metric

X: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)

Cassette 2 to 4

Metric

X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1mm increments)

Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Media Type*4 Select the media type.

Value: Plain (60 - 105 g/m2), Rough, Vellum (60 - 105 g/m2), Recycled,

Preprinted*5, Hagaki (Cardstock)*6, Bond, Color, Prepunched*5, Letterhead*5,

Envelope*6, Thick (60 - 220 g/m2), High Quality, Custom 1 - 8

HorizontalVertical

8-14

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

MP Tray Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [MP Tray Settings]

*1 When the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) or Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) is used, paper size does

not appear.

*2 Not displayed in Cassette 1.

*3 Paper size automatically detected in the cassette.

*4 To change to a media type other than "Plain".

Media Type Setting (page 8-16)

When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.

*5 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.

Special Paper Action (page 8-18)

*6 Not displayed in the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) or Side Feeder (3,000-sheet).

Item Description

Paper Size Select paper size. Paper size is automatically detected and selected when [Auto

(Metric)] or [Auto (Inch)] is selected.

Value: Auto (Metric), Auto (Inch), A3*1, A4*1, A4-R*1, A5*1, A5-R, A6*1, B4*1, B5*1,

B5-R*1, B6*1, Folio*1, 216×340mm, SRA3*1, Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal,

Statement, 12×18", Executive, Oficio II, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, ISO B5, Envelope #10,

Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Envelope C4, Hagaki*1, Oufukuhagaki, Kakugata 2, Youkei 4, Youkei 2,

Younaga 3, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Size Entry

If you selected [Size Entry], enter the paper size.

Value

Metric

X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

*1 Paper size automatically detected in the cassette.

Media Type*2

*2 To change to a media type other than "Plain".

Media Type Setting (page 8-16)

Select the media type.

Value: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*3,

Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Envelope, Thick, Coated,

High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 - 8

*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.

Special Paper Action (page 8-18)

NOTE

If the optional FAX Kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.

Plain, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Envelope, Thick, Coated, High Quality and

Custom1-8

Horizontal

Vertical

8-15

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Custom Paper Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Custom Paper Settings]

Item Description

Custom Paper Settings Set up frequently-used custom paper size.

The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select paper size in the

multipurpose tray.

To register a custom paper size, select [On] and enter the desired size. Up to four

custom paper sizes can be added.

Select [Next >] to set the media type for each custom paper.

Value

Metric

X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Media Type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,

Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated,

High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1-8

HorizontalVertical

8-16

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Media Type Setting

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Media Type Setting]

Select weight for each media type.

The following media type and paper weight combinations are available.

Each media type's default weight is indicated.

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)

Light 52 g/m² to 59 g/m² Heavy 2*1 136 g/m² to 163 g/m²

Normal 1 60 g/m² to 74 g/m² Heavy 3*1 164 g/m² to 220 g/m²

Normal 2 75 g/m² to 90 g/m² Heavy 4*1 221 g/m² to 256 g/m²

Normal 3 91 g/m² to 105 g/m² Heavy 5*1 257 g/m² to 300 g/m²

Heavy 1*1

*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.

106 g/m² to 135 g/m² Extra Heavy*1 Transparencies

Media Type Default Media Type Default

Plain Normal 2 Prepunched Normal 2

Rough Normal 3 Letterhead Normal 2

Vellum Heavy 1 Envelope Heavy 3

Labels Heavy 2 Thick Heavy 3

Recycled Normal 2 High Quality Normal 2

Preprinted Normal 2 Coated Heavy 1

Bond Normal 3 Index Tab Dividers Heavy 4

Cardstock Heavy 4 Custom 1 - 8 Normal 2

Color Normal 3

Item Description

Duplex Print Prohibit Duplex printing allowed.

Permit Duplex printing not allowed.

Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters.

Selecting media type at multipurpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

8-17

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Show Paper Setup Message

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Show Paper Setup Message]

Paper Feed Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Paper Feed Settings]

Item Description

Show Paper Setup

Message

Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new

paper is set for each cassette.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder

is installed.

[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet x 2) is installed.

[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet x 2) is installed.

[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.

Cassette 1 to 5

Multipurpose Tray

Item Description

Default Paper Source Select the default paper source.

Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), MP Tray

NOTE

[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder

is installed.

[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet x 2) is installed.

[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet x 2) is installed.

[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.

Paper Selection Set the default paper selection.

Value: Auto, Default Paper Source

Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when

the zoom changes.

Value

Most Suitable Size: Selects paper size based on the current zoom and the size

of the original.

Same as Original Size: Selects paper that matches the size of the original,

regardless the zoom.

Media for Auto (Color) Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper

Selection. If [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the

specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind

of paper loaded in the specific size.

Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,

Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick,

Coated, High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8

Media for Auto (B & W)

8-18

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Paper Source for Cover Select the paper source in which the cover paper used for the Cover function is

placed.

Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), MP Tray

NOTE

[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder

is installed.

[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet x 2) is installed.

[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet x 2) is installed.

[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.

Paper Source for

Front Cover

Paper Source for

Back Cover

Separator Paper Source Select the default paper source for separator sheets.

Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), MP Tray

NOTE

[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder

is installed.

[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet x 2) is installed.

[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet x 2) is installed.

[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.

Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be

aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are

set and the combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adjust Print

Direction] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select

[Speed Priority].

If [Adjust Print Direction] is selected, load paper according to the steps below.

Example: copying on Letterhead

Value: Adjust Print Direction, Speed Priority

Item Description

Multipurpose TrayCassetteFinishedPaperOriginal

8-19

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Paper Output

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Output]

Item Description

Paper Output*1

*1 This function will not be displayed when the optional Inner Finisher is installed.

Copy/Box Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from

Document Box, computers, and Fax RX data.

Value:

with optional job separator

•Inner Tray: Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine

•Job Separator Tray: Delivery to the Job Separator.

with optional 1,000-Sheet Finisher

•Job Separator Tray: Delivery to the Job Separator.

•Finisher Tray: Delivery to the Finisher Tray of the optional Document

Finisher.

with optional 4,000-sheet Finisher

•Job Separator Tray: Delivery to the Job Separator.

•Tray A: Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document Finisher

•Tray B: Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document Finisher

with optional Mailbox

•Job Separator Tray: Delivery to the Job Separator.

•Tray A, Tray B, Tray 1 to 7: Delivery to tray A, tray B, and tray 1 to 7

(tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of the optional Mailbox

NOTE

Fax RX data output can be specified when the optional FAX Kit is

installed.

Printer

Fax Port 1*2

*2 This is displayed when the option of two FAX Kits has been installed.

Fax Port 2*2

Paper Output

Behavior

Offset Documents by

Job

Select whether to offset documents by Job.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when an optional Document Finisher is

installed.

Offset One Page

Documents

Set whether one-page documents are sorted.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when an optional Document Finisher is

installed.

8-20

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Function Key Assignment

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Function Key Assignment]

Operation Assist

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Operation Assist]

Item Description

Function Key 1 Assign a function to each function key.

Value: None, Copy, Send, Fax Server, Fax*1, Custom Box, Job Box, USB Drive, Fax

Box*1, Polling Box*1, Fax Memory RX Box*1, Send to Me (Email), Send to Me from Box

(Email), Internet Browser, ID Card Copy, Favorites*2, Application*3

NOTE

Select [Filter] to narrow down for [All], [Application], [Favorites] and [Others].

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

*2 The registered favorite will be displayed.

*3 The running application will be displayed.

Function Key 2

Function Key 3

Item Description

Orientation Confirmation Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be

placed on the platen when using the following functions.

Original Orientation (page 6-26)

• Zoom (XY Zoom)

•Duplex

• Margin/Centering

• Border Erase

• Combine

• Memo Page

Value: Off, On

• Page #

• Staple/Punch (optional feature)

• 2-sided/Book Original

• Text Stamp

• Bates Stamp

Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.

Value: 1 to 9999 copies

Clear Settings after Job

Started

Set whether to reset function settings to their defaults after the job starts.

Value: Clear, Do Not Clear

8-21

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Error Handling

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Error Handling]

Item Description

Duplexing Error Set what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and

media types.

Value

1-sided: Printed in 1-sided

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

Finishing Error Set alternative actions when finishing (Staple/Punch/Offset) is not available for the

selected paper size or media type.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

No Staple Error Set what to do when staples run out during printing.

Value

Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Finisher.

Finished Pages Exceeded Set what to do when finishing (stapling or offsetting) capacity is exceeded during

printing.

Value

Ignore: Printing continues without finishing.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Finisher.

Punch Waste Full Error Set what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing.

Value

Ignore: Printing continues without punching.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Finisher and Punch Unit.

Paper Mismatch Error Set what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or

type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by

specifying the cassette or multipurpose tray.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

Wrong Size Paper Loaded Set what to do when it is detected that the multipurpose tray paper size setting does

not match the actual paper size that is fed.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

8-22

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Paper Jam before Staple The page from which printing is resumed when a paper jam occurs during a job with

stapling can be selected.

Value

Resume at Top of Page: Resume printing from the first page of the document.

Resume at Jammed Page: Resume printing from the page where the jam occurred.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Finisher.

Error Job Skip Set whether a job for which a "Add paper in cassette #" or "Add paper in Multipurpose

Tray" error occurred when the job was started is automatically skipped after a set

period of time elapses.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• When a job is skipped, it is moved to the end of the job queue.

• If [On] is selected, set the time until the job is skipped. The setting range is 5 to 90

(5 second increments).

Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be

taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a

set amount of time elapses.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before

automatically clearing errors. The setting range is 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second

increments).

Continue or Cancel Error

Job

Set which users can cancel or continue operations for jobs which were paused due to

an error.

Value: All Users, Job Owner Only

NOTE

Administrator can cancel all jobs regardless of this setting.

Image Preview at DP Jam Set whether or not a preview of the scanned document appears when a paper jam

occurs.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

8-23

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Toner Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Toner Settings]

Item Description

Color Toner Empty Action Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White setting is used for

printing once the color toner runs out.

Value: Stop printing, Print in Black & White

NOTE

This setting is not valid when the optional Fiery Controller is installed.

Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner

when the toner is running low.

This notification is used for event report, Status Monitor, SNMP Trap.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to

100% (in 1% increments).

Toner Waste Full Alert Notifies the user or the administrator when the waste toner box is almost full. Set the

notification timer based on the amount of toner in the waste toner box.

Notify via Operation

Panel

Notifies you via the Operation Panel when the waste toner box is almost full.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the notification timer based on the amount of toner in the waste

toner box. The setting range is 10 to 90% (in 10% increments).

Notify Externally (for

admin. use)

Notifies the administrator when the waste toner box is almost full. This notification is

used for the Event Report, Status Monitor, SNMP Trap (Printer Management System

etc.).

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the notification timer based on the amount of toner in the waste

toner box. The setting range is 10 to 90% (in 10% increments).

8-24

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Notification/Report

Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings for printing reports can also be configured.

Printing Report/List

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Notification/Report] > "Printing Report/List" [Printing Report/List]

Item Description

Status Page Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current settings,

available memory space, and optional equipment installed.

Service Status Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status Page.

Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose.

Network Status Prints the network status, allowing you to check the information including network interface

firmware version, network address and protocol.

Optional Network

Status

Prints the optional network status, allowing you to check the information including optional

network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network

Interface Kit is installed.

Print Accounting

Report

If job accounting is enabled, the total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed

as an accounting report.

Print Accounting Report (page 9-48)

Status Page

Network Status Page

ACCOUNT. REPORT

8-25

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Result Report Setting

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Notification/Report] > "Result Report Setting"

Font List Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.

Outgoing Fax Report FAX Operation Guide

Incoming Fax Report FAX Operation Guide

Fax List (Index) FAX Operation Guide

Fax List (No.) FAX Operation Guide

One Touch List (ALL) Prints One Touch List, allowing you to check the destinations that have been registered on

the One Touch Keys.

One Touch List (Fax) FAX Operation Guide

Fax Box List FAX Operation Guide

Application Status

Prints Application Status, allowing you to check the information on the application installed in the machine.

Configuration List Print the system settings as the list.

Data Sanitization

Report

Prints the data sanitization report.

Item Description

Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.

Email/Folder Automatically print a report of transmission result when Email or SMB/FTP

transmission is complete.

Value: Off, On, Error Only

Fax*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

FAX Operation Guide

Canceled before

Sending*2

*2 When "Email/Folder" and "Fax" are set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.

Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent.

Value: Off, On

Recipient Format*2 Select the Recipient Format for the send result report.

Value: Name or Destination, Name and Destination

RX Result*1

FAX Operation Guide

Job Finish Notice Setting*1

Item Description

8-26

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Device Status Notification

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Notification/Report] > "Device Status Notification"

Message Board Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Notification/Report] > "Message Board Settings"

Item Description

Low Toner Alert Low Toner Alert (page 8-23)

Toner Waste Full

Alert

Toner Waste Full Alert (page 8-23)

Item Description

Message Board Select whether to use the Message Board.

Value: Off, On

Message List Configure settings for the registered message board.

Add Add a new message board.

Title/Body Enter the title and body to display on the message board. The title can include up to

30 characters, and the body can include up to 300 characters.

Device to Show Select where to show the message.

Value

Hide: Displays no message.

Operation Panel: Displays a message on the operation panel.

Embedded Web Server: Displays a message in Command Center RX.

Panel + Web Server: Displays a message in the operation panel and the

Command Center RX.

Place to Show Select where to show the message in the touch panel.

Value

Home Screen: Home Screen

administration

Message Type Select the message type.

Value: Normal, Alert, Prohibition

Priority Show Displays the message on the message board.

Value: Off, On

Raise Priority Raise the priority of the message board selected on the list.

Low Priority Lower the priority of the message board selected on the list.

Delete Deletes the message board selected on the list.

[] (information

icon)

Display information on the selected message board.

8-27

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Fax Communication Report

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Notification/Report] > "Fax Communication Report"

Configure settings for Outgoing Fax report and Incoming Fax report.

FAX Operation Guide

History Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Notification/Report] > "History Settings"

NOTE

For details on the Log History, refer to the following:

History Management (page 8-31)

Item Description

Sending Log History Auto Sending This function automatically sends the log history to the specified

destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories. The setting

range is 1 to 1,500.

Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail

address can be set.

Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories

by E-mail.

Value: Up to 256 characters

SSFC Enter the subject of the printed job history with IC card

authentication.

Value: Up to 256 characters

Personal Information Select whether to include personal information in the job log.

Value: Include, Exclude

Send Log History You can also send the log history to the specified destinations

manually.

8-28

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Settings

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be recorded. The

setting range is 1 to 1,000.

Auto Sending Select whether the login history is automatically sent to the set

address when the number of entries reaches the number set in

"Login History".

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].

Destination Set the destination to which login histories are sent. E-mail

address only can be set as destination.

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].

Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending login histories

by E-mail.

Value: Up to 256 characters

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].

Log Reset Resets the recorded login histories.

Item Description

8-29

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Device Log History

Settings

Device Log History Select whether to record the device log history.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The

setting range is 1 to 1,000.

Auto Sending Select whether the device log history is automatically sent to the

set address when the number of entries reaches the number set

in "Device Log History".

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to

[On].

Destination Set the destination to which device log histories are sent. E-mail

address only can be set as destination.

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to

[On].

Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending device log

histories by E-mail.

Value: Up to 256 characters

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to

[On].

Item Description

8-30

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Secure Comm. Error

Log

Secure Comm. Error

Log

Select whether to record the secure communication error log

history.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The

setting range is 1 to 1,000.

Auto Sending Select whether the secure communication error log history is

automatically sent to the set address when the number of entries

reaches the number set in "Secure Comm. Error Log".

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error

Log History" is set to [On].

Destination Set the destination to which secure communication error log

histories are sent. E-mail address only can be set as destination.

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error

Log History" is set to [On].

Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending secure

communication error log histories by E-mail.

Value: Up to 256 characters

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error

Log History" is set to [On].

Item Description

8-31

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

History Management

It is possible to perform Log Management for the following logs on this machine.

Item Log subject Log information

Jobs Log Copy/Fax/Scan/Send/Print job completion • Event occurrence date

and time

• Event type

• Information on users

logged in (or users who

attempted to log in)

• Event results (Success/

Failure)

Checking job status/Changing of jobs/Canceling of jobs

User Account Lockout occurrence and cancellation

Device Log History Power on

Power off

Changing user properties

User information login password registration and change

failure

Changing date and time

Changing security settings

Displaying and deletion of image data stored in Document Box

Secure

Communication Error

Log

Communications failure in TLS and IPsec communications

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,

you need to login as an administrator or as a user with privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user

name and login password are set as shown below.

8-32

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Function Settings

Configures settings for copying, sending and Document Box functions.

Function Defaults

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Function Defaults]

Common

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Function Defaults] > [Common]

Item Description

Clear Settings after Job

Started

Clear Settings after Job Started (page 8-20)

File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as

Date and Time and Job No. can also be set.

Value

File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Additional Info: None, Job No., Date and Time, Job No. & Date and Time, Date

and Time & Job No.

Border Erase Default Set the default width to be erased as a border.

Value

Metric: 0 to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch: 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)

NOTE

To specify border erase widths around original, set the value in "Border". To specify

border erase widths in the middle of original, set the value in "Gutter".

Border Erase to Back

Page

Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet.

Value: Same as Front Page, Do Not Erase

Zoom Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the

originals set.

Value: 100%, Auto

System Stamp (Basic

Settings)

Configure settings for stamps.

Text (Text Stamp) Edit the test string for a template. Up to 8 templates can be registered.

Font Size (Page #) Set the font size for page numbers when printing them.

Value

Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt

Font Size (Bates

Stamp)

When a bates stamp is used, set the font sizes that can be set.

Value

Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt

Font Size (Text

Stamp)

Set the font size for stamps when printing them.

Value

Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt

DP Read Action Set the operation when a document is scanned from the document processor.

Value: Speed Priority, Quality Priority

8-33

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Copy/Print

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Function Defaults] > [Copy/Print]

Detect Multi-fed Originals When reading a document from the document processor, if the multiple feeding of

documents is detected, then the reading stops automatically.

Value:

On: In case of detecting that multiple sheets of original are fed at the same time, the

message is displayed and stop scanning the original.

Off: It does not detect.

Detect Stapled Originals When reading a document from the document processor, if a stapled document is

detected, then the reading stops automatically.

Value:

On: In case of detecting that the original is stapled or the original is fed skewed, the

message is displayed and stop scanning the original.

Off: It does not detect.

Item Description

Original Orientation

(Copy)

Set the original orientation defaults.

Value: Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left, Auto*1

Color Selection

(Copy)

Set the default copying color mode setting.

Value: Auto Color, Full Color, Black & White

Color Balance Select the default Color Balance setting.

Value: Cyan (-5 to 5), Magenta (-5 to 5), Yellow (-5 to 5), Black (-5 to 5)

Original Image (Copy) Set the default original document type for copying.

Value: Text+Photo (Printer), Text+Photo (Magazine), Photo (Printer), Photo

(Magazine), Photo (Photo Paper), Text, Text (Fine Line), Graphic/Map (Printer),

Graphic/Map (Magazine)

Background Density

Adj. (Copy)

Set the default Background Density (Copy).

Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)

Continuous Scan

(Copy)

Select the default Continuous Scan (Copy) setting.

Value: Off, On

Prevent Bleed-

through (Copy)

Set the default value for preventing bleed-through (Copy).

Value: Off, On

Skip Blank Page

(Copy)

Select the default Skip Blank Page (Copy) settings.

Value: Off, On

EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default.

Value: Off, On

Toner Save Level

(EcoPrint)

Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).

Value: 1 (Lower) to 5 (Higher)

NOTE

Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.

Item Description

8-34

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Margin Default Set the default margin.

Value

Metric

Left/Right: -18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Top/Bottom: -18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

Left/Right: -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)

Top/Bottom: -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)

Border Erase (Copy) Set the defaults for Border Erase (Copy).

Value: Standard, Border Erase Sheet, Border Erase Book, Individual Border Erase

Collate/Offset Set the defaults for Collate/Offset.

Value: Off, Collate On, Offset Each Page, Offset Each Set

Auto Image Rotation

(Copy)

Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting.

Value: Off, On

Repeat Copy Select the Repeat Copy default.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• This function will not be displayed when the Data Security Function is active.

• This function will not be displayed when Repeat Copy Job Retention is set to 0.

Trapping Select the default trapping level.

Value: Off, Light, Medium, Heavy

JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.

Value: Fit to Paper Size, Image Resolution, Fit to Print Resolution

XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.

Value: Off, On

Reserve Next Priority Specify whether the default screen appears when a subsequent copy job is reserved while

printing is in progress. To have the default screen appear, select [On].

Value: Off, On

Auto Image Rotation

Action

Set whether the image is rotated when the orientation of the document to be printed is

different from the orientation of the paper.

Value

Unrotated Manual Copy: If a paper source or zoom ratio is specified, the image is not

rotated.

Apply All: Rotates all images.

Follow Image Size: The image is rotated if the rotated image fits on the paper.

Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic

zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.

Value: Off, On

Paper Size for Small

Original

Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the original is too small to be detected in

the Auto Paper Selection mode.

Value: Default Paper Source, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Letter-R, Letter,

Statement-R

Item Description

8-35

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Send/Store

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Function Defaults] > [Send/Store]

Original Size of

Undetected Original

Specify the action when original size is not detected.

Value: Default Paper Source, Show Confirmation

Erase Shadowed

Areas (Copy)

Select the default Erase Shadowed Areas (Copy) setting.

Value: Off, On

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)

Item Description

Original Orientation

(Send/Store)

Set the original orientation defaults.

Value: Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left, Auto*2

Color Selection

(Send/Store)

Select the default color mode for scanning documents.

Value: Auto Color (Color/Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale, Black

& White

Color Type Set the color type when you send color documents.

Value: RGB(Profile:XXXX), sRGB

Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution.

Value: 600×600dpi, 400×400dpi Ultrafine, 300×300dpi, 200×400dpi Superfine,

200×200dpi Fine, 200×100dpi Normal

Fax TX Resolution*1 FAX Operation Guide

Org. Image (Send/

Store)

Set the default original document type for sending/storing.

Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Text (Fine Line), Text (for OCR)

Background Density

Adj. (Send/Store)

Set the default Background Density (Send/Store).

Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)

Continuous Scan

(Send/Store)

Select the default Continuous Scan (Send/Store) setting.

Value: Off, On

Continuous Scan

(Fax)*1 FAX Operation Guide

Prevent Bleed-

through (Send/Store)

Set the default Prevent Bleed (Send/Store).

Value: Off, On

Border Erase/Full

Scan (Send/Store)

Set the defaults for Border Erase/Full Scan (Send/Store).

Value: Standard, Full Scan, Border Erase Sheet, Border Erase Book, Individual

Border Erase

Border Erase/Full

Scan (Fax) FAX Operation Guide

Skip Blank Page

(Send/Store)

Select the default Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) settings.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

8-36

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

File Format Set the default type of the files.

Value: PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS, High Comp. PDF, Word, Excel, PowerPoint

NOTE

If [On] is selected in "Digital Signature", [PDF/A-1a] and [PDF/A-1b] cannot be selected.

Digital Signature to File (page 8-38)

Image Quality (File

Format)

Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS/OpenXPS/Word/Excel/PowerPoint file quality.

Value: 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

High Comp. PDF

Image

Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.

Value: Compression Ratio Priority, Standard, Quality Priority

HighCompressionPD

F Mode

Select the compression method for sending High-Compression PDF.

Value: Text Priority, File Size Priority

Color TIFF

Compression

Select the compression method for sending the color documents in the TIFF format.

Value: TIFF V6, TTN2

PDF/A Select the default PDF/A setting.

Value: Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-2a, PDF/A-2b, PDF/A-2u

OCR Text

Recognition Action*2

Configure settings for OCR Text Recognition Action.

Value: Speed Priority, Quality Priority

OCR Text

Recognition*2

Set the default OCR Text Recognition.

Value: Off, On

Primary OCR

Language*2

Set the default language of the text to be extracted. ([English] is selected as a default.)

Select the language to extract from the options displayed on the touch panel.

OCR Output Format*2 Set the default OCR output format.

Value: Text + Graphics, Text + Graphics with Scanned Image, Scanned Image with

Searchable Text

File Separation Select the default file separation setting.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If you select [On], set the number of pages to be divided. The setting range is 1 to 2500

pages.

Attach File to

Select how to attach the files to the E-mail.

Value

All Files in 1 Email: Attach and send all files in a single E-mail.

1 file per Email: Attach and send 1 file per E-mail.

Email Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the

scanned originals by E-mail. Three body messages can be registered, and the initial

template can be used to choose which body message is used.

Value

Subject: Up to 256 characters can be entered.

Body 1 to 3: Up to 500 characters can be entered.

Item Description

8-37

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Copy/Print

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Copy/Print]

Send/Store

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Send/Store]

iFax Subject/Body*3 Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the

scanned originals by i-FAX.

Value

Subject: Up to 256 characters can be entered.

Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.

Erase Shadowed

Areas (Send)

Select the default Erase Shadowed Areas (Send) setting.

Value: Off, On

Erase Shadowed

Areas (Store)

Select the default Erase Shadowed Areas (Store) setting.

Value: Off, On

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

*2 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)

*3 Displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.

Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit" (page 11-6)

Item Description

Quick Setup

Registration (Copy)

Quick Setup Registration (Copy) (page 8-10)

Item Description

Default Screen Set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send] key.

Value: Destination, Address Book

Prevent Mis-sending

Settings

Destination Check

before Send

Select whether to display the confirmation screen of destinations

after pressing the [Start] key when performing sending jobs.

Value: Off, On

Entry Check for New

Dest.

When adding new destination, select whether to display the entry

check screen to check the entered destination.

Value: Off, On

New Destination

Entry

Select whether to permit direct entry of destination.

Value: Prohibit, Permit

Recall Destination Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send screen.

Value: Prohibit, Permit

Broadcast Set whether to enable broadcast.

Value: Prohibit, Permit

Destination History Allow to use the destination history.

Value: Prohibit, Permit

Delete Destination

History

Delete the destination history.

Item Description

8-38

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Quick Setup Registration (Send) Quick Setup Registration (Send) (page 8-10)

Digital Signature to

File

Digital Signature Select whether to add a digital signature.

Value:

Off: Does not add a digital signature.

Specify Each Job: Whether to add a digital signature is

selected each time of sending.

On: Always adds a digital signature when

sending.

Digital Signature

Format

Select an algorithm used for encryption of digital signature.

Value: SHA1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Digital Signature" is set to

[Specify Each Job] or [On].

Password

Confirmation on

Signature Permission

Select whether to confirm password when setting digital signature.

Value: On, Off

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Digital Signature" is set to

[Specify Each Job].

Password Set a password required for setting digital signature. Enter a new

security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols.

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Password Confirmation on

Signature Permission" is set to [On].

Item Description

8-39

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Email]

Sending Job - Folder

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Sending Job - Folder]

Item Description

Email Settings SMTP (Email

TX)

Select whether to send E-mail using SMTP.

Value: Off, On

SMTP Server

Name

Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.

NOTE

Up to 256 characters can be entered.

SMTP Port

Number

Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default port number is 25.

Value: 1 to 65535 (Port Number)

Sender

Address

Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-mails, such as the

machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person

rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for

SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 256

characters.

SMTP Auth and

Sender

Address

When the user login is set to ON, login user name, password and E-mail

address of login user are used for SMTP authentication and e-mail sender

address.

Value

Use System Settings: Information set with [Sender Address] is used for

SMTP authentication and E-mail sender address information.

Use Login User Information: Login User information is used for SMTP

authentication and E-mail sender address information.

NOTE

If there is no e-mail address set for the user who logged in, the Sender Address

set with [Sender Address] is used for E-mail sender address information.

POP3 POP3 Select whether to receive E-mail using POP3.

Value: Off, On

Remote

Printing

Remote Printing (page 8-48)

Item Description

FTP Settings Select whether to send documents using FTP. To use the FTP Client, set the protocol to

[On] for "Protocol Settings". The default port number is 21.

Value: Off, On, 1 to 65535 (Port Number)

SMB Settings Select whether to send documents using SMB. To use the SMB Client, set the protocol to

[On] for "Protocol Settings". The default port number is 445.

Value: Off, On, 1 to 65535 (Port Number)

8-40

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Fax/iFax

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Fax/iFax]

Configure settings for FAX.

FAX Operation Guide

WSD

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [WSD]

DSM Scan

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [DSM Scan]

Address Book

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Address Book]

Item Description

WSD Scan Protocol

Settings

Select whether to use WSD Scan.*1

Value: Off, On

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

WSD Print Protocol

Settings

Set whether to use our proprietary web services. WIA driver, TWAIN driver and

Network FAX driver use this Enhanced WSD web service.*1

Value: Off, On

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

Item Description

Basic Using DSM Select whether to use DSM scan.*1

Value: Off, On

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.

LDAP Select whether to use LDAP.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Add/Edit Machine Address Book Configure settings for address book.

Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-37)

8-41

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

One-Touch Key

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [One-Touch Key]

Send and Forward

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Send and Forward]

Machine

Address Book

Sort Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.

Value: No., Name

Narrow Down This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination

listed when the address book is displayed.

Value: Off, Email, Folder, Fax*1, iFax*2, Group

Edit Restriction Restrict editing of the address book. If you selected [Administrator Only], you

can only edit the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges.

Value: Off, Administrator Only

External Address Book Command Center RX User Guide

Address Book Type*3 Select whether the machine's address book or the External Address Book

appears when the address book is displayed.

Value: Machine Address Book, Ext Address Book

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

*2 This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.

*3 This display appears only if the external address book is available.

Item Description

Add/Edit One Touch

Key

Configure settings for One Touch Key.

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (page 3-44)

Edit Restriction Restrict editing of the One Touch Key. If you selected [Administrator Only], you can only

edit the One Touch Key by logging in with administrator privileges.

Value: Off, Administrator Only

Item Description

Forward Settings Select whether to forward the original.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], select rules to forward from [Email], [Folder (SMB)],

[Folder (FTP)], [Fax]*1, [iFax (Via server-On)]*2, and [iFax (Via server-Off)]*2.

Destination Add Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. One destination can be

set. Follow the steps below to register the destination.

• Addr. Book

•Email

•SMB

• FTP

Specifying Destination (page 5-47)

Item Description

8-42

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Job Settings Color Setting Configure the color settings for forwarded original.

Value: Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color,

Grayscale, Black & White

Scan

Resolution

Select resolution for stored original.

Value: 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi Ultrafine, 300x300dpi, 200x400dpi

Superfine, 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Normal

File Format Select the file format of forwarded original.

File Format for Send and Forward (page 8-43)

File Separation Set whether originals are divided into multiple files before being forwarded.

Value: Off, Each Page

Email Subject Enter a maximum of 256 characters for the subject of forwarded E-mail.

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

FTP Encrypted

Set whether originals are encrypted before being forwarded.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when SSL is set to [On] in Security Settings.

Security Settings (page 8-69)

Encrypted TX

Sends encrypted E-mail using the electronic certificate.

Encryption secures the document transmission.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when S/MIME is configured in Command Center RX.

Configuring S/MIME settings in the Command Center RX (page 6-93)

Digital

Signature

Add a digital signature to the email, using the electronic certificate.

By adding a digital signature to an email, you can confirm the identity of the

destination and detect tampering during transmission.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when S/MIME is configured in Command Center RX.

Configuring S/MIME settings in the Command Center RX (page 6-93)

*1 Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.

*2 This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.

Item Description

8-43

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

File Format for Send and Forward

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Send and Forward] > [Job Settings] > [File Format]

Select the file format for forwarded original.

The table below lists the file formats and their details.

File format Adjustable range of image quality Color setting

PDF*1

*1 File format can be selected. (Value: [Off] / [PDF/A-1a] / [PDF/A-1b] / [PDF/A-2a] / [PDF/A-2b] / [PDF/A-2u])

1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/

Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and

White

TIFF

JPEG Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale

XPS Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/

Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and

White

OpenXPS

High Comp. PDF*1 Compression Ratio Priority,

Standard, Quality Priority

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/

Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale

8-44

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

PDF Encryption Functions

If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and

editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.

Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in "Compatibility".

When [Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Send and Forward] > [Job Settings] > [Encryption]

Item Value Description

Password to Open

Document

Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256

characters) and then select [OK].

Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for

confirmation, and select [OK].

Password to Edit/Print

Document

Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256

characters) and then select [OK].

Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for

confirmation, and select [OK].

When you have entered the password to edit/print

document, you can specifically limit the operation.

Detail Printing

Allowed

Not Allowed, Allowed Restricts printing of the PDF file.

Changes

Allowed

Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.

Commenting Can only add commenting.

Page Layout except

extracting Pages

Can change the page layout except extracting the pages

of the PDF file.

Any except extracting

Pages

Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of

the PDF file.

Copying of

Text/Images/

Others

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.

8-45

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

When [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Send and Forward] > [Job Settings] > [Encryption]

RX/Forward Rules/Fax Box

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [RX/Forward Rules/Fax Box]

Configures settings for RX/Forward rules and FAX Box.

FAX Operation Guide

Item Value Description

Password to Open

Document

Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256

characters) and then select [OK].

Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for

confirmation, and select [OK].

Password to Edit/Print

Document

Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256

characters) and then select [OK].

Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for

confirmation, and select [OK].

When you have entered the password to edit/print

document, you can specifically limit the operation.

Detail Printing

Allowed

Not Allowed Disables the printing of PDF file.

Allowed

(Low Resolution only)

Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.

Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution.

Changes

Allowed

Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.

Inserting/Deleting/

Rotating Pages

Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the PDF

file.

Commenting Can only add commenting.

Any except extracting

Pages

Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of

the PDF file.

Copying of

Text/Images/

Others

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.

8-46

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Printer

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Printer]

Item Description

Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types

of printers.

Value: PCL6, IBM Proprinter, Line Printer, EPSON LQ-850, KPDL, KPDL (Auto)

NOTE

• When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)], set "Alt Emulation", too.

• When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set "KPDL Error Report", too.

KPDL Error Report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or

not the error report is output.

Value: Off, On

Alt Emulation When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between

KPDL and another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to

the data to print.

Value: PCL6

Color Setting You can choose whether reports are printed in color or black and white.

Value: Color, Black & White

Gloss Mode Gloss Mode increases the effect of glossiness in printing. However, printing takes

longer time.

Value: Off, On

IMPORTANT

This function is not available when [Labels] or [Transparency] is selected as

the paper type setting.

Paper Feeding (page 8-13)

Depending on the paper used, printing in gloss mode may cause curl in paper. To

reduce curl, try using thicker paper.

EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where

faded printing is not a problem.

Value: Off, On

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).

Value: 1 (Lower) to 5 (Higher)

NOTE

Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.

Override A4/Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size

when printing.

Value

Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.

On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use

whichever size is in the paper source.

Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode.

Value: 1-sided, 2-sided (Bind Long Edge), 2-sided (Bind Short Edge)

Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 9999.

Value: 1 to 9999 copies

8-47

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Orientation Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].

Value: Portrait, Landscape

Form Feed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is

no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed.

When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options

are between 5 and 495 seconds.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character

code 0AH).

Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF

CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code

(character code 0DH).

Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR

Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], select the job name to be displayed from [Job Name], [Job No.

& Job Name], or [Job Name & Job No.].

User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Value: Off, On

Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source

and type are specified.

Value

Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.

Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.

MP Tray Priority If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray

in the paper feed.

Value

Off: The printer driver settings are followed.

Auto Feed: If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the MP

tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray.

Always: If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP

tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver.

Auto Cassette Change Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while

printing.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• When selecting [Off], the machine displays "Add the following paper in cassette

#." (# is a cassette number) or "Add the following paper in the multipurpose tray.",

and stops printing.

• Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing.

• To print from the other paper cassette, select [Paper Selection]. Select the

desired paper source.

• When selecting [On], the machine continues printing automatically when the other

cassette contains the same paper as the currently-used cassette.

Item Description

8-48

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Document Box

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Document Box]

Message Banner Print Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when

printing multiple banner sheets.

Value: Off, On

Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a

line for an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at

10 pitch). This setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation.

Value: Off, On

Resolution Set the resolution used for printing.

Value: 600 dpi, 1200 dpi

NOTE

Settings that are received from the printer driver have priority over the operation

panel settings.

KIR Select the default KIR (smoothing) setting.

Value: Off, On

Printing Job Terminator You can select the condition which regarded as a job termination if the print job could

not be processed until the end due to your environment and the other reason.

Value:

EOJ (End of Job): The command recognized as a termination of the job data is

regarded as one job until it is detected.

End of Network Session: The data included in a network session at network

connection is regarded as one job.

UEL (Universal Exit Language): The UEL included in the termination of the job data

is regarded as one job until it is detected.

Remote Printing Select whether to prohibit printing that is performed without operating the machine.

When [Prohibit] is selected, a document that has been stored in the document box

from the printer driver can be printed from the machine. This prevents another person

from seeing that document.

Value: Prohibit, Permit

NOTE

If [Prohibit] is selected, printing and storing using Quick Copy and Proof and Hold

functions are disabled. Printing a received FAX (optional) is not prohibited.

Direct Printing from Web Set whether to allow Direct Printing from Command Center RX.

Value: Not Allowed, Allowed

Command Center RX

Item Description

Custom Box - Add/Edit Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-58)

Auto File Deletion Time Set the time to automatically delete stored documents.

Quick Setup Registration

(Storing in Box)

Quick Setup Registration (Storing in Box) (page 8-10)

Item Description

8-49

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Job Box

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Job Box]

Fax Memory RX Box

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Fax Memory RX Box]

Set whether to perform print immediately for the FAX documents received or to save them in the Fax Memory RX Box.

FAX Operation Guide

Home

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Home]

Configure settings for Home screen.

Editing the Home Screen (page 2-15)

Quick Setup Registration

(Box Print)

Quick Setup Registration (Box Print) (page 8-10)

Quick Setup Registration

(Sending from Box)

Quick Setup Registration (Sending from Box) (page 8-10)

Item Description

Quick Copy Job

Retention

To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Value: number between 0 and 300

NOTE

When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.

Repeat Copy Job

Retention

To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Value: number between 0 and 50

NOTE

• This function will not be displayed when the Data Security Function is activated.

• When 0 is set, Repeat Copy cannot be used.

Deletion of Job

Retention

This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and

Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have

been saved for a set time.

Value: Off, 1 hour, 4 hours, 1 day, 1 week

NOTE

This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this

function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned off.

Item Description

8-50

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Status

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Status]

Internet Browser

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Internet Browser]

Item Description

Display Settings Set the items that appear in the status screens for printing jobs, sending jobs, and

storing jobs.

Printing Jobs Column

Value: Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages, Color/

Black & White

Printing Jobs Column

Value: Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages, Color/

Black & White

Sending Jobs

Column 1

Value: Job Name, User Name, Destination, Original Pages, Color/Black & White

Sending Jobs

Column 2

Value: Job Name, User Name, Destination, Original Pages, Color/Black & White

Storing Jobs Column

Value: Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White

Storing Jobs Column

Value: Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White

Job Status/Job Logs

Settings

Set the display method of the Status/Log.

Display Jobs Detail

Status

Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All

Display Jobs Log Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All

Display Fax Log*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Value: Show All, Hide All

Pause/Resume of All

Print Jobs

Value: Prohibit, Permit

Item Description

Internet Browser Select whether to use the Internet browser.

Value: Off, On

Browser

Environment

This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how pages

are displayed.

Value:

Home page: (Enter the address for Home page.)

Text Size: Large, Medium, Small

Display Mode: Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering

Cookie: Accept All, Reject All, Prompt before Accepting

NOTE

This setting is not displayed if you selected [Off] for "Internet Browser".

Proxy Proxy (page 8-52)

8-51

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Manual Staple

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Manual Staple]

Remote Services

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Remote Services]

When the trouble occurs on this product, it is possible to explain the operational procedure and the troubleshooting

method through the internet from our sales office by accessing the operation panel screen of this product while

operating the screen.

NOTE

Only displayed when the optional 4,000-sheet Finisher is installed.

Item Description

Manual Staple Select whether to use Manual Staple.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If you selected [On], set the time until manual stapling mode is automatically cancelled. The

setting range is 5 to 60 seconds (in 5-second increments).

Staple Position Set the default Staple Position.

Value: A4, Letter

NOTE

When using the remote service settings, it is necessary to make a contract with our company.

Please contact our sales office or our authorized dealer (purchase source) for the details.

8-52

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Network Settings

Configures network settings.

Host Name

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Host Name]

Proxy

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Proxy]

Wi-Fi Direct Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Direct Settings]

Set Wi-Fi Direct.

Item Description

Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command

Center RX.

Changing Device Information (page 2-69)

Item Description

Proxy Proxy Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application.

Value: Off, Use Different Proxy Server, Use the Same Proxy Server

for All Protocols

Proxy Server (HTTP) Set a proxy server (HTTP).

Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)

Proxy Server (HTTPS) Set a proxy server (HTTPS). This setup is available when "Proxy" is set

to [Use Different Proxy Server].

Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)

Do Not Use Proxy for

Following Domains

Set domains for which no proxy is used.

Value: (Enter the domain name.)

NOTE

This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37 or IB-38) is installed.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service

representatives for detail.

IB-37/IB-38 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)

Item Description

Wi-Fi Direct Select whether to use Wi-Fi Direct.

Value: Off, On

Device Name Specify the device name.

NOTE

• Up to 32 characters can be entered.

• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

8-53

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wi-Fi Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Settings]

Set Wi-Fi.

Wi-Fi

IP Address Check the IP address of the machine.

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-57)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

Auto Disconnect Automatically disconnect devices connected through Wi-Fi Direct.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• If you select [ON], set the waiting time for automatic disconnection.

• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

Persistent Group Set whether Wi-Fi Direct connection as Persistent Group (information for the

connection is kept even if the power is turned off).

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

Password Select whether the Wi-Fi Direct password is automatically generated or created

manually. When [Off] is selected, the Persistent Group setting changes to [On].

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If you selected [On], set a password (8 or more characters).

Frequency band Set the frequency band to be used.

Value: 2.4GHz, 5Ghz

NOTE

This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37 or IB-38) is installed.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service

representatives for detail.

IB-37/IB-38 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)

Item Description

Wi-Fi Select whether to use Wi-Fi.

Value:

Off, On

Item Description

8-54

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Setup

Item Description

Available Network Displays access points to which the machine can connect.

Index Select the key index of the access point.

Value:

0 to 3

Push Button Method If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be configured

using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the connection is started by

pressing the push button on the access point.

NOTE

The push button method supports only the WPS.

PIN Code Method

(Device)

Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access point.

The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.

Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.

Network Name

(SSID)

Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine connects.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Network

Authentication

Select network authentication type.

Value: Open, WPA2/WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA2/WPA-EAP, WPA2-EAP

Encryption Select encryption method. The setting values vary depending on the Network Authentication

setting.

Network

Authentication

Value

Open Value: Disable, WEP

NOTE

If you selected [WEP], set the WEP key (up to 26

characters) and WEP Key Index (0 to 3).

WPA2/WPA-PSK Value: AES, Auto, Preshared Key (Up to 64 characters)

WPA2-PSK Value: Preshared Key (Up to 64 characters)

WPA2/WPA-EAP Value: AES, Auto

WPA2-EAP —

8-55

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

TCP/IP Setting

Item Description

TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.

Value: Off, On

IPv4 Settings Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/

IP] is set to [On].

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.

Value: Off, On

Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.

Value: Off, On

IP Address Set the IP address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], the value cannot be entered.

Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], the value cannot be entered.

Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], the value cannot be entered.

DNS Server Address Set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server.

Value: Use DNS Server from DHCP, Use following DNS Server

NOTE

When [Use following DNS Server] is selected, you can enter static DNS server

information in the Primary and Secondary fields provided.

DNS over TLS Set whether to connect to a DNS server during communication protected by TLS.

Value: Off, On, Auto

IMPORTANT

• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].

• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-56

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Item Description

IPv6 Settings Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/

IP] is [On].

IPv6 Select whether to use IPv6.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Addr. (Link Local)] after restarting the

network.

Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP

(IPv6).

Value

IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of

four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).

Prefix Length: 0 to 128

Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-

digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].

RA (Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the

network.

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the

network.

DNS Server Address Set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server.

Value: Use DNS Server from DHCP, Use following DNS Server

NOTE

When [Use following DNS Server] is selected, you can enter static DNS server

information in the Primary and Secondary fields provided.

DNS over TLS Set whether to connect to a DNS server during communication protected by TLS.

Value: Off, On, Auto

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-57

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wired Network Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Wired Network Settings]

Configure wired network settings.

TCP/IP Setting

Item Description

TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.

Value: Off, On

IPv4 Settings Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/

IP] is set to [On].

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.

Value: Off, On

Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.

Value: Off, On

IP Address Set the IP address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], the value cannot be entered.

Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], the value cannot be entered.

Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], the value cannot be entered.

DNS Server Address Set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server.

Value: Use DNS Server from DHCP, Use following DNS Server

NOTE

When [Use following DNS Server] is selected, you can enter static DNS server

information in the Primary and Secondary fields provided.

DNS over TLS Set whether to connect to a DNS server during communication protected by TLS.

Value: Off, On, Auto

IMPORTANT

• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].

• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-58

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Item Description

IPv6 Settings Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/

IP] is [On].

IPv6 Select whether to use IPv6.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Addr. (Link Local)] after restarting the

network.

Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP

(IPv6).

Value

IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of

four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).

Prefix Length: 0 to 128

Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-

digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].

RA (Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address 1 to 5 (Stateless)] after restarting

the network.

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the

network.

DNS Server Address Set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server.

Value: Use DNS Server from DHCP, Use following DNS Server

NOTE

When [Use following DNS Server] is selected, you can enter static DNS server

information in the Primary and Secondary fields provided.

DNS over TLS Set whether to connect to a DNS server during communication protected by TLS.

Value: Off, On, Auto

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-59

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Others

Protocol Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol Settings]

Configure protocol settings.

Item Description

LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.

Value:

Auto, 10BASE-T Half, 10BASE-T Full, 100BASE-TX Half, 100BASE-TX Full,

1000BASE-T

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

SMTP (Email TX) Email Settings (page 8-39)

POP3 (Email RX) POP3 (page 8-39)

FTP Client (Transmission) FTP Settings (page 8-39)

FTP Server

(Reception)

Protocol

Settings

Select whether to receive documents using FTP.*1

Value: Off, On

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

SMB Client (Transmission) SMB Settings (page 8-39)

NetBEUI Protocol

Settings

Selects whether to receive documents using NetBEUI.*1

Value: Off, On

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

WSD Scan WSD Scan (page 8-40)

WSD Print WSD Print (page 8-40)

iFax Select whether to use i-FAX.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.

DSM Scan DSM Scan (page 8-40)

8-60

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

ThinPrint Protocol

Settings

Select whether to use ThinPrint. To use the Thin Print protocol, set the protocol

to [On]. The default port number is 4000.*1*2

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed only when the optional ThinPrint Option is activated.

Thin Print over

SSL

To use the Thin Print over SSL protocol, set [Thin Print Over SSL] and [SSL]

to [On].

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default

certificate is the self-certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

LPD Protocol

Settings

Selects whether to receive documents using LPD.*1

Value: Off, On

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

Raw Protocol

Settings

Select whether to receive documents using Raw Port.*1

Value: Off, On

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

IPP Protocol

Settings

Selects whether to receive documents using IPP. To use the IPP protocol, set

[IPP] to [On], and set [SSL] to [Off]. In addition, select [Not Secure

(IPP&IPPS)] on IPP Security under Security Settings from the Command

Center RX. The default port number is 631.*1

Value: Off, On, 1 to 32767 (Port Number)

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

IPP over SSL Protocol

Settings

To use the IPP protocol, set [IPP] and [SSL] to [On]. The default port number is

443.*1*2

Value: Off, On, 1 to 32767 (Port Number)

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate

is the self-certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

Item Description

8-61

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

HTTP Protocol

Settings

Select whether to communicate using HTTP.*1

Value: Off, On

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

HTTPS Protocol

Settings

Select whether to communicate using HTTPS.*1*2

Value: Off, On

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

LDAP Select whether to use LDAP.

Value: Off, On

SNMPv1/v2c Protocol

Settings

Select whether to communicate using SNMP.*1

Value: Off, On

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

SNMPv3 Protocol

Settings

Select whether to communicate using SNMPv3.*1

Value: Off, On

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

Enhanced WSD Protocol

Settings

Set whether to use our proprietary web services.*1

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN, and Network FAX

driver.

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

Enhanced WSD

over SSL

Protocol

Settings

Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.*1*2

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN and Network FAX

drivers.

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

eSCL Protocol

Settings

Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL.*1

Value: Off, On

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

Item Description

8-62

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

eSCL over SSL Protocol

Settings

Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL over SSL.*1*2

Value: Off, On

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

VNC (RFB) Protocol

Settings

This is set when starting up a VNC Viewer (E.g. RealVNC) to use the Remote

Operation.*1

The default port number is 9062.

Value: Off, On, 1 to 32767 (Port Number)

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

VNC (RFB) over

SSL

Protocol

Settings

This is set when starting up a VNC Viewer (E.g. RealVNC) to use Remote

Operation protected by SSL.*1*2

The default port number is 9063.

Value: Off, On, 1 to 32767 (Port Number)

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default

certificate is the self-certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

Enhanced VNC

over SSL

Protocol

Settings

This is set when starting up Command Center RX to use Remote Operation

protected by SSL.*1*2

The default port number is 9061.

Value: Off, On, 1 to 32767 (Port Number)

NOTE

• The default setting is [On].

• When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default

certificate is the self-certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

REST Protocol

Settings

Select whether to communicate using REST.*1

Value: Off, On, 1 to 32767 (Port Number)

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

Item Description

8-63

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Ping

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Ping]

Bonjour

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Bonjour]

REST over SSL Protocol

Settings

Select whether to communicate using REST over SSL.*1*2

Value: Off, On, 1 to 32767 (Port Number)

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate

is the self-certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

RESTful API Settings Select whether to communicate using RESTful API.

To use the RESTful API, set [Protocol Setting] on [REST] or

[REST over SSL] to [On].

Value: API for Service/Maintenance, API for Scan/Maintenance

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.

*2 Set "SSL" to [On] in Security Settings.

SSL (page 8-82)

IMPORTANT

Depending on the protocol, there are models where you need to restart the network or turn the machine OFF

and then ON after changing the setting.

Item Description

Ping Checks if communication with the destination by entering the host name or IP address of the

destination is possible.

NOTE

If [Primary Network (Client)] is set to [Others], this item is not displayed.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-69)

Ping Timeout Ping Timeout (page 8-9)

Item Description

Bonjour Protocol

Settings

Select whether to use Bonjour.

Value: Off, On

Available

Network

Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and

wired.

Value: Disable, Enable

Item Description

8-64

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

IP Filter (IPv4)

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [IP Filter (IPv4)]

IP Filter (IPv6)

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [IP Filter (IPv6)]

IPSec

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [IPSec]

Restart Network

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Restart Network]

Item Description

IP Filter (IPv4) Configure IP filters. IP filters restrict access to the machine based on the IP addresses and

protocols.

Specify the IP addresses or network addresses of the hosts to which access is granted from

Command Center RX. If nothing is specified on this page, access from all hosts is allowed.

Value: Off, On

Command Center RX User Guide

Item Description

IP Filter (IPv6) Configure IP filters. IP filters restrict access to the machine based on the IP addresses and

protocols.

Specify the IP addresses or network addresses of the hosts to which access is granted from

Command Center RX. If nothing is specified on this page, access from all hosts is allowed.

Value: Off, On

Command Center RX User Guide

Item Description

IPSec Select whether to use IPSec.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Restart Network Restarts the network.

8-65

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Optional Network

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Optional Network"

Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit.

Host Name

Wireless Network

Configure settings for the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit.

NOTE

This menu is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

Item Description

Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command

Center RX.

Changing Device Information (page 2-69)

NOTE

This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.

Item Description

Connection Status You can check the wireless LAN status.

Setup Available Network Select access points to which the machine can be connected, enter the

Preshared Key and start a connection.

Push Button Method If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings

can be configured using the push button. This setting executes push

button, and the connection is started by pressing the push button on the

access point.

NOTE

The push button method supports only the WPS.

PIN Code Method

(Device)

Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into

the access point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically

generated.

PIN Code Method

(Terminal)

Starts connection using the PIN code of the access point. Enter the PIN

code of the access point.

8-66

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Setup Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.

Network Name

(SSID)

Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the

machine connects.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Connection

Mode

Set the connection mode.

Value: Ad Hoc, Infrastructure

NOTE

•Ad Hoc: Directly communicates with the device without going

through an access point. This method cannot be used to connect to

two or more devices.

•Infrastructure: Performs communication through an access point.

Channel Set channel. Use [-] / [+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.

Value: 1 to 11

Network

Authentication

Select network authentication type. To select other options, open the

device home page from a computer.

Value: Open, Shared, WPA-PSK*1, WPA2-PSK*1

Encryption Select encryption method. If the option other than [Disable] is selected,

enter the WEP key or the Preshared key. The setting values vary

depending on the Network Authentication setting. Select [Data

Encryption].

When Network Authentication is set to [Open] or [Shared]:

Value: Disable, WEP

When Network Authentication is set to [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK]:

Value: TKIP*2, AES, Auto*2, Preshared Key

NOTE

•If [WEP] is selected, enter the WEP key. Up to 26 characters can be

entered.

•If [TKIP], [AES] or [Auto] is selected, enter the Preshared key. Enter

the value in 8 to 64 characters.

TCP/IP Setting For details on setting value.

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-57)

Bonjour (page 8-63)

IPSec (page 8-64)

Others For details on setting value.

NetWare (page 8-67)

AppleTalk (page 8-67)

MAC Address Filter (page 8-67)

*1 Not displayed if you selected [Ad Hoc] for "Connection Mode".

*2 Not displayed if you selected [WPA2-PSK] for "Network Authentication".

Item Description

8-67

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wired Network Settings

Restart Network

NOTE

This menu is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) is installed.

Item Description

TCP/IP Setting For details on setting value.

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-57)

Bonjour (page 8-63)

IPSec (page 8-64)

Dynamic DNS Set whether Dynamic DNS is used.

Value: Off, On

Others NetWare Use NetWare to receive documents.

Operation Guide for the optional Network Interface Kit

Value: Off, On

AppleTalk Selects whether to receive documents using AppleTalk.*1

Value: Off, On

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.

LAN Interface Select the LAN Interface type.*1

Value: Auto, 10Base-Half, 10Base-Full, 100Base-Half, 100Base-Full,

1000BASE-T

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.

MAC Address

Filter

Select whether to use MAC Address Filter.

Operation Guide for the optional Network Interface Kit

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Restart Network Restarts the network.

8-68

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Connectivity

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Connectivity"

Item Description

Bluetooth

Settings

Bluetooth

Keyboard

Use Bluetooth keyboard.

Value: Off, On

Device Select a keyboard.

Fax Server Fax Server Select whether to use FAX Server.

Value: On, Off

Address

Settings

This specifies a prefix, suffix, and domain name to be attached to a destination.

NOTE

For information about the fax server, contact the fax server administrator.

File Format Set the default type of the files.

Value: PDF, TIFF, XPS

NFC Use NFC (Near Field Communication).

Value: Off, On

Remote Operation Configure settings for remote operation.

Value: Off, On

When you set it to [On], set the Use Restriction.

Value: Off, Use Password, Administrator Only

When selecting [Off], users without administrator privileges can also execute

remote operation.

When selecting [Use Password], enter the password, then re-enter it to

confirm.

When selecting [Administrator Only], only administrator can execute remote

operation.

NOTE

When selecting [Administrator Only], the remote operation using VNC

software is unavailable.

8-69

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Others

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Others"

Security Settings

Configures security settings.

Security Quick Setup

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > [Security Quick Setup]

The configuration methods are as follows:

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37, IB-

38 or IB-51) is installed.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37 or IB-38) is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or

service representatives for detail.

IB-37/IB-38 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)

Item Description

Primary Network

(Client)

Select the network interface to be used for the send function that this machine functions as

a client, the network authentication and connecting to external address book.

Value: Wi-Fi, Wired Network, Optional Network

•[Wi-Fi] is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37 or IB-38) is installed.

•[Optional Network] is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or

Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.

• You can set and use "[Wired Network] or [Wi-Fi]", and "[Optional Network] (IB-50 or

IB-51)" individually for the e-mail send connection.

Restart Entire Device Restart the machine without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable

operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)

Item Description

Security Quick Setup Select a security level close to the your operating environment, and customize the security

functions as necessary.

Value

Level 1: This is the factory default.

Level 2: The security functions of network are changed.

Level 3: All functions that protect the machine are enabled, and functions that are not

protected are disabled.

NOTE

• This function is available when you have logged in as administrator.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

• The settings will be enabled when the device or network is restarted after selecting

the level.

Restart Entire Device (page 8-86)

Restart Network (page 8-67)

• If you change any security settings after selecting the security level, "Custom" is

displayed on Security Quick Setup.

8-70

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > [Security Quick Setup]

Select a security level according to your operating environment.

Configure the security function as necessary.

4Restart the device or network.

Restart Entire Device (page 8-86)

Restart Network (page 8-67)

Interface Block Setting

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "Interface Block Setting"

This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional

interfaces.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with

privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login password

are set as shown below.

NOTE

Refer to the following for the settings of each security level.

Functions List of Security Quick Setup (page 11-36)

Item Description

USB Host This locks and protects the USB port (USB host).

Value: Unblock, Block

USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Device).

Value: Unblock, Block

USB Drive This locks and protects the USB memory slot.

Value: Unblock, Block

NOTE

This function is available when USB Host is set to [Unblock].

8-71

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Device Security Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "Device Security Settings"

Optional Interface 1 This locks and protects the optional interface slots.

Value: Unblock, Block

NOTE

You can set this feature for each slot.

Optional Interface 2

Restart Entire Device Restart the machine without turning the power switch off.

IMPORTANT

After changing "Interface Block Setting", restart the network or turn the machine OFF

and then ON.

Item Description

Unusable Time*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Set a time period during which the machine will not print received faxes.

FAX Operation Guide

Job Status/Job Logs

Settings

Job Status/Job Logs Settings (page 8-50)

Security Level Specify the security level.

Value

Low: This mode is used during maintenance. Do not use normally.

High: This is the security setting we recommend. Use this setting normally.

Very High: In addition to [High] setting, this setting disables the machine settings to be

changed from external command.

NOTE

This function is available when you have logged in as machine administrator.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

Remote Printing Remote Printing (page 8-48)

Software Verification Verify the installed software.

Select [Start] to start verification.

If an error occurs during software verification, contact your dealer or service representative.

Administrator

Authentication on

Firm Update

Request administrator to approve when updating firmware.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

8-72

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Data Security

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "Device Security Settings" [Data Security]

Configure settings for data stored in the SSD, hard disk, and machine's memory.

Item Description

Hard Disk/SSD Initialization Change security functions.

NOTE

• This function is displayed when the Data Security Function is active.

• Enter the security password to change security functions. The default setting is

"000000".

Data Overwrite

Method

The method used to overwrite data can be changed.

Refer to the following for details.

Data Encryption/Overwrite Operation Guide

Value

1-time Overwrite Method: The 1-time overwrite method overwrites unneeded data

areas (in the case of overwriting) or all the data areas (in the case of system

initialization) with specific numbers to prevent data restoration.

3-time Overwrite Method (A): The 3-time overwrite method complies with DoD

5220.22-M, and overwrites unneeded data areas (in the case of overwriting) or all the

data areas (in the case of system initialization) with specific numbers, their

complements, and random numbers to prevent data restoration. Data restoration is

not possible even through a sophisticated restoration technique.

NOTE

The 3-time Overwrite Method (A) may take more time than the 1-time Overwrite

Method.

Security Password Customize the security password so that only the administrator can use the Data

Encryption/Overwrite.

Enter a new security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols.

Enter the password again for confirmation.

IMPORTANT

Avoid any easy-to-guess numbers for the security password (e.g. 11111111 or

12345678).

System Initialization Overwrite all the data stored in the hard disk/SSD when disposing of the machine.

IMPORTANT

If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, the hard disk/

SSD might possibly crash or initialization might fail.

NOTE

If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, turn the power switch

on again. Initialization automatically restarts.

8-73

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Data Sanitization Return the following information registered in the machine to the factory defaults.

• Address Book

• Favorites

• System settings

• Fax transmission and reception / forwarding data

• Transmission histories

• Local FAX Name

• Local FAX Number

• Data saved in Custom Box

• Optional applications

NOTE

• Print the data sanitization report and then confirm that security data is deleted.

Data Sanitization Report (page 8-25)

• Once in progress, the processing cannot canceled.

• Before performing this function, disconnect modular, network, and other cables.

• Before performing this function, set all interface block settings to [Unblock].

Interface Block Setting (page 8-70)

• Do not turn the power off while sanitizing the data. If the power is turned off during

data erasing, erasing will be executed automatically when the power is restored,

however, complete erasure cannot be guaranteed.

Item Description

8-74

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Run Immediately Data Sanitization will be performed.

Reserve a

Sanitization Time

Completely erase address and image data saved in the device at the scheduled time.

Value: Off, On

If [On] is selected, set the date and time that sanitization is to be performed. The

setting range is Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (0 to 23).

Device Use After

Sanitization

The device use restriction after the data sanitization is completed.

The device cannot be used if [Prohibit] is selected.

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Data Overwrite

Method

Data Overwrite Method

The method used to overwrite data can be changed.

Refer to the following for details.

Data Encryption/Overwrite Operation Guide

Value:

3-time Overwrite Method (A): The 3-time overwrite method complies with DoD

5220.22-M, and overwrites unneeded data areas (in the case of overwriting) or all the

data areas (in the case of system initialization) with specific numbers, their

complements, and random numbers to prevent data restoration. Data restoration is

not possible even through a sophisticated restoration technique.

7-time Overwrite Method (A): The 7-time overwrite method complies with DoD

5220.22-M, and overwrites unneeded data areas (in the case of overwriting) with

specific numbers, their complements, and random numbers to prevent data

restoration. Data restoration is not possible even through a sophisticated restoration

technique.

7-time Overwrite Method (B): The 7-time overwrite method complies with BSI/

VSITR, and overwrites unneeded data areas (in the case of overwriting) with specific

numbers, their complements, and random numbers to prevent data restoration. Data

restoration is not possible even through a sophisticated restoration technique.

NOTE

The 7-time Overwrite Method (A) or 7-time Overwrite Method (B) may take more time

than the 3-time Overwrite Method (A).

Data Sanitization

Report

Print the data sanitization report.

Item Description

8-75

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Information erased

Category Data erased

Devices/jobs • Job settings configured by users

• Network settings

• Image data saved in Document Box, etc.

• Data registered in One Touch keys

• Job histories

• User information (user list, address book, Document Box registered by the user,

etc.)

• Account information of job accounting

• Network certificates

• Initial screen on machine changed by service representative

FAX (Option) • Fax settings configured by users

• Communication restriction settings

• Encryption key settings

• Transmission histories

• Scheduled jobs

• Conditional reception/forwarding settings

Application/favorite • Application/favorite added by a user or service representative

• Trial functions

8-76

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Stamp

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "System Stamp"

Printing Jobs

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "System Stamp" [Printing Jobs]

Configure settings for stamps when a document is printed.

After configuring the setting, return to the Copying Functions or Custom Box (Printing a Document) screen from System

Menu, and select the [Reset] key.

Item Description

Text Stamp Text Stamp Select whether to print a text stamp on all printing jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when

printing.

Edit Text Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or enter a maximum of

32 characters for the text string.

NOTE

Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates,

refer to the following:

Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-32)

Stamp Method Select the stamp method for the text stamp.

Value: Each Print Page, Each Original Page

Position Set the text stamp position.

Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,

Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right

NOTE

Specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set the stamp

position and angle when a stamp is placed on the back side of the paper in

duplex printing.

Font Set the font of the text stamp.

Value

Font: Courier, Letter Gothic

Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.

Font Size (Text Stamp) (page 8-32)

Color: Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Green, Blue, White

Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic

Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite

Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)

8-77

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Bates Stamp Bates Stamp Select whether to print a bates stamp on all printing jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when

printing.

Edit Text Set the default Bates Stamp. (Max.: 6)

Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2

NOTE

To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text string.

Date Format Set the date display format.

Value: MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year), DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year),

YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)

Numbering

Default

Set the starting sequence number. If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On],

you can set the number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).

Value

Start #: 1 to 9999999

Fixed Digit Number: Off, On

Position Set the stamp position to be printed.

Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,

Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right

NOTE

Specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set the stamp

position when a stamp is placed on the back side of the paper in duplex

printing.

Font Set the font of the text stamp.

Value

Font: Courier, Letter Gothic

Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.

Font Size (Bates Stamp) (page 8-32)

Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline

Color: Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Green, Blue, White

Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic

Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite

Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)

Item Description

8-78

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Sending Jobs

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "System Stamp" [Sending Jobs]

Configure stamp settings for sending documents.

After configuring the setting, return to the Sending Functions or Custom Box (Sending Documents) screen from System

Menu, and select the [Reset] key.

Item Description

Text Stamp Text Stamp Select whether to print a text stamp on all sending jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when

sending.

Edit Text Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or enter a maximum of

32 characters for the text string.

NOTE

Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates,

refer to the following:

Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-32)

Position Set the text stamp position.

Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,

Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right

NOTE

Specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set the stamp

angle.

Font Set the font of the text stamp.

Value

Font: Courier, Letter Gothic

Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.

Font Size (Text Stamp) (page 8-32)

Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline

Color: Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Green, Blue, White

Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic

Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite

Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)

8-79

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Bates Stamp Bates Stamp Select whether to print a bates stamp on all sending jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when

printing.

Edit Text Set the default Bates Stamp. (Max.: 6)

Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2

NOTE

To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text string.

Date Format Set the date display format.

Value: MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year), DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year),

YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)

Numbering

Default

Set the starting sequence number. If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On],

you can set the number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).

Value

Start #: 1 to 9999999

Fixed Digit Number: Off, On

Position Set the stamp position to be printed.

Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,

Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right

NOTE

Specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values.

Font Set the font of the text stamp.

Value

Font: Courier, Letter Gothic

Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.

Font Size (Bates Stamp) (page 8-32)

Color: Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Green, Blue, White

Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic

Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite

Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)

Item Description

8-80

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Storing Jobs

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "System Stamp" [Storing Jobs]

Configure stamp settings for storing documents in USB drive.

After configuring the setting, return to the Custom Box (Storing Documents) screen from System Menu, and select the

[Reset] key.

Item Description

Text Stamp Text Stamp Select whether to print a text stamp on all storing jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when

storing.

Edit Text Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or enter a maximum of 32

characters for the text string.

NOTE

Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates,

refer to the following:

Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-32)

Position Set the text stamp position.

Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,

Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right

NOTE

Specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values.

Font Set the font of the text stamp.

Value

Font: Courier, Letter Gothic

Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.

Font Size (Text Stamp) (page 8-32)

Color: Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Green, Blue, White

Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic

Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite

Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)

8-81

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Authentication Security

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "Authentication Security"

If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.

Authentication Security (page 9-4)

Bates Stamp Bates Stamp Select whether to print a bates stamp on all storing jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when

storing.

Edit Text Set the default Bates Stamp. (Max.: 6)

Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2

NOTE

To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text string.

Date Format Set the date display format.

Value: MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year), DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year),

YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)

Numbering

Default

Set the starting sequence number. If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On],

you can set the number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).

Value

Start #: 1 to 9999999

Fixed Digit Number: Off, On

Position Set the stamp position to be printed.

Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,

Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right

NOTE

Specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set the stamp

angle.

Font Set the font of the text stamp.

Value

Font: Courier, Letter Gothic

Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.

Font Size (Bates Stamp) (page 8-32)

Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline

Color: Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Green, Blue, White

Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic

Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite

Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)

Item Description

8-82

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Unknown User Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "Unknown User Settings"

This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID.

Unknown ID Job (page 9-52)

Network

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "Network"

Job Accounting/Authentication

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

Configure settings related to machine management.

Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)

Unknown User Settings (page 9-52)

Add/Delete Application

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Add/Delete Application]

Configure settings for Application.

Application (page 5-14)

Applications (page 11-8)

NOTE

This function is displayed in case if User login administration or Job accounting is enabled.

Item Description

SSL Select whether to use SSL for communication.

Value: Off, On

Network Access Select whether to communicate using SNMP and IPSec.

SNMPv1/v2c (page 8-61)

SNMPv3 (page 8-61)

IPSec (page 8-64)

8-83

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Adjustment/Maintenance

Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.

Image Adjustment

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment"

Item Description

Density Adjust density.

Copy Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Send/Box Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment

can be made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Fax*1 FAX Operation Guide

Background Density Adj. Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment.

Copy (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying.

Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Send/Box (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them

in the Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Sharpness Adjustment Adjust the sharpness of the image outline.

Copy All Sharpen or blur overall image outlines during copying. Adjustment can be made in 7

levels.

Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)

Text/Fine

Line

Sharpen text/fine line during copying. Adjustment can be made in 4 levels.

Value: 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Sharpen)

Send/Box All Sharpen or blur overall image outlines when sending or storing them in the Document

Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)

Text/Fine

Line

Adjust sharpness of the text/fine line when during sending or storing them in the

Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 4 levels.

Value: 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Sharpen)

Contrast You can increase or decrease the overall contrast.

Copy Increases or decreases the overall contrast of copies.

Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)

Send/Box Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents are sent or saved in a

document box.

Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)

Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine

whether the original is color or black and white in Auto Color Selection Mode. Setting

a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value

will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white.

Value: 1 (Color), 2, 3, 4, 5 (B & W)

8-84

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Correcting Black Lines Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the

image, when the document processor is used.

Value

Off: No correction performed.

On (Low): Correction performed. The reproduction of fine lines on the original

may become lighter than when using [Off].

On (High): Select this item if a streak remains after using [On (Low)]. The

reproduction of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using

[On (Low)].

Color Registration - Auto When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during

printing may occur. Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan,

magenta and yellow to resolve color drift.

Color Registration Procedure (page 10-52)

Color Registration - Manual

Calibration Cycle Set the calibration cycle.

Value:

Auto: Automatically sets the cycle for calibration.

Short: Priority is given to image quality.

Standard: Balances image quality and print speed.

Long: Priority is given to print speed.

NOTE

When [Custom] is displayed as setting item, the setting cannot be changed.

Calibration Calibrate the device to ensure correct toner overlapping and consistency with the

original tone.

Calibration (page 10-58)

NOTE

Perform Color Registration when correct toner overlapping is not ensured even after

performing Calibration, and perform Tone Curve Adjustment if consistency with the

original tone is not ensured.

Tone Curve Adjustment After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the

printed output tone may differ from the original. Perform this function to ensure

consistency with the original tone.

Tone Curve Adjustment (page 10-56)

Developer Refresh Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough

toner.

Developer Refresh (page 10-58)

NOTE

Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.

Auto Drum Refresh This specifies the Auto Drum Refresh execution time.

Value:

Off: Auto Drum Refresh not performed.

Short: Short Auto Drum Refresh execution time.

Standard: Standard Auto Drum Refresh execution time.

Long: Long Auto Drum Refresh execution time.

Item Description

8-85

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Behavior Adjustment

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Behavior Adjustment"

Others

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Others"

Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. It takes about 1 minute and

20 seconds. The time required may vary depending on the operating environment.

Drum Refresh (page 10-57)

NOTE

Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the

printing is done.

Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical white lines from the printout.

Developer Refresh (page 10-58)

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Item Description

Silent Mode Set the Silent Mode. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, it may take time for the next print job to start.

Drum Heater Set the drum heater.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This setting does not appear in some regions.

Item Description

Diagnostics Memory

Diagnostics

Perform this function to check the machine memory.

Software

Verification

Software Verification (page 8-71)

Open toner cover Open the toner cover.

Value: Y, C, M, K

NOTE

This function is displayed when using a genuine toner container.

Item Description

8-86

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Restart/

Initialization

Restart

Network

Restart Network (page 8-64)

Restart

Network

(Optional

Network)

Restart Network (page 8-67)

Restart Entire

Device

Restart Entire Device (page 8-69)

Format SSD Format the SSD.

Format SD

Card

Format the SD card. To use an SD card, it is necessary to format the SD card

on this machine first.

When the formatting is complete, data can be written to the SD card.

System

Initialization

System Initialization (page 8-72)

Item Description

9-1

User Authentication and

Accounting (User Login,

Job Accounting)

This chapter explains the following topics:

Overview of User Login Administration ......... 9-2

Managing the Job Account from PC ... 9-2

Managing the Users to Use TWAIN

for Scanning ........................................ 9-2

Managing the Users to Use WIA for

Scanning ............................................. 9-2

Managing the Users to Send Faxes

from a PC ............................................ 9-2

Enabling User Login Administration .............. 9-3

Setting User Login Administration ................. 9-4

Authentication Security ....................... 9-4

Adding a User (Local User List) .......... 9-6

Changing User Properties ................ 9-10

User Login Administration for Printing ... 9-12

Managing the Users to Scan Using

TWAIN .............................................. 9-13

Managing the Users to Scan Using

WIA ................................................... 9-14

Managing the Users that Send Faxes

from a PC .......................................... 9-15

Local Authorization ........................... 9-16

Server Settings ................................. 9-17

Group Authorization Settings ............ 9-18

Guest Authorization Settings ............ 9-21

Obtain NW User Property ................. 9-24

Simple Login Settings ....................... 9-26

ID Card Settings ............................... 9-29

PIN Login .......................................... 9-31

Using User Login Administration ................. 9-32

Overview of Job Accounting ........................ 9-33

To Manage the Number of Sheets

Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ...... 9-33

Managing the Scan Job Account by

Using TWAIN .................................... 9-33

Managing the Scan Job Account by

Using WIA ......................................... 9-33

Managing the FAX Job Transmitted

from a PC .......................................... 9-33

Enabling Job Accounting ............................. 9-34

Job Accounting (Local) ................................ 9-35

Adding an Account ............................ 9-35

Restricting the Use of the Machine ... 9-36

Editing an Account ............................ 9-37

Deleting an Account .......................... 9-38

Job Accounting for Printing ............... 9-39

Job Accounting for Scan Using

TWAIN .............................................. 9-40

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA .... 9-41

Job Accounting for the FAX

Transmitted from a Computer ........... 9-42

Configuring Job Accounting ........................ 9-43

Default Counter Limit ........................ 9-43

Count by Paper Size ......................... 9-45

Counting the Number of Pages

Printed .............................................. 9-46

Print Accounting Report .................... 9-48

Using Job Accounting ................................. 9-49

Apply Limit .................................................. 9-50

Copier/Printer Count ................................... 9-51

Unknown User Settings .............................. 9-52

Unknown ID Job ............................... 9-52

Registering Information for a User

whose ID is Unknown ....................... 9-53

9-2

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration

Overview of User Login Administration

User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user

name and password for user authentication to login.

Access are in three levels - "User", "Administrator", and "Machine Administrator". The security levels can be modified

only by the "Machine Administrator".

Managing the Job Account from PC

In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the job account from PC.

To Manage the Users to Print from PCs

Printer driver settings are necessary to manage the users that print on the machine from PCs.

Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning

TWAIN driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning.

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-13)

Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning

WIA driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning.

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA (page 9-14)

Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC

FAX driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC (page 9-15)

The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.

UserA

1Enable User Login

Administration

(page 9-3)

2Set the user

(page 9-6)3Enter the login user name and

password and execute the job

(page 9-32)

User A

User B

User C

1Set the User Login

Administration on the printer

driver (page 9-12)

2Print

9-3

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration

Enabling User Login Administration

This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "User Login Setting" [User Login].

2Configure the settings.

Select [Local Authentication] or [Network Authentication].

Select [Off] to disable user login administration.

If you select [Local Authentication], set [Local Authorization].

Local Authorization (page 9-16)

If you select [Network Authentication], set [Server Settings].

Server Settings (page 9-17)

Item Descriptions

Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine.

Network

Authentication

User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored in

Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator

registered in the local user list and correct the settings.

9-4

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Setting User Login Administration

This registers, alters and deletes users and configures the settings for User Login Administration.

Authentication Security

If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.

User Account Lockout Setting

You can prohibit the use of a user account if an incorrect password is entered repeatedly to login with that account.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication] > "Authentication

Security" [User Account Lockout Settings]

2Configure the settings.

The following settings can be selected.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name and

password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with

privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Lockout Select whether or not account lockout policy is enabled.

Value: Off, On

Lockout Policy Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout

is applied.

Value

Number of Retries until Locked:

Specify how many login retries are allowed

until the account is locked out.

(1 to 10 times)

Lockout Duration:Specify how long the account is to be

locked out until it is unlocked.

(1 to 60 minutes)

Lockout Target: Specify the extent to which the account

lockout is applied. You can select from [All]

or [Remote Login Only]. Remote Login Only

locks out all operations from outside the

operation panel.

Locked out Users

List

Displays a list of locked out users. You can unlock a user by

selecting the user in the list, and selecting [Unlock].

NOTE

This function is displayed when account lockout policy is enabled.

9-5

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Password Policy Settings

You can prohibit the setting and use of passwords that do not comply with the password policy.

Setting the Password Policy makes it more difficult to break the password.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication] > "Authentication

Security" [Password Policy Settings]

2Configure the settings.

The following settings can be selected.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name and

password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with

privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Password Policy Select whether or not password policy is enabled.

Value: Off, On

Minimum Password

Length

Set the minimum password length of characters for password.

Value: Off, On (1 to 64 characters)

Password

Complexity

Set the password complexity.

Value

No more than two consecutive identical char: Off, On

At least one uppercase letter (A-Z): Off, On

At least one lowercase letter (a-z): Off, On

At least one number (0-9): Off, On

At least one symbol: Off, On

Maximum Password

Age

Set the maximum password age.

Value: Off, On (1 to 180 days)

Policy Violated User

List

List of users do not meet password policy requirements.

9-6

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Adding a User (Local User List)

You can add up to 1000 users (including the default login user name).

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "User Login Setting" [Add/Edit Local User].

2Enter the user information.

[Add] > Enter the user information

NOTE

By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.

Each user's properties are:

Machine Administrator

User Name: DeviceAdmin

Access Level: Machine Administrator

Administrator

User Name: Admin

Access Level: Administrator

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)

* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).

It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your

security.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

User Name*1 Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

password for confirmation.

9-7

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Access Level

Settings*1

Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.

Access

Level

Select [Administrator] or [User] for user access privileges.

System

Admin

Permission

If the user privileges set in the [Access Level] are [User], select the

privileges that can be set from the following.

• Original/Paper Settings

• Address Book

• User/Job Account Information

• Basic Network Settings

• Basic Device Settings

• Advanced Device/Network Settings

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered

his/her account name, can login without entering the account ID.

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)

NOTE

• Search by account ID or account name. Select either [Search

(No.)] or [Search (Name)] to switch between [Search (No.)] and

[Search (Name)].

•Select [Account Name] or [Account ID] to sort the account list.

Email Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered address

will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need

any E-mail function.

ID Card Info Register ID card information.

Place the ID card on the ID card reader.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication

Kit is activated.

Applications (page 11-8)

Item Descriptions

9-8

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Local

Authorization*2

Set usage authority for each user.

Restriction

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is

prohibited.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from USB Drive

• Print Report

• Print from PC

Restriction

(Color)

Select whether or not use of the print function (color) of the printer is

prohibited.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from USB Drive

• Print Report

• Print from PC

Copy

Restriction

Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.

Copy

Restriction

(Color)

Select whether or not use of the copy print function (color) is

prohibited.

Copy Restr.

(Full Color)

Select whether or not use of the copy print function (full color) is

prohibited.

Duplex

Restriction

Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

Combine

Restriction

Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

EcoPrint

Restriction

Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

Send

Restriction

Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.

Fax TX

Restriction*3

Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.

Storing

Restriction

in Box

Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.

Storing

Restr. in

USB

Select whether or not use of the USB Drive store function is

prohibited.

My Panel You can register the language selection, initial screen, and shortcut

settings for each user. Settings registered here can be applied simply

by logging in.

*1 Be sure to enter the items.

*2 Displayed when Local Authorization is enabled.

Local Authorization (page 9-16)

*3 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Item Descriptions

9-9

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3Select [Save].

A new user is added on the local user list.

NOTE

• For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

• If you selected [Send] or [Fax] in the Default Screen for "My Panel", select the screen to

display from [Destination], [Machine Address Book], or [Ext Address Book].

NOTE

If simple login is enabled, a confirmation screen appears when new registration is finished

asking if you will configure simple login settings. To configure simple login settings, select

[Yes]. If you select [No], you will return to the user list screen.

For the procedure for configuring simple login settings, refer to the following:

Simple Login Settings (page 9-26)

9-10

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Changing User Properties

Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "User Login Setting" [Add/Edit Local User].

2Change the user properties.

Changing user properties

1Select [ ] (information icon) for the user whose properties you wish to change.

NOTE

To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine administrator authority.

You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

•Select [User Name] or [Login User ID] to sort the user list.

• Search by name or login user name. Select either [Search (Login)] or [Search

(Name)] to switch between [Search (Login)] and [Search (Name)].

9-11

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Enter the user information.

For details on each items, refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a

user property.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

3Select [Save].

The user information is changed.

Deleting a user

1Select the user to delete.

2[Delete] > [Delete]

The selected user will be deleted.

Item

User Name

*1 You can change only when you log in with machine administrator authority.

Access Level Settings*1

Account Name*1

Email Address

ID Card Information*1

Local Authorization*1*2

*2 Displayed when Local Authorization is enabled.

Local Authorization (page 9-16)

My Panel

NOTE

The default user with machine administrator rights cannot be deleted.

9-12

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

User Login Administration for Printing

It is possible to manage the users that print on this machine from a PC.

Setting Printer Driver

To manage the users that print on this machine from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the printer driver.

Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel],

and [View devices and printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [User Login] on the [User Login] tab.

2Set the User Login Administration.

[Use specific name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use

the same User login for every print job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to

type the name and password for each print job.

[Prompt for name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed

when attempting a printing. The user name and password must be entered each time a

printing is attempted.

[Prompt for name and validate]: A screen for entering the user name and password will

be displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password stored in the Login

user name list needs to be entered. The user name and password must be entered each

time a printing is attempted.

[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for login user name]: When printing, the

Windows user name is searched in the "Login user names" and printing is possible if the

name is registered. If the name is not registered, the printing will be canceled for users with

only user authority. If the user has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user

name and password will appear.

NOTE

In Windows 8.1, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel],

and then [Devices and Printers].

9-13

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3Click [OK].

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN

It is possible to manage the users that scan using TWAIN.

Setting TWAIN Driver

To manage the users that scan using TWAIN, the following settings are necessary in the TWAIN driver. Instructions are

based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1Display the screen.

1Click the search box in the taskbar, and type "TWAIN Driver Setting" in there. Select

[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list. TWAIN Driver screen is displayed.

2Select the machine, and click [Edit].

2Configure the settings.

1Click [User Authentication Settings].

2Select the checkbox beside [Authentication], and enter Login User Name and Password.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

NOTE

In Windows 8.1, select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the

search box. Click [TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver

Setting screen appears.

9-14

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA

It is possible to manage the users that scan using WIA.

Setting WIA Driver

To manage the users that scan using WIA, the following settings are necessary in the WIA driver. Instructions are based

on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel].

Click the search box in the Control Panel, and type "Scanner" in there. Select [View

scanners and cameras] in the search list. The Scanners and Cameras screen is

displayed.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].

2Configure the settings.

1Select the checkbox beside [Authentication] on the [Settings] tab, and enter Login User

Name and Password.

2Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 8.1, click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click

[View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen

appears.

9-15

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC

It is possible to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.

Setting Fax Driver

To manage the users that send faxes from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the FAX driver. Instructions are

based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel],

and [View devices and printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printing preferences]

menu of the printer driver.

3Click [FAX TX Setting] on the [Printing Preferences] window.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [User Login] on the [Authentication] tab.

2Set the User Login Administration.

[Use Specific Login User Name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and

password to use the same User login for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user

does not have to type the name and password for each FAX job.

[Prompt for Login User Name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be

displayed when attempting a transmission. The user name and password must be entered

each time a transmission is attempted.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 8.1, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel],

and then [Devices and Printers].

9-16

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Local Authorization

Select whether or not to use Local Authorization.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "User Login Setting" [Local Authorization].

2Configure the settings.

Select [Off] or [On].

NOTE

When using Local Authorization, the user authentication type must be set to [Local Authentication].

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-17

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Server Settings

Set the server type when network authentication is enabled.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "User Login Setting" [User Login] > [Network Authentication]

2Configure the settings.

1Select [NTLM], [Kerberos] or [Ext.] as the server type and enter the host name (256

characters or less) for the Authentication Server.

When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number.

2Select [OK].

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

• Selecting [Add/Edit/Delete Domain] displays the domain registration list. In the

domain registration list screen, select [Add/Edit], and enter the domain name. Up to

10 domain names can be registered.

• If two or more domains are registered, select [Default Domain] and select the default

domain.

NOTE

If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.

• Network Authentication setting of the machine

• User property of the Authentication Server

• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server

9-18

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Group Authorization Settings

Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.

Group Authorization

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "User Login Setting" [Group Authorization].

2Configure the settings.

Select [On] or [Off].

Group List (Up to 20)

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "User Login Setting" [Group List].

NOTE

To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method in

"Enabling User Login Administration". Select [On] for "LDAP" in "Protocol Settings".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Protocol Settings (page 8-59)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-19

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Configure the settings.

[Add] > Add information on each item

Item Descriptions

Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).

Group ID*1

*1 For "Group ID", specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by Active Directory of Windows.

Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and

4294967295).

Access Level Select [Administrator] or [User] for group access privileges.

Print Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the

printer.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from USB Drive

• Print Report

• Print from PC

Print Restriction

(Color)

Select whether or not to reject usage of color print functions for

the printer.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from USB Drive

• Print Report

• Print from PC

Copy Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.

Copy Restriction

(Color)

Select whether or not to reject usage of color copy functions.

Copy Restriction (Full

Color)

Select whether or not to reject usage of only full-color print

functions for copies.

Duplex Restriction Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

Combine Restriction Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

EcoPrint Restriction Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

Send Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.

Fax TX Restriction*2

*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.

Storing Restriction in

Box

Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document

boxes.

Storing Restr. in USB Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the USB drive.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

9-20

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3Register the group.

Select [Save].

A new group is added on the group list.

9-21

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Guest Authorization Settings

When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are

allowed to use.

Enabling Guest Authorization

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "User Login Setting" [Guest Authorization Set.].

2Configure the settings.

Select [On] or [Off].

NOTE

To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

• If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Logout] key must be selected when

logging in.

• In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to

use a different function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings

in the guest properties.

9-22

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Configuring Guest Property

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "User Login Setting" [Guest Property].

2Configure the settings.

Check the settings and change or add information as needed.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

The default setting is "GuestUser".

Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.

If the user does not belong to any account, select [Other Account].

9-23

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3Register the guest user information.

Select [OK].

Authorization

Rules

Set usage authority for each user.

The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.

Print Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is

prohibited.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from USB Drive

Print Restriction (Color):

Select whether or not use of the print function (color) of the printer

is prohibited.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from USB Drive

Copy Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.

Copy Restriction (Color):

Select whether or not use of the copy print function (color) is

prohibited.

Copy Restriction (Full Color):

Select whether or not use of the copy print function (full color) is

prohibited.

Duplex Restriction:

Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

Combine Restrict.:

Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

EcoPrint Restriction:

Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

Send Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.

Fax TX Restriction:*1

Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.

Storing Restriction in Box:

Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.

Storing Restr. in USB:

Select whether or not use of the USB Drive store function is

prohibited.

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Item Descriptions

9-24

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Obtain NW User Property

Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name and E-mail

address obtained with this setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and the header of

E-mail.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "User Login Setting" [Obtain NW User Property].

2Configure the settings.

Select [On] for "Obtain NW User Property" and add information on each item

NOTE

To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the

authentication method in "Enabling User Login Administration". Select [On] for "LDAP" in "Protocol Settings".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Protocol Settings (page 8-59)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

LDAP Server Information

Server Name*1 Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to

64 characters). If a server name is not entered, user

information will be acquired from the server set for Network

Authentication.

Port Port number for LDAP server. The default port number is

389.

Acquisition of User Information

Name 1*2 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be

displayed from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).

Name 2*3 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be

displayed from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).

Email Address*4 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the E-mail address from

the LDAP server (up to 256 characters).

Authentic at Type*5 Set the authentication method. Select [Simple] or [SASL].

After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the

power off and then on.

9-25

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3Select [OK].

Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds

(from 5 to 255 seconds).

LDAP Security Select the type of encryption according to the type of

security employed by the LDAP server. The value is [Off],

[SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].

*1 If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be the same as the server

name entered in the network authentication.

*2 If using Active Directory of Windows, display Name of Attribute may be used as "Name 1".

*3 "Name 2" can be left out. When you assign display Name in "Name 1" and department in

"Name 2", and if the value of displayName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is

"Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears as "Mike Smith Sales".

*4 If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.

*5 Appears when the server type is set to "Kerberos" in "Network Authentication".

Item Descriptions

9-26

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Simple Login Settings

The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name. Users must be registered in advance to

use this functionality.

Enabling Simple Login

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "User Login Setting" [Simple Login].

2Configure the settings.

Select [On] or [Off].

NOTE

• For user registration, refer to the following:

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

• To use Simple Login, User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

• When the guest authorization setting is enabled, the Simple Login screen is not displayed.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-27

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Simple Login Key

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "User Login Setting" [Simple Login Key].

2Enter the user information.

1Select the key to which you want to register a user.

2Enter the user name to be displayed.

3Select [Select user].

4To specify the user from local users, select [Local User]. To specify from network users,

select [Network User].

The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.

Specifying the user from local users

Select the user to be set for simple login.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

NOTE

• Search by login user name or name. Select either [Search (Login)] or [Search (Name)] to

switch between [Search (Login)] and [Search (Name)].

•Select [User Name] or [Login User Name] to sort the user list.

9-28

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Specifying the user from network users

Select the entry field for "Login User Name" and "Login Password", enter the information of

the user to be registered, and select [OK].

If you are specifying a user for whom a domain is set in network authentication, select the

"Domain" and select the domain where the user is registered.

5Select [On] or [Off] for "Password".

6Select the user icon to be displayed.

3Register the user.

Select [Save].

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

/RJLQ8VHU1DPH

&DQFHO 6LPSOH/RJLQ.H\V 8VHU

/RJLQ3DVVZRUG

(QWHUDXVHUQDPH

(QWHUDSDVVZRUG

9-29

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

ID Card Settings

If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type.

Keyboard Login

When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not login by keyboard is allowed.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "ID Card Settings" [Keyboard Login].

2Configure the settings.

Select [Permit] or [Prohibit].

NOTE

This functions appears when the Card Authentication kit is activated.

Applications (page 11-8)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-30

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Additional Authentication

Select whether or not to require password entry after authenticating by ID card.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "ID Card Settings" [Additional Authentication].

2Configure the settings.

Select [Off], [Use Password] or [Use PIN Code].

NOTE

This function does not appear when the server type is set to [NTLM] or [Kerberos] in "Network Authentication".

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

[Use PIN Code] is displayed only when using PIN Code Authorization.

PIN Login (page 9-31)

9-31

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

PIN Login

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "User Login Setting" [PIN Login].

2Configure the settings.

Select [On] or [Off].

NOTE

When using PIN Code Authorization, the network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected for

server type.

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Server Settings (page 9-17)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-32

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using User Login Administration

Using User Login Administration

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.

If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use

this machine.

Use the procedure below to login and logout.

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following:

Logout

When the operations are complete, select the [Logout] key to return to the login user name and login password entry

screen.

9-33

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting

Overview of Job Accounting

Job accounting manages the copy/print/scan/FAX count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each

account.

To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs

Printed from a PC

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need to configure settings by using the

printer driver on the PC.

Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN

To manage the scan job account by using TWAIN, you need to configure the TWAIN driver settings on the computer

connected to the machine.

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-40)

Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA

To manage the scan job account by using WIA, you need to configure the WIA driver settings on the computer

connected to the machine.

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA (page 9-41)

Managing the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the PC, you need to configure the settings by using the FAX Driver

on the PC.

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer (page 9-42)

The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.

100 400 200

A: 00000001

1Enable job

accounting. (page

9-34)

3Enter the assigned

account ID when

performing the job.

(page 9-32)

4Count the number of

pages copied, printed,

scanned and faxed.

2Setting an

account. (page

9-35)

A: 00000001

B: 00000002

C: 00000003

100 400 200

1Set Job Accounting for the PC

on the network by using the

printer driver. (page 9-39)

2Execute printing. 3Count the number of

pages printed.

9-34

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting

Enabling Job Accounting

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "Job Accounting Setting" [Job Accounting].

2Configure the settings.

Select [Local] or [Network].

Select [Off] to disable job accounting.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed

and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the

Account ID.

9-35

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Job Accounting (Local)

You can add, change and delete an account and set the restriction for each account.

Adding an Account

Up to 1000 individual accounts can be added.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "Job Accounting Setting" [Add/Edit Job Accounting].

2Enter the account information.

1[Add] > Add information on each item

2Select [Redister].

A new account is added on the Account List.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).

Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and

99999999).

Restriction This prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of

sheets to load.

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-36)

NOTE

• For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-10)

• Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account

ID.

9-36

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Restricting the Use of the Machine

This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.

The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether "Individual" or "Total" is selected for "Copy/Print Count".

Copier/Printer Count (page 9-51)

Restriction Items

[Individual] selected for "Copy/Printer Count"

[Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count

Item Descriptions

Copy Restriction (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for copying.

Copy Restriction (Full

Color)

Limits the number of pages used for full-color copying.

Copy Restriction

(SingleColor)

Limits the number of pages used for single-color copying.

Print Restriction (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for printing.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from USB Drive

• Print Report

• Print from PC

Print Restriction (Full

Color)

Limits the number of pages used for full-color printing.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from USB Drive

• Print Report

• Print from PC

Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).

Fax TX Restriction*1

*1 This is displayed when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Limits the number of sheets sent by fax.

Fax Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX Kits are

installed.

Item Descriptions

Print Restriction (Total) Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.

Print Restriction (Full

Color)

Limits the number of pages used for full-color printing.

Print Restriction

(SingleCol.)

Limits the number of sheets used for single-color printing.

Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).

Fax TX Restriction*1

*1 This is displayed when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Limits the number of sheets sent by fax.

Fax Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX Kits are

installed.

9-37

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Applying Restriction

Restriction can be applied in the following modes:

Editing an Account

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "Job Accounting Setting" [Add/Edit Job Accounting].

2Edit an account.

1Select [ ] (information icon) for the account name you wish to edit.

2Change the account information.

3Select [Save].

The account information is changed.

IMPORTANT

Select [Off], [Use Port 1 Only] or [Use Port 2 Only] as the "Fax Port Restriction" setting.

Item Descriptions

Off No restriction is applied.

Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.

Reject Usage Restriction is applied.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

• Search by account ID or account name. Select either [Search (ID)] or [Search

(Name)] to switch between [Search (ID)] and [Search (Name)].

•Select [Account Name] or [ Account ID] to sort the account list.

9-38

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Deleting an Account

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "Job Accounting Setting" [Add/Edit Job Accounting].

2Delete an account.

1Select the account name you wish to delete.

2[Delete] > [Delete]

The account is deleted.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

• Search by account ID or account name. Select either [Search (ID)] or [Search

(Name)] to switch between [Search (ID)] and [Search (Name)].

•Select [Account Name] or [ Account ID] to sort the account list.

9-39

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Job Accounting for Printing

The number of jobs to be printed from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting Printer Driver

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need configure the following settings by

using the printer driver on the PC. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel],

and [View devices and printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Job accounting] on the [Job Accounting] tab.

2Set the Account ID.

[Use specific account ID]:

Enter the Account ID. Printing will be performed using the

entered Account ID. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID

for each print job.

[Prompt for account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when

attempting a printing. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.

[Prompt for account ID and validate]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be

displayed when attempting a printing. The Account ID stored in the Account ID list needs to

be entered. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.

[Display account ID list]: The Account ID list is displayed when printing. The Account ID

to be used needs to be selected from the list.

[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for account ID]: When printing, the Windows

user name is searched in the "Account IDs" and printing is possible if the name is

registered. If the Account ID is not registered, the screen for entering the Account ID will

appear.

NOTE

In Windows 8.1, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel],

and then [Devices and Printers].

9-40

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

3Click [OK].

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN

The number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting TWAIN Driver

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN, you need to configure the following settings by using the

TWAIN Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1Display the screen.

1Click the search box in the taskbar, and type "TWAIN Driver Setting" in there. Select

[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list. TWAIN Driver screen is displayed.

2Select the machine, click [Edit].

2Configure the settings.

1Click [User Authentication Settings].

2Select the checkbox beside [Account], and enter the account ID.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

NOTE

In Windows 8.1, select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the

search box. Click [TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver

Setting screen appears.

9-41

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA

The number of jobs scanned by using WIA can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting WIA Driver

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using WIA, you need to configure the following settings by using the WIA

Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel].

Click the search box in the Control Panel, and type "Scanner" in there. Select [View

scanners and cameras] in the search list. The Scanners and Cameras screen is

displayed.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].

2Configure WIA Driver.

1Select the checkbox beside [Account ID] on the [Settings] tab, and enter the Account ID.

2Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 8.1, click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click

[View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen

appears.

9-42

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a

Computer

The number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting FAX Driver

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer, you need to configure the following settings by using

the FAX Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel],

and [View devices and printers].

2Right click the name of the machine to be used as the FAX Driver and select

[Printing preferences] from the resulting pull-down menu.

3Click [FAX TX Setting] in the [Printing Preferences] window.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Job Accounting] on the [Authentication] tab.

2Set the Job Accounting.

[Use Specific Account ID]: This option can be used to specify an account ID to use the

same Account ID for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to

enter the Account ID for each FAX job.

[Prompt for Account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when

attempting a transmission. The Account ID must be entered each time a transmission is

attempted.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.

NOTE

In Windows 8.1, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel],

and then [Devices and Printers].

9-43

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Configuring Job Accounting

Default Counter Limit

When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can set any

number from 1 to 9,999,999.

The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Individual] or [Total] is selected for "Copy/Print Count".

Copier/Printer Count (page 9-51)

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "Job Accounting Setting" [Job Accounting Setting].

2Configure the settings.

Select the item for "Default Counter Limit" > use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the default

restriction on the number of sheets > [OK]

[Individual] selected for "Copy/Printer Count"

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Description

Copy Restriction (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

copying.

Copy Restriction (Full

Color)

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

full-color copying.

Copy Restriction

(SingleColor)

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

single-color copying.

Print Restriction (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

printing.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from USB Drive

• Print Report

• Print from PC

9-44

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

[Total] selected for "Copy/Printer Count"

Print Restriction (Full

Color)

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

full-color printing.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from USB Drive

• Print Report

• Print from PC

Scan Restriction (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

scanning (excludes copying).

Fax TX Restriction*1 Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

sending faxes.

*1 This function is displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Item Description

Print Restriction (Total) Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets

used for copying and printing.

Print Restriction (Full

Color)

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

full-color printing.

Print Restriction

(SingleCol.)

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

single-color printing.

Scan Restriction (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

scanning (excludes copying).

Fax TX Restriction*1

*1 This function is displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

sending faxes.

Item Description

9-45

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Count by Paper Size

This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).

In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size color paper used). If you do not

specify the media type, the number of used sheets will be counted for the specified sheet size, regardless of the media

type.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "Job Accounting Setting" [Job Accounting Setting].

2Configure the settings.

1"Count by Paper Size" [Paper Size 1 (to 5)] > [On]

2Select [Paper Size].

3Select the paper size.

4Select [Media Type] to specify media type.

5Select the media type.

6Select [OK].

NOTE

Paper size is available in five types, 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting reports.

Print Accounting Report (page 9-48)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-46

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A

new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.

The table below lists the item you can view.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "Job Accounting Setting" [Job Accounting Counter].

Item Descriptions

Printed Pages Displays the number of pages used in printing for each of the following item.

Count by Function Displays the number of pages used to copy, print, FAX and their total, for each color

mode.

Count by Paper Size Displays the number of pages used in the selected paper size as well as the number

of pages used in other paper sizes.

Count by Paper Size (page 9-45)

Count by Duplex Displays the number of pages used in Duplex (1-sided) mode, Duplex (2-sided) mode

and the total for both.

Count by Combine Displays the number of pages used in Combine (None) mode, Combine (2 in 1)

mode, Combine (4 in 1) mode and the total for all three.

Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing, printing and other

functions, as well as the total number of pages scanned.

Fax Transmission Pages Displays the number of pages faxed. This function is displayed only when the optional

FAX Kit is installed.

Fax Transmission Time Displays the total duration of FAX transmissions. This function is displayed only when

the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Counter Reset Resets the counter.

Select [Reset] in the confirmation screen.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-47

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

2Check the number of pages.

Total Accounting

This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts

together at the same time.

1Select [Total] to check the count.

Select [Counter Reset] to reset the counter.

2 Confirm the count and select [Close].

Each Job Account

This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. When

checking Each Job Accounting, select the account for which you want to check the count.

1 Select the account.

2Check the count.

Select [Counter Reset] to reset the counter.

3Confirm the count and select [Close].

NOTE

• Search by account ID or account name. Select either [Search (ID)] or [Search

(Name)] to switch between [Search (ID)] and [Search (Name)].

•Select [Account Name] or [Account ID] to sort the account list.

• To display an account other than your own account, select [Other Account].

9-48

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Print Accounting Report

The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.

Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.

When "Individual" is selected for Managing the Copy/Printer Count.

If count by paper size is being performed, then the report will be printed per size.

Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.

1Prepare paper.

Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.

2Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

3Print the report.

"Job Accounting Setting" [Print Accounting Report] > [Print]

Accounting report is printed.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name and

password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user

with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

ACCOUNT. REPORT

9-49

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using Job Accounting

Using Job Accounting

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.

If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.

1Enter the account ID using the numeric keys > [Login]

When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears

If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password

appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the

account information, the account ID entry would be skipped.

2Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.

Logout

When the operations are complete, select the [Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.

NOTE

• If you entered a wrong character, select [C] (Clear) and enter the account ID again.

• If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound and

• By selecting [Check Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the

number of pages scanned.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

9-50

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Apply Limit

Apply Limit

This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below

describes the action taken.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2"Job Accounting Setting" [Job Accounting Setting] > "Default Setting" [Apply Limit]

2Configure the settings.

Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert Only].

Item Descriptions

Immediately*1

*1 The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.

Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.

Subsequently Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will

be rejected.

Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-51

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Copier/Printer Count

Copier/Printer Count

You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying and

printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. For details, refer to the

following:

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-36)

Counting the Number of Pages Printed (page 9-46)

Print Accounting Report (page 9-48)

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2"Job Accounting Setting" [Job Accounting Setting] > "Default Setting" [Copy/Printer

Count]

2Configure the settings.

Select [Total] or [Individual].

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-52

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings

Unknown User Settings

Unknown ID Job

This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If the User

The setting items are as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "Unknown User Settings" [Unknown ID Job].

2Configure the settings.

Select [Permit] or [Reject].

Item Descriptions

Permit The job is permitted to be printed.

Reject The job is rejected (not printed).

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-53

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings

Registering Information for a User whose ID is

Unknown

If you register user information for a user whose ID is unknown, you can check information on the Job Status or Job

History screens. In addition, you can restrict available functions.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]

2Select "Unknown User Settings" [User Property].

2Enter the user information.

Enter the user information > [OK]

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Unknown ID Job] is set to [Permit].

Unknown ID Job (page 9-52)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a

user with privileges to carry out this setting.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

Account Name Register an account for a user whose ID is unknown.

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)

NOTE

• Search by account ID or account name. Select either [Search

(ID)] or [Search (Name)] to switch between [Search (ID)] and

[Search (Name)].

•Select [Account Name] or [Account ID] to sort the account

list.

Authorization Rules Set usage authority.

The following restriction items are available:

Print Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is

prohibited.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from PC

Print Restriction (Color):

Select whether or not use of the print function (color) of the

printer is prohibited.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from PC

10-1

10 Troubleshooting

This chapter explains the following topics:

Regular Maintenance .................................. 10-2

Cleaning ............................................ 10-2

Cleaning Glass Platen ...................... 10-2

Cleaning inside of the Document

Processor .......................................... 10-2

Cleaning Slit Glass ........................... 10-3

Toner Container Replacement .......... 10-4

Replace the Waste Toner Box .......... 10-7

Loading Paper .................................. 10-8

Replacing Staples (Inner Finisher) ...... 10-9

Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet

Finisher) ........................................... 10-11

Replacing Staples

(4,000-Sheet Finisher) .................... 10-12

Disposing of the Staple Waste ........ 10-14

Disposing of the Punch Waste ........ 10-16

Troubleshooting ........................................ 10-22

Solving Malfunctions ....................... 10-22

Machine Operation Trouble ............ 10-22

Printed Image Trouble .................... 10-27

Color Printing Trouble ..................... 10-29

Remote Operation .......................... 10-30

Responding to Messages ............... 10-32

Adjustment/Maintenance .......................... 10-51

Overview of Adjustment/

Maintenance ................................... 10-51

Color Registration Procedure ......... 10-52

Tone Curve Adjustment ................... 10-56

Drum Refresh ................................. 10-57

Calibration ....................................... 10-58

Laser Scanner Cleaning ................. 10-58

Developer Refresh .......................... 10-58

Clearing Paper Jams ................................ 10-59

Jam Location Indicators .................. 10-59

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 1 ....................................... 10-62

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 2 ....................................... 10-65

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 3 and 4 (500-sheet×2) ..... 10-68

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) ............ 10-70

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) ............ 10-72

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) ................ 10-75

Remove any jammed paper in the

Multipurpose Tray ........................... 10-77

Remove any jammed paper in Right

Cover 1 ........................................... 10-78

Remove any jammed paper in Right

Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) .................... 10-83

Remove any jammed paper in Right

Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) ................. 10-84

Remove any jammed paper in the

Bridge Unit ...................................... 10-86

Remove any jammed paper in the

Mailbox ........................................... 10-87

Remove any jammed paper in the

Inner Finisher .................................. 10-88

Remove any jammed paper in the

Document Processor (Reverse

Automatic) ....................................... 10-89

Remove any jammed paper in the

Document Processor (Dual Scan) ... 10-91

Remove any jammed paper in the

1,000-Sheet Finisher ...................... 10-92

Remove any jammed paper in the

4,000-sheet Finisher (Inner) ........... 10-95

Remove any jammed paper in the

4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray A) ......... 10-96

Remove any jammed paper in the

4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray B) ....... 10-100

Remove any jammed paper in

the Folding Unit (4,000-sheet

Finisher) ........................................ 10-103

Remove any jammed paper in

the Folding Tray (4,000-sheet

Finisher) ........................................ 10-108

Clearing a Staple Jam .............................. 10-113

Clearing a staple jam of the Inner

Finisher .......................................... 10-113

Clearing a staple jam of the

1,000-Sheet Finisher ..................... 10-115

Clearing a staple jam of the

4,000-sheet Finisher ...................... 10-118

Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding

Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) ........... 10-120

10-2

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Regular Maintenance

Cleaning

Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.

Cleaning Glass Platen

Wipe the backside of the original cover, the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth

dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.

Cleaning inside of the Document Processor

When using the document processor that features dual scanning, clean the dual scanning unit with the supplied

cleaning cloth.

1Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth compartment and

open the document processor cover.

CAUTION

For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.

IMPORTANT

Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.

IMPORTANT

Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.

10-3

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

2Clean inside of the document processor.

Cleaning Slit Glass

When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the supplied cleaning cloth.

1Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth compartment.

2Clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide.

IMPORTANT

Clean the slit glass surface with the supplied cleaning cloth.

NOTE

Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.

10-4

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Toner Container Replacement

When toner is empty, the following message will be displayed. Replace the toner container.

"Toner [C][M][Y][K] is empty."

When toner runs low, the following message will be displayed. Make sure you have a new toner container available for

replacement.

"Toner [C][M][Y][K] is low. (Replace when empty.)"

Installation procedures of the toner container is same for every color. Here, we'll explain the procedures for the yellow

toner container, as an example.

1Open the front cover.

The cover of the empty toner container is open.

2Remove the toner container.

NOTE

• For the toner container, always use a genuine toner container. Using a toner container that is not genuine may

cause image defects and product failure.

• The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer

convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of new

products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify individuals, and is

only used anonymously for the above purposes.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

NOTE

If you close the toner container cover before replacing the container, select [Open Toner

Container Cover].

10-5

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

3Put used toner container into the plastic waste bag.

4Remove the new toner container from the box.

5Tap the toner container.

6Shake the toner container.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the points shown below.

5~65~6 5~65~6

5~6

10-6

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

7Install the toner container.

8Close the toner container cover.

9Close the front cover.

IMPORTANT

Insert the toner container all the way.

NOTE

• If the toner container cover or front cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly.

• Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be

recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

CLICK!

10-7

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Replace the Waste Toner Box

When the waste toner box is full, the following message will be displayed. Immediately replace the waste toner box.

"Replace the waste toner box."

1Open the waste toner box cover.

2Remove the Waste Toner Box.

3Put used Waste Toner Box into the plastic waste bag.

4Remove the new Waste Toner Box.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

10-8

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

5Install the Waste Toner Box.

6Close the waste toner box cover.

Loading Paper

When Cassette # runs out of paper, the following messages will be displayed.

"Add paper in cassette #"

"Add paper in Multipurpose tray"

Loading in Cassette 1 (page 3-4)

Loading in Cassette 2 (page 3-7)

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder (page 3-14)

Loading in the Side Feeder (page 3-16)

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-6)

NOTE

Return the exhausted waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected waste toner box will be

recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

NOTE

If [Show Paper Setup Message] is set to [On], the confirmation screen for the paper setting will be displayed when a

new paper is set. If a paper is changed, change the settings of the paper.

Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings (page 8-13)

MP Tray Settings (page 8-14)

CLICK!

10-9

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Replacing Staples (Inner Finisher)

When the Staple Unit runs out of staples, the following messages will be displayed. The staple cartridge holder need to

be replenished with staples.

"Staple is empty."

1Open the inner finisher unit.

2Open the staple cover.

3Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.

NOTE

If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.

10-10

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

4Replace the staples.

5Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.

6Return the staple cover to the original position.

7Return the unit to the original position.

10-11

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet Finisher)

When the Staple Unit runs out of staples, the following messages will be displayed. The staple cartridge holder need to

be replenished with staples.

"Staple is empty"

1Open the finisher front cover.

2Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.

3Replace the staples.

NOTE

If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.

10-12

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

4Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.

5Close the cover.

Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet Finisher)

When the Staple Unit runs out of staples, the following messages will be displayed. The staple cartridge holder need to

be replenished with staples.

"Staple is empty."

1Open the finisher front cover 1.

NOTE

If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.

10-13

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

2Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).

3Replace the staples.

4Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).

5Close the cover.

10-14

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Disposing of the Staple Waste

When the staple waste box is full, the following messages will be displayed. Empty the staple waste box.

"Check the staple waste box."

Leave the power switch on the machine switched ON while performing this procedure.

1Open the finisher front cover 1.

2Remove the Staple Waste Box.

3Empty the Staple Waste Box.

NOTE

Take care not to spill the staple waste when removing the box.

10-15

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

4Install the Staple Waste Box.

5Close the cover.

10-16

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Disposing of the Punch Waste

When the waste punch box is full, the following messages will be displayed. Empty the punch waste box.

"Empty the punch waste box"

Leave the power switch on the machine switched ON while performing this procedure.

Inner Finisher

1Open the inner finisher unit.

2Remove the Punch Waste Box.

NOTE

Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the box.

10-17

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

3Empty the Punch Waste Box.

4Install the Punch Waste Box.

5Return the unit to the original position.

10-18

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

1,000-sheet Finisher

1Open the finisher front cover.

2Remove the Punch Waste Box.

3Empty the Punch Waste Box.

NOTE

Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the box.

10-19

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

4Install the Punch Waste Box.

5Close the cover.

4,000-sheet Finisher

1Open the finisher front cover 1.

10-20

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

2Remove the Punch Waste Box.

3Empty the Punch Waste Box.

4Install the Punch Waste Box.

NOTE

Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the box.

10-21

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

5Close the cover.

10-22

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Solving Malfunctions

The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.

If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following

pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.

Machine Operation Trouble

When the following machine operation troubles occur, implement appropriate procedures.

NOTE

When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.

To check the serial number, refer to the following:

Display for Device Information (page 2-21)

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

An application does not

start.

Is the Auto Panel Reset time short? Set the Auto Panel Reset time to 30

seconds or more.

page 8-7

The screen does not

respond when the power

switch is turned on.

Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC

outlet.

―

The touch panel is not

responsive or

malfunctions.

Is the touch panel operated with wet

hands?

Dry your hands to operate the touch

panel.

―

Are you operating with gloves on? Use your bare hands or a stylus pen

to operate the touch panel.

―

Is the machine installed near a

device that generates electrical

noise (generator, air conditioner,

etc.)?

Install the machine away from

devices that generate electrical

noise.

―

Pressing the [Start] key

does not produce copies.

Is there a message on the screen? Determine the appropriate response

to the message and respond

accordingly.

page 10-32

Is the machine in Sleep mode? Select any key on the operation

panel to recover the machine from

Sleep mode.

page 2-45

Blank sheets are ejected. Are the originals loaded correctly? When placing originals on the

platen, place them face-down and

align them with the original size

indicator plates.

page 5-2

When placing originals in the

document processor, place them

face-up.

page 5-3

―Check that the settings of the

application software.

―

10-23

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4

―Turn the orientation 180 degrees

around in which the paper is

positioned.

page 3-4

Is the paper of the supported type?

Is it in good condition?

Remove the paper, turn it over, and

reload it.

page 3-4

Is the paper curled, folded or

wrinkled?

Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Are there any loose scraps or

jammed paper in the machine?

Remove any jammed paper. page 10-59

2 or more sheets are

overlaps when ejected.

(multi feed)

―Load the paper correctly. page 3-2

Printouts are wrinkled. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4

―Turn the orientation 180 degrees

around in which the paper is

positioned.

page 3-4

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Printouts are curled. ―Turn the orientation 180 degrees

around in which the paper is

positioned.

page 3-4

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Printer driver cannot be

installed.

Is the driver installed with the host

name while Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct

function is available?

Specify the IP address instead of

the host name.

page 2-50

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-24

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC

outlet.

―

Is the machine powered on? Turn on the power switch. page 2-9

Are the USB cable and network

cable connected?

Connect the correct USB cable and

network cable securely.

page 2-7

Is the print job paused? Resume printing. page 7-11

When the wired or Wi-Fi network is

configured using the name

resolution, does the IP address

(private address) of the other

network which can not access

coexists?

The number of host name and

domain name which can be used

with the machine is one

respectively. Configure the network

under this restriction.

―

Change the settings of name

resolution such as NetBEUI and

DNS, or network environment

settings.

Command

Center RX

User

Guide

Select Wi-Fi, Wired Network or

Optional Network as an

unlimited-use network on Primary

Network (Client).

page 8-69

Set to [Wired Network] or [Wi-Fi]

either one of [On], and set the other

setting to [Off].

page 8-59

Cannot print with USB

drive.

USB drive not

recognized.

Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host

settings.

page 8-70

―Check that the USB drive is

securely plugged into the machine.

―

While "Auto-IP" is already

set to [On], the IP

address is not assigned

automatically.

Is a value other than "0.0.0.0"

entered for the link local address of

TCP/IP(v4)?

Enter "0.0.0.0" for the IP address of

TCP/IP(v4).

page 2-32

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-25

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot send via SMB. Is the network cable connected? Connect the correct network cable

securely.

page 2-7

Have the network settings for the

equipment been configured

properly?

Configure the TCP/IP settings

properly.

page 8-57

Have the folder sharing settings

been configured properly?

Check sharing settings and access

privileges under the folder

properties.

page 3-23

Is the selected interface selected as

the Primary Network?

Specify the host name or IP address

of the interface selected as the

Primary Network, or set the

interface to be used again.

page 8-69

Has the SMB protocol been set to

[On]?

Set the SMB protocol setting to

[On].

page 8-59

Has [Host Name] been entered

properly? *1

Check the name of the computer to

which data is being sent.

page 5-26

Has [Path] been entered properly? Check the share name for the

shared folder.

page 5-26

Has [Login User Name] been

entered properly? *1 *2

Check the domain name and login

user name.

page 5-26

Has the same domain name been

used for [

Host Name

] and [

User Name

Delete the domain name and

backslash

("/") from [

page 5-26

Has [Login Password] been

entered properly?

Check the login password. page 5-26

Have exceptions for Windows

Firewall been configured properly?

Configure exceptions for Windows

Firewall properly.

page 3-27

Do the time settings for the

equipment, domain server, and data

destination computer differ?

Set the equipment, domain server,

and data destination computer to

the same time.

―

Is the screen displaying Send error? Refer to Responding to Send Error.page 10-47

Cannot send via the

e-mail.

Is the E-mail send size limit set in

the SMTP server registered on the

machine?

Check the limit value is entered to

"E-mail Size Limit" of [E-mail]

setting in Command Center RX and

change the value as necessary.

page 2-70

The machine is emitting

steam in the area around

the paper ejection slot.

Check the room temperature to see

if it is low, or if damp paper was

used.

Depending on the printing

environment and the paper's

condition, the heat generated during

printing will cause the moisture in

the paper to evaporate, and the

steam emitted may look like smoke.

This is not a problem, and you can

continue printing. If the steam

concerns you, raise the room

temperature, or replace the paper

with a newer, dryer paper.

―

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-26

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot create

Searchable PDF file.

Is the proper language selected? Check the language to extract. page 6-85

Can the texts on the original not be

recognized as texts, or is the PDF

creation time taken?

Check the following:

• The original orientation is correct.

• When setting the originals with the

mixed orientation at once, [On] is

selected for [Auto Image Rotation].

page 6-85

Cannot search a text that

you want to search on the

PDF file.

Have you set [OCR Text

Recognition] in [File Format]?

Set [OCR Text Recognition] in

[File Format].

page 6-85

Are the texts of the scanned original

fainted or too light?

Set [Density] to darker level. page 6-35

Is the background of the scanned

original too dark and the texts are

difficult to recognize?

Set [Background Density Adj.] to

[Auto] or [Manual] and manually

adjust the density lighter. Otherwise,

set [Density] to darker level.

page 6-35

page 6-43

Is the text or image on the back of

the original visible on the front?

Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to

[On].

page 6-44

Cannot find the machine

with WSD.

Did you search by specifying the

machine’s IP address or host

name?

For security reasons, [HTTP]

protocol is set to [Off], and therefore

you cannot search by IP address or

host name.

―

*1 You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).

*2 You can also enter login user names in the following formats:

Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)

User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-27

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Printed Image Trouble

When the following printed image trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Printouts are totally too

light.

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2

Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-35

page 8-83

Is there a message on the screen

about adding the toner?

Replace the toner container. page 10-4

Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable [EcoPrint] mode. page 8-33

―Run [Developer Refresh]. page 10-58

―Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. page 10-58

―Make sure the paper type setting is

correct for the paper being used.

page 8-16

White background parts

of the image appear to

have a slight overall

coloration.

Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-35

page 8-83

―Run [Calibration]. page 10-58

―Perform the drum refresh, and then

set [Drum Heater] to [On].

page 8-85

Copies have a moire

pattern (dots grouped

together in patterns and

not aligned uniformly).

Is the original a printed photograph? When making copies

Set the original image to

[Printer Output] or [Book/

Magazine] in [Photo].

page 6-36

Texts are not clearly

printed.

Did you choose appropriate image

quality for the original?

Select appropriate image quality. page 6-36

Black or color dots appear

on the white background.

Is the original holder or the glass

platen dirty?

Clean the original holder or the

glass platen.

page 10-2

―Run [Developer Refresh]. page 10-58

10-28

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Printed images are fuzzy.

Printed images are cut

off.

Is the device used in an

environment with high humidity or

where the temperature or humidity

changes suddenly?

Use in an environment that has

suitable humidity.

―

―Run [Drum Refresh]. page 10-57

Printed images are

skewed.

Are the originals placed correctly?

When placing originals on the platen,

align them with the original size

indicator plates.

page 5-2

When placing originals in the

document processor, align the

original width guides securely before

placing the originals.

page 5-3

Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper

width guides.

page 3-4

Printed images have

vertical lines.

Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. page 10-3

―Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. page 10-58

Dirt on the top edge or

back of the paper.

Is the interior of the machine dirty? Open the right cover. If the machine

interior is dirty with toner, clean it

using soft, dry, lint-free cloth.

page 10-2

Part of the image is

periodically faint or shows

white lines.

―Open and then close the right cover. ―

―Run [Drum Refresh]. page 10-57

―Run [Developer Refresh]. page 10-58

Print on the back of the

sheet is visible on the

front.

―Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to

[On].

page 6-44

page 8-33

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-29

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Color Printing Trouble

When the following color printing trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Skewed-color printout. ―Run [Calibration]. page 10-58

―Run [Color Registration]. page 10-52

Colors appear different

than you anticipated.

Did you choose appropriate image

quality for the original?

Select appropriate image quality. page 6-36

Have you loaded color copy paper

into the paper tray?

Load color copy paper into the

paper tray.

―

―Run [Calibration]. page 10-58

―Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]. page 10-56

―When making copies

Adjust the color balance.

page 6-39

―When printing from a computer

Adjust the color using the printer

driver.

―

Perform Tone Curve

Adjustment in the System

Menu. is displayed.

Over long periods of use, the effects

of the ambient temperature and

humidity can cause color output

hues to vary slightly.

Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]page 10-56

The color toner is empty. Do you want to continue printing in

black and white?

If the black toner is remained, the

machine continues printing in black

and white by selecting [Print in

Black and White] of [Color Toner

Empty Action].

page 8-23

10-30

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Remote Operation

This function enables the system administrator to explain how to operate the panel and troubleshoot to user, by

accessing operation panel of the machine at remote using browser and VNC software.

Executing Remote Operation from Browser

The supported Browser is as follows. We recommend the latest version of browser to use Remote Operation.

• Google Chrome (Version 21.0 or later)

• Internet Explorer (Version 9.0 or later)

• Microsoft Edge

• Mozilla Firefox (Version 14.0 or later)

• Safari (Version 5.0 or later)

This procedure explains how to execute Remote Operation from Command Center RX using Google Chrome.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol

Settings]

2Set "Enhanced VNC over SSL" to [On].

Protocol Settings (page 8-59)

3Configure settings for remote operation.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Connectivity" [Remote

Operation] > [On]

2Select [Off], [Use Password], or [Administrator Only].

When you select [Use Password], enter the password in "Password" and "Confirm Password", then

select [OK].

Remote Operation (page 8-68)

4Restart the machine.

Restart Entire Device (page 8-69)

NOTE

To execute Remote Operation using other browsers, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

You can configure the protocol settings using Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

You can configure settings for remote operation using Command Center RX

Command Center RX User Guide

10-31

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

5Start up the browser.

Enter "https://" and host name of the machine to access the Command Center RX

Accessing Command Center RX (page 2-67).

6Select [Device Information/Remote Operation] > [Remote

Operation].

7Click [Start] button.

When the Remote Operation is started up, the operation panel screen will be displayed on the

system administrator's or user's PC screen.

Executing Remote Operation from VNC Software

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol

Settings]

2Set "Enhanced VNC (RFB)" to [On].

Protocol Settings (page 8-59)

3Startup the remote operation.

1Start up the VNC software.

2Enter the following format separated by a colon to start up the remote operation.

"IP address: port number"

NOTE

• If the user is logged in to the device, the permission confirmation screen will be displayed

on the operation panel. Select [Yes].

• If pop-up blocking of the browser occurs during connection of the Remote Operation,

select Always allow pop-ups from https:// [host name], and click Done. Perform Remote

Operation after waiting 1 minute or more.

NOTE

• When setting "VNC (RFB) over SSL" to [On], the communication is encrypted.

• You can configure the protocol settings using Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

When setting "VNC (RFB)" to [On] in step 2, the default port number is 9062. When

setting "VNC (RFB) over SSL " to [On], the default port number is 9063.

Protocol Settings (page 8-59)

10-32

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Responding to Messages

If the touch panel or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.

NOTE

When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary. To check the serial number, refer to the following:

Display for Device Information (page 2-21)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Acceptable staple

count exceeded.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-22)

Is the acceptable number of

sheets exceeded?

Select [Continue] to print

without using Staple. Select

[Cancel] to cancel the job.

—

Access point was not

detected.

―Check if the access point has

been set correctly.

―

Add paper in cassette

Is the indicated cassette out of

paper?

Load paper.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 3-2

Are five or less envelopes

loaded in the cassette?

Pull the cassette and loosen the

paper length and width guides

slightly.

―

Add paper in

Multipurpose tray.

Is the paper of the selected size

loaded in the multipurpose tray?

Load paper.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 5-6

Adjusting Scanner. — The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its

quality. Please wait.

—

10-33

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Box is not found. — The specified box cannot be

found. Job is canceled. Select

[End].

—

Box limit exceeded.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-22)

Is [End] displayed on the

screen?

The specified box is full, and no

further storage is available. Job

is canceled. Select [End]. Try to

perform the job again after

printing or deleting data from the

box.

—

— Repeat Copy box is full, and no

further repeat copy is available.

Select [Continue] to print

scanned pages. Select [Cancel]

to cancel the job.

—

Broadcast error — An error has occurred during

broadcast transmission. The job

is canceled. Select [End].

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Calibrating... ―The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its

quality. Please wait.

―

Cannot Banner Print. ―System stamp is set up.

Banner print cannot be carried

out.

Job is canceled. Select [End].

―

Cannot connect to

Authentication

Server.*1

— Set machine time to match the

server’s time.

page 2-31

— Check the domain name. page 9-2

— Check the host name. page 9-2

— Check the connection status

with the server.

—

Cannot connect to

Server.

— Check the connection status

with the server.

—

Cannot connect. — This appears when the Wi-Fi or

Wi-Fi Direct connection did not

complete. Check the settings,

and check the signal conditions.

page 8-52

page 8-53

10-34

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot duplex print

on this paper.*1

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be duplex printed?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, duplex is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-59

Cannot duplex print

on this paper size.*1

Cannot duplex print

on this paper type.*1

Cannot fold this

paper.

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be folded?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, fold is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-27

Cannot fold this paper

size.

Cannot fold this paper

type.

Cannot offset this

paper.*1

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be offset?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, offset is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-29

Cannot offset this

paper size.*1

Cannot offset this

paper type.*1

Cannot output this

paper to the tray.

Is the cassette you selected

correct?

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

—

Cannot perform

remote printing.

— Remote printing is prohibited.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

page 8-48

Cannot print the

specified number of

copies.*1

— Only one copy is available.

Select [Continue] to continue

printing. Select [Cancel] to

cancel the job.

—

Cannot process this

job.*1

―Restricted by Authorization

settings. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

―

―Restricted by Job Accounting.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

page 9-34

Cannot punch at the

specified position.

Have you selected a position

that cannot be punched?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, punch is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-32

Cannot punch this

paper.

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be punched?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, punch is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-32

Cannot punch this

paper size.

Cannot punch this

paper type.

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-35

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot read data in

this ID card.

―In registration process, the ID

card information was not read

correctly. Hold again the ID card

over the ID card reading part.

If the same message still

appears, the

ID card may not be compatible

with this product. Change it to

another ID card.

―

Cannot recognize. ―Make sure your ID card has

been registered.

―

Cannot staple at the

specified position.

Have you selected a position

that cannot be stapled?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, staple is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-30

Cannot staple this

paper.*1

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be stapled?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, staple is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-30

Cannot staple this

paper size.*1

Cannot staple this

paper type.*1

Cannot use ##### due

to a failure.

―Call service. ―

Cannot use following

functions due to

scanner failure.

>> Copy, Send, Fax,

Storing in Box

―Scanner of this machine has

failed. Contact your service

representative. You can use the

print function.

―

Cannot use this

function due to a hard

disk failure.

— Call service. —

Check the document

processor.

Is the top cover of the document

processor open?

Close the document processor

cover.

―

Is the document processor

open?

Close the document processor. ―

Check the paper in the

multipurpose tray.

— The paper size is different. Set

selected size paper and select

[Continue].

page 5-6

Check the side feeder. — The side feeder is not installed

correctly. Attach the side feeder.

―

Check the staple

waste box.

Is the staple waste box full? Follow the instructions on the

screen, and empty the staple

waste box.

page 10-14

— The staple waste box is not

installed correctly. Set it

correctly.

page 10-14

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-36

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Check the toner

container.

— Open the main unit front cover

and remove the toner container.

Shake carefully and replace.

NOTE

If you select [Open Toner

Container Cover], you can

open the Toner Container Cover

that you closed accidentally.

―

Confidential

document was

detected.

— The machine detects the

document guard pattern. Job is

canceled. Select [End].

―

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-22)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Empty the punch

waste box.

Is the punch waste box full? Follow the instructions on the

screen. and empty the punch

waste box.

page 10-16

Encrypted PDF

Password error.

Is the password you input

correct?

Password is not entered or is

incorrect.

—

Error occurred at

cassette #.

―Open the cassette. Check inside

the machine and remove the

paper.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Failed to activate. ―Failed to activate the

application. Contact

administrator.

―

―Expansion Authentication is

disabled. Turn the power switch

off and on. If the error exists,

contact administrator.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-37

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Failed to send via

SMB.

Is the machine and the PC to

which the scanned image is to

be sent connected to the

network?

Check the network and SMB

settings.

• The network cable is

connected.

• The hub is not operating

properly.

• The server is not operating

properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

page 2-6

Is the account information (user

ID, password) used to access

the shared folder to which the

scanned image is to be sent

incorrect?

Check the following settings of

the PC to which the scanned

image is to be sent.

•Host name

•Path

• Login user name

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user,

specify the domain name.

[Login User ID]@[Domain

Name]

Example: sa720XXXX@km

• Login password

• Folder share permissions of

the recipient

—

Failed to specify Job

Accounting.*1

— Failed to specify Job Accounting

when processing the job

externally. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

—

Failed to store job

retention data.

— The job is canceled. Select

[End].

—

FAX box limit

exceeded.

— Follow the instructions on the

screen and delete documents

from the FAX box to make room

for FAX reception.

To check the canceled job,

select the [Status/Job Cancel]

key and then [Printing Jobs] to

check receipt result.

FAX

Operation

Guide

Finisher tray is full of

paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

Folding tray is full of

paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

Folding Unit is

detached.

―Close the folding unit. ―

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-22)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-38

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Hard Disk error. — An error has occurred on the

hard disk. Job is canceled.

Select [End].

The error cords are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can

be saved at once has been

exceeded. Restart the system or

turn the power OFF/ON. If the

error still occurs, divide the file

into smaller files.

If the error occurs after the file is

divided, the hard disk is

damaged. Execute [System

Initialization].

04: Insufficient space on the

hard disk to complete this

operation. Move data or delete

unneeded data.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Incorrect account

ID.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-22)

— The account ID was incorrect

when processing the job

externally. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

—

Incorrect box

password.

— The box password was incorrect

when processing the job

externally. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

—

Incorrect Login User

Name or Password.*1

— The login user name or

password was incorrect when

processing the job externally.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

—

Install the punch

waste box.

— Follow the instructions on the

screen. and install the punch

waste box.

page 10-16

Install the waste toner

box.

— The waste toner box is not

installed correctly. Set it

correctly.

page 10-7

10-39

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Job Accounting

restriction

exceeded.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-22)

Is the acceptable printing count

restricted by Job Accounting

exceeded?

The printing count exceeded the

acceptable count restricted by

Job Accounting. Cannot print

any more. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

—

Job separator tray is

full of paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper and select

[Continue]. Printing then

resumes.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

KPDL error. *1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-22)

―PostScript error has occurred.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Machine failure. ―Internal error has occurred.

Make a note of the error code

displayed on the screen. Call

service.

―

Mailbox tray # is full

of paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

Main unit inner tray is

full of paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

Maximum number of

scanned pages.

Is the acceptable scanning

count exceeded?

Cannot scan pages any more.

Follow the instructions on the

screen.

—

10-40

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Memory is full.*1 — The memory is full and the job

cannot be continued. Select

[Continue] to print the scanned

pages. The print job cannot be

processed completely. Select

[Cancel] to cancel the job.

—

— The process cannot be

performed due to insufficient

memory. If only [End] is

available, select [End]. The job

will be canceled.

When insufficient memory

occurred frequently, contact

your dealer or service

representative.

—

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-22)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Paper jam. ―If a paper jam occurs, the

machine will stop and the

location of the jam will be

indicated on the screen. Leave

the machine on and follow the

instructions to remove the

jammed paper.

page 10-59

Paper left. — Remove paper from the finisher

tray.

—

— Remove the paper from the

folding tray of the finisher.

—

— Remove paper from the

document finisher.

—

Perform Tone Curve

Adjustment in the

System Menu.

Over long periods of use, the

effects of the ambient

temperature and humidity can

cause output hues to vary

slightly.

Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]. page 10-56

Performing Drum

Refresh…

— The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its

quality. Please wait.

—

Preparing to print. — The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its

quality. Please wait.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-41

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Printing System error. — An error has occurred on

Printing System.

Refer to Responding to Printing

System Error for the error code

and corrective actions.

page 10-47

Printing System error.

Press Status/Job

Cancel key to check

error.

Select [Status/Job Cancel] key.

Is the [Printing System Error.]

message displayed?

An error has occurred on

Printing System.

Refer to Responding to Printing

System Error for the error code

and corrective actions.

page 10-47

Select [Status/Job Cancel] key.

Is the [Device/Communication]

screen displayed?

An error has occurred on

Printing System.

Select [Printing Sys Err] of the

[Device/Communication]

screen and check error.

page 10-47

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Regulating the

temperature…

―The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its

quality. Please wait.

―

Remove originals in

the document

processor.

Are there any originals left in the

document processor?

Remove originals from the

document processor.

―

Replace all originals

and press [Continue].

— Remove originals from the

document processor, put them

back in their original order, and

place them again. Select

[Continue] to resume printing.

Select [Cancel] to cancel the

job.

—

Running security

function...

— Running security function.

Please wait.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-42

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Scanner memory is

full.*1

— Scanning cannot be performed

due to insufficient memory of the

scanner. Follow the instructions

on the screen.

—

Scheduled sending

jobs exceeded.

— The number of jobs has

exceeded the limit set for

delayed transmission. Select

[End]. The job is canceled.

Wait until the delayed

transmission is executed, or

cancel the delayed transmission

and then perform the job again.

—

Select another

cassette.

Is the cassette you selected

correct?

The specified cassette is a fax

special stage.

Select another valid cassette.

Select [Continue] to print.

—

Send Error.*1 — An error has occurred during

transmission. The job is

canceled. Select [End]. Refer to

Responding to Send Error for

the error code and corrective

actions.

page 10-47

Skewed originals or

multi originals fed at

once.

— See the caution attached on the

document processor and check

the originals. If the originals are

jammed, follow the instructions

on the screen to remove the

originals.

—

10-43

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

SSD error. — An error has occurred on the

SSD. Job is canceled. Select

[End].

The error cords are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can

be saved at once has been

exceeded. Restart the system or

turn the power OFF/ON. If the

error still occurs, divide the file

into smaller files. If the error

occurs after the file is divided,

the SSD is damaged. Execute

[System Initialization].

04: Insufficient space on the

SSD to complete this operation.

Move data or delete unneeded

data.

NOTE

Please be aware that when you

carry out initialization of the

system, the data saved in SSD

will be erased.

—

Staple is empty. *1 Has the staple cartridge holder

run out of staples?

If the staples are depleted, the

machine will stop and the

location of staple depletion will

be indicated on the screen.

Leave the machine on and

follow the instructions to replace

the staple case. Select

[Continue] to print without

stapling. Select [Cancel] to

cancel the job.

page 10-9

page 10-11

page 10-12

page 10-14

Staple is empty.

(Manual Staple)

Has staple cartridge holder A

run out of staples?

Add staples to staple cartridge

holder A.

page 10-12

Staple jam. — If a staple jam occurs, the

machine will stop and the

location of the jam will be

indicated on the screen. Leave

the machine on and follow the

instructions to remove the

jammed staple.

page

10-113

System error. — System error has occurred.

Follow the instructions on the

screen.

—

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-22)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-44

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

The cover is open. Is there any cover which is

open?

Close the cover indicated on the

screen.

―

The device cannot be

connected because

allowed connections

would be exceeded.

Are ten handheld devices

connected simultaneously?

Cancel a connection to a

portable device that is not being

used, or set the machine's auto

disconnect time to break

portable device connections.

page 8-53

The password does

not meet password

policy.

Is the password expired? Change the login password.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

page 9-5

page 9-6

Is the password policy

requirement (such as password

length or required characters)

changed?

Confirm the password policy

requirements and change the

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

page 9-5

page 9-6

The phone receiver is

off the hook.

―Put down the receiver. ―

The slit glass requires

cleaning.

— Clean the slit glass using the

cleaning cloth supplied with the

document processor.

page 10-3

The toner container is

improperly installed.

— The toner container is

improperly installed or not

installed.

Open the front cover and set all

the four toner containers

correctly.

—

This ID card is already

registered to another

user.

— Your ID card has already been

registered. Change it to another

ID card.

—

This user account is

locked out.

— Contact administrator.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

―

Time for maintenance

soon. #####

— Call service. —

Toner [C][M][Y][K] are

empty.

— Replace the toner container to

our specified toner container.

NOTE

If the color toner is empty but

the black toner is remained, the

machine continues printing in

black and white by selecting

[Print in Black and White] of

Color Toner Empty Action.

page 10-4

10-45

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Toner [C][M][Y][K] is

low. (Replace when

empty.)

— It is almost time to replace the

toner container. Obtain a new

toner container.

—

Toner type mismatch. Does the type of toner you have

match the model?

Please install correct toner. —

Tray # is full of paper. Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

USB Drive error.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-22)

Is writing to a USB drive

prohibited?

An error occurred in the USB

drive. The job stopped. Select

[End].

The error cord is as follows.

01: Connect a USB drive that

can be written to.

―

―An error occurred in the USB

drive. The job stopped. Select

[End].

The error cord is as follows.

01: The amount of data that can

be saved at once has been

exceeded. Restart the system or

turn the power OFF/ON. If the

error still occurs, the USB drive

is not compatible with the

machine. Use the USB drive

formatted by this machine. If the

USB drive cannot be formatted,

it is damaged. Connect a

compatible USB drive.

page 5-70

USB Drive is full.*1 ―The job is canceled. Select

[End].

Insufficient free space in the

USB drive. Delete unneeded

files.

―

USB Drive is not

formatted.

Is the USB drive formatted by

this machine?

Perform [Format] on this

machine.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-46

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Warning for high

temperature. Adjust

the room temperature.

―Print quality may be

deteriorated. Adjust the

temperature and the humidity of

your room.

―

Warning for low

temperature. Adjust

the room temperature.

— Print quality may be

deteriorated. Adjust the

temperature and the humidity of

your room.

—

Warning low memory. — Cannot start the job. Try again

later.

—

Waste toner box

almost full.

— It is almost time to replace the

waste toner box. Obtain a new

waste toner box.

—

Waste toner box is

full.

Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box. page 10-7

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

You cannot use this

box.

— You cannot use the specified

box. Job is canceled. Select

[End].

—

10-47

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Responding to Send Error

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

1101 Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the host name of the SMTP server on the

Command Center RX.

page 2-70

Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name of FTP. page 5-29

Failed to send via SMB. Check the host name of SMB. page 5-26

1102 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the

domain name.

•Host name

•Path

page 5-26

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following on the Command Center

RX.

• SMTP login user name and login password

• POP3 login user name and login password

• E-mail size limit

page 2-70

Failed to send i-FAX. Check the following on the Command Center

RX.

• SMTP login user name and login password

• POP3 login user name and login password

Refer to

FAX

Operation

Guide

Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the

domain name.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-29

1103 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the

domain name.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-26

Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-29

10-48

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

1104 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail address.

NOTE

If the address is rejected by the domain, you

cannot send the email.

page 5-24

Failed to send i-FAX. Check the i-FAX address.

NOTE

If the address is rejected by the domain, you

cannot send the email.

Refer to

FAX

Operation

Guide

1105 Failed to send via SMB. Check the following settings.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network

Settings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol Detail]

[SMB Client (Transmission)]

page 8-57

Failed to send the e-mail. Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the

Command Center RX.

page 2-70

Failed to send via FTP. Check the following settings.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network

Settings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol Detail]

[FTP Client (Transmission)]

page 8-57

Failed to send i-FAX. Select [On] of the i-FAX settings on the

Command Center RX.

Refer to

FAX

Operation

Guide

1106 Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the sender address of SMTP on the

Command Center RX.

page 2-70

1131 Failed to send via FTP. Enable the SSL.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security

Settings] > "Network" [SSL]

page 8-82

1132 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following of the SMTP server.

• Is SMTP over SSL available?

• Is the encryption available?

Refer to the

Command

Center RX

User

Guide.

Failed to send via FTP. Check the following of the FTP server.

• Is FTPS available?

• Is the encryption available?

—

1133 Job is canceled. Press [End]. Server certificate has expired.

Check the network and FTP settings.

• Check time/date setting of the machine.

• Make sure server is using a valid certificate.

—

1134 Job is canceled. Press [End].

Check the network and Command Center RX.

• Network Settings : Protocol, FTP

Client(Transimssion):Hash

—

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-49

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

2101 Failed to send via SMB. Check the network and SMB settings.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

—

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network and FTP settings.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

—

Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the network and Command Center RX.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• POP3 server name of the POP3 user

• SMTP server name

page 2-70

2102

2103

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

Check the following of the FTP server.

• Is FTP available?

• The server is not operating properly.

—

Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

2201

2202

2203

2231

Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send via FTP.

Failed to send via SMB.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

2204 Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the e-mail size limit of the SMTP settings

on the Command Center RX.

page 2-70

3101 Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the authentication methods of both the

sender and the recipient.

—

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

3201 Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the SMTP user authentication method of

the recipient.

—

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-50

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

4801 Job is canceled. Press [End]. Turn the power switch off and back on. If this

error occurs several times, make a note of the

displayed error code and contact your service

representative.

—

4802 Failed to send the email.

Check the encryption certificate

of each destination by the

Command Center RX.

Job is canceled. Press [End].

Turn the power switch off and back on. If this

error occurs several times, make a note of the

displayed error code and contact your service

representative.

—

4803 Job is canceled. Press [End]. Server certificate has expired.

Check the network and SMTP settings.

• Check time/date setting of the machine.

• Make sure server is using a valid certificate.

—

4804 Job is canceled. Press [End].

Check the network and Command Center RX.

• Network Settings : Protocol, SMTP(E-mail

TX):Hash

—

0007

4201

4701

5101

5102

5103

5104

7101

7102

7103

720f

— Turn the power switch off and back on. If this

error occurs several times, make a note of the

displayed error code and contact your service

representative.

page 2-9

9181 — The scanned original exceeds the acceptable

number of pages of 999. Send the excess pages

separately.

—

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-51

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Adjustment/Maintenance

Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance

If there is an image problem and the message to run adjustment or maintenance menu appears, run Adjustment/

Maintenance in the system menu.

The table below lists the item you can carry out.

Item Description Reference Page

Color Registration

Procedure

Correct the color position to resolve color drift. page 10-52

Tone Curve Adjustment The printed output tone may differ from the original. Perform this

function to ensure consistency with the original tone.

page 10-56

Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. page 10-57

Calibration Calibrate the device to ensure correct toner overlapping and

consistency with the original tone.

page 10-58

Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical white lines from the printout. page 10-58

Developer Refresh Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even

though there is enough toner.

page 10-58

10-52

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Color Registration Procedure

When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this function to

correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift.

Auto registration and manual registration are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected through

auto registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the manual registration.

Auto Correction

1Load paper.

2Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment"

[Color Registration - Auto]

3Print the chart.

Select [Start].

A chart is printed.

IMPORTANT

Before performing color registration, be sure to perform Calibration. If color drift remains, perform color

registration. By performing color registration without performing Calibration, the color drift will be resolved

once, however, it may cause the serious color drift later.

Calibration on page 10-58

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in

the cassettes.

Loading in Cassette 1 (page 3-4)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is

curled or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width

guide, the paper may skew or become jammed.

10-53

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Chart Example

4Perform the color registration.

1As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with

the arrows toward the back.

2Select [Start] to scan the chart.

When scanning is finished, color printing position correction starts.

3When color printing position correction ends, select [OK].

10-54

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Manual Correction

1Load paper.

2Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment"

[Color Registration - Manual]

3Print the chart.

Select [Print Chart].

A chart is printed. On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), charts for

H-1 to 5 and V-1 to 5 are printed.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in

the cassettes.

Loading in Cassette 1 (page 3-4)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is

curled or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width

guide, the paper may skew or become jammed.

10-55

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Chart Example

4Enter the appropriate value.

1Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match. If this is the 0 position,

registration for that color is not required. For the illustration, B is the appropriate value.

From charts H-1 to H-5, read the values from H-1 to H-5.

From charts V-1 to V-5, read only the values from V-3 (center).

2Select [Registration].

3Select the chart to be corrected.

4Select the values read from the chart.

5Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the registration values for each chart.

6Select [Start] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins.

7Select [OK] after color registration is complete.

10-56

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Tone Curve Adjustment

After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the printed output tone may differ from

the original. Perform this function to ensure consistency with the original tone. Before executing Tone Curve Adjustment,

execute calibration.

If calibration does not improve the tones, perform Tone Curve Adjustment.

Calibration (page 10-58)

A total of 3 pattern pages (No. 1 to 3) are printed during adjustment. The printed patterns are read sequentially during

the adjustment.

1Load paper.

2Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment"

[Tone Curve Adjustment]

2Select [Copy/Print (600dpi)] or [Print (1200dpi)].

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

cassettes.

Loading in Cassette 1 (page 3-4)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled

or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,

the paper may skew or become jammed.

NOTE

Select [Print (1200dpi)] if you want to adjust the printed output tone in printer resolution

1200 dpi.

10-57

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

3Adjust the tone curve.

1Select [Start]. A pattern is printed.

Check that the number "1" is printed at the bottom of the pattern.

2As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with

the arrows toward the back.

3Select [Start]. The pattern is read and adjustment begins.

The second pattern is output.

4Check that the number "2" (to "3") is printed at the bottom of the pattern and repeat steps 2

to 3 twice to read patterns 2 and 3 in sequence.

5Select [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.

Drum Refresh

Remove image blur and white dots from the printout.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment"

[Drum Refresh]

2Perform the drum refresh.

Select [Start]. "Drum Refresh" begins.

NOTE

Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.

10-58

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Calibration

Calibrate the device to ensure correct toner overlapping and consistency with the original tone.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment"

[Calibration]

2Perform the calibration.

Select [Start]. "Calibration" begins.

Laser Scanner Cleaning

Remove vertical white lines from the printout.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment"

[Laser Scanner Cleaning]

2Perform the laser scanner cleaning.

Select [Start]. "Laser Scanner Cleaning" begins.

Developer Refresh

Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment"

[Developer Refresh]

2Perform the Developer Refresh.

Select [Start]. "Developer Refresh" begins.

NOTE

When correct toner overlapping is not ensured even after performing calibration, refer to the

following:

Color Registration Procedure (page 10-52)

When consistency with the original tone is not ensured even after performing calibration,

refer to the following:

Tone Curve Adjustment (page 10-56)

NOTE

Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.

10-59

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Clearing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, printing stops and the location at which the paper jam has occurred and the following message

appear on the touch panel.

"Paper Jam."

Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper.

Jam Location Indicators

1 Shows the location of a paper jam.

2 Shows the Help screen. The Help screen shows the procedure to clear the jam.

3 Returns to the previous step.

4 Closes the Help screen and returns to the original screen.

5 Shows the selected step.

6 Returns to step 1.

7 Advances to the next step.

8 Shows the removal procedure.



+ROG

3DSHUMDP

&OHDUWKHSDSHUMDPPHGLQ5LJKW&RYHU

3UHVV>6WDUW+HOS@WRIROORZWKHLQVWUXFWLRQV

-$0 6WDUW+HOS

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

2SHQIXVHUFRYHU$DQG

UHPRYHWKHSDSHU

&ORVH+HOS 5HWXUQWR7RS

+ROG

3DSHUMDP

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

10-60

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the touch panel as well as the clearing instructions.



+ROG

3DSHUMDP

&OHDUWKHSDSHUMDPPHGLQ5LJKW&RYHU

3UHVV>6WDUW+HOS@WRIROORZWKHLQVWUXFWLRQV

-$0 6WDUW+HOS

(QHUJ\6DYHU

5HVHW

10-61

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes

with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.

Paper Jam Location Indicator

Paper Jam Location Reference Page

ACassette 1 page 10-62

BCassette 2 page 10-65

CCassette 3 (500-sheet×2) page 10-68

Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×1) page 10-70

DCassette 4 (500-sheet×2) page 10-68

ECassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) page 10-72

FCassette 5 (Side Feeder) page 10-75

GMultipurpose Tray page 10-77

HRight Cover 1 page 10-78

IRight Cover 2 page 10-83

JBridge Unit page 10-86

KMailbox page 10-87

LInner Finisher page 10-88

MDocument Processor page 10-89

page 10-91

N1,000-sheet Finisher page 10-92

O4,000-sheet Finisher (Inner) page 10-95

P4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray A) page 10-96

Q4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray B) page 10-100

RFolding Unit page 10-103

SFolding Tray page 10-108

10-62

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1

Here, we'll explain the procedures for cassette 1, as an example.

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 1.

3Open the cover (A3).

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-63

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the cover to the original position.

6Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.

7Remove any jammed paper.

10-64

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

8Push Cassette 1 back in.

9If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

NOTE

To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.

10-65

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 1.

3Close the duplex unit (A5).

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-66

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the cover to the original position.

6Pull Cassette 2 out toward you until it stops.

7Remove any jammed paper.

10-67

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

8Push Cassette 2 back in.

9If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

NOTE

To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.

10-68

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 and 4

(500-sheet×2)

See the explanation for Cassette 3 below.

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 2.

3Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-69

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.

5Remove any jammed paper.

6Push Right Cover 2 and Cassette 3 back in.

NOTE

To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.

10-70

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

7If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3

(1,500-sheet×2)

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 2.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-71

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Remove any jammed paper.

4Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.

5Remove any jammed paper.

6Push Right Cover 2 and Cassette 3 back in.

10-72

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

7If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4

(1,500-sheet×2)

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 2.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-73

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Remove any jammed paper.

4Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.

5Pull Cassette 4 out toward you until it stops.

6Pull out paper feed unit (B1).

10-74

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

7Open cover (B2).

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Push paper feed unit, Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 back in.

10 Return the cover to the original position.

10-75

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

11 If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 5 (Side

Feeder)

1Detach the side feeder.

2Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-76

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Pull Cassette 5 out toward you until it stops.

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the Cassette 5 and side feeder to the original position.

10-77

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray

1Remove any jammed paper.

2Remove all the paper.

3Reload the paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-78

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 1.

3Close the duplex unit (A5).

4Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting

burned.

10-79

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

5Open the paper feed unit cover (A1).

6Remove any jammed paper.

7Open the fuser cover (A2).

8Remove any jammed paper.

10-80

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

9Open the cover (A3).

10 Remove any jammed paper.

11 Lift the cover (A4).

12 Remove any jammed paper.

10-81

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

13 Lift the duplex unit (A5).

14 Remove any jammed paper.

15 Remove the paper from the paper ejector.

16 Return the cover to the original position.

10-82

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

17 If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

10-83

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2

(500-sheet×2)

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 2.

3Remove any jammed paper.

4Return the cover to the original position.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-84

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

5If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2

(1,500-sheet×2)

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 2.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-85

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Remove any jammed paper.

4Return the cover to the original position.

5If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

10-86

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit

1 Open the bridge unit cover.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Close the cover.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-87

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox

1Open the mailbox cover.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Close the cover.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-88

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Inner Finisher

1Remove any jammed paper.

2Open the inner finisher unit.

3Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-89

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Return the unit to the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in the Document

Processor (Reverse Automatic)

1Remove the originals from the Original Table.

2Open the document processor cover.

CAUTION

If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-90

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Turn dial (C1) to remove any jammed paper.

4Open reverse unit (C2) and remove any jammed paper.

5Turn dial (C1) to remove any jammed paper.

6Return the cover to the original position.

10-91

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Document

Processor (Dual Scan)

1Remove the originals from the Original Table.

2Open the document processor cover.

3Turn dial (C) to remove any jammed paper.

4Turn dial (C) to remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-92

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

5Return the cover to the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in the 1,000-Sheet

Finisher

1Remove any jammed paper.

2Open the finisher top cover.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-93

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Open the conveyor guide (D2).

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the conveyor guide (D2) to the original position.

6Open the finisher front cover.

10-94

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

7Open the conveyor guide (D1).

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

10 Return the covers to the original position.

10-95

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet

Finisher (Inner)

1Open the finisher front cover 1.

2Open the conveyor guide (D1).

3Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-96

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

5Return the cover to the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet

Finisher (Tray A)

1Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-97

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

2Open the finisher front cover 1.

3Open the conveyor guide (D6).

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the conveyor guide (D6) to the original position.

10-98

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

6Open the conveyor guide (D4).

7Turn knob (D5).

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Return the conveyor guide (D4) to the original position.

10-99

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

10 Open the conveyor guide (D1).

11 Remove any jammed paper.

12 Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

13 Return the cover to the original position.

10-100

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet

Finisher (Tray B)

1Remove any jammed paper.

2Open the finisher front cover 1.

3Open the conveyor guide (D2).

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-101

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Turn knob (D3).

5Remove any jammed paper.

6Return the conveyor guide (D2) to the original position.

7Open the conveyor guide (D1).

10-102

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

10 Return the cover to the original position.

10-103

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Unit

(4,000-sheet Finisher)

1Open the finisher front cover 1 and 2.

2Open the conveyor guide (D7).

3Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-104

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Return the conveyor guide (D7) to the original position.

5Open the conveyor guide (D8).

6Remove any jammed paper.

7Return the conveyor guide (D8) to the original position.

10-105

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

8Remove paper from inside the finisher.

9Return the covers to the original position.

10 Lift the folding tray.

11 Remove any jammed paper.

10-106

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

12 Press the release lever to pull the folding unit out.

13 Open the folding unit left cover.

14 Turn dial (D9).

15 Remove any jammed paper.

10-107

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

16 Return the folding unit left cover to the original position.

17 Open the folding unit top cover.

18 Turn dial (D9).

19 Remove any jammed paper.

10-108

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

20 Return the folding unit top cover to the original position.

21 Return the folding unit to the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Tray

(4,000-sheet Finisher)

1Lift the folding tray.

2Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-109

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Press the release lever to pull the folding unit out.

4Open the folding unit left cover.

5Turn dial (D9).

6Remove any jammed paper.

10-110

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

7Return the folding unit left cover to the original position.

8Open the folding unit top cover.

9Turn dial (D9).

10 Remove any jammed paper.

10-111

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

11 Return the folding unit top cover to the original position.

12 Return the folding unit to the original position.

13 Open the finisher front cover 1 and 2.

14 Remove paper from inside the finisher.

10-112

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

15 Return the covers to the original position.

10-113

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

Clearing a Staple Jam

Clearing a staple jam of the Inner Finisher

1Open the inner finisher unit.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Open the staple cover.

10-114

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

4Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.

5Remove the jammed staple.

6Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.

7Return the staple cover to the original position.

10-115

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

8Return the unit to the original position.

Clearing a staple jam of the 1,000-Sheet Finisher

1Open the finisher top cover.

2Open the conveyor guide (D2).

3Remove any jammed paper.

10-116

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

4Return the conveyor guide (D2) to the original position.

5Open the finisher front cover.

6Open the conveyor guide (D1).

7Remove any jammed paper.

10-117

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

8Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

9Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.

10 Remove the jammed staple.

11 Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.

10-118

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

12 Return the covers to the original position.

Clearing a staple jam of the 4,000-sheet Finisher

1Open the finisher front cover 1.

2Open the conveyor guide (D4).

3Turn knob (D5).

10-119

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the conveyor guide (D4) to the original position.

6Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).

7Remove the jammed staple.

10-120

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

8Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).

9Return the cover to the original position.

Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit (4,000-sheet

Finisher)

1Open the finisher front cover 1 and 2.

10-121

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

2Remove paper from inside the finisher.

3Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (B) or (C).

4Remove the jammed staple.

5Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (B) or (C).

10-122

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

6Return the covers to the original position.

7Lift the folding tray.

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Press the release lever to pull the folding unit out.

10-123

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

10 Open the folding unit left cover.

11 Turn dial (D9).

12 Remove any jammed paper.

13 Return the folding unit left cover to the original position.

10-124

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

14 Open the folding unit top cover.

15 Turn dial (D9).

16 Remove any jammed paper.

17 Return the folding unit top cover to the original position.

10-125

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

18 Return the folding unit to the original position.

11-1

11 Appendix

This chapter explains the following topics:

Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2

Applications ............................................................................................................................................ 11-8

Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................. 11-10

Entry Screens ....................................................................................................................................... 11-10

Entering Characters .............................................................................................................................. 11-12

Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-13

Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-13

Choosing the Appropriate Paper ........................................................................................................... 11-14

Special Paper ....................................................................................................................................... 11-17

Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-21

Machine ................................................................................................................................................ 11-21

Copy Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 11-24

Printer Functions ................................................................................................................................... 11-25

Scanner Functions ................................................................................................................................ 11-26

Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 11-27

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) ................................................................................................................ 11-28

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) ............................................................................................... 11-28

Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) .................................................................................................................... 11-28

Inner Finisher ........................................................................................................................................ 11-29

Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) ............................................................................................................ 11-29

1,000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................................................................. 11-30

4,000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................................................................. 11-31

Punch Unit (For 1,000-sheet/4,000-sheet) ........................................................................................... 11-31

Mailbox (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) ....................................................................................................... 11-32

Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) ................................................................................................ 11-32

Job Separator Tray ............................................................................................................................... 11-33

Inner Shift Tray ..................................................................................................................................... 11-33

Banner Tray .......................................................................................................................................... 11-34

Backing up your data ...................................................................................................................................... 11-35

Backing up your data using KYOCERA Net Viewer .............................................................................. 11-35

Backing up your data using Command Center ..................................................................................... 11-35

Backing up your date using USB Drive ................................................................................................. 11-35

Functions List of Security Quick Setup ........................................................................................................... 11-36

Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-40

11-2

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Optional Equipment

Overview of Optional Equipment

The following optional equipment is available for the machine.

* If the following option is installed, toppling prevention kit must be installed: PF-7140, PF-7150, PF-7120

(1) PLATEN COVER

TYPE E

(1) DP-7150

(2) MT-730(B)

(4) DF-7120

(7) PF-7150*

(14) PH-7A,

PH-7C, PH-7D

(1) DP-7140

(1) DP-7160

(12) DF-7100

(13) PH-7100,

PH-7120, PH-7130

(3) DF-7140

(9) Banner Guide 10

(11) JS-7100

(1) DP-7170

(5) BF-730

(10) JS-7110

(6) PF-7140*

(8) PF-7120

11-3
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Software option
(24) Internet FAX Kit(A)
(25) UG-33
(26) UG-34
(27) Scan Extension Kit(A)
(28) Data Security Kit 10
(29) USB Keyboard
(18) FAX System 12
(19) IB-50
(20) IB-51
(21) IB-37/IB-38
(16) DT-730(B) (23) Card 
Authentication Kit(B)
(22) HD-15/HD-16
(15) NK-7120
(17) Keyboard Holder 10

11-4

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(1)

DP-7170 "Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed, Multifeed and Staple Detection)"

DP-7160 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"

DP-7150 "Document Processor (Reverse Automatic)"

DP-7140 "Document Processor (Reverse Automatic)"

PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover"

Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.

For document processor operation, refer to the following:

Loading Originals in the Document Processor (page 5-3)

When the document processor is not used, please use the PLATEN COVER TYPE E.

(2) MT-730 (B) "Mailbox"

Makes it easy to sort output into separate trays. Installing this option adds 7 output trays. When multiple computer users

share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray. Installs on the 4,000-sheet Finisher.

(3) DF-7140 "4,000-sheet Finisher"

This is a large-capacity 4,000-sheet Finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple

copies of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.

(4) DF-7120 "1,000-sheet Finisher"

This is a document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a

printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.

(5) BF-730 "Folding Unit"

Folds printed output at the center or in tri-fold to enable the creation of simple booklets. Installs on the 4,000-sheet

Finisher.

(6) PF-7140 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2)"

Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassette can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading

method are the same as the standard cassettes.

Loading in Cassette 1 (page 3-4)

(7) PF-7150 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2)"

In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional large capacity feeder (1,500-sheet×2) capable of

holding up to 3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder (page 3-14)

(8) PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)"

In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional side feeder (3,000-sheet) capable of holding up to

3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.

Loading in the Side Feeder (page 3-16)

NOTE

To deliver output to the mail box, change the Paper Output selection on the operation panel or in the printer driver, or

change in the default settings.

Paper Output (page 6-34)

11-5

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(9) Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray"

This tray enables continuous feeding of banner paper. Up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be loaded. To attach the tray

and load paper, refer to the following:

Using the Banner Tray (Option) (page 4-12)

(10) JS-7110 "Inner Shift Tray"

This device can shift and sort each set of output.

(11) JS-7100 "Job Separator"

Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or, specify as

the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and printing of the

received fax data.

(12) DF-7100 "Inner Finisher"

This is a document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a

printout into individual copies. It can also staple the offset printouts.

(13) PH-7100, PH-7120, PH-7130 "Punch Unit"

Attaches to the Inner Finisher and is used to punch holes.

(14) PH-7A, PH-7C, PH-7D "Punch Unit"

Attaches to the Document Finisher and is used to punch holes.

(15) NK-7120 "Optional Numeric Keypad"

The numeric keypad is added to the operation panel. If the optional numeric keypad is installed, numeric keys do not

appear on the touch panel.

(16) DT-730 (B) "Document Table"

Place original or other documents when using the machine.

(17) Keyboard Holder 10 "Keyboard Holder"

A USB keyboard connected to the machine can be placed here.

(18) FAX System 12 "FAX Kit"

By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a

computer. When two FAX kits are installed, the units can be connected to two different telephone lines which will enable

quicker message transmission to a number of recipients. If one of the lines is dedicated to receiving, the busy line time

can be reduced.

FAX Operation Guide

NOTE

To ensure that paper is delivered to the Job Separator, select the output destination or change the default setting.

Paper Output (page 6-34)

11-6

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(19) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit"

The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. This kit supports

traditional protocols such as AppleTalk, Netware and so on.

It also supports only the least functions in the standard utilities.

IB-50 User's Manual

(20) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and

11 g/b. This supports traditional protocols such as AppleTalk, Netware and so on.

It also supports only the least functions in the standard utilities.

The IB-51 Steup utility supports Windows OS and Mac OS X.

IB-51 User's Manual

(21) IB-37/IB-38 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (max. 150 Mbps) and

IEEE802.11 g/b/ac. In addition, network printing is possible without using the wireless LAN router because Wi-Fi Direct

is supported.

(22) HD-15/HD-16 "Hard Disk"

With Hard Disk installed in the machine, received data can be rasterized and stored on this Hard Disk. This enables

high-speed printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function. Also, you can use the Document Box functions.

HD-15 is standard in South America and North America.

Printing Documents in Custom Box (page 5-61)

(23) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"

User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on

the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the

following:

Card Authentication Kit(B) Operation Guide

(24) Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit"

Activating the Internet FAX Kit sends and receives faxes via the Internet without using a phone line. It can only be added

when the FAX Kit is installed.

(25) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.

(26) UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit"

Enables emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option enables IBM

Proprinter, Line Printer, and EPSON LQ-850 emulation.

(27) Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit"

This option enables the use of the OCR Text Recognition function in the applications of the machine.

11-7

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(28) Data Security Kit 10 "Data Security Kit"

If you use IPsec protocol (required by the U.S. Department of Defense), you will be able to perform encryption using the

FIPS140-2 compliant encryption module.

(29) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"

A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also

available to install the keyboard on the machine. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on

keyboards that are compatible with your machine before you purchase one.

11-8

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Applications

Overview of the Applications

The applications listed below are installed on this machine.

Starting Application Use

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Add/Delete Application] > "Optional Function"

[Optional Function List]

2Select the desired application > [Activate]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ] (information

icon).

Item Application Name

Data Encryption/Overwrite Data Encryption/Overwrite

INTERNET FAXKIT(A) Internet FAX Kit

UG-33 ThinPrint Option*1

*1 This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.

UG-34 Emulation Upgrade Kit

Scan extension kit(A) OCR Scan Activation Kit*1

CARD AUTHENTICATIONKIT(B) Card Authentication Kit

Data Security Kit 10 Data Security Kit

CAUTION

When starting [Data Encryption/Overwrite] and after that replacing the main board by service personnel, the

box files and fax received data stored in the SSD, hard disk, and machine's memory are deleted and can not

be restored.

NOTE

• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the

application.

• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the

application.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with

privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login password

are set as shown below.

11-9

Appendix > Optional Equipment

3Enter the license key > [Official]

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen

does not appear, go to Step 5.

To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.

4Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Checking Details of Application

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Add/Delete Application] > "Optional Function"

[Optional Function List]

2Select [ ] (information icon) for the application whose

detailed information you want to check.

You can view detailed information on the selected application.

The table below lists the item you can view.

Extend the trial period.

Select [Extend].

NOTE

• If you started the Data Encryption/Overwrite or Thin Print option and entered the license

key, turn the power OFF/ON.

• Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with

privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login password

are set as shown below.

Item

Function Name

License

Remaining Counts

Expiration Date

Status

11-10

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Character Entry Method

To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.

Entry Screens

Lower-case Letter Entry Screen

NOTE

Keyboard Layout

"QWERTY", "QWERTZ" and "AZERTY" are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Select the

[System Menu/Counter] key, [Device Settings], [Keyboard] and then [Keyboard Layout] to choose the desired

layout. "QWERTY" layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.

No. Display/Key Description

1Keyboard Select the character to enter.

2Input box Enter characters in the selected box.

3Tab key Select to move to the next input box.

4Shift key Select to switch between upper case and lower case.

5[?123] / [Character] Select the characters that are entered.

6Space key Select to insert a space.

7Cursor key Select to move the cursor on the display.

8Close key Select to close the entry screen.

9Enter key Select to finalize entry and return to the screen before the

entry.

10 Backspace key Select to delete a character to the left of the cursor.

8Input / Limit display Displays maximum number of characters and the number of

characters entered.

Enter a name

8VHU1DPH

HQWHU

6SDFH

1HZ8VHU

&DQFHO 6DYH

'HYLFH

6HWWLQJV

4XLFN6HWXS

:L]DUG

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

6\VWHP0HQX

Enter a user name

/RJLQ8VHU1DPH

56 7 8

111

11-11

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Upper-case Letter Entry Screen

Select the Shift key.

Number/Symbol Entry Screen

Select [?123].

Enter a name

8VHU1DPH

HQWHU

6SDFH

1HZ8VHU

&DQFHO 6DYH

'HYLFH

6HWWLQJV

4XLFN6HWXS

:L]DUG

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

6\VWHP0HQX

Enter a user name

/RJLQ8VHU1DPH

Enter a name

8VHU1DPH

HQWHU

6SDFH

1HZ8VHU

&DQFHO 6DYH

'HYLFH

6HWWLQJV

4XLFN6HWXS

:L]DUG

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

6\VWHP0HQX

Enter a user name

/RJLQ8VHU1DPH

Enter a name

8VHU1DPH

HQWHU

6SDFH

1HZ8VHU

&DQFHO 6DYH

'HYLFH

6HWWLQJV

4XLFN6HWXS

:L]DUG

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

6\VWHP0HQX

Enter a user name

/RJLQ8VHU1DPH

11-12

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Entering Characters

Follow the steps below to enter 'List #1' for an example.

1Enter 'List', (space).

To switch between upper case and lower case, select the Shift key.

2Enter '#' and '1'.

To enter numbers or symbols, select [#123].

3Check that the entry is correct.

Check that the entry is correct. Select [enter].

8VHU1DPH

HQWHU

6SDFH

1HZ8VHU

&DQFHO 6DYH

'HYLFH

6HWWLQJV

4XLFN6HWXS

:L]DUG

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

6\VWHP0HQX

Enter a user name

/RJLQ8VHU1DPH

8VHU1DPH

HQWHU

6SDFH

1HZ8VHU

&DQFHO 6DYH

'HYLFH

6HWWLQJV

4XLFN6HWXS

:L]DUG

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

6\VWHP0HQX

Enter a user name

/RJLQ8VHU1DPH

1, 3 24

8VHU1DPH

HQWHU

6SDFH

1HZ8VHU

&DQFHO 6DYH

'HYLFH

6HWWLQJV

4XLFN6HWXS

:L]DUG

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

6\VWHP0HQX

Enter a user name

/RJLQ8VHU1DPH

8VHU1DPH

HQWHU

6SDFH

1HZ8VHU

&DQFHO 6DYH

'HYLFH

6HWWLQJV

4XLFN6HWXS

:L]DUG

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

6\VWHP0HQX

Enter a user name

/RJLQ8VHU1DPH

8VHU1DPH

HQWHU

6SDFH

1HZ8VHU

&DQFHO 6DYH

'HYLFH

6HWWLQJV

4XLFN6HWXS

:L]DUG

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

6\VWHP0HQX

Enter a user name

/RJLQ8VHU1DPH

8VHU1DPH

HQWHU

6SDFH

1HZ8VHU

&DQFHO 6DYH

'HYLFH

6HWWLQJV

4XLFN6HWXS

:L]DUG

1RWLILFDWLRQ

5HSRUW

)XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJV

6\VWHP0HQX

Enter a user name

/RJLQ8VHU1DPH

11-13

Appendix > Paper

Paper

This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.

For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the

following:

Specifications (page 11-21)

Basic Paper Specifications

This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as

laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.

Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.

Supported Paper

Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.

Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.

Basic Paper Specifications that can be Used with This Machine

The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections

for further details.

We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.

Criteria Specifications

Weight Cassettes: 52 to 300 g/m2

Multipurpose tray: 52 to 300 g/m2, 136 to 163g/m2 (Banner sheet)

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°

Moisture content 4 to 6%

Pulp content 80% or more

NOTE

Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications

shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of

recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and

contains low levels of paper dust.

11-14

Appendix > Paper

Choosing the Appropriate Paper

This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.

Condition

Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper

fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may

also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,

avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.

Ingredients

Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those

types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.

Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content

consists of cotton or other fibers.

Smoothness

The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several

sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.

Basis Weight

In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in

area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard

size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause

paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several

sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to

adhere correctly.

Moisture Content

Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is

supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.

Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to

become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,

making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.

Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.

To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.

• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.

• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for

a while.

• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.

Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.

• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.

• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.

11-15

Appendix > Paper

Other Paper Specifications

Porosity: The density of the paper fibers.

Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.

Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls

upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.

Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be

discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.

Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.

Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough,

sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you

cut the paper yourself.

Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have

been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.

Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the

basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.

• Glossy paper

• Watermarked paper

• Paper with an uneven surface

• Perforated paper

11-16

Appendix > Paper

Paper Sizes that can be Used with This Machine

Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.

Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must

be 90° ± 0.2°.

• A3 (297 × 420 mm) *1

• A4 (297 × 210 mm)

• A5 (210 × 148 mm)

• A6 (148 × 105 mm)

• B4 (257 × 364 mm) *1

• B5 (257 × 182 mm)

• B6 (182 × 128 mm)

• 216×340 mm

• SRA3 (320 × 450 mm) *1

• Ledger*1

•Letter

• Legal

• Statement

• Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2")

• 12×18" (304.8 × 457 mm) *1

• Oficio II

• Folio (210 × 330 mm)

• 8K (273 × 394 mm) *1

• 16K (273 × 197 mm)

*1 This paper cannot be used in cassette 1.

• ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)

• Envelope #10 (4-1/8 × 9-1/2")

• Envelope #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8")

• Envelope #6 3/4 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2")

• Envelope Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2")

• Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)

• Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm)

• Envelope C4 (229 × 324 mm) *1

• Hagaki (Cardstock) (100 × 148 mm)

• Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (148 × 200 mm)

• Kakugata 2 (240 × 332 mm)*1

• Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)

• Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)

• Younaga 3 (235 × 120 mm)

• Nagagata 3 (120 × 235 mm)

• Nagagata 4 (90 × 205 mm)

•Custom

Cassette 1: 98 × 148 to 297 × 356 mm

Cassette 2 to 4: 98 × 148 to 320 × 457 mm*2

Multipurpose Tray: 98 × 148 to 320 × 457 mm

*2 The Paper Feeder (500-sheets×2) can only be used for cassettes 3 and 4.

11-17

Appendix > Paper

Special Paper

This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.

The following paper and media can be used.

• Transparencies

• Preprinted paper

• Bond paper

• Recycled paper

• Thin paper

• Letterhead

• Colored paper

• Prepunched paper

• Envelopes

• Hagaki (Cardstock)

• Thick paper

• Labels

•Coated

• High-quality paper

• Index tab dividers (136 to 256 g/m2)

When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as

laser printers). Use the multipurpose tray for transparencies, cardstocks, labels, coated paper and index tab dividers.

Choosing Special Paper

Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary

considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than

regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the

print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not

responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.

Select a cassette or multipurpose tray for special paper.

Transparencies

Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.

To avoid problems, use the multipurpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the

machine.

If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.

Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C

Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm

Material Polyester

Dimensional

accuracy

±0.7 mm

Squareness of

corners

90° ±0.2°

11-18

Appendix > Paper

Label

Be sure to feed labels from the multipurpose tray.

For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine

and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled

labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.

When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.

Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected

by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of

labels may cause more problems.

The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,

resulting in a serious failure.

Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the

carrier sheet before completing output.

Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.

Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²

Basis weight

(overall paper weight)

104 to 151 g/m²

Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm

Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm

Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)

Top sheet

Adhesive

Carrier sheet

Not allowedAllowed

Top sheet

Carrier

11-19

Appendix > Paper

Hagaki (Cardstock)

Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock) into the multipurpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki (Cardstock)

paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause jams.

Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough

edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki (Cardstock)

on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.

Envelopes

Envelopes should be fed from the MP tray with the print-side down or the cassette and the optional paper feeder with the

print-side up.

Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin

envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing

envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.

Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are

ready to use them.

Keep the following points in mind.

• Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is

exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes

off in the machine.

• Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a

string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.

• If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.

Thick Paper

Before loading thick paper, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a

paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by placing the paper on a

flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.

Colored Paper

Colored paper must conform to the specifications.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)

In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).

NOTE

Do not load paper above the load limits located on the paper width guide of the cassette and the optional paper

feeder.

NOTE

If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper with the leading edge raised a few

millimeters.

Burrs

11-20

Appendix > Paper

Preprinted Paper

Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)

The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use

paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.

Recycled Paper

Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)

Coated Paper

Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than

plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.

The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making

the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated

side appears slightly glossy.

NOTE

Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.

IMPORTANT

When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture

may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very humid

environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.

11-21

Appendix > Specifications

Specifications

Machine

IMPORTANT

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

NOTE

For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following:

FAX Operation Guide

Item Description

Type Desktop

Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser

Paper Weight Cassette 52 to 300 g/m2

Multipurpose

Tray

52 to 300 g/m2

Paper Type Cassette

Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond,

Cardstock,

Color,

Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom

1 to 8

(Duplex: Same as Simplex)

Multipurpose

Tray

Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,

Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High

Quality, Coated, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8

Paper Size Cassette 1 A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II,

Folio, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope

Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki

(Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Custom (98 × 148 mm to

297 × 356 mm)

Cassette 2 A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,

Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,

Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),

Kakugata 2, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Custom (98 × 148 mm to

320 × 457 mm)

Multipurpose

Tray

A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,

Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,

Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),

Kakugata 2, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Younaga 3, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Custom

(98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)

Banner sheet (210 × 488.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm/8.26" × 19.22" to

12" × 48.03")

Printable Area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm or less

11-22

Appendix > Specifications

Warm-up Time

(23°C/73.4°F,

60%)

Power on TASKalfa 2554ci 18 seconds or less

TASKalfa 3554ci 18 seconds or less

Low Power TASKalfa 2554ci 9.7 seconds or less

TASKalfa 3554ci 9.7 seconds or less

Sleep TASKalfa 2554ci 9.7 seconds or less

TASKalfa 3554ci 9.7 seconds or less

Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1

Multipurpose

Tray

150 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (80 g/m2),

50 sheets (larger than A4/Letter) (80 g/m2)

1 sheet (Banner sheet (210 × 488.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm/8.26" × 19.22" to

12" × 48.03")) (136 to 163 g/m2)

Output Tray

Capacity

Inner tray 500 sheets (80 g/m2)

Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography

Memory 4.0 GB

Large Capacity Storage TASKalfa 2554ci SSD 32 GB (SSD 32 GB/Hard Disk 320 GB*2)

TASKalfa 3554ci SSD 32 GB (SSD 32 GB/Hard Disk 320 GB*2)

Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (Super-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4,

IPSec), 802.3a supported)

USB Port: 4 (Hi-Speed USB)

Option eKUIO: 2*3

Fax: 2*4

Wireless LAN: 1

Operating

Environment

Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Humidity 10 to 80%

Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum

Brightness 1,500 lux maximum

Dimension (W × D × H)

(without Document Processor)

23.71 " × 26.19" × 31.11"

602 × 665 × 790 mm

Weight TASKalfa 2554ci: Approx. 196.3 lb/Approx. 90 kg (without toner container)

TASKalfa 3554ci: Approx. 196.3 lb/Approx. 90 kg (without toner container)

Space Required (W × D)

(Using multipurpose tray)

36.23" × 26.19"

920 × 665 mm

Power Source 120 V Specification Model: 120 V 60 Hz 12 A

230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 7.2 A

The power consumption of the

product in networked standby (If

all network ports are connected.)

The information is available at the website below.

(

https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/en/about-us/our-brand/

environmental-policy.html

)

Options Optional Equipment (page 11-2)

Item Description

11-23

Appendix > Specifications

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

*2 This is standard in South and North America.

*3 When two optional interface are installed, a fax line can not be installed.

*4 When IB-50 or IB-51 is installed, only one fax line can be installed.

11-24

Appendix > Specifications

Copy Functions

Item Description

Copy Speed TASKalfa 2554ci

A4/Letter

A4-R/Letter-R

A3/Ledger

Legal

B5-R

A5-R

A6-R

Black and White Copying

25 sheets/min

17 sheets/min

12 sheets/min

15 sheets/min

25 sheets/min

17 sheets/min

12 sheets/min

Full Color Copying

25 sheets/min

17 sheets/min

12 sheets/min

15 sheets/min

25 sheets/min

17 sheets/min

12 sheets/min

TASKalfa 3554ci

A4/Letter

A4-R/Letter-R

A3/Ledger

Legal

B5-R

A5-R

A6-R

Black and White Copying

35 sheets/min

24 sheets/min

17 sheets/min

21 sheets/min

35 sheets/min

24 sheets/min

17 sheets/min

Full Color Copying

35 sheets/min

24 sheets/min

17 sheets/min

21 sheets/min

35 sheets/min

24 sheets/min

17 sheets/min

First Copy

Time (A4,

place on the

platen, feed

from

Cassette)

Black and White TASKalfa 2554ci 6.4 seconds or less

TASKalfa 3554ci 5.3 seconds or less

Color TASKalfa 2554ci 8.5 seconds or less

TASKalfa 3554ci 7.0 seconds or less

Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments

Auto mode: Preset Zoom

Continuous Copying 1 to 9,999 sheets

Resolution 1200 × 1200 dpi (multi-bit)

Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/Ledger)

Original Feed System Fixed

11-25

Appendix > Specifications

Printer Functions

Item Description

Printing Speed Black and White Printing Full Color Printing

TASKalfa 2554ci 12×18"/SRA3 12 sheets/min 12 sheets/min

TASKalfa 3554ci 12×18"/SRA3 17 sheets/min 17 sheets/min

Other than the above size, specifications are the same as those of Copy

Speed.

First Print

Time (A4,

feed from

Cassette)

Black and White TASKalfa 2554ci 7.0 seconds or less

TASKalfa 3554ci 5.9 seconds or less

Color TASKalfa 2554ci 9.2 seconds or less

TASKalfa 3554ci 7.7 seconds or less

Resolution 4800 dpi equivalent × 1200 dpi

Operating System Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2012/R2, Windows Server 2016,

Windows Server 2019, Mac OS 10.9 or later

Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Super-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4,

IPSec), 802.3a supported)

Optional Interface (Option): 2 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)

Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-37/38 mounting)

Page Description Language PRESCRIBE

Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL-5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS,

OpenXPS

11-26

Appendix > Specifications

Scanner Functions

Item Description

Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200×400 dpi, 200 dpi, 200×100 dpi

File Format TIFF, JPEG, XPS, Open XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression), High

compressive PDF, OCR Text Recognition (Option), MS Office file (Option),

OOXML (Option), OOXML (OCR) (Option)

Scanning Speed*1

*1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Multifeed Detection) (except TWAIN and WIA

scanning)

(A4 landscape, 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)

TASKalfa 2554ci 1-sided B/W 100 Images/min

2-sided B/W 200 Images/min

Color 100 Images/min

Color 200 Images/min

TASKalfa 3554ci 1-sided B/W 100 Images/min

2-sided B/W 200 Images/min

Color 100 Images/min

Color 200 Images/min

Interface Ethernet (1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T)

Transmission System SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*2, WIA*2, DFS, DSM

*2 Available Operating System: Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows

Server 2016/Windows Server 2019

11-27

Appendix > Specifications

Document Processor

Item

Description

Document Processor

(Automatic 2-Sided)

Document Processor

(Dual scan DP)

Type DP-7140 DP-7150 DP-7160

DP-7170

(Skewed, Multifeed and

Staple Detection)

Original Feed Method Automatic feed

Supported Original Types Sheet originals

Paper Size Maximum: A3/Ledger

11.69" × 17"/297 × 432 mm

(Long-sized 11.69" × 63"/297 × 1,600 mm)

Maximum: A3/Ledger

11.69" × 17"/297 × 432 mm

(Long-sized 11.69" ×

74.8"/297 × 1,900 mm)

Minimum: A5-R/

Statement-R

5.51" × 8.27"/

140 × 210 mm

Minimum: A6-R/

Statement-R

4.13" × 5.82"/

105 × 148 mm

Minimum: A6-R/

Statement-R

4.13" × 5.82"/

105 × 148 mm

Paper Weight 1-sided: 45 to 160 g/m2

2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m2

1-sided: 35 to 160 g/m2

2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m2

1-sided: 35 to 220 g/m2

2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m2

Loading Capacity 50 sheets

(50 to 80 g/m2)*1

maximum

140 sheets

(50 to 80 g/m2)*1

maximum

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.

270 sheets

(50 to 80 g/m2)*1

maximum

Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.15" × 19.77" × 5.24"

588 × 502 × 133 mm

23.35" × 20.95" × 5.75"

593 × 532 × 146 mm

23.63" × 21.23" × 7.29"

600 × 539 × 185 mm

Weight Approx. 15.22 lbs./

Approx. 6.9 kg

Approx. 18.52 lbs./

Approx. 8.4 kg

Approx. 29.33 lbs./

Approx. 13.3 kg

11-28

Appendix > Specifications

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2)

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2)

Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder

No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes

Paper Size A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,

Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,

Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),

Kakugata 2, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Custom (98 × 148 mm to

320 × 457 mm)

Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper

Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.63" × 26.19" × 12.73"

600 × 665 × 323.2 mm

Weight Approx. 50.8 lbs. / Approx. 23 kg

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder

No. Sheets: 1,500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes

Paper Size A4,B5, Letter

Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper

Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.63" × 26.19" × 12.73"

600 × 665 × 323.2 mm

Weight Approx. 66.2 lbs. / Approx. 30 kg

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Feed & reverse roller method

No. Sheets: 3,000, 80 g/m2

Paper Size A4,B5, Letter

Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper

Dimensions (W × D × H) 13.82" × 23.04" × 18.47"

351 × 585 × 469 mm

Weight Approx. 58.5 lbs. / Approx. 26.5 kg

11-29

Appendix > Specifications

Inner Finisher

Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher)

Item Description

Number of Trays 1 tray

Paper Size (80 g/m2)

Finisher tray (no stapling)

A3, B4, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K,

Envelope C4: 250 sheets

A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5-R, B5, B6, Letter-R, Letter, Statement, Executive,

16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku

hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 500 sheets

Stapling Number of

Sheets

A3, B4, 216×340 mm,

Ledger, Legal, Oficio II,

30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)

A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R,

Letter, 16K

50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)

40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)

Media types Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,

Thick, High Quality, Custom

Dimensions (W × D × H)

(When pulling the tray)

26.47" × 20.99" × 10.9"

672.3 × 533.1 × 276.8 mm

Weight 25.4 lbs. or less / 11.5 kg or less

Item Description

Paper

Size

Inch 2 Hole A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K

3 Hole A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 12×18", 8K, 16K

cm 2 Hole A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K

4 Hole A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 12×18", 8K, 16K

Paper Weight 52 - 300 g/m2

Media types Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High

Quality, Custom 1 to 8

11-30

Appendix > Specifications

1,000-sheet Finisher

Item Description

Number of Trays 1 tray

Paper Size

(80 g/m2)

Finisher tray

(Non-stapling)

A3, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Statement-R,

Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 500

sheets

A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 1,000

sheets

Supported Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less

Stapling Number of

Sheets

A3, B4, B5-R,

216×340 mm, Ledger,

Legal, 12×18", Oficio II,

16K-R, 8K

30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)

A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R,

Letter, 16K

50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)

40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)

Media types Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,

Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Dimensions (W × D × H) 21.58" × 24.36" × 41.34"

548 × 618.5 × 1,050 mm

Weight Approx. 66.2 lbs. or less / Approx. 30 kg or less

Space Required (W × D)

(When pulling the tray)

26.23" × 24.36"

666 × 618.5 mm

11-31

Appendix > Specifications

4,000-sheet Finisher

Punch Unit (For 1,000-sheet/4,000-sheet Finisher)

Item Description

Number of Trays 2 trays

Paper

Size

(80 g/m2)

Tray A (Non-Stapling) A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Executive, 12×18",

Oficio II, Folio, 8K: 1,500

sheets

A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R, 16K: 4,000

sheets

A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500

sheets

Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,

Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II,

Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope C4, Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki

(Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 200 sheets

Supported Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less

Stapling

Maximum

Number A3, B4, 216×340 mm,

Ledger, Legal, 12×18",

Oficio II, 8K

30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)

A4-R, A4, B5-R, B5,

Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R,

16K

65 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)

55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)

Media types Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Thick,

Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.91" × 26.32" × 41.79"

607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm

Weight Approx. 88.2 lbs. or less / Approx. 40 kg or less

Space Required (W × D)

(When pulling the tray)

28.55" × 26.32"

725 × 668.5 mm

Item Description

Paper

Size

Inch 2 Hole A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R

3 Hole A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 12×18", 8K, 16K

cm 2 Hole A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R

4 Hole A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 12×18", 8K, 16K

Paper Weight 45 - 300 g/m2

Media types Plain, Rough, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated,

High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

11-32

Appendix > Specifications

Mailbox (For 4,000-sheet Finisher)

Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher)

Item Description

Number of Trays 7 trays

Paper Size

(80 g/m2)

A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, 8K: 50 sheets

A4-R, A4, A5-R, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R,

Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K-R, 16K: 100 sheets

Dimensions (W × D × H) 20.08" × 15.75" × 18.51"

510 × 400 × 470 mm

Weight Approx. 22.1 lbs. / Approx. 10 kg

Item Description

Sizes Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K

Saddle Stitch A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Letter-R, Legal, Oficio II, 8K

Tri-Fold A4-R, Letter-R

Number of Sheets Bi-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)

1 sheet (121 to 256 g/m2)

Saddle Stitch 20 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

13 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)

1 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 or heavier)

Tri-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)

Maximum Number for Storage

(80 g/m2)

Bi-Fold 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets

Saddle Stitch 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets

6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets

11 to 20 sheets per set: 10 sets

Tri-Fold 1 sheet per set: 30 sets

2 to 5 sheets per set: 5 sets

Media types Bi-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,

Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,

High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Saddle Stitch Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,

Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,

High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Tri-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,

Prepunched, Letterhead, Coated, High Quality,

Custom 1 to 8

11-33

Appendix > Specifications

Job Separator Tray

Inner Shift Tray

Item Description

Number of Trays 1 tray

Maximum Sheets 100 Sheets (80 g/m2)

Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,

Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio,

8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope

Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock),

Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 to

304.8 × 1,220 mm)

Paper Type Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper

Dimensions (W × D × H) 18.78" × 16.52" × 2.52"

477 × 419.6 × 64 mm

Weight Approx. 1.6 lbs. / Approx. 0.7 kg

Item Description

Number of Trays 1 tray

Maximum Sheets 250 Sheets (80 g/m2)

Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,

Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio,

8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope

Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock),

Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Kakugata 2, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3,

Nagagata 4, Younaga 3, Custom (98 × 148 to 320 × 1,220 mm)

Paper Type Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper

Dimensions (W × D × H) 17.33" × 15.75" × 5.24"

440 × 400 × 133 mm

Weight Approx. 3.97 lbs. / Approx. 1.8 kg

11-34

Appendix > Specifications

Banner Tray

Item Description

Max. number of sheets 10 sheets (Multipurpose tray)

Paper length 210 to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")

Paper width Max. 1,220.0 mm (48.03")

Paper Type Paper weight: 136 to 163 g/m2

Paper type: Heavy 2

Dimensions (W × D × H) 15.78" × 15.67" × 7.63"

400.6 × 397.8 × 193.6 mm

Weight Approx. 1.2 lbs. / Approx. 0.5 kg

NOTE

Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.

11-35

Appendix > Backing up your data

Backing up your data

If the SSD, HDD, or memory of this machine installed in the machine failed for any reason, the files in the Custom box,

fax received data and various settings saved there will be deleted and cannot be restored. To prevent erasing data,

make regular backups as follows.

Backing up your data using KYOCERA Net Viewer

Use KYOCERA Net Viewer to save the following data registered in this machine to your PC regularly.

•System Settings

• Network Settings

•User List

• Address Book

• Custom Box Settings (Except for the file in the Custom Box)

Migrating the Address Book (page 2-77)

Backing up your data using Command Center

Use Command Center RX to save the data saved in the Custom Box and Fax Box to your PC regularly. This subsection

describes the procedure for backing up the data in the Custom Box. You can back up the fax box using the same

procedure.

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3Click the number or name of Custom Box which stores the documents.

2Download the documents.

1Select the document data you want to download to your computer.

Only one document data can be downloaded at a time.

2Click [Download] icon. The selected file is shown in "Selected Files".

3Specify [Color Selection] and [File Format] as necessary.

4Click [Download].

Backing up your date using USB Drive

You can copy the data saved in the Custom Box and FAX Box to a USB drive. You can save multiple document data at

once.

Copying Documents in Custom Box to USB Drive (page 5-65)

11-36

Appendix > Functions List of Security Quick Setup

Functions List of Security Quick Setup

The functions configured in each level of Security Quick Setup are as follows. After selecting the security level, configure

the security function according to your operating environment.

Item Security Quick Setup

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

SSL On On On

Serverside

Settings*1

TLS Version TLS1.1, TLS1.2,

TLS1.3

TLS1.2, TLS1.3 TLS1.2, TLS1.3

Effective Encryption 3DES, AES, AES-

GCM, CHACHA20/

POLY1305

AES-GCM, AES,

CHACHA20/

POLY1305

AES-GCM, AES,

CHACHA20/

POLY1305

Hash SHA1, SHA2(256/

384)

SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

IPP Security Secure Only (IPPS) Secure Only (IPPS) Secure Only (IPPS)

HTTP Security Secure Only (HTTPS) Secure Only (HTTPS) Secure Only (HTTPS)

Enhanced WSD

Security

Secure Only

(Enhanced WSD over

SSL)

Secure Only

(Enhanced WSD over

SSL)

Secure Only

(Enhanced WSD over

SSL)

eSCL Security Not Secure (eSCL

over SSL & eSCL)

Secure Only (eSCL

over SSL)

Secure Only (eSCL

over SSL)

Clientside

Settings*1

TLS Version TLS1.1, TLS1.2,

TLS1.3

TLS1.2, TLS1.3 TLS1.2, TLS1.3

Effective Encryption 3DES, AES, AES-

GCM, CHACHA20/

POLY1305

AES-GCM, AES,

CHACHA20/

POLY1305

AES-GCM, AES,

CHACHA20/

POLY1305

Hash SHA1, SHA2(256/

384)

SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

IPv4 settings

(Wired

Network)*1

DNS over TLS Off Auto On

Certificate Auto

Verification

Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period

Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

IPv4 settings

(Wireless

Network)*1

DNS over TLS Off Auto On

Certificate Auto

Verification

Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period

Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

IPv6 Settings

(Wired

Network)*1

DNS over TLS Off Auto On

Certificate Auto

Verification

Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period

Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

11-37

Appendix > Functions List of Security Quick Setup

IPv6 Settings

(Wireless

Network)*1

DNS over TLS Off Auto On

Certificate Auto

Verification

Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period

Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

Send Protocols:

FTP Client

(Transmission)*1

Certificate Auto

Verification

Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period

Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

Other Protocols:

HTTP (Client)*1

Certificate Auto

Verification

Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period

Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

Other Protocols:

Google Cloud

Print*1

Certificate Auto

Verification

Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period

Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

Other Protocols:

SOAP*1

Certificate Auto

Verification

Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period

Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

Other Protocols:

LDAP*1

Certificate Auto

Verification

Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period

Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

Send Protocols:

SMTP (E-mail

TX)*1

Certificate Auto

Verification

Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period

Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

E-mail: POP3

User Settings*1

Certificate Auto

Verification

Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period

Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

Print Protocols NetBEUI On Off Off

LPD On On Off

FTP Server

(Reception)

On Off Off

IPP On Off Off

IPP over SSL On On On

Raw On On Off

ThinPrint On Off Off

ThinPrint over SSL On Off Off

WSD Print On Off Off

POP3 (E-mail RX) Off Off Off

Item Security Quick Setup

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

11-38

Appendix > Functions List of Security Quick Setup

Send Protocols FTP Client

(Transmission)

On Off Off

SMB On On Off

WSD Scan On Off Off

DSM Scan Off Off Off

eSCL On Off Off

eSCL over SSL On On Off

Other Protocols SNMPv1/v2c On On Off

SNMPv3 Off Off Off

HTTP On Off Off

HTTPS On On On

Google Cloud Print*1 On Off Off

Enhanced WSD On Off Off

Enhanced WSD (SSL) On On On

LDAP Off Off Off

LLTD*1 Off Off Off

REST On Off Off

REST over SSL On On On

VNC (RFB) Off Off Off

VNC (RFB) over SSL Off Off Off

Enhanced VNC (RFB)

over SSL

On Off Off

TCP/IP: Bonjour

Settings

Bonjour On On Off

Network

Settings

Wi-Fi Direct Settings Off Off Off

Connectivity Bluetooth Settings Off Off Off

NFC Off Off Off

Interface Block USB Host Unblock Unblock Block

USB Device Unblock Unblock Block

Optional Interface 1 Unblock Unblock Block

Optional Interface 2 Unblock Unblock Block

Energy Saver/

Timer

Auto Panel Reset On On On

User Account

Lockout Setting

Lockout Off Off On

Item Security Quick Setup

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

11-39

Appendix > Functions List of Security Quick Setup

Job Status/Job

Logs Settings

Display Jobs Detail

Status

Show All Show All Hide All (Display only

when Administrator)

Display Jobs Log Show All Show All Hide All (Display only

when Administrator)

Display Fax Log Show All Show All Hide All (Display only

when Administrator)

Edit Restriction Address Book Off Off Administrator Only

One-Touch Key Off Off Administrator Only

Prevent Mis-

sending Settings

Destination Check

before Send

Off Off On

Entry Check for New

Dest.

Off Off On

New Destination

Entry

Permit Permit Prohibit

New Destination

Entry (FAX)

Permit Permit Prohibit

Recall Destination Permit Permit Prohibit

Broadcast Permit Permit Prohibit

Destination History Permit Permit Prohibit

History Settings Login History Off On On

Device Log History Off On On

Secure Comm. Error

Log

Off On On

Protocol

Settings:

RESTful API

Settings

API for Enhanced

Services

Off Off Off

*1 The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.

Item Security Quick Setup

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

11-40

Appendix > Glossary

Glossary

Accessibility

The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or

visually impaired. The angle of the touch panel is adjustable.

Apple Talk

AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another

computer on the same AppleTalk network.

Auto Form Feed Timeout

During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form

feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no output is

performed if the last page has no data to be printed.

Auto-IP

Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP

requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0

to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.

Auto Paper Selection

A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing.

Auto Sleep

A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data transfer for a

specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.

Bonjour

Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and

services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically

recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives

network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that

Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run

stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets

are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly

for Bonjour.

Custom Box

The Custom Box function stores print data for each individual user on the printer and allows the user to print single or

multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer's operation panel.

Default Gateway

This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing

computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address,

data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.

11-41

Appendix > Glossary

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway

addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client

computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.

DHCP (IPv6)

DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends

the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the

network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an

IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management

workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.

dpi (dots per inch)

A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).

EcoPrint Mode

A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.

Emulation

The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of

PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).

Enhanced WSD

Kyocera's proprietary web services.

FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,

FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.

Grayscale

A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black

at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:

that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16

bits.

Help

If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like more information on its functions or are having problems

getting the machine to work properly, select [?] (Help) to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.

IP Address

An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.

The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be

between 0 and 255.

11-42

Appendix > Glossary

IPP

IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be

sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and

enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication

mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.

Job Box

The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data

later using the printer's operation panel.

KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)

Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.

Multipurpose (MP) Tray

The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto

envelopes, Hagaki (Cardstock), transparencies, or labels.

NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)

An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller

networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities

to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as

a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.

Outline font

With outline fonts, character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced

in different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions. Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts,

since the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions. You can specify the font size in

steps of 0.25 points up to 999.75 points.

PDF/A

This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use

of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a

specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A-

2), is currently being prepared.

POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)

A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.

PostScript

A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional

graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that

enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for

the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.

PPM (prints per minute)

This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.

11-43

Appendix > Glossary

Printer Driver

The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is

downloaded from our website. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.

RA (Stateless)

The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information

is the Router Advertisement (RA).

ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control

Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".

RAM Disk

Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer memory as a

RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).

Send as E-mail

A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected

from the list or entered at each time.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as

well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.

Status Page

The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source

settings.

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address.

A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in

the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,

in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network

address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In

this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network

address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet

address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the "DHCP" setting to "Off".

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)

TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other

over a network.

TCP/IP (IPv6)

TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and

expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also

introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.

11-44

Appendix > Glossary

TWAIN (Technology Without An Interesting Name)

A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to computers. The

TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted

on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0

A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with

USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.

WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)

A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices. This

function replaces what TWAIN used to do. The feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of

operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)

WPS is a network security standard created by Wi-Fi Alliance, to make it easy to connect with the wireless devices and

set up the Wi-Fi Protected Access. The WPS-supported services can connect to the wireless access points by pushing

a button or entering passphrases.

Index-1

Index

Numerics

1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-115

1,000-sheet Finisher 11-4

2-sided/Book Original 6-82

3,000-Sheet Finisher

Manual Staple 5-76

4,000-sheet Finisher 11-4

Accessibility 11-40

Accessibility Functions 2-28

Address Book 3-37

Adding 3-37

Contact 3-37

Deleting 3-43

Editing 3-42

Group 3-41

Adjustment/Maintenance 8-83

Image Adjustment 8-83

Others 8-85

AirPrint 4-16

AppleTalk 11-40

Application 5-14

Applications 11-8

Auto Detect Original Size 8-11

Auto Drum Refresh 8-84

Auto Error Clear 8-22

Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-40

Auto Image Rotation 6-77

Default 8-34

Auto Panel Reset 8-7

Auto Paper Selection 11-40

Auto Sleep 2-45, 11-40

Auto-IP 11-40

Settings 8-55, 8-57

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function 1-13

Background Density Adjustment 6-43, 8-83

Default 8-33, 8-35

Backing up your data 11-35

Banner Tray 11-5

Using 4-12

Bates Stamp 6-73

Bluetooth Settings 8-68

Bonjour 11-40

Settings 8-63

Booklet 6-56

Border Erase 6-53

Border Erase (Copy) 8-34

Border Erase/Full Scan (Fax) 8-35

Border Erase/Full Scan (Send/Store) 8-35

Cables 2-6

Calibration 8-84, 10-58

Canceled before Sending 8-25

Card Authentication Kit 11-6

Cassette

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock 3-10

Loading Paper 3-4, 3-7

Cassette 1 2-2

Cassette 1 (to 4) Settings 8-13

Cassette 2 2-2

Cassette 3 2-5

Cassette 4 2-5

Cassette 5 2-5

Centering 6-51

Character Entry Method 11-10

Checking the Counter 2-63

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7-15

Cleaning 10-2

Document Processor 10-2

Glass Platen 10-2

Slit Glass 10-3

Clear Set. after Job Started 8-32

Clear Settings after Job Started 8-20

Coated Paper 11-20

Collate/Offset 6-29

Default 8-34

Color

Calibration 8-84, 10-58

Color Balance 6-39

One-touch Image Adjust 6-41

Saturation 6-44

Color Balance 6-39, 8-33

Color Registration - Auto 8-84, 10-52

Color Registration - Manual 8-84, 10-54

Color Selection 6-38

Default 8-33, 8-35

Color Toner Empty Action 8-23

Colored Paper 11-19

Combine 6-49

Command Center RX 2-66

Connecting

LAN Cable 2-7

Power Cable 2-8

USB cable 2-8

Connection Method 2-6

Connectivity 8-68

Continuous Scan 6-76

Default 8-33, 8-35

Contrast 6-45, 8-83

Control Section of the Finisher 2-5

Conventions Used in This Guide xxiv

Copy 5-19

Copy Settings

Auto Image Rotation Action 8-34

Original Size of Undetected Original 8-35

Paper Size for Small Original 8-34

Copy Speed 11-24

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

Count by Paper Size 9-45

Counter 2-63

Each Job Account 9-47

Print Accounting Report 9-48

Index-2

Total Accounting 9-47

Cover 6-62

Custom Box 11-40

Deleting Documents 5-67

Editing and Deleting Custom Box 5-59

Printing Documents 5-61

Send 5-63

Storing Documents 5-60, 5-62

Custom Original Size 8-12

Custom Paper Settings 8-15

Data Overwrite Method 8-74

Data Sanitization 8-73

Data Security 8-72

Date Format 8-7

Date/Time 8-6

Date Format 8-7

Date/Time 8-6

Time Zone 8-7

Default

Auto % Priority 8-34

Auto Image Rotation (Copy) 8-34

Background Density Adj. (Copy) 8-33

Background Density Adj. (Send/Store) 8-35

Border Erase Default 8-32

Border Erase to Back Page 8-32

Clear Settings after Job Started 8-32

Collate/Offset 8-34

Color Selection (Copy) 8-33

Color Selection (Send/Store) 8-35

Color TIFF Compression 8-36

Color Type 8-35

Continuous Scan (Copy) 8-33

Continuous Scan (Fax) 8-35

Continuous Scan (Send/Store) 8-35

DP Read Action 8-32

EcoPrint 8-33

Email Subject/Body 8-36

Erase Shadowed Areas (Copy) 8-35

Erase Shadowed Areas (Send) 8-37

Erase Shadowed Areas (Store) 8-37

Fax TX Resolution 8-35

File Format 8-36

File Name Entry 8-32

File Separation 8-36

High Comp. PDF Image 8-36

HighCompressionPDF Mode 8-36

iFax Subject/Body 8-37

Image Quality (File Format) 8-36

JPEG/TIFF Print 8-34

Margin 8-34

OCR Output Format 8-36

OCR Text Recognition 8-36

OCR Text Recognition Action 8-36

Org. Image (Send/Store) 8-35

Original Image (Copy) 8-33

Original Orientation (Copy) 8-33

Original Orientation(Send/Store) 8-35

PDF/A 8-36

Prevent Bleed-through (Copy) 8-33

Prevent Bleed-through (Send/Store) 8-35

Primary OCR Language 8-36

Repeat Copy 8-34

Reserve Next Priority 8-34

Scan Resolution 8-35

Skip Blank Page (Copy) 8-33

Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) 8-35

System Stamp 8-32

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-33

Trapping 8-34

XPS Fit to Page 8-34

Zoom 8-32

Default Gateway 11-40

Settings 8-55, 8-57

Default Screen 8-10

Delete after Printed 6-94

Delete after Transmitted 6-95

Density 6-35, 8-83

Destination

Adding a Destination 3-37

Address Book 5-47

Address Book Type 8-41

Check before Send 8-37

Checking and Editing 5-51

Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-51

Entry Check for New Dest. 8-37

Multi Sending 5-42

Narrow Down 8-41

One Touch Key 3-44

Search 5-48

Sort 8-41

Developer Refresh 8-84, 10-58

Device Information 7-13

Device Security Settings 8-71

Administrator Authentication on Firm Update 8-71

Job Status/Job Logs Settings 8-71

Remote Printing 8-71

Software Verification 8-71

Unusable Time 8-71

Device Settings 8-6

Error Handling 8-21

Function Key Assignment 8-20

Keyboard 8-6

Language/System of Units 8-6

Numeric Keypad 8-6

Operation Assist 8-20

Original/Scan Settings 8-11

Paper Feeding 8-13

Paper Output 8-19

Sound 8-11

Toner Settings 8-23

Device Status Notification 8-26

Low Toner Alert Level 8-26

DHCP 11-41

Settings 8-55, 8-57

DHCP (IPv6) 11-41

Settings 8-56, 8-58

Different Width Originals 8-12

Digital Signature Email 6-93

Index-3

Direct Printing from Web 8-48

Display Brightness 8-10

Display Settings 8-10

Default Screen 8-10

Display Brightness 8-10

Quick Setup Registration (Box Print) 8-10

Quick Setup Registration (Copy) 8-10

Quick Setup Registration (Send) 8-10

Quick Setup Registration (Sending from Box) 8-10

Quick Setup Registration (Storing in Box) 8-10

Show Power Off Message 8-10

Wallpaper 8-10

Disposing of the Punch Waste 10-16

1,000-sheet Finisher 10-18

4,000-sheet Finisher 10-19

Inner Finisher 10-16

Disposing of the Staple Waste 10-14

DNS over TLS 8-55, 8-56, 8-57, 8-58

DNS Server Address

Settings 8-55, 8-56, 8-57, 8-58

Document Box

Basic Operation 5-54

Custom Box 5-53

Job Box 4-18, 5-53

Removable Memory Box 5-53

Document Processor 2-2

Loading Originals 5-3

Originals Not Supported by the Document

Processor 5-3

Originals Supported by the Document

Processor 5-3

Part Names 2-2

Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and

Multifeed Detection) 11-4

Document Processor (Dual Scan) 11-4

Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) 11-4

Document Table 11-5

DP Read Action 8-32

dpi 11-41

Drum Heater 8-85

Drum Refresh 8-85, 10-57

DSM Scan

Protocol Settings 8-40, 8-59

Duplex 6-59

Dynamic DNS 8-67

EcoPrint 6-37, 11-41

Default 8-33

Printer 8-46

Edit Destination

Address Book 3-37

Contact 3-37

Group 3-41

One Touch Key 3-44

E-mail

POP3 8-39

SMTP (E-mail TX) 8-39

Email 8-25

Email Encrypted TX 6-93

E-mail Settings 2-70

E-mail Subject/Body 6-92

Email Subject/Body

Default 8-36

Email/Folder 8-25

Emulation 11-41

Selection 8-46

Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-6

Encrypted PDF Password 6-96

Energy Saver Recovery Level 2-46, 8-9

Energy Saver/Timer 8-7

Auto Panel Reset 8-7

EnergySaver RecoveryLevel 8-9

Interrupt Clear Timer 8-9

Low Power Timer 8-7

Panel Reset Timer 8-7

Ping Timeout 8-9

Power Off Rule 8-9

Power Off Timer 8-8

Sleep Level 8-8

Sleep Rules 8-7

Sleep Timer 8-7

Weekly Timer Settings 8-8

Energy Saving Control Function 1-13

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program 1-13

Enhanced VNC over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-62

Enhanced WSD 11-41

Protocol Settings 8-61

Enhanced WSD over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-61

Enlarged Display 2-28

Entering Numbers 2-25

Entry

File Name 6-78

Subject 6-92

Envelope Feed Guide 3-10

Envelope Stack Guide 3-18

Envelopes 11-19

Environment 1-3

Erase Colors 6-46

Erase Shadowed Areas 6-55

Error Handling 8-21

Auto Error Clear 8-22

Continue or Cancel Error Job 8-22

Duplexing Error 8-21

Error Job Skip 8-22

Finished Pages Exceeded 8-21

Finishing Error 8-21

Inserted Paper Mismatch 8-21

No Staple Error 8-21

Paper Jam before Staple 8-22

Paper Mismatch Error 8-21

Punch Waste Full Error 8-21

eSCL

Protocol Settings 8-61

eSCL over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-62

Index-4

Favorites 5-11

Deleting 5-13

Editing 5-13

Recalling 5-12

Registering 5-12

Fax 8-25

Fax Communication Report 8-27

FAX Kit 11-5

FAX RX Result Report 8-25

Fax Server 8-68

FAX Server Send 5-44

File

Format 6-84

PDF 6-86

Separation 6-91

File Format 6-84

Default 8-36

File Management Utility Connection 5-39

File Name Entry 6-78

Default 8-32

File Separation 6-91

Default 8-36

File Size Confirmation 6-94

Finisher Tray 2-5

First Copy Time 11-24

First Print Time 11-25

Fold 6-27

Folding Tray 2-5

Folding Unit 11-4

Form Overlay

Storing a Form 5-69

Front Cover 2-2

FTP 11-41

FTP Client (Transmission)

Protocol Settings 8-39, 8-59

FTP Encrypted TX 6-93

FTP Server (Reception)

Protocol Settings 8-59

Function Key Assignment 2-19, 8-20

Function Settings 8-32

Address Book 8-40

Copy/Print 8-37

Document Box 8-48

DSM Scan 8-40

Email 8-39

Fax Memory RX Box 8-49

Fax/iFax 8-40

Function Defaults 8-32

Home 8-49

Internet Browser 8-50

Job Box 8-49

Manual Staple 8-51

One-Touch Key 8-41

Printer 8-46

RX/Forward Rules/Fax Box 8-45

Send and Forward 8-41

Send/Store 8-37

Sending Job - Folder 8-39

Status 8-50

WSD 8-40

Functions List of Security Quick Setup 11-36

Glossary 11-40

Google Cloud Print 4-16

Grayscale 11-41

Group Authorization Settings 9-18

Group Authorization 9-18

Group List 9-18

Guest Authorization Settings 9-21

Guest Authorization 9-21

Guest Property 9-22

Guides Provided with the Machine xxi

Hagaki (Cardstock) 11-19

Handles 2-2

Hard Disk 11-6

Hard Disk/SSD Initialization 8-72

Help 11-41

Help Screen 2-27

History Settings 8-27

Device Log History Settings 8-29

Secure Comm. Error Log 8-30

Sending Log History 8-27

Home

Customize Desktop 2-16

Customize Taskbar 2-16

Wallpaper 2-16

Home Screen 2-14

Host Name 8-52, 8-65

HTTP

Protocol Settings 8-61

HTTPS

Protocol Settings 8-61

Hue Adjustment 6-40

ID Card Copy 6-35

ID Card Settings

Additional Authentication 9-30

Keyboard Login 9-29

iFax

Protocol Settings 8-59

Image Adjustment

Auto Color Correction 8-83

Auto Drum Refresh 8-84

Background Density Adjustment 8-83

Calibration 8-84, 10-58

Calibration Cycle 8-84

Color Registration - Auto 8-84, 10-52

Color Registration - Manual 8-84, 10-54

Contrast 8-83

Correcting Black Lines 8-84

Density 8-83

Developer Refresh 8-84, 10-58

Drum Refresh 8-85, 10-57

Index-5

Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-85, 10-58

Sharpness Adjustment 8-83

Tone Curve Adjustment 8-84, 10-56

Image Preview at DP Jam 8-22

Image Repeat 6-69

Inner Finisher 10-113

Inner Tray 2-2

Insert Sheets/Chapters 6-68

Install

Macintosh 2-57

Software 2-50

Windows 2-51

Interface Block Setting 8-70

Internet Browser 8-50

Instructions for use 5-74

Internet FAX Kit 11-6

IP Address 11-41

Settings 8-55, 8-57

IP Filter (IPv4)

Settings 8-64

IP Filter (IPv6)

Settings 8-64

IPP 11-42

Protocol Settings 8-60

IPP over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-60

IPSec 8-64

Job

Available Status 7-2

Canceling 7-11

Checking History 7-9

Checking Status 7-2

Detailed Information 7-8

Detailed Information of Histories 7-10

Details of the Status Screens 7-3

Displaying History Screen 7-10

Displaying Status Screens 7-2

Pause and Resumption 7-11

Sending the Log History 7-10, 8-27

Job Accounting 9-33

Adding an Account 9-35

Apply Limit 9-50

Copy/Printer Count 9-51

Count by Paper Size 9-45

Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-46

Default Counter Limit 9-43

Deleting an Account 9-38

Editing an Account 9-37

Enabling Job Accounting 9-34

FAX Driver 9-42

Logout 9-49

Overview of Job Accounting 9-33

Print Accounting Report 9-48

Printing 9-39

Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-36

TWAIN 9-40

WIA 9-41

Job Accounting/Authentication

Authentication Security 9-4

Job Accounting 9-33

Unknown User Settings 9-52

User Login 9-2

Job Box 11-42

Deletion of Job Retention 8-49

Form for Form Overlay 5-69

Form Overlay 5-69

Private Print Box 4-19

Proof and Hold Box 4-22

Quick Copy Box 4-21

Quick Copy Job Retention 8-49

Repeat Copy Job Retention 8-49

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job 4-18

Stored Job Box 4-20

Job Finish Notice 6-78

Job Finish Notice Setting 8-25

Job Separator 11-5

Job Separator Tray 2-2, 2-5

JPEG/TIFF Print 6-96

Default 8-34

Keyboard 8-6

Keyboard Holder 11-5

Keyboard Layout 8-6

KPDL 11-42

Label 11-18

LAN Cable 2-6

Connecting 2-7

LAN Interface 8-59

Language/System of Units 8-6

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-4

Loading Paper 3-14

Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-85, 10-58

LDAP

Protocol Settings 8-40, 8-61

Legal Information 1-11

Limited Use of This Product 1-10

Loading Originals 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document Processor 5-3

Placing Originals on the Platen 5-2

Loading Paper 10-8

Local Authorization 9-16

Logout 2-30

Low Power Timer 8-7

Low Toner Alert 8-23

LPD

Protocol Settings 8-60

Mailbox 11-4

Management 9-1

Manual Setting (IPv6) 8-56, 8-58

Index-6

Manual Staple 5-76, 8-51

Margin 6-51

Default 8-34

Margin/Centering 6-51

Media Type Setting 8-16

Memo Page 6-66

Memory Diagnostics 8-85

Message Banner Print 8-48

Message Board Settings 8-26

Mirror Image 6-77

Mixed Size Originals 6-23

Combinations 6-24

Copy Size 6-25

Mixed Size Stapling 6-32

Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-12

Mopria 4-16

Motion Sensor 2-2, 2-43, 8-9

MP Tray Settings 8-14

Multi Sending 5-42

Multipurpose Tray 2-2, 2-3, 11-42

Loading Index Paper 5-9

Negative Image 6-77

NetBEUI 11-42

Protocol Settings 8-59

NetWare

Settings 8-67

Network Interface 2-6

Network Interface Connector 2-4

Network Interface Kit 11-6

Network Settings 8-52

Bonjour 8-63

IP Filter (IPv4) 8-64

IP Filter (IPv6) 8-64

IPSec 8-64

Ping 8-63

Protocol Settings 8-59

Proxy 8-52

Restart Network 8-64

Wi-Fi Direct 8-52

Wi-Fi Settings 8-53

Wired Network Settings 8-57

NFC

Printing 4-17

Settings 2-42, 8-68

Notice 1-2

Notification/Report 8-24

Device Status Notification 8-26

Fax Communication Report 8-27

History Settings 8-27

Message Board Settings 8-26

Printing Report/List 8-24

Result Report Settings 8-25

Numeric Keypad 8-6

OCR Scan Activation Kit 11-6

Offset Documents by Job 8-19

Offset One Page Documents 8-19

OHP Backing Sheet 6-80

One Touch Key

Adding 3-44

Editing and Deleting 3-45

Open toner cover 8-85

Operation Assist 8-20

Clear Settings after Job Started 8-20

Orientation Confirmation 8-20

Preset Limit 8-20

Operation Panel 2-2

Option

1,000-sheet Finisher 11-4

4,000-sheet Finisher 11-4

Banner Tray 11-5

Card Authentication Kit 11-6

Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and

Multifeed Detection) 11-4

Document Processor (Dual Scan) 11-4

Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) 11-4

Document Table 11-5

Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-6

FAX Kit 11-5

Folding Unit 11-4

Hard Disk 11-6

Internet FAX Kit 11-6

Job Separator 11-5

Keyboard Holder 11-5

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-4

Mailbox 11-4

Network Interface Kit 11-6

OCR Scan Activation Kit 11-6

Optional Numeric Keypad 11-5

Overview 11-2

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-4

Punch Unit 11-5

Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-4

ThinPrint Option 11-6

Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-6

Option Interface Slot 2-4

Optional Keyboard Type 8-6

Optional Network 8-65

Host Name 8-65

Restart Network 8-67

Wired Network Settings 8-67

Wireless Network 8-65

Optional Numeric Keypad 11-5

Org. Image

Default 8-35

Orientation Confirmation 8-20

Original

Auto Detect 8-11

Custom Original Size8-12

Size xxvi

Original Eject Table 2-2

Original Image 6-36

Default 8-33

Original Orientation 6-26

Default 8-33, 8-35

Original Size 6-20

Original Size Indicator Plates 2-2

Index-7

Original Stopper 2-2

Original Table 2-2

Original Width Guides 2-2

Original/Scan Settings 8-11

Auto Detect Original Size 8-11

Custom Original Size 8-12

Prevent Light Reflection 8-12

Outline font 11-42

Page # 6-64

Panel Reset Timer 8-7

Paper

Appropriate Paper 11-14

Auto Paper Selection 8-17

Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7-15

Custom Paper Size 8-15

Default Paper Source 8-17

Loading Cardstock 3-10, 5-8

Loading Envelopes 3-10, 5-8

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder 3-14

Loading in the Side Feeder 3-16

Loading Index Paper 5-9

Loading Paper 3-2

Loading Paper in the Cassette 1 3-4

Loading Paper in the Cassette 2 3-7

Media for Auto 8-17

Paper Selection 8-17

Paper Source for Cover 8-18

Separator Paper Source 8-18

Show Paper Setup Message 8-17

Size and Media Type 11-13

Special Paper 11-17

Special Paper Action 8-18

Specifications 11-13

Paper Feed Mode 8-47

Paper Feed Settings 8-17

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-4

Paper Feeding 8-13

Cassette 1 (to 4) Settings 8-13

Custom Paper Settings 8-15

Media Type Setting 8-16

MP Tray Settings 8-14

Paper Feed Settings 8-17

Show Paper Setup Message 8-17

Paper Jams 10-59

1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-92

4,000-sheet Finisher (Inner) 10-95

4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray A) 10-96

4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray B) 10-100

Bridge Unit 10-86

Cassette 1 10-62

Cassette 2 10-65

Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-70

Cassette 3 and 4 (500-sheet×2) 10-68

Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-72

Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) 10-75

Document Processor 10-89, 10-91

Folding Tray (4,000-sheet Finisher) 10-108

Folding Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) 10-103

Inner Finisher 10-88

Jam Location Indicators 10-59

Mailbox 10-87

Multipurpose Tray 10-77

Right Cover 1 10-78

Right Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-84

Right Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) 10-83

Paper Length Guide 2-3, 3-4, 3-7

Paper Output 8-19

Offset Documents by Job 8-19

Offset One Page Documents 8-19

Paper Selection 6-21

Paper Stopper 2-2, 3-18

Paper Width Adjusting Tab 2-3

Paper Width Guide 2-3, 3-5, 3-8

Part Names 2-2

Password 8-53

PDF/A 11-42

PIN Login 9-31

Ping 8-63

Platen 2-2

POP3 11-42

Poster 6-67

PostScript 11-42

Power Cable

Connecting 2-8

Power Management 1-13

Power Off 2-9

Power Off Rule 8-9

Power Off Timer 2-46, 8-8

Power On 2-9

Power Switch 2-2

PPM 11-42

Precautions for Use 1-4

Preprinted Paper 11-20

Preset Limit 8-20

Prevent Bleed-thru 6-44

Default 8-33, 8-35

Prevent Light Reflection 8-12

Prevent Original Skewing 8-12

Primary Network (Client) 8-69

Print Report

Data Sanitization Report 8-25

Print Settings 4-2, 4-15

Printer

Color Setting 8-46

Copies 8-46

CR Action 8-47

Duplex 8-46

EcoPrint 8-46

Emulation 8-46

Form Feed TimeOut 8-47

Gloss Mode 8-46

Job Name 8-47

KIR 8-48

LF Action 8-47

Message Banner Print 8-48

MP Tray Priority 8-47

Orientation 8-47

Override A4/Letter 8-46

Index-8

Paper Feed Mode 8-47

Print setting 4-2

Printing Job Terminator 8-48

Resolution 8-48

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-46

User Name 8-47

Wide A4 8-48

Printer Driver 11-43

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings 4-3

Help 4-3

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory 5-70

Printing from PC 4-4

Non-standard Sized Paper 4-6

Standard Sized Paper 4-4

Printing Report/List 8-24

Font List 8-25

Network Status 8-24

Optional Network Status 8-24

Print Accounting Report 8-24

Service Status 8-24

Status Page 8-24

Printing Speed 11-25

Priority Override 6-79

Proof Copy 5-21

Protocol Settings 8-59

Punch 6-32

Punch Unit 11-5

Quick Setup Registration (Box Print) 8-10

Quick Setup Registration (Copy) 8-10

Quick Setup Registration (Send) 8-10

Quick Setup Registration (Sending from Box) 8-10

Quick Setup Registration (Storing in Box) 8-10

Quick Setup Wizard 2-47

RA (Stateless) 11-43

Settings 8-56, 8-58

RAM Disk 11-43

Raw

Protocol Settings 8-60

Recipient Format 8-25

Recycled Paper 11-20

Regarding Trade Names 1-11

Regular Maintenance 10-2

Cleaning 10-2

Disposing of the Punch Waste 10-16

Loading Paper 10-8

Replace the Waste Toner Box 10-7

Replacing Staples 10-9

Toner Container Replacement 10-4

Remote Operation 10-30

Remote Printing 8-48

Repeat Copy

Default 8-34

Printing 6-79

Repeat Copy Job Retention 8-49

Replace the Waste Toner Box 10-7

Replacing Staples

1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-11

4,000-Sheet Finisher 10-12

Inner Finisher 10-9

Reserve Next Priority 8-34

Resolution 6-91, 8-48, 11-24, 11-25

Resource Saving - Paper 1-13

Responding to Messages 10-32

REST

Protocol Settings 8-62

REST over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-63

Restart Entire Device 8-69, 8-71

Restart Network 8-64, 8-67

RESTful API Settings

API for Service/Maintenance 8-63

Result Report Settings 8-25

Right Cover 1 2-3

Right Cover 1 Lever 2-3

Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2

Same Width Originals 8-12

Saturation 6-44

Saving Documents to USB Memory 5-72

Scan Resolution 6-91

Default 8-35

Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB 3-32

Security Level 8-69

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN 1-9

Security Quick Setup 8-69

Security Settings 8-69

Authentication Security 8-81

Data Security 8-72

Device Security Settings 8-71

Interface Block Setting 8-70

Network 8-82

System Stamp 8-76

Unknown User Settings 8-82

Send and Forward

File format 8-43

PDF Encryption Functions 8-44

Send and Print 6-92

Printing 6-92

Storing 6-92

Send and Store 6-92

Send as E-mail 5-23, 11-43

Send Result Report 8-25

Send to Folder (FTP) 5-23

Send to Folder (SMB) 5-23

Send/Store

Broadcast 8-37

Default Screen 8-37

Destination Check before Send 8-37

Entry Check for New Dest. 8-37

New Destination Entry 8-37

Recall Destination 8-37

Sending 5-23

Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 3-22

Sending Size 6-83

Index-9

Setting Date and Time 2-31

Sharpness 6-43

Sharpness Adjustment 8-83

Shortcuts

Adding 5-17

Editing and Deleting Shortcuts 5-18

Show Paper Setup Message 8-17

Show Power Off Message 8-10

Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-4

Loading Paper 3-16

Silent Mode 8-85

Simple Login 2-30

Simple Login Settings

Simple Login 9-26

Simple Login Setup 9-27

Skip Blank Page 6-82

Default 8-33, 8-35

Sleep 2-45

Sleep Level 8-8

Energy Saver 8-8

Quick Recovery 8-8

Sleep Rules 8-7

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) 2-45

Sleep Timer 8-7

Slit Glass 2-2

SMB Client (Transmission)

Protocol Settings 8-39, 8-59

SMTP 11-43

SMTP Auth and Sender Address 8-39

SNMPv1/v2c

Protocol Settings 8-61

SNMPv3

Protocol Settings 8-61

Solving Malfunctions 10-22

Sound 8-11

Specifications 11-21

1,000-sheet Finisher 11-30

4,000-sheet Finisher 11-31

Banner Tray 11-34

Copy Functions 11-24

Document Processor 11-27

Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) 11-32

Inner Finisher 11-29

Inner Shift Tray 11-33

Job Separator Tray 11-33

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-28

Machine 11-21

Mailbox (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) 11-32

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-28

Printer Functions 11-25

Punch Unit (For 1,000-sheet/4,000-sheet) 11-31

Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) 11-29

Scanner Functions 11-26

Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-28

SSL

Security Settings 8-82

Stack Level Adjuster 3-19

Staple 6-30

Staple Jam 10-113, 10-115

4,000-sheet Finisher 10-118

Folding Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) 10-120

Staple/Punch 6-30

Status Monitor 4-23

Accessing 4-23

Exiting 4-23

Notification Settings 4-26

Status Page 11-43

Status/Job Cancel 7-1

Storing Size 6-95

Subnet Mask 11-43

Settings 8-55, 8-57

Supplies

Checking the Remaining Amount 7-15

Support Tray Section of the Multipurpose Tray 2-3

Symbols 1-2

System Initialization 8-86

System Menu 8-2

Add/Delete Application 8-82

Adjustment/Maintenance 8-83

Date/Time 8-6

Device Settings 8-6

Display Settings 8-10

Energy Saver/Timer 8-7

Function Settings 8-32

Job Accounting/Authentication 8-82

Network Settings 8-52

Notification/Report 8-24

Operation Method 8-2

Quick Setup Wizard 2-47

Security Settings 8-69

System Stamp 8-76

Default 8-32

System/Network

Security Level 8-69

TCP/IP 11-43

Settings 8-55, 8-57

TCP/IP (IPv4)

Settings 2-32, 8-55, 8-57

TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-41

Settings 8-56, 8-58

Thick Paper 11-19

Thin Print over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-60

ThinPrint

Protocol Settings 8-60

ThinPrint Option 11-6

Time Zone 8-7

Tone 8-11

Tone Curve Adjustment 8-84, 10-56

Toner Container (Black) 2-4

Toner Container (Cyan) 2-4

Toner Container (Magenta) 2-4

Toner Container (Yellow) 2-4

Toner Container Replacement 10-4

Toner Settings 8-23

Color Toner Empty Action 8-23

Low Toner Alert 8-23

Toner Waste Full Alert 8-23

Index-10

Toner Waste Full Alert 8-23, 8-26

Touch Panel 2-12

Transparencies 11-17

Trapping 6-45

Default 8-34

Tray 1 to 7 2-5

Tray A 2-5

Tray B 2-5

Troubleshooting 10-22

TWAIN 11-44

Setting TWAIN Driver 2-60

Unknown User Settings

Unknown ID Job 9-52

User Property 9-53

USB 11-44

USB Cable 2-6

Connecting 2-8

USB Drive

Printing 5-70

Remove 5-73

USB Interface 2-6

USB Interface Connector 2-4

USB Memory

Save 5-72

USB Memory Slot 2-2

USB Port 2-4

User Login Administration 9-2

Adding a User 9-6

Changing User Properties 9-10

Enabling User Login Administration 9-3

FAX Driver 9-15

Group Authorization Settings 9-18

Guest Authorization Settings 9-21

ID Card Settings 9-29

Local Authentication 9-16

Logout 2-30

Obtain NW User Property 9-24

Overview of User Login Administration 9-2

Password Policy Settings 9-5

PIN Code Authentication 9-31

Printing 9-12

Server Settings 9-17

Simple Login Settings 9-26

TWAIN 9-13

User Account Lockout Setting 9-4

WIA 9-14

Using MultiCrop Scan 5-40

VNC (RFB)

Protocol Settings 8-62

VNC (RFB) over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-62

Waste Toner Box 2-4

Waste Toner Box Cover 2-2, 2-4

Weekly Timer Settings 2-46, 8-8

White space 6-66

WIA 11-44

Setting WIA Driver 2-62

Wide A4 8-48

Wi-Fi

Settings 2-34, 8-53

Wi-Fi Direct

Printing 4-17

Settings 2-40, 8-52

Wireless Connection 1-9

Wireless Network

Settings 2-34, 8-65

Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-6

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) 11-44

WSD Print

Protocol Settings 8-40, 8-59

WSD Scan 5-35

Protocol Settings 8-40, 8-59

XPS Fit to Page 6-96

Default 8-34

Zoom 6-46

Default 8-32

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.

Headquarters

225 Sand Road,

Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA

Phone: +1-973-808-8444

Fax: +1-973-882-6000

Latin America

8240 NW 52nd Terrace, Suite 301

Miami, Florida 33166, USA

Phone: +1-305-421-6640

Fax: +1-305-421-6666

KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada

, Ltd.

6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,

Canada

Phone: +1-905-670-4425

Fax: +1-905-670-8116

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Mexico, S.A. de C.V.

Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco

Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo,

Ciudad de Mexico, C.P. 11560

Phone: +52-555-383-2741

Fax: +52-555-383-7804

KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda.

Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás,

Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba, State of São Paulo, CEP

06543-306, Brazil

Phone: +55-11-2424-5353

Fax: +55-11-2424-5304

KYOCERA Document Solutions Chile SpA

Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile

Phone: +56-2-2670-1900

Fax: +56-2-2350-7150

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113,

Australia

Phone: +61-2-9888-9999

Fax: +61-2-9888-9588

KYOCERA Document Solutions

New Zealand Ltd.

Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,

New Zealand

Phone: +64-9-415-4517

Fax: +64-9-415-4597

KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited

13/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan,

New Territories, Hong Kong

Phone: +852-2496-5678

Fax: +852-2610-2063

KYOCERA Document Solutions

(China) Corporation

8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,

Shanghai,200003, China

Phone: +86-21-5301-1777

Fax: +86-21-5302-8300

KYOCERA Document Solutions

(Thailand) Corp., Ltd.

335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue,

Bangkok 10800,

Thailand

Phone: +66-2-586-0333

Fax: +66-2-586-0278

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Singapore Pte. Ltd.

12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,

Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118

Phone: +65-6741-8733

Fax: +65-6748-3788

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Hong Kong Limited

16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan,

New Territories, Hong Kong

Phone: +852-3582-4000

Fax: +852-3185-1399

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Taiwan Corporation

6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,

Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.

Phone: +886-2-2507-6709

Fax: +886-2-2507-8432

KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.

#10F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro, Jung-gu,

Seoul, Korea

Phone: +822-6933-4050

Fax: +822-747-0084

KYOCERA Document Solutions

India Private Limited

Second Floor, Centrum Plaza, Golf Course Road,

Sector-53, Gurugram, Haryana 122002, India

Phone: +91-0124-4671000

Fax: +91-0124-4671001

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Deutschland GmbH

Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,

Germany

Phone: +49-2159-9180

Fax: +49-2159-918100

KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH

Wienerbergstraße 11, Turm A, 18. OG, 1100 Wien,

Austria

Phone: +43-1-863380

Fax: +43-1-86338-400

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB

Borgarfjordsgatan 11, 164 40 Kista, Sweden

Phone: +46-8-546-550-00

Fax: +46-8-546-550-10

KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf

Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway

Phone: +47-22-62-73-00

Fax: +47-22-62-72-00

KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S

Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,

Denmark

Phone: +45-70223880

Fax: +45-45765850

KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.

Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,

Portugal

Phone: +351-21-843-6780

Fax: +351-21-849-3312

KYOCERA Document Solutions

South Africa (Pty) Ltd.

KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,

90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa

Phone: +27-11-540-2600

Fax: +27-11-466-3050

KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC.

Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow,

Russia

Phone: +7(495)741-0004

Fax: +7(495)741-0018

KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East

Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,

Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,

United Arab Emirates

Phone: +971-04-433-0412

KYOCERA Document Solutions Czech, s.r.o.

Harfa Office Park, ýeskomoravská 2420/15, Praha 9

Phone: +420-222-562-246

KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.

2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku

Osaka 540-8585, Japan

Phone: +81-6-6764-3555

https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V.

Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp,

The Netherlands

Phone: +31(0)20-654-0000

Fax: +31(0)20-653-1256

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.

Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk,

The Netherlands

Phone: +31-20-5877200

Fax: +31-20-5877260

KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited

Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road,

Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS,

United Kingdom

Phone: +44-118-931-1500

Fax: +44-118-931-1108

KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.

Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy,

Phone: +39-02-921791

Fax: +39-02-92179-600

KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.

Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem,

Belgium

Phone: +32-2-7209270

Fax: +32-2-7208748

KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.

Espace Technologique de St Aubin

Route de I’Orme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX,

France

Phone: +33-1-69852600

Fax: +33-1-69853409

KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A.

Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2,

28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain

Phone: +34-91-6318392

Fax: +34-91-6318219

KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy

Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki,

Finland

Phone: +358-9-47805200

Fax: +358-9-47805212

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch

Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich,

Switzerland

Phone: +41-44-9084949

Fax: +41-44-9084950

KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions

Turkey A.S.

Altunizade Mah. Prof. Fahrettin Kerim Gökay Cad. No:45

34662 ÜSKÜDAR øSTANBUL, TURKEY

Phone: +90-216-339-0020

Fax: +90-216-339-0070

is a

trademark of KYOCERA Corporation

2020.10

2XDKDEN002